MP'       .11 


liVi'ii 


mi?  •;.  ''H 


!'!i     1^ 


11 


'|l):l!l!! 


If, 


mm. 


i  111  11 


Jii  'iiiiiiil  llllll        I  II 

tU)(HouiiM)iiiMiiiiiuifniMiiii(   (iiJiitMiitii 


■  itiMiitr 


1      ! 

i  ill  n^ 


I         Hi 


luiiiiin 


UitUi  FHHiJ 


nnintn  n  fir  f  t 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 


PRESENTED  BY 

PROF.  CHARLES  A.  KOFOID  AND 

MRS.  PRUDENCE  W.  KOFOID 


THE 


MOTIVE  POWER  OF  ORGANIC  LIFE, 


AND 


MAGNETIC     PHENOMENA 


OF 


TERRESTRIAL  AND  PLANETARY  MOTIONS, 


WITH    THE 


APPLICATION  OF  THE  EVER-ACTIVE  AND  ALL-PERVADING  AGENCY 


OF 


MAGNETISM, 


TO   THE 


NATURE,  SYMPTOMS,  AND  TREATMENT 


OF 


CHRONIC    DISEASES. 


BY  HENRY  HALL  SHERWOOD,  M.  D. 


NEW-YORK. 
H.     A.     CHAPIN    &    CO.,    138    F  U  LT  ON- S  TRE  ET. 


MDCCCXLI. 


■  -  A  - 


ZP:32.2 


Entered  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1841,  by  H.  H.  Sherwood, 
M.  D.,  in  the  Clerk's  OfiQce  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Southern  Distict  of  New-York. 


Pat.  O«o»  ^^• 


PRINTED  BY    JARED  W.  BELL,  CORNER  OP  ANN  AND  NASSAU-STREETS. 


PREFACE. 


In  demonstrating  the  Motive  Power  of  Organic  Life  in  the  following 
work,  I  have  endeavoured  to  present  the  subject  to  the  reader  in  a  plain, 
concise,  and  simple  manner,  divested  entirely  of  the  abstruse  metaphysics 
in  which  it  has  been  heretofore  involved. 

The  Motive  Power  is  in  the  Nervous  System,  and  hence  the  necessity 
of  describing  this  system  to  show  the  connection  of  that  power  with  it. 

To  effect  the  first  object,  I  have  availed  myself  of  a  general  and  concise 
description  of  the  Nervous  System,  communicated  to  the  British  Associa- 
tion for  the  advancement  of  Science,  by  William  Charles  Henry,  and  also 
of  a  more  particular  description  of  it  by  Mr.  Geo.  Combe  ;  to  which  I 
have  added  extracts  from  Spurzheim  and  Bichat,  and  a  lecture  of  M. 
Broussais  on  the  Cerebellum — all  of  which  I  have  illustrated  with  nu- 
merous engravings  ;  presenting,  in  the  whole,  the  most  popular  and  inte- 
resting views  of  the  Nervous  System,  and  of  its  Physiology,  as  taught  in 
the  rival  schools  of  London  and  Paris. 

In  presenting  the  views  of  Terrestrial  and  Planetary  Motions,  derived 
from  Magnetic  Phenomena,  with  their  attendant  influences  upon  the 
Motive  Power  of  Organic  Life,  I  have  adhered  to  my  plan  of  giving  to  the 
reader  in  connection  every  subject  in  a  plain  and  concise  way,  without 
halting  in  my  course  to  notice  every  idle  theory  that  has  been  invented  to 
explain  them. 

On  the  subject  of  the  application  of  the  ever-active  and  all-pervading 
influence  of  Magnetism  to  the  nature,  symptoms,  and  treatment  of  Chro- 
nic Diseases,  I  have  been  guided  by  the  immutable  laws  of  the  magnetic, 
natural  or  mechanical  forces,  which  have  resulted  in  the  successful  de- 
velopement  of  the  nature,  symptoms,  and  treatment  of  a  large  class  of 
chronic  diseases,  which  have  consigned  to  a  premature  grave,  every 


IV 

year,  so  many  millions  of  the  fairest,  most  amiable  and  talented  portion  of 
our  race. 

The  almost  uniformly  disastrous  results  of  the  common  treatment  of 
this  class  of  diseases,  furnish  a  melancholy  commentary  on  the  uncertainty 
of  the  common  symptoms, — as  deplorable  as  the  knowledge  of  the  nature 
of  the  class  of  diseases  founded  upon  them. 

The  best  physicians  have  long  deplored  the  want  of  that  knowledge  of 
these  diseases  which  should  produce  the  same  satisfactory  results  as 
those  obtained  in  the  treatment  of  acute  diseases.  Dr.  Armstrong  com- 
menced a  long  and  arduous  investigation  of  the  character  of  chronic  dis- 
eases, for  the  purpose  of  increasing  our  knowledge  of  their  symptoms  and 
treatment,  but  he  did  not  live  to  finish  the  elaborate  work  which  he  con- 
templated on  this  subject.*  In  the  mean  time  Professor  Hahnemann  insti- 

*  "  If  any  one  were  to  assert,  in  unqualified  terms,  that  medicine  is  a  conjectural  and 
vague  art,  it  were  easy  to  refute  him,  by  proving  its  great  certainty  in  many  acute 
diseases  ;  and  if  any  one  were  to  ask  what  part  of  physic  is  most  defective,  we  might 
point  out  chronic  diseases,  since  in  them  our  efforts  have  hitherto  been  the  most  in- 
effectual. It  is  for  want  of  having  discriminated  the  general  difference  of  results  in 
the  treatment  of  acute  and  chronic  diseases,  that  some  have  so  much  underrated,  and 
others  so  much  overrated,  the  powers  of  the  medical  art.  Speak  of  acute  diseases,  and 
we  may  justly  maintain  the  present  utility  of  our  profession  ;  speak  of  chronic  diseases, 
and  we  must  with  regret  confess  its  present  imperfection.  If  any  practitioner  should  be 
generally  unsuccessful  in  the  treatment  of  acute  diseases,  the  fault  must  be  his  own, 
provided  he  be  consulted  in  the  earliest  stages :  for  the  united  agencies  of  blood-letting, 
purgatives,  mercurials,  opium,  and  blisters,  will  commonly  control  the  very  elements  of 
these  diseases,  when  opportunely  and  judiciously  directed  ;  and  if  any  one  will  still  be 
so  stubborn  as  to  reject  the  use  of  some  of  the  most  powerful  instruments  which  we 
possess,  the  failures  are  rather  to  be  attributed  to  himself,  than  to  the  inefficiency  of  me- 
dical treatment. 

"As  we  cannot  make  such  a  confident  declaration  as  to  chronic  diseases,  though  we 
can  often  palliate  and  sometimes  cure  them,  we  are  constrained  to  acknowledge,  either 
that  their  nature  is  more  irremediable,  or  the  means  employed  are  less  efficacious. 

"  The  means  which  we  administer  in  chronic  diseases  are  numerous,  but  most  of  them 
ambiguous,  and  questionable  at  the  best ;  whereas  in  acute  diseases,  our  means  are  few, 
and  their  operation  plain  and  indisputable.  The  long  catalogue  of  prescriptions  for 
chronic  diseases,  at  once  indicates  that  all  is  not  right  in  our  pathology,  as  it  implies 
that  each  prescription  is  liable  to  fail,  and  that  the  whole  may  be  successfully  required. 

"  Wherever  we  have  any  thing  like  principles  to  guide  us,  our  prescriptions  are  ex- 
tremely limited ;  wherever  we  have  no  fixed  principles  to  guide  us,  our  prescriptions 
accumulate  with  emphical  rapidity.  But  what,  it  may  be  reasonably  enquired,  is  the 
principal  cause  of  all  this  complexity  of  formulse  in  chronic  diseases  ?  Undoubtedly  it 
arises  from  that  vagueness  of  opinion  which  exists  respecting  the  nature  of  these  dis- 
eases in  their  onset,  and  in  the  greater  part  of  their  progress  ;  and  so  long  as  we  attempt 
to  cover  our  ignorance  by  such  terms  as  nervous,  bilious,  dyspeptic,  spasmodic,  and 
the  like,  so  long  shall  our  practice  be  mere  experiment  in  most  chronic  affections.  We 
may  make  a  sort  of  druggist's  shop  of  the  stomach  of  every  patient  laboring  under  chro- 


tuted  a  new  theory  of  the  phenomena  of  diseases  of  every  class,  and  found- 
ed his  Homcepathic  practice  of  infinitesimal  doses  of  medicine  upon  it ; 
which  theory  now  distinguishes  its  votaries,  and  which,  with  Animal 
Magnetism,  is  now  making  progress  both  in  Europe  and  this  country. 
M.  Lugol,  however,  has  no  confidence  in  the  common  symptoms  or 
treatment  of  tuberculous  diseases  known  to  the  profession,  and  he  calls 
uopn  them  to  abandon  both,  and  pursue  some  other  which  is  less  fallible.* 

nic  disease,  by  alternately  cramming  it  with  most  of  the  articles  of  the  pharmacoposas  ; 
but  we  shall  not,  probably,  advance  in  the  treatment,  until  we  deduce  pathological  prin- 
ciples, from  cautiously  marking  the  rise  and  progress  of  the  symptoms,  and  exploring 
their  seats  and  effects.  For  several  years  past,  it  has  been  part  of  my  employment  to 
collect  facts  on  chronic  diseases,  and  as  the  enquiry  will  not  be  completed  for  many 
years  to  come,  in  the  mean  time  I  otier  a  few  brief  results  of  my  observation  and  expe- 
rience in  regard  to  them,  &c." 

*  From  the  Medico-Chirurgical  Review,  for  January,  1841. 
DISPARAGEMENT    OF    AUSCULTATION,    BY    M.    LUGOL,    OF    PARIS. 

The  following  are  extracts  from  the  fourth  lecture  on  the  formation  of  tubercles  in 
internal  organs : — 

"  The  numerous  checks  and  repeated  deceptions  to  which  physicians  are  daily  ex- 
posed in  the  diagnosis  and  treatment  of  tuberculous  diseases,  do  they  not  prove 
that  it  is  necessary  to  leave  the  beaten  track  of  inquiry  and  pursue  some  other  which  is 
less  fallible  ?  You  all  know  that  auscultation  and  percussion  are  useless  in  the  diagnosis 
of  pulmonary  tubercles.  Both  alike  insuflRcient  to  announce  the  commencement  of  the 
mischief,  they  are  superfluous  at  the  very  time  that  they  become  capable  of  indicating 
the  presence  of  the  tubercles  ;  for  then  these  are  discoverable  by  other  means,  and,  alas ! 
are  too  far  advanced  in  their  developement  to  warrant  our  hopes  of  arresting  their  pro- 
gress— at  least  in  the  generality  of  cases.  I  will  even  go  a  step  farther,  and  say  that  the 
unlimited  confidence  placed  by  the  greater  number  of  practitioners  of  the  present  day  in 
auscultation  and  percussion,  has  had  the  effect  of  too  often  inspiring  a  fatal  security  in 
many  tuberculous  diseases,  which  are  thereby  allowed  to  advance  in  their  progress,  un- 
til this  is  revealed  by  physical  phenomena  at  a  period  when  remedial  measures  have  but 
little  chance  of  effecting  any  good. 

"  But  what  are  the  means,  you  will  say  to  me,  that  are  to  be  substituted  in  the  room 
of  auscultation  and  percussion.'  I  answer,  gentlemen,  induction.  Examine  by  these 
boasted  methods  this  patient,  and  tell  me  what  results  you  obtain.  Negative  results, 
you  will  reply.  And  yet  I  maintain  that  he  is  tuberculous  ;  for  his  father,  his  mother, 
and  his  brothers  have  all  died  of  tuberculous  disease  ;  and  he  himself  is  affected  with  it 
in  his  chest  at  the  present  moment.  Believe  me,  this  plan  is  much  less  deceptive  than 
the  other  one.  I  tell  you,  the  inductive  method  cannot  mislead  you,  for  nature  is  inva- 
riable in  its  causes  as  in  its  effects  ;  and  the  external  signs  of  tuberculous  scrofula  must 
give  you  assurance  that  similar  morbid  productions  exist  in  internal  organs,  especially 
in  the  lungs. f 

"  It  is  by  viewing  the  question  from  this  elevated  point  of  view,  by  studying  it  in  all 

t  M.  Lugol  is  mistaken  in  regard  to  tlic  certainty  of  this  method  ;  for  nothmg  is  more  common  than  to 
find  all  the  external  signs  of  tuberculous  disease,  without  tuberculisation  of  the  lungs;  and  this  fact  is  dis- 
closed by  the  absence  of  the  magnetic  symptoms,  while  their  presence  give  the  first  notice  of  the  com- 
mencemeut  of  the  disease  in  the  lungs,  even  before  the  cough  commences. 


VI 

Such  is  the  testimony  of  these  men,  and,  I  may  add,  that  of  every 
other  physician  whose  opinion  is  of  any  value. 

Notwithstanding,  however,  such  testimony,  which  is  verified  by  every 
day  experience,  a  great  majority  of  the  profession  are  following  the  ex- 
amples of  the  most  arrant  quacks,  in  pretending  to  be  able  to  cure  this 
class  of  diseases  with  the  common  remedies. 

There  are,  also,  some  physicians,  who,  having  given  up  every  other 
remedy  recommended  in  the  books,  still  adhere  to  iodine,  as  a  forlorn 
hope,  notwithstanding  it  has  been  tested  many  thousand  times  by  other 
physicians,  and  discarded  as  useless.  Among  the  latter,  I  am  pleased  to 
be  able  to  rank  so  distinguished  a  physician  as  Dr.  Warren,  of  Boston.  In 
a  recent  valuable  work,  he  says  : 

"  A  medicine  has  been  introduced  of  late  years,  which  has  acquired  much  reputation 
in  this  and  other  forms  of  scrofulous  disease.  It  is  not  surprising  that  physicians  should 
with  avidity  take  up  any  remedy  which  may  promise  to  relieve  so  common  and  invete- 
rate a  disease  as  scrofula,  especially  one  analogous  in  its  character  to  those  of  which  ex- 
perience has  most  approved.  I  must  say  that  after  many  years  trial  of  the  preparations 
of  iodine,  in  various  forms  of  scrofulous  affection,  I  have  rarely  seen  any  distinct  ad- 
vantages from  it." 

In  speaking  again  of  the  cases  in  Avhich  iodine  has  been  used,  he  says  : 

"  Preparations  of  iodine  have  not  been  efficacious  in  those  cases,  so  far  as  I  have  used 
them.  The  tincture  of  iodine  has  been  given  to  the  amount  of  forty-five  drops  three 
times  a  day.  This  quantity  was  sufficient  to  produce  diarrhoea;  but  after  a  long  use  had 
no  effect  on  the  tumor.  The  same  must  be  said  of  the  hydriodates  of  soda  and  potassa, 
which  I  have  frequently  given  in  this  and  other  scrofulous  cases,  in  the  dose  of  seven 
grains  three  or  four  times  a  day,  till  it  irritated  the  stomach  and  bowels,  without  influ- 
encing the  cure." 

In  order  to  ascertain  the  unknown  causes  of  obvious  effects,  one  of  two 
modes  is  generally  adopted.     In  the  one  generally  chosen,  in  accordance 

its  ensemble,  that  you  will  be  best  enabled  to  comprehend  it  in  its  details;  and  these  can- 
not be  understood  by  the  special  methods  of  examination  which  have  been  so  much  re- 
commended of  late  years. 

"  The  tuberculisation  of  internal  organs  exhibits  in  its  developement  the  same  pheno- 
mena as  tubercles  which  are  outwardly  situated — there  is  no  pain,  and  nothing  of  me- 
chanical derangements. 

"  The  existence  of  tubercles  in  the  lungs  is  so  frequent,  that  I  must  admit  that  they 
are  present  in  all  scrofulous  persons.  You  know  that  all,  or  almost  all,  patients,  who 
have  pulmonary  tubercles,  are,  or  have  been  at  some  time,  affected  with  tubercles  in  the 
neck  ;  the  majority  have  had  during  infancy  this  external  sign  of  scrofula  ;  while  others 
have  had  it  at  a  later  period  of  life.  I  believe  that  pulmonary  tubercles  frequently  exist 
in  early  youth  ;  but  it  is  chiefly  about  the  age  of  puberty  that  they  are  apt  to  be  deve- 
loped. 


vu 

with  common  philosophy,  theories  are  first  constructed,  and  then  facts 
collected  to  confirm  them  ;  but  a  sufficient  number  is  very  rarely  found 
for  this  purpose,  and  these  theories,  resting  on  slight  foundations,  are 
consequently  almost  always  fallacious.  In  the  other  mode,  which  is  ac- 
cording to  inductive  philosophy,  a  great  number  of  corresponding  facts  is 
collected,  and  the  theory  or  knowledge  derived  from  a  comparison  of 
them  is  true  and  substantial. 

The  latter  mode  should  always  be  adopted  to  establish  a  theory  on  a 
foundation  that  cannot  be  overturned.  For  if  a  theory  in  philosophy  be 
true,  the  number  of  comparative  facts  that  may  be  brought  to  its  support, 
is  absolutely  innumerable  and  without  end.  So  that  if  a  certain  number 
of  facts  is  not  sufficient  to  satisfy  any  person  of  the  truth  of  the  theory, 
any  additional  number  can  be  presented  to  him,  that  may  be  necessary 
for  such  purpose. 

The  theory  upon  which  this  work  is  founded,  is  the  result  of  that  in- 
ductive process  which  has  elicited  the  true  causes  of  universal  motion, 
and  the  laws  by  which  it  is  governed  ;  and  the  demonstrations  on  the 
electro-dynamic  rings  have  since  placed  the  hypothesis  beyond  a  doubt. 

The  part  of  this  theory  which  belongs  to  the  human  form,  and  to 
chronic  diseases,  derives,  from  the  causes  of  motion,  new  and  invariable 
symptoms  of  those  diseases  which  belong  to  the  class  hypertrophy,  or 
chronic  swellings  of  the  organs  and  limbs ;  and  the  laws  of  magnetic 
motion  explain  the  causes  of  their  phenomena. 

When  the  discoveries  thus  made,  were  compared  with  the  various 
theories  of  the  medical  profession  on  these  subjects,  it  was  easy  to  see 
how  fallacious  the  latter  necessarily  were,  and  with  what  ease  they  might 
be  overturned  and  buried  for  ever  in  one  common  ruin. 

Entertaining  the  same  views  of  our  knowledge  of  this  class  of  diseases, 
and  of  the  remedies  for  it,  with  Dr.  Armstrong,  I  commenced  the  inves- 
tigation of  the  primary  phenomena  of  this  class  of  diseases  in  1809,  in  a 
field,  which  had  never  been  explored,  with  strong  inducement  to  pursue 
it,  and  soon  discovered  new  and  unerring  symptoms  by  which  to  distin- 
guish the  disease  in  any  of  the  organs  or  limbs.  The  investigation  of 
these  symptoms  unfolded  the  laws  of  motion  in  man  and  other  animals, 
and  a  knowledge  of  these  laws  has  enabled  me  to  determine  and  apply 
the  natural  remedies  for  this  class  of  diseases,  with  great  success,  during 
a  period  of  more  than  twenty-five  years. 


Vlll 


In  describing  the  cases,  which  I  have  introduced,  to  illustrate  the  new 
symptoms,  and  the  action  of  the  natural  remedies  for  them,  I  have  been 
as  brief  as  possible,  purposely  avoiding  reports  of  the  state  of  the  pulse, 
and  other  unimportant  symptoms  not  necessarily  belonging  to  the  disease. 

A  great  majority  of  the  cases  were  first  treated  by  other  physicians,  and 
besides  mercury  and  iodine,  had  been  under  the  use  of  a  great  variety  of 
other  remedies,  and  when  these  failed,  many  of  the  patients  had  resorted 
to  root,  steam,  charm,  Indian  and  cancer  doctors,  and  to  an  endless  variety 
of  elixirs  of  health,  purifiers  of  the  blood,  cough  drops,  panaceas,  catholi- 
cons,  and  Indian  specifics,  and  continued  their  use  until  they  became  satis- 
fied of  the  futility  of  such  remedies. 

Some  of  these  patients  had  taken  from  one  to  thirteen  bottles  of  Swaim's 
Panacea,  a  compound  of  syrup  of  sarsaparilla  and  muriate  of  mercury,  in 
imitation  of  the  long  known  Lisbon  diet  drink.  And  although,  from  its 
frequent  failure,  very  little  dependence  is  now  placed  upon  it,  there  can 
be  no  doubt  that  it  sometimes  exercises  a  favorable  influence  upon  this 
class  of  diseases. 

It  will  be  observed  by  those  who  are  acquainted  with  the  classification 
of  diseases,  that  I  have  added  to  the  common  and  acknowledged  cases  of 
scrofula,  a  number  of  diseases  not  classed  as  such  by  nosologists  or  other 
medical  writers ;  and  I  have  done  so,  because  the  symptoms  and  the  dis- 
organizations, presented  by  dissections,  are  identical  and  uniform ;  and, 
moreover,  because  they  can  always  be  cured  by  the  same  remedies,  which 
demonstrate  the  unity  of  chronic  diseases  of  this  class,  by  which  the 
practice  is  greatly  simplified,  and  a  knowledge  of  it  easily  attained. 

I  have  substituted  the  term  tubercula,  from  tuber,  a  knot,  knob,  or  lit- 
tle swelling,  for  scrofula,  a  little  pig;  because  there  is  a  manifest  simi- 
larity between  the  verbal  sign  and  the  thing  signified  in  the  one  selection, 
and  apparently  none  in  the  other.  The  disease  is  a  swelling  of  the  knobs, 
or  little  round  organized  bodies  called  lymphatic  glands,  pervading  every 
part  of  the  body  with  consequent  hypertrophy,  or  general  swelling  of  the 
organs,  limbs,  and  other  structures. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER   I 

Objects  of  physiology — Nervous  System — Cerebrum,  or  brain  proper — Cerebellum — 
Medulla  oblongata — Spinal  marrow — Nerves — Of  motion — Of  sensation — Of  the 
three  senses — Ganglionic  system. 

CHAPTER    II. 

Views  of  the  structure  of  the  brain — Description  of  the  brain  and  nervous  system — 
Relation  between  the  structure  and  the  functions  of  the  brain. 


CHAPTER    III. 

Ganglionic  system  of  vegetative  life — View  of  the  ganglions  connected  with  the  great 
sympathetic  nerve — Ganglionic  system  of  phrenic  life — View  of  the  grn^lions  of 
the  brain — Cerebellum — Medulla  oblongata — Spinal  nerves — Excreting  system — 
Secreting  system — Secreting  and  excreting  systems  of  vegetative  life. 

CHAPTER   IV. 

Sensation  and  motion — Elements  of  sensation — Sensation — Inclination — Motion — Num- 
ber of  phrenological  organs  in  the  brain — Broussais  on  the  cerebellum. 
2 


10 
CHAPTER   V. 

Application  of  the  motive  power  of  the  human  sj'stem  to  determine  the  character  of  a 
large  class  oi  chronic  diseases — Magnetic  symptoms — Causes  of  the  symptoms — 
Tuberculations, — Cause  of  Tuberculations — Revolutions  of  the  Earth's  axis. 

CHAPTER   VI. 

Remedies  for  tubercular  diseases — Directions  for  using  the  remedies — Observations  on 
the  use  of  the  remedies  in  different  cases. 

CHAPTER   VII. 

Cases  of  tubercular  disease  of  the  organs. 

CHAPTER    VIII. 

Tubercnla  of  the  Spine — Lecture  of  M.  Sanson  on  caries  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae — 
Review  of  the  Lecture  of  M.  Sanson. 

CHAPTER    IX. 

Tubercula  of  the  joints  and  limbs — Color  of  the  skin  in  chronic  tubercula — Appendix 
— Glossary — Index. 


THE 


NERVOUS    SYSTEM,    ETC 


CHAPTER  I. 


Objects  of  Physiology — Nervous  System — Cerebrum,  or  Brain  Proper — Cerebellum — 
Medulla  Oblongata — Spinal  Marrow — Nerves — Of  Motion — Of  Sensation — Of  the 
Three  Senses — Ganglionic  System. 

"  The  science  of  Physiology  has  for  its  object  to  ascertain,  to  analj'^ze, 
and  to  classify  the  qualities  and  actions  which  are  peculiar  to  living  bo- 
dies. These  vital  properties  reside  exclusively  in  organized  matter, 
which  is  characterized  by  a  molecular  arrangement,  not  producible  by 
ordinary  physical  attractions  and  laws.  Matter  thus  organized  consists 
essentially  of  solids,  so  disposed  into  an  irregular  network  of  laminae  and 
filaments,  as  to  leave  spaces  occupied  by  fluids  of  various  natures. 
"  Texture"  or  "  tissue"  is  the  anatomical  term  by  which  such  assemblages 
are  distinguished.  Of  these  the  cellular,  or  tela  cellulosa,  is  most  ele- 
mentary, being  the  sole  constituent  of  several,  and  a  partial  component  of 
all  the  tissues  and  systems.  Thus  the  membranes  and  vessels  consist 
entirely  of  condensed  cellular  substance ;  and  even  muscle  and  nerve  are 
resolvable,  by  microscopic  analysis,  into  globules  deposited  in  attenuated 
cellular  element. 

But  though  the  phenomena,  which  are  designated  as  vital,  are  never 
found  apart  from  organization,  and  have  even  by  some  natuaralists  been 
regarded  as  identical  with  it,  yet  in  the  order  of  succession  vital  actions 
seem  necessarily  to  stand  to  organized  structures  in  the  relation  of  antece- 
dents ;  for  the  production  of  even  the  most  rudimentary  forms  and  tex- 
tures implies  the  previous  operation  of  combining  tendencies  or  "  vital 
affinities."  The  origin  and  early  developement  of  these  vital  tendencies, 
and  of  organized  structures,  are  beyond  the  pale  of  exact  or  even  of  ap- 
proximative knowledge.     But  it  is  matter  of  certainty,  that  life  is  the 


12 

product  only  of  life  ;  that  every  new  plant  or  animal  proceeds  from  some 
pre-existent  being  of  the  same  form  and  character ;  and  thus  that  the 
image  of  the  great  Epicurean  poet,  "  Quasi  cursores  vitai  lampada  tra- 
dunt,"  possesses  a  compass  and  force  of  illustration  "which,  as  a  supporter 
of  the  doctrine  of  fortuitous  production,  he  could  not  have  himself  con- 
templated. 

The  popular  notions  respecting  life  are  obscure  and  indeterminate  ;  nor 
are  the  opinions  even  of  philosophers  characterized  by  much  greater 
distinctness  or  mutual  accordance.  Like  other  complex  terms,  "life" 
can  obviously  be  defined  only  by  an  enumeration  of  the  phenomena  which 
it  associates.  This  enumeration  will  comprehend  a  greater  or  smaller 
number  of  particulars,  according  to  the  station  in  the  scale  of  living  beings 
which  is  occupied  by  the  object  of  survey.  In  its  simplest  manifestation, 
the  principle  of  life  may  be  resolved  into  the  functions  of  nutrition,  se- 
cretion, and  absorption.  It  consists,  according  to  Cuvier,  of  the  faculty 
possessed  by  certain  combinations  of  matter,  of  existing  for  a  certain  time 
and  under  a  determinate  form,  by  attracting  unceasingly  into  their  com- 
position a  part  of  surrounding  substances,  and  by  restoring  portions  of  their 
own  substance  to  the  elements.  This  definition  comprehends  all  the 
essential  phenomena  of  vegetable  life.  Nutritive  matter  is  drawn  from 
the  soil  by  the  spreading  fibres  of  the  root,  through  the  instrumentality  of 
spongioles  or  minute  turgid  bodies  at  their  extremities,  which  act,  accord- 
ing to  Dutrochet,  by  a  power  which  he  has  called  "  endosmcsis."  The 
same  agency  raises  the  nutrient  fluid  through  the  lymphatic  tubes  to  the 
leaves,  where  it  seems  to  undergo  a  kind  of  respiratory  process,  and  be- 
comes fit  for  assimilation.  These  changes,  and  the  subsequent  propulsion 
of  the  sap  to  the  different  parts  and  textures,  plainly  indicate  independent 
fibrilliary  movements,  which  are  represented  in  animal  life  by  what  Bichat 
has  termed  "  the  phenomena  of  organic  contractility."  The  power  re- 
siding in  each  part  of  detecting  in  the  circulating  fluid,  and  of  appropri- 
ating matters  fitted  to  renovate  its  specific  structure,  is  designated  in  the 
same  system  by  the  term  "  organic  sensibility." 

Ascending  from  the  vegetable  to  the  animal  kingdom,  the  term  "  life" 
advances  greatly  in  comprehensiveness.  The  existence  of  a  plant  is  limit- 
ed to  that  portion  of  space  in  which  accident  or  design  has  inserted  its 
germ ;  while  animals  are  for  the  most  part  gifted  with  the  faculties  of 
changing  their  place,  and  of  receiving  from  the  external  world  various 
impressions.  Along  with  the  general  nutritive  functions,  the  higher  attri- 
butes of  locomotion  and  sensation  are  therefore  comprised  in  the  extended 
compass  of  meaning  which  the  term  "  life"  acquires  with  the  prefix 
"  animal."  The  nutritive  functions,  too,  emerging  from  their  original  sim- 
plicity, are  accomplished  by  a  more  complex  mechanism,  and  by  agencies 
further  removed  from  those  which  govern  the  inanimate  world. 


13 

Locomotion  is  effected  either  by  means  of  a  contractile  tissue,  or  of 
distinct  muscular  fibres.  These  fibres  have  been  said  to  consist  of  slobules 
resembling,  and  equal  in  magnitade  to,  those  of  the  blood,  disposed  in 
lines,  in  the  elementary  cellulosity,  which  by  an  extension  of  the  analogy 
is  compared  to  serum.  But  the  latest  microscopical  observations  of  Dr. 
Hodgkin  are  opposed  to  this  globular  constitution  of  the  contractile  fibre- 
"  Innumerable  very  minute  but  clear  and  fine  parallel  lines  or  striae  may  be 
distinctly  perceived,  transversely  marking  the  fibrillEe."  Irritability,  or 
the  faculty  of  contracting  on  the  application  of  a  stimulant,  is  a  property 
inherent  in  the  living  fibre.  It  is  an  essential  element  of  all  vital  opera- 
tions, except  of  those  which  have  their  seat  in  the  nervous  system,  such 
as  sensation,  volition,  the  intellectual  states,  and  moral  affections.  All 
the  phenomena  of  life,  in  the  higher  animals,  may  then  be  ultimately 
resolved  into  the  single  or  combined  action  of  these  two  elementary  pro- 
perties,— irritability  and  nervous  influence,  each  residing  in  its  appropriate 
texture  and  system. 

These  preliminary  remarks  are  designed  to  unfold  the  principles  to  be 
followed  in  classifying  the  vital  functions.  In  general  or  comparative 
physiology,  a  strictly  scientific  arrangement  would  contemplate  first  the 
phenomena  pf  the  most  elementary  life,  and  would  successively  trace  the 
more  perfect  developement  of  those  simple  actions  and  their  gradual" 
transition  into  more  complex  processes,  as  well  as  the  new  functions, 
superadded  in  the  ascending  scale  of  endowment.  But  such  a  mode  of 
classification  is  wholly  inapplicable  to  the  particular  physiology  of  man 
and  of  the  more  perfect  animals,  viewed  by  itself  and  without  reference 
to  inferior  orders  of  beings  ;  for  the  nutritive  functions  of  this  class,  which 
correspond  with  the  elementary  actions  of  the  simplest  vegetable  life,  are 
effected  by  a  complex  system  of  vessels  and  surfaces,  deriving  their  vital 
powers  from  contractile  fibres,  and  controlled,  if  not  wholly  governed  by 
nervous  influence.  It  is  then  manifest,  that  in  the  higher  physiology  the 
general  laws  of  contractility  and  "  innervation"  must  precede  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  several  functions,  which  all  depend  on  their  single  or  united 
agency.  The  particular  functions  will  afterwards  be  classed,  as  they 
stand  in  more  immediate  relation  to  one  or  other  of  the  two  essential 
principles  of  life. 

In  the  present  state  of  physiological  knowledge,  it  is  impossible  to 
determine  absolutely,  and  without  an  opening  to  controversy,  whether 
the  functions  of  muscle  or  those  of  nerve  are  entitled  to  precedency.  If 
each  were  equally  independent  of  the  other  in  the  performance  of  their 
several  offices,  the  question  of  priority  would  resolve  itself  into  one  of 
simple  convenience.  The  actions  of  the  nervous  system,  if  contempla- 
ted for  the  short  interval  of  time  during  which  they  are  capable  of  per- 
sisting without  renovation  of  tissue,  are   entirely  independent  of  the 


14 

contractile  fibre.  But  it  is  certain  that  the  cooperation  of  nerve  is 
required  in  most,  if  not  in  all,  the  actions  of  the  muscular  system.  Thus 
the  voluntary  muscles  in  all  their  natural  and  sympathetic  contractions 
receive  the  stimulant  impulse  of  volition  through  the  medium  of  nerve ; 
and  though  the  mode,  in  which  the  motive  impression  is  communicated 
to  the  involuntary  muscles,  is  still  matter  of  controversy,  there  seems 
sufficient  evidence*  to  sanction  the  conclusion  that  nerve  is  in  this  case 
also  the  channel  of  transmission  ; — "  that  the  immediate  antecedent  of 
the  contraction  of  the  muscular  fibre  is  universally  a  change  in  the 
ultimate  nervous  filament  distributed  to  that  fibre."  If  this  be  correct, 
the  physiological  history  of  muscle  cannot  be  rendered  complete  vs^ithout 
reference  to  that  of  nerve. 

In  the  higher  manifestations  of  life,  nervous  matter  is  invested  with 
the  most  eminently  vital  attributes.  It  is  the  exclusive  seat  of  the 
various  modes  of  sensation,  and  of  all  the  intellectual  operations ;  or, 
rather,  it  is  the  point  of  transition,  where  the  physical  conditions  of  the 
organs,  which  are  induced  by  external  objects,  pass  into  states  of  mind, 
becoming  perceptions  ;  and  where  the  mental  act  of  volition  first  impresses 
a  change  on  livins;  matter.  These  two  offices  of  conductino;  motive 
impressions  from  the  central  seat  of  the  will  to  the  muscles,  and  of  pro- 
pagating sensations  from  the  surface  of  the  body  and  the  external  organs 
of  sense  to  the  sensorium  commune,  have  been  of  late  years  shown  to 
reside  in  distinct  portions  of  nervous  substance. 

The  honour  of  this  discovery,  doubtless  the  most  important  accession 
to  physiological  knowledge  since  the  time  of  Harvey,  belongs  exclusively 
to  Sir  Charles  Bell.  It  constitutes,  moreover,  only  a  part  of  the  new 
truths,  which  his  researches  have  unveiled,  regarding  the  general  laws 
of  nervous  action,  and  the  offices  of  individual  nerves.  His  successive 
experiments  on  function,  guided  always  by  strong  anatomical  analogies 
in  structure,  in  origin,  or  in  distribution,  have  led  to  the  entire  remodel- 
ling of  nervous  physiology,  and  to  the  formation  of  a  system  of  arrange- 
ment, based  on  essential  affinities  and  on  parity  of  intimate  composition, 
instead  of  on  apparent  sequence  or  proximity  of  origin.  Among  the 
continental  anatomists,  MM.  Magendie  and  Flourens  have  contributed 
most  largely  to  our  knowledge  of  this  part  of  physiology  ;  the  former 
by  repeating  and  confirming  the  experiments  of  Bell,  as  well  as  by 
various  original  inquiries  ;  the  latter  by  his  important  researches  into  the 
vital  offices  of  the  brain  and  its  appendages.  Much  light,  too,  has  been 
thrown  on  the  functions  of  several  of  the  encephalic  nerves,  and  especially 
of  those  supplying  the  face  and  its  connected  cavities,  by  Mr.  Herbert 

*  See  "  A  Critical  and  Experimental  Enquirj'  into  the  Relations  subsisting  between 
Nerve  and  Muscle,"  in  the  37th  vol.  of  the  Edinburgh  Medical  and  Surgical 
Journal. 


FIG.  1. 


View  of  the  top  of  the  Brain. 


A  A — Front  part  of  the  Brain. 
■R  pj  I  Right  and  left  hemisphere. 


15 

Mayo,  who  has  analyzed  their  anatomical  composition,  and  pursued  their 
course  with  singular  precision,  and  has  thus  been  enabled  to  correct  some 
errors  of  detail  in  the  system  of  Sir  Charles  Bell. 


NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 

In  man,  and  in  other  vertebrated  animals,  the  nervous  system  consists 
of  the  cerebrum,  cerebellum,  medulla  oblongata,  medulla  spinalis,  and  of 
the  encephalic,  spinal,  and  ganglionic  nerves.  It  seems  most  natural  to 
observe  this  order  of  anatomical  sequence  in  recording  what  is  known  of 
nervous  functions. 


CEREBRUM,    OR    BRAIN-PROPER. 

The  physiology  of  the  brain  has  received  of  late  years  very  conside- 
rable accessions,  and  its  vital  offices,  viewed  as  an  entire  organ,  have  now 
probably  been  ascertained  with  sufficient  precision.  Some  portion  of 
this  newly  acquired  knowledge  has  been  gathered  from  experiments  on 
living  animals,  but  the  greater  and  more  valuable  part  has  flowed  from 
the  study  of  comparative  developement.  In  this  latter  field  of  inquiry, 
Tiedemann's  elaborate  history  of  the  progressive  evolution  of  the  human 
brain  during  the  period  of  foetal  existence,  with  reference  to  the  compa- 
rative structure  of  that  organ  in  the  lower  animals,  merits  an  early  and 
detailed  notice.  It  had  been  discovered  by  Harvey,  that  the  foitus  in 
the  human  species,  as  well  as  in  inferior  animals,  is  not  a  precise  facsimile 
of  the  adult,  but  that  it  commences  from  a  form  infinitely  more  simple, 
and  passes  through  several  successive  stages  of  organization  before 
reaching  its  perfect  developement.  In  the  circulatory  system,  these 
changes  have  been  minutely  observed  and  faithfully  recorded*.  Tiede- 
mann  has  traced  a  similar  progression  in  the  brain  and  nervous  system, 
and  has  moreover  established  an  exact  parallel  between  the  temporary 
states  of  the  foetal  brain  in  the  periods  of  advancing  gestation,  and  the 
permanent  developement  of  that  organ  at  successive  points  of  the  animal 
scale.  The  first  part  of  his  work  is  simply  descriptive  of  the  nervous 
system  of  the  embryo  at  each  successive  month  of  foetal  life.  It  consti- 
tutes the  anatomical  groundwork  upon  which  are  raised  the  general  laws 
of  cerebral  formation,  and  the  higher  philosophy  of  the  science.  In  the 
second  part,  Tiedemann  has  established,  by  examples  drawn  from  all  the 

•  See  an  excellent  Essay  on  the  Developement  of  the  Vascular  System  in  the  Fmttt^ 
of  Vertebrated  Animals,  by  Dr.  Allen  Thomson. 


16 

grand  divisions  of  the  animal  kingdom,  the  universaUty  of  the  law  of 
formation,  as  traced  in  the  nervous  system  of  the  human  foetus,  and  the 
existence  of  one  and  the  same  fundamental  type  in  the  brain  of  man  and 
of  the  inferior  animals. 

The  facts  which  have  been  unfolded  by  the  industry  of  Tiedemann) 
besides  leading  to  the  universal  law  of  nervous  developement,  throw 
important  light  upon  nervous  function :  for  it  is  observed  that  the 
successive  increments  of  nervous  matter,  and  especially  of  brain,  mark 
successive  advances  in  the  scale  of  being ;  and,  in  general,  that  the 
developement  of  the  higher  instincts  and  faculties  keeps  pace  with  that  of 
brain.  Thus,  in  the  zoophyta,  and  in  all  living  beings  destitute  of  nerves, 
nothing  that  resembles  an  instinct  or  voluntary  act  is  discoverable.  In 
fishes  the  hemispheres  of  the  brain  are  small,  and  marked  with  few 
furrows  or  eminences.  In  birds  they  are  much  more  voluminous,  more 
raised  and  vaulted  than  in  reptiles  ;  yet  no  convolutions  or  anfractuosities 
can  be  perceived  on  any  point  of  their  surface,  nor  are  they  divided  into 
lobes.  The  brain  of  the  mammalia  approaches  by  successive  steps  to 
that  of  man.  That  of  the  rodentia  is  at  the  lowest  point  of  organization. 
Thus  the  hemispheres  in  the  mouse,  rat,  and  squirrel  are  smooth  and 
without  convolutions.  In  the  carnivorous  and  ruminating  tribes,  the 
hemispheres  are  much  larger  and  marked  by  numerous  convolutions.  In 
the  ape  tribe  the  brain  is  still  more  capacious  and  more  convex  ;  it  covers 
the  cerebellum,  and  is  divided  into  anterior,  middle,  and  posterior  lobes. 
It  is  in  man  that  the  brain  attains  its  greatest  magnitude  and  most  elabo- 
rate organization.  Sommerring  has  proved  that  the  volume  of  the  brain, 
referred  to  that  of  the  spinal  marrow  as  a  standard  of  comparison,  is 
greater  in  man  than  in  any  other  animal. 

Various  attempts  have  been  made  of  late  years,  chiefly  by  the  French 
physiologists,  to  ascertain  the  functions  of  the  brain  by  actual  experiment. 
It  will  appear  from  a  detailed  survey  of  their  labours,  that  little  more 
than  a  few  general  facts  respecting  the  function  of  its  larger  masses  and 
great  natural  divisions  have  flowed  from  this  mode  of  research.  The 
oflflces  of  the  smaller  parts  of  cerebral  substance  cannot  with  any 
certainty  be  derived  from  the  phenomena  that  have  been  hitherto  observed 
to  follow  the  removal  of  those  parts,  since  the  most  practised  vivisectors 
have  obtained  conflicting  results.  Nor  is  it  difiicult,  after  having  per- 
formed or  witnessed  such  experiments,  to  point  out  many  unavoidable 
sources  of  fallacy.  In  operations  on  living  animals,  and  especially  on 
so  delicate  an  organ  as  the  brain,  it  is  scarcely  possible  for  the  most  skil- 
ful manipulator  to  preserve  exact  anatomical  boundaries,  to  restrain 
hsemorrhage,  or  prevent  the  extension  to  contiguous  parts,  of  the  morbid 
actions  consequent  upon  such  serious  injuries,  and  to  distinguish  the 
secondary  and  varying  phenomena,  induced  by  the  pressure  of  extrava- 


17 

sated  blood,  or  the  spread  of  an  inflammatory  process,  from  those  which 
are  essential  and  primary.  The  ablation  of  small  and  completely  insulated 
portions  of  brain  must,  then,  be  classed  among  the  "agenda"  of  experi- 
mental physiology. 

The  most  decisive  researches,  that  have  been  hitherto  instituted  on 
the  functions  of  the  brain,  are  those  of  M.  Flourens.  His  mode  of 
operating  was  to  remove  cautiously  successive  thin  slices  of  cerebral 
matter,  and  to  note  the  corresponding  changes  of  function.  He  com- 
menced with  the  hemispheres  of  the  brain,  which  he  found  might  be 
thus  cut  away,  including  the  corpora  striata  and  thalan)i  optici,  without 
apparently  occasioning  any  pain  to  the  animal,  and  without  exciting 
convulsive  motions.  Entire  removal  of  the  cerebrum  induces  a  state 
resembling  coma  ;  the  animal  appears  plunged  in  a  profound  sleep,  being 
wholly  lost  to  external  impressions,  and  incapable  of  originating  motion  ; 
it  is  deprived,  too,  according  to  Flourens,  of  every  mode  of  sensation. 
Hence  the  cerebrum  is  inferred  to  Le  the  organ  in  which  reside  the 
faculties  of  perception,  volition  and  memory.  Though  not  itself  sensible, 
in  the  ordinary  acceptation  of  the  word, — that  is,  capable,  on  contact  or 
injury,  of  propagating  sensation, — yet  it  is  the  point  where  impressions 
made  on  the  external  organs  of  sense  become  objects  of  perception. 
This  absence  of  general  sensibility  observed  in  the  brain  has  also  been 
experimentally  demonstrated  in  the  nerves  dedicated  to  the  functions  of 
sight,  of  smell  and  of  hearing,  and  constitutes,  perhaps,  one  of  the  most 
remarltable  phenomena  that  have  been  disclosed  by  interrogating  living 
nature.  Flourens  appears,  however,  to  have  failed  in  proving  that  all 
the  sensations  demand  for  their  perception  the  integrity  of  the  brain. 
He  has  himself  stated  that  an  animal  deprived  of  that  organ,  when 
violently  struck,  "  has  the  air  of  awakening  from  sleep,"  and  that  if 
pushed  forwards,  it  continues  to  advance  after  the  impelling  force  must 
have  been  wholly  expended.  Cuvier  has  therefore  concluded,  in  his 
Report  to  the  Academy  of  Sciences  upon  M.  Flourens'  paper,  that  the 
cerebral  lobes  are  the  receptacle  in  which  the  impressions  made  on  the 
organs  of  sight  and  hearing  only,  become  perceptible  by  the  animal,  an^ 
that  probably  there  too  all  the  sensations  assume  a  distinct  form,  and 
leave  durable  impressions, — that  the  lobes  are,  in  short,  the  abode  of  me- 
mory. The  lobes,  too,  would  seem  to  be  the  part  in  which  those  motions 
which  flow  from  spontaneous  acts  of  the  mind  have  their  origin.  But  a 
power  of  effecting  regular  and  combined  movements,  "on  externa/  stimula- 
tion^ evidently  survives  the  destruction  of  the  cerebral  hemispheres. 

A  very  elaborate  series  of  experiments  on  the  functions  of  the  brain  in 
general,  and  especially  on  those  of  its  anterior  portion,  have  been  since 
performed  by  M.  Bouillaud*.     That  observer  concurs  with  Flourens  io 

•Magendie,  Journal  de  Physiologie,  torn.  x.  p.  36. 
3 


18 

viewing  the  cerebral  lobes  as  the  seat  of  the  remembrance  of  those  sensa- 
tions which  are  furnished  to  us  by  sight  and  hearing,  as  well  ns  of  all 
the  intellectual  operations  to  which  these  sensations  may  be  subjected, 
such  as  comparison,  judgment  and  reasoning.  But  he  proves  that  the 
ordinary  tactual  sensibility  does  not  require  for  its  manifestation  the* 
presence  of  the  brain.  For  ani'iials  entirely  deprived  of  brain  were 
awakened  by  being  struck,  and  gave  evident  indications  of  suffering  when 
exposed  to  any  cause  of  physical  pain.  Bouillaud  observes,  too,  thai  the 
iris  continues  obedient  to  the  stimulus  of  light,  after  ablation  of  the 
hemispheres,  and  on  thi->  ground  calls  in  question  the  loss  of  vision 
asserted  by  Flourens.  isor  are  the  lobes  (he  contends,)  the  only  recep- 
tacle of  intelligence,  of  instincts  and  of  volition  :  for  to  admit  this 
proposition  of  Flourens  would  be  to  grant  that  an  animal  which  retains 
the  power  of  locomotion,  which  makes  every  effort  to  escape  from 
irritation,  which  preserves  its  appropriate  attitude,  and  executes  the  same 
movements  after  as  before  mutilation,  may  perform  all  those  actions 
without  the  ag-ency  of  the  will  or  of  instinct.  Another  doctrine  of 
Flourens,  which  has  been  experimentally  refuted  by  Bouillaud,  is,  "that 
the  cerebral  lobes  concur  as  a  whole  in  the  full  and  entire  exercise  of 
their  functions;  that  v.  hen  one  sense  is  lost,  all  are  lost;  when  one 
faculty  disappears,  all  disappear  ;"  in  short,  that  a  certain  amount  of  cere- 
bral matter  may  he  cut  away  without  apparent  injury,  but  that  when  this 
limit  is  passed,  ail  voluntary  acts  and  all  perceptions  perish  simultane- 
ously. Bouillaud,  on  the  contrary,  has  descritied  several  experiments 
which  show  that  animals,  from  whom  the  anterior  or  frontal  part  of  the 
brain  had  been  removed,  preserved  sight  and  hearing,  though  deprived  of 
the  knowledge  of  external  objects,  and  of  the  power  of  seeking  their 
food. 

The  second  part  of  M.  Bouillaud's  researches  is  entirely  devoted  to  the 
functions  of  the  anterior  lobes  of  the  brain.  These  were  either  removed 
by  the  scalpel,  or  destroyed  by  the  actual  cautery,  in  dogs,  rabbits  and 
pigeons.  Animals  thus  mutilated  feel,  see,  hear  and  smell ;  are  easily 
alarmed,  and  execute  a  number  of  voluntary  acts,  but  cease  to  recognise 
the  persons  or  objects  which  surround  them.  They  no  longer  seek  food, 
or  perform  any  action  announcing  a  combination  of  ideas.  Thus  the  most 
docile  and  intelligent  dogs  lost  all  power  of  comprehending  signs  or  words 
which  were  before  familiar  to  them,  became  indifferent  to  menaces  or 
care.sses,  were  no  longer  amenable  to  authority,  and  retained  no  remem- 
brance of  places,  of  things,  or  of  persons.  They  saw  distinctly  food  pre- 
sented to  them,  but  had  ceased  to  associate  with  its  external  qualities  all 
perception  of  its  relations  to  themselves  as  an  object  of  desire.  The  an- 
terior or  frontal  part  of  the  brain  is  hence  inferred  to  be  the  seat  of  several 
intellectual  faculties.     Its  removal  occasions  a  state  resembling  idiotism, 


19 

characterized  by  loss  of  the  power  of  discriminating  external  objects, 
whicli,  however,  co-exists  v/ith  the  faculties  of  sensation. 

It  will  be  unnecessary  to  describe  fully  in  this  place  the  experiments  of 
Professor  Rolando,  of  Turin,  performed  in  1S09,  and  published  in  Magen- 
'die's  Journal^  torn,  iii.,  1823,  since  the  more  important  of  his  facts  have 
reference,  not  to  the  brain-proper,  but  to  the  cerebellum.  His  paper  cer- 
tainly contains  some  curious  anticipations  of  phenomena,  since  more  ac- 
curately observed  by  Flourens  and  Magendie ;  yet  as  regards  the  brain, 
properly  so  called,  his  results  are  vague  and  inconclusive.  Accident, 
rather  than  a  well  matured  design,  seems  to  have  directed  what  parts  of 
the  brain  he  should  remove ;  and  from  having  comprehended  in  the  same 
injury  totally  distinct  anatomical  divisions,  he  has  rendered  it  impossible  to 
arrive  at  the  precise  function  of  any  one  part.  Thus  we  are  told  that 
injury  of  the  thalami  optici  and  tubercula  quadrigemina  in  a  dog  was  fol- 
lowed by  violent  muscular  contractions.  Now  all  subsequent  experi- 
menters agree,  that  irritation  of  the  thalami  is  incapable  of  inducing  con- 
vulsive motions;  and  Flourens  has  proved  that  this  property  has  its 
beo-innino-  in  the  tubercula, — an  important  fact,  which  Rolando,  with  a 
little  more  precision  in  anatomical  manipulation,  could  scarcely  have 
failed  to  discover. 

Magendie  has  described*  some  curious  experiments  on  the  corpora 
striata,  which,  though  closely  analogous  in  their  results  to  those  on  the 
cerebellum,  have  their  proper  place  in  this  section.  Removal  of  one  cor- 
pus striatum  was  followed  by  no  remarkable  change;  but  when  both  had 
been  cut  away,  the  animal  rushed  violerflj^  forwards,  never  deviating 
from  a  rectilinear  course,  and  striking  against  any  objects  in  its  way.  In 
his  lecture  of  February  7,  1828,  Magendie,  in  the  presence  of  his  class, 
removed  both  corpora  striata  from  a  rabbit.  The  animal  attempted  to 
rush  forwards,  and,  if  restrained,  appeared  restless,  continuing  in  the  atti- 
tude of  incipient  progression.  One  thalamus  opticus  was  then  cut  away 
from  the  same  animal.  The  direction  of  its  motion  was  immediately 
changed  from  a  straight  to  a  curved  line.  It  continued  for  some  time  to 
run  round  in  circles,  turning  towards  the  injured  side.  When  the  other 
thalamus  was  removed,  the  animal  ceased  its  motions  and  remained  per- 
fectly tranquil,  with  the  head  inclined  backwards.  These  experiments, 
it  may  be  observed,  furnish  no  support  to  the  opinions  of  MM.  Foville  and 
Pinel  Grandchamps,  who  have  assigned  the  anterior  lobes  and  corpora 
striata  as  the  parts  presiding  over  the  movements  of  the  inferior  extremi- 
ties, and  the  posterior  lobes  and  thalami  as  regulating  the  superior. 

*  Journal  dc  Physiologic,  torn.  iii.  p.  376 


20 

CEREBELLUM. 

It  may  be  regarded  as  nearly  established  by  modern  researches,  that  the 
cerebellum  is  more  or  less  directly  connected  with  the  function  of  loco- 
motion. The  precise  nature  and  extent  of  its  control  over  the  actions  of 
the  voluntary  muscles  are,  however,  far  from  being  clearly  determined. 
In  the  higher  animals,  the  mental  act  of  volilion  probably  has  its  com- 
mencing point,  as  productive  of  a  physical  change,  in  the  brain-proper  ; 
though  it  must  be  confessed  that  some  of  the  experiments  of  Flourens,  and 
all  of  those  of  Bouillaud,  indicate  the  persistance  of  many  instinctive,  and 
even  of  some  automatic  motions,  after  destruction  of  the  brain.  But 
there  does  appear  sufficient  evidence  to  prove  that  those  volitions  which 
have  motion  as  their  etfect,  whatever  be  their  origin,  Mhether  in  the  cere- 
brum, cerebellum,  or  medulla  oblongata,*  require  for  their  accomplish- 
ment the  co-operation  of  the  cerebellum.  This  evidence  has  been  mainly 
supplied  by  the  same  inquirers  whose  researches  on  the  cerebrum  have 
been  already  analyzed. 

In  the  order  of  time,  though  not  of  importance,  the  experiments  of 
Professor  Rolando  stand  foremost.  Injuries  of  the  cerebellum,  he  ob- 
served, were  always  followed  by  diminished  motive  power  ;  and  this  par- 
tial loss  of  power  was  always  in  direct  proportion  to  the  amount  of  injury. 
A  turtle  survived  upwards  of  two  months  the  entire  removal  of  the  cere- 
bellum, continuing  sensible  to  the  slightest  stimulus;  but  when  irritants 
were  applied,  it  was  totally  unable  to  move  from  its  place.  M  Flourens 
has  since  arrived  at  similar,  fbt  more  definitive  results.  He  removed  in 
succession  thin  slices  from  the  cerebellum.  After  the  first  two  layers 
had  been  cut  away,  a  slight  weakness  and  want  of  harmony  and  system  in 
the  automatic  movements  were  noticed.  When  more  cerebellic  substance 
had  been  removed,  great  general  agitation  became  apparent.  The  pigeon, 
which  was  the  subject  of  operation,  retained,  as  at  first,  the  senses  of 
sight  and  hearing,  but  was  capable  of  executing  only  irregular  unconnect- 
ed muscular  efforts.  It  lost  by  degrees  the  power  of  flying,  of  walking, 
and  even  of  standing.  Removal  of  the  whole  cerebellum  was  followed  by 
the  entire  disappearance  of  motive  power.  The  animal,  if  laid  upon  its 
back,  tried  in  vain  to  turn  round  ;  it  perceived  and  was  apprehensive  of 
blows,  with  which  it  was  menaced,  heard  sounds,  seemed  aware  of  dan- 
ger, and  made  attempts  to  escape,  though  ineffectually, — in  short,  while 
it  preserved,  uninjured,  sensation  and  the  exercise  of  volition,  it  had  lost 
all  power  of  rendering  its  muscles  obedient  to  the  will.  The  cerebellum 
is  hence  supposed  by  Flourens  to  be  invested  with  the  office  of  "  ballanc- 
ing,  regulating  or  combining  separate  sets  of  muscles  and  limbs,  so  as  to 

*  Flourens,  Memoires  de  V Academic,  torn.  ix. 


FIG.  2. 


Side  view  of  the  brain,  cerebellum,  and  medulla  oblono-ata. 


C — Cerebrum. 

D — Cerebellum. 

E — Medulla  oblonjrata. 


21 

brino^  about  those  complex  movements  depending  on  simultaneous  and 
conspiring  eflforts  of  many  muscles,  which  are  necessary  to  the  different 
kinds  of  progressive  motion."  Bouillaud,  who  has  successfully  disputed 
several  of  the  opinions  of  Floureiis  respecting  the  functions  of  the  cere- 
brum, fully  concurs  with  him  as  to  those  of  the  cerebellum. 

Yet,  it  must  be  admitted,  that  there  exists  also  conflicting  expermental 
testimony  on  this  subject.  M.  Fodera*  states  that  he  has  found  the  re- 
moval of  a  part  of  the  cerebellum  to  be  followed,  in  all  cases,  either  by 
motion  backwards,  or  by  that  position  of  the  body  which  precedes  retro- 
grade movement  The  head  is  thrown  back,  the  hind  legs  separated,  and 
the  fore  legs  extended  forwards,  and  pressed  firmly  against  the  ground. 
More  complete  destruction  of  the  cerebellum  occasions  the  animal  to  fall  on 
its  side  ;  but  the  head  is  still  inclined  rigidly  backwards,  and  the  anterior 
extremities  agitated  with  convulsive  movements,  tending  to  cause  retrograde 
motion  of  the  body.  Injuries  of  one  side  of  the  cerebellum  were  observed 
to  produce  paralysis  of  the  same  side  of  the  body  ;  as  might,  indeed,  have 
been  anticipated  from  the  direct  course,  without  decussation,  of  the  resti- 
form  columns  which  ascend  to  form  the  cerebellum.  Magendie  has  de- 
scribed'j"  precisely  the  same  results.  A  duck,  whose  cerebellum  had  been 
destroyed,  could  swim  only  backwards.  In  the  course  of  his  experimental 
lectures,  Magendie,  having  removed  the  cerebellum  in  several  rabbits, 
demonstrated  to  his  class  the  phenomena  of  retrograde  movement,  exactly 
as  they  have  been  recorded  by  Fodera.  It  is,  then,  impossible  to  regard 
the  conclusions  of  Flourens  as  fully  established,  opposed  as  they  are  by 
those  of  so  skilful  an  experimenter  as  Magendie.  Indeed,  while  Flourens 
conceives  the  cerebellum  to  preside  over  motion,  MM.  Foville  and  Pinel 
Grandchamps  attribute  to  it  the  directly  opposite  function  of  sensation : 
and  this  doctrine  seems  to  derive  some  support  from  anatomical  disposi- 
tion ;  for  it  has  been  proved  by  Tiedemann  that  the  cerebellum  is  nothing 
more  than  an  expansion  or  prolongation  of  the  corpora  restiformia,  and 
posterior  columns  of  the  spinal  meSuUa,  which  columns  have  been  shown 
by  Sir  Charles  Bell  to  have  the  office  of  conveying  sensations.  But  it  is 
not  the  less  true  that  all  recent  experiments,  even  those  of  Fodera  and  Ma- 
gendie, point  to  some  connexion  between  the  cerebellum  and  the  power 
of  voluntary  motion.  In  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge  it  would  be 
unsafe  to  contend  for  more  than  the  probable  existence  of  some  such  gene- 
ral relation. 

This,  then,  is  all  that  seems  deserving  of  confidence  respecting  the  func- 
tions of  the  cerebellum  itself.  .  But  there  are  some  singular  phenomena 
•which,  though  residing  in  other  structures  more  or  less  near  to  the  cere- 
bellum, are  so  analogous  to  those  already  described  as  to  call  for  notice  in 

•  Journal  de  Physique,  July,  1823.  f  Ibid.  torn.  iii.  p.  157. 


23 

this  place.     Magendie  has  described*  the  results  of  injury  to  the  crura 
cerebelli  of  a  rabbit.     Complete  division  of  the  right  crus  was  followed  by 
rapid  and  incessant  rotation  of  the  body  upon  its  own  axis,  from  left  to 
right.       This    singular  inotioii  having  continued    two   hours,  Magendie 
placed  the  rabbit  in  a  basket  containing  hay.     On  visiting  it  the  following 
day  he  was  surprised  to  find  the  anim;l  slill  turning  round  as  hefi.re,  and 
completely  enveloped  in  hay.     The  eyes  were  rigidly  fixed  in  difl'erent 
lines  ;  that  of  the  injured  side  being  directed  forwards  and  downwards, 
that  of  the  other  side  backwards  and  upwards.   If  both  crura  were  divided, 
no  motion  followed.     Magendie  hence  concluded  that  these  nervous  cords 
are  the  conductors  of  impulsive  forces  -which  counterbalance  or.e  another, 
and  that  from  the  equilibrium  of  these  two  forces  result  the  power  of 
standino-,  and  even  of  maintainins;  a  stale  of  rest,  and  of  executins;  the 
different   voluntary   motions.      The    inquiry    naturally   presented    itself, 
whether  these  forces  are  inherent  in  the  crura  themselves,  or  emanate 
from  the  cerebellum  or  some  other  source.     To  determine  this  question, 
portions  of  substance  were  removed  from  both  sides  of  the  cerebellum, 
but  unequally,  so  as  leave  intact  three-fourths  on  the  left  side  and  one- 
fourth  only  on  the  right.     The  animal  rolled  towards  the  right  side,  and 
its  eyes  were  fixed  in  the  manner  already  described.     But  the  left  crus 
being  divided,  the  animal  rolled  to  the  left  side.     Hence  it  appears  that 
section  of  the  crus  has  more  influence  over  the  lateral  rotation  of  the  1  ody 
than  injury  of  the  cerebellum  itself;  and  that  the  impulsive  force  does 
not  belong  (at  least  exclusively)  to  the  cerebellum.     When  the  cerebel- 
lum was  divided  precisely  in  the  median  line,  the  animal  seemed  suspend- 
ed between  two  opposing  forces,  sometimes  inclining  towards  one  side,  as 
if  about  to  fall,  and  again  thrown  suddenly  back  to  the  opposite  side.     Its 
eyes  were  singularly  agitated,  and  seemed  about  to  start  from  the  orbits. 
Similar  movements  followed  division  of  the  continuous  fibres  in  the  pons 
Varolii.     Serres  has  described  a  case  of  similar  rotary  motion  occurring 
in  the  human  subject.     A  shoemaker  habituated  to  excess  in  alcoholic 
liquors,  after  great  intemperance,  was  seized  with  an  irresistible  disposi- 
tion to  turn  round  upon  his  own  axis,  and  continued  to  move  so  till  death 
ensued.     On  inspecting  the  brain,  one  of  the  crura  cerebelli  was  found 
much  diseased,  and  this  was  the  only  alteration  of  structure  visible  in  any 
part  of  the  nervous  system. 

M.  Flourens  has  published  in  a  recent  volume  of  the  Mcmohes  de 
V Academic  des  Sciences-\  a  description  of  some  striking  abnormal  motions 
which  followed  the  division  of  the  semicircular  canals  of  the  ears  of  birds. 
Thouo-h  these  organs  have  no  anatomical  relation  to  the  cerebrum  or  cere- 
bellum, the  altered  motions  resulting  from  their  division  are  so  analogous 

•  Jmtrnal  de  Physiologie,  torn.  iv.  399  t  Tom.  is.  p.  454. 


FIG.  3. 


A  front  view   of  the  Medulla  Oblongata,  lateral   nerves,  Pons  Varolii, 

and  fifth  pair  of  nerves. 


M — Medulla  oblongata.      A — Pons  Varolii.      B — Corpus  Pyramidale.      C — Corpus 
Olivary.       D — Spinal  accessory  nerve.      E — Par   Vagum.       F — Glosso-Pharyngeal 
nerve.     G — Portio  Dura  of  the  seventh.  H — Fourth  Nerve.     I  I — Anterior  column  of 
the    Spinal    Cord.       a — Fifth  nerve.      b — Ganglionic    branch    of   the    fifth   nerve 
c — Ganglion,     d — Motor  branch  of  the  fifth  nerve. 


23 

to  those  observed  by  Magendie  after  lesions  of  the  corpora  striata  and 
crura,  that  they  may  be  most  conveniently  described  in  the  same  section. 
Two  of  the  semicircular  canals  are  vertical,  and  one  horizontal.  Division 
of  the  horizontal  canals  on  each  side  occasioned  a  rapid  horizontal  move- 
ment of  the  head  from  right  to  left,  and  back  again,  and  loss  of  the  power 
of  maintaining  an  equilibrium,  except  when  standing,  or  when  perfectly 
motionless.  There  was  also  the  same  singular  rotation  of  the  animal 
round  its  own  axis  which  follows  injury  of  the  crura  cerebelli.  Section 
of  the  inferior  vertical  canal  on  both  sides  produced  violent  vertical  move- 
ments of  the  head,  with  loss  of  equilibrium  in  walking  or  flying.  There 
was  in  this  case  no  rotation  of  the  body  upon  itself,  but  the  bird  fell  back- 
wards, and  remained  lying  on  its  back.  When  the  superior  vertical  ca- 
nals were  divided,  the  same  phenomena  were  observed  as  in  section  of  the 
inferior,  except  that  the  bird  fell  forward  on  its  head,  instead  of  backward. 
All  the  canals,  both  vertical  and  horizontal,  having  been  divided,  in  an- 
other pigeon,  violent  and  irregular  motions  in  all  directions  ensued. 
When,  however,  the  bony  canals  were  so  cautiously  divided  as  to  leave 
their  internal  membranous  investment  uninjured,  these  abnormal  motions 
were  not  produced.  It  is,  therefore,  in  these  membranes,  or  rather  in  the 
expansion  of  the  acoustic  nerve  which  overspreads  them,  that  the  cause  of 
this  phenomenon  must  reside.  No  explanation  is  proposed  by  Flourens 
of  the  control  thus  exercised  by  a  nerve  supposed  to  minister  exclusively 
to  the  sense  of  hearing,  over  actions  so  entirely  opposite  in  character.  It 
is  remarkable  that  the  irregular  movements  should  observe  the  same  di- 
rection in  their  course  as  the  canals,  by  the  section  of  which  they  are  in- 
duced. Thus  the  direction  of  the  inferior  vertical  canal  is  posterior,  that 
of  the  superior  is  anterior,  corresponding  perfectly  with  the  directions  of 
the  abnormal  motions. 


MEDULLA     OBLONGATA. 

The  medulla  oblongata,  or  "  bulbe  rachidien,"  is  reducible  into  six 
columns,  or  three  pairs,  viz:  two  anterior  or  pyramidal,  which  partially 
decussate,  two  middle  or  olivary,  and  two  posterior  or  restiform,  which 
proceed  forwards  without  crossing.  It  is  continuous  in  structure  with  the 
spinal  marrow,  and  enjoys,  by  virtue  of  this  relation,  the  same  function  of 
propigating  motion  and  sensation.  But  it  is  distinguished  from  the  spinal 
medulla  by  special  and  higher  attributes,  being  endowed  with  the  faculty 
of  ori2:inatino;  motions,  as  well  as  with  that  of  regculatin":  and  conductinoj 
them.  The  medulla  oblongata,  with  the  cerebrum  and  cerebellum,  consti- 
tute, in  short,  according  to  Flourens,*  those  portions  of  the  nervous  sys- 

•  Memoires  de  I'Academie  des  Sciences,  torn.  ix.  p.  478 


24 

torn  which  exercise  their  functions  "  spontaneously  or  primordially,"  and 
which  originate  and  preside  over  llie  vital  actions  of  the  subordinate  parts. 
To  this  latter  order  of  parts,  which  require  an  exciting  or  regulatins;  influ- 
ence, belongs  the  spinal  medulla.  In  the  superior  class,  Flourens  seems 
to  assign  even  a  higher  place  to  the  medulla  oblongata  than  to  the  cere- 
brum or  cerebellum.  For  the  cerebrum,  he  observes,  may  act  without  the 
cerebellum  ;  and  this  latter  organ  continues  to  regulate  the  motions  of  the 
body  after  removal  of  the  cerebrum.  But  the  functions  of  neither  cere- 
brum nor  cerebellum  survive  the  destruction  of  the  medulla  oblono-ata, 
which  seems  to  be  the  common  bond  and  central  knot  combining  all  the 
individual  parts  of  the  nervous  system  into  one  whole. 

The  medulla  oblongata  was  regarded  by  Legallois  as  the  mainspring  or 
"  premier  mobile"  of  the  inspiratory  movements.  He  repeated  before  a 
Commission  of  the  Institute  of  France  the  leading  experiments  on  which 
his  opinion  rested.*  In  a  rabbit,  five  or  six  days  old,  the  larynx  was 
detached  from  the  os  hyoides  and  the  glottis  exposed  to  view.  The 
brain  and  cerebellum  were  then  extracted  without  arresting  the  inspira- 
tions, which  were  marked  by  four  simultaneous  motions, — a  gaping  of 
the  lips,  an  opening  of  the  glottis,  the  elevation  of  the  ribs,  and  the  con- 
traction of  the  diaphragm.  Legallois  next  removed  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata, when  all  these  motions  ceased  together.  In  a  second  rabbit,  instead 
of  extracting  at  once  the  entire  medulla,  it  was  cut  away  in  successive 
thin  slices.  The  four  inspiratory  movements  continued  after  the  removal 
of  the  three  first  slices,  but  ceased  after  the  fourth.  It  was  found  that  the 
fourth  had  reached  the  origin  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves.  If,  instead  of 
destroying  the  part  in  which  this  motive  influence  resides,  it  be  simply 
prevented  from  communicating  with  the  muscles,  which  are  .subservient 
to  inspiration,  a  similar  effect  ought  to  be  produced.  Now  it  is  obvious 
that  the  medulla  oblongata  must  transmit  its  influence  to  the  muscles 
which  raise  the  ribs,  through  the  medium  of  the  intercostal  nerves,  and 
therefore  of  the  spinal  marrow,  and  to  the  diaphragm  through  the  phrenic 
nerves,  and  to  these  through  the  spinal  marrow.  In  another  rabbit, 
therefore,  the  medulla  spinalis  was  cut  across  about  the  level  of  the  sev- 
enth cervical  vertebra.  The  effect  of  this  operation  was  to  arrest  the 
elevation  of  the  ribs,  the  other  three  inspiratory  motions  still  continuing. 
A  second  section  was  made  near  the  first  cervical  vertebra,  and  conse- 
quently above  the  origin  of  the  phrenic,  with  the  effect  of  suspending  the 
contraction  of  the  diaphragm.  The  par  vagum  was  next  divided  in  the 
neck,  and  the  opening  of  the  glottis  ceased.  There  remained  then,  of  the 
four  inspiratory  movements,  only  the  gfiping  of  the  lips,  which,  however, 
was  sufficient  to  attest  that  the  medulla  oblongata  still  retained  the  power 

*  (Euvres  de  Legallois,  torn.  i.  p.  247 


25 

of  producing  them  all.  This  power  had  ceased  to  call  forth  the  other 
three  motions,  only  because  it  no  longer  had  communication  with  their 
organs. 

M.  Flourens,  in  a  recent  memoir  already  referred  to,*  has  confirmed 
and  extended  lh,e  views  first  announced  by  Legallois.  He  has  distinctly 
traced  the  comparative  action  of  the  medulla  spinalis  and  oblongata,  on 
respiration,  in  the  four  classes  of  vertebrated  animals.  In  birds,  he  found 
that  all  the  lumbar  and  the  posterior  dorsal  medulla  might  be  destroyed 
without  impeding  the  respiratory  function,  though  it  was  arrested  by  re- 
moval of  the  costal  medulla.  In  the  mammalia  the  costal  also  misrht  be 
removed,  for  though  the  raising  of  the  ribs  ceased,  the  action  of  the  dia- 
phragm continued  as  long  as  the  origin  of  the  phrenic  nerve  remained  un- 
injured. In  frogs,  all  the  spinal  medulla  may  be  destroyed,  except  the 
portion  whence  spring  the  nerves  supplying  the  hyoideal  apparatus.  Eve- 
ry part  of  the  spinal  marrow  may  be  removed  in  fishes  without  affecting 
respiration;  for  all  the  nerves  distributed  to  the  respiratory  organs  of 
fishes  have  their  origin  in  the  medulla  oblongata.  It  is  hence  apparent  that 
the  spinal  marrow  exercises  only  a  variable  and  relative  action  on  the  re- 
spiratory function,  in  the  different  classes  of  vertebrated  animals.  In  de- 
scending from  the  higher  to  the  lower  points  of  this  scale,  the  spinal  mar- 
row is  seen  progressively  to  disengage  itself  from  cooperation  in  these 
movements,  while  the  medulla  oblongata  tends  more  and  more  to  concen- 
trate them  in  itself,  till  in  fishes  the  proper  functions  of  the  two  medullte 
show  themselves  completely  distinct,  the  spinal  ministering  to  locomo- 
tion and  sensation,  and  the  oblongata  to  respiration.  The  medulla  oblon- 
gata is,  then,  the  "  premier  moteur,"  or  the  exciting  and  regulating  prin- 
ciple of  the  i-nspiratory  movements  in  all  classes  of  vertebrated  animals  ; 
besides  participating,  by  virtue  of  its  continuity  with  the  spinal  marrow, 
in  the  proper  functions  of  that  organ.  From  a  second  series  of  experi- 
ments, M  Flourens  concludes  that  there  exists  a  point  in  the  nervous 
centres  at  which  the  section  of  those  centres  produces  the  sudden  annihi- 
lation of  all  the  inspiratory  movements  ;  and  that  this  point  corresponds 
with  the  origin  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves,  commencing  immediately 
above,  and  ending  a  little  below,  that  origin, — a  result  precisely  agreeing 
with  that  obtained  by  Legallois. 


SPINAL    MARROW 

It  is  apparent  that  the  functions  of  the  three  grand  divisions  of  the  ner- 
vous system,  already  described,  have  not  yet  been  distinctly  and  fully  as- 

*  Memoircs  de  VAcademie,  torn.  ix.  1830 
4 


26 

certained.  Our  knowledge  of  those,  which  next  fall  under  survey,  is 
more  definite  and  substantial.  The  vital  offices  of  the  spinal  medulla — 
regarded  by  Legallois  as  the  mainspring  of  life,  and  as  alone  regulating 
the  actions  of  the  heart  and  nobler  organs, — are  now  reduced  to  convey- 
ing to  the  muscles  the  motive  impulse  of  volition,  and  to  propagating  to 
the  sensorium  commune,  impressions  made  on  the  external  senses.  It  is 
not  invested  with  the  power  possessed  by  the  cerebrum  and  cerebellum, 
and  perhaps  by  the  medulla  oblongata,  of  spontaneously  originating  mus- 
cular motions.  It  is  mainly,  if  not  exclusively,  a  conductor ;  a  medium 
of  communication  between  the  brain  and  the  external  instruments  of  loco- 
motion and  sensation.  Flourens,  indeed,  conjectures  that  it  also  has  the 
office  of  associating  the  partial  contractions  of  individual  muscles  into 
"mouvemens  d'ensemble,"  necessary  to  the  regular  motions  of  the  lim.bs. 

Before  recording  what  is  known  of  the  spinal  cord  itself,  it  will  be  pro- 
per to  advert  to  some  recent  experiments  of  Magendie  on  the  serous  fluid 
in  which  it  is  immersed.  It  would  appear  that  a  quantity  of  liquid,  vary- 
ing from  two  to  five  ounces  in  the  human  subject,  is  always  interposed 
between  the  arachnoid  tunic  and  the  pia  mater,  or  proper  membrane  of 
the  cord.  The  intermembranous  bag,  occupied  by  this  fluid,  communi- 
cates with  the  ventricular  cavities  at  the  calamus  scriptorius  by  a  round 
aperture,  often  large  and  patent  in  hydrocephalic  subjects.  Magendie  has 
therefore  named  this  serous  liquid  "  cerebro-spinal."  In  living  animals, 
it  issues  in  a  stream  from  a  puncture  of  the  arachnoid.  Its  removal  oc- 
casions great  nervous  agitation,  and  symptoms  resembling  those  of  canine 
madness.  The  sudden  increase  of  its  quantity  induces  coma.  Its  pre- 
sence seems  essential  to  the  undisturbed  and  natural  exercise  of  the  ner- 
vous functions  ;  and  this  influence  probably  is  dependent  upon  its  pressure, 
temperature,  and  chemical  constitution,  since  any  variation  of  these  con- 
ditions is  follow^ed  by  the  phenomena  of  nervous  disorder. 

The  great  medullary  cord  is  divided  by  a  double  furrow  into  two  late- 
ral halves  ;  and  each  of  these  is  again  subdivided  by  the  insertions  of  the 
ligamenta  dentata  into  two  columns,  one  posterior  and  one  anterior.  It 
has  been  long  known  that  section  of  any  part  of  the  spinal  marrow  ex- 
cludes from  intercourse  with  the  brain  all  those  parts  of  the  body  which 
derive  their  nerves  from  the  cylinder  of  medulla  below  the  point  of  injury. 
The  muscles,  so  supplied,  are  no  longer  obedient  to  the  control  of  the  will, 
and  the  tegumentary  membranes  similarly  situated  entirely  lose  their  sen- 
sibility. This  interruption  of  the  relations  which  subsist  between  the 
central  seat  of  volition  and  sensation,  and  the  rest  of  the  body,  whether 
due  to  direct  injury  of  the  great  nervous  masses  or  communicating  nerves, 
or  produced  by  the  pressure  of  extravasated  fluids,  by  morbid  growths,  ox 
by  various  poisonous  matters,  constitutes  the  condition  known  by  the 
name  "paralysis."     In  cases  of  this  kind  it  is  frequently  observed  that 


27 

the  powers  of  sensation  and  locomotion  are  simultaneously  impaired  or 
destroyed.  But  examples  are  not  wanting,  even  in  the  earliest  clinical 
records,  of  the  total  ioss  of  one  of  those  faculties  with  perfect  integrity  of 
the  other.  Such  facts  naturally  suggested  the  belief  that  the  power  of 
propagiiting  sensations,  and  that  of  conveying  motive  impressions,  resided 
in  distinct  portions  of  the  nervous  system.  This  opinion,  however,  re- 
mained mere  matter  of  conjecture  until  a  recent  period,  when  it  was  une- 
quivocally establishetl  by  Sir  Charles  Bell.  From  the  original  experi- 
ments of  that  most  distinguished  physiologist,  repeated  and  confirmed  by 
Magendie,  it  follows  that  the  faculty  of  conducting  sensations  resides  ex- 
clusively in  the  two  posterior  columns  of  the  medulla,  while  that  of  com- 
municating to  the  muscular  system  the  motive  stimulus  impressed  by  voli- 
tion is  the  attribute  of  the  two  anterior  columns.  The  same  limitation  of 
function  is  found  in  the  nervous  roots  which  spring  from  these  separate 
columns.  Thus,  each  spinal  nerve  is  furnished  with  a  double  series  of 
roots,  one  set  of  which  have  their  origin  in  the  anterior  medullary  co- 
lumn, and  one  in  the  posterior.  The  spinal  nerves  are,  in  consequence  of 
this  anatomical  composition,  nerves  of  twofold  function,  containing  in  the 
same  sheath  distinct  continuous  filaments  from  both  columns,  and  exercis- 
ing, in  the  parts  to  which  they  are  distributed,  the  double  office  of  conduc- 
tors of  motion  and  sensation.  It  will  afterwards  appear,  in  our  history  of 
individual  nerves,  that  all  those  which  spring  from  the  brain,  except  the 
fifth  and  eighth  pairs,  possess  only  a  single  function. 

Sufficient  experimental  proof  of  the  foregoing  propositions  has  been  fur- 
nished by  Sir  Charles  Bell  and  by  M.  Magendie.  Thus,  division  of  the 
posterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves  is  uniformly  followed  by  total  absence 
of  feeling  in  the  parts  of  the  body  to  which  the  injured  nerves  are  distri- 
buted, while  their  motive  power  remains  undiminished.  Magendie  has 
further  observed,  that  if  the  medullary  canal  be  laid  open,  and  the  two 
posterior  cords  be  touched  or  pricked  slightly,  there  is  instant  expres- 
sion of  intense  suffering  ;  whereas,  if  the  same  or  a  greater  amount  of  irrita- 
tion be  applied  to  the  anterior  columns,  there  are  scarcely  any  signs  of  ex- 
cited sensibility.  The  central  parts  of  the  medulla  seem  also  nearly 
impassible*  They  may  be  touched,  and  even  lacerated,  according  to 
Magendie,  without  exciting  pain,  if  precautions  are  taken  to  avoid  the  sur- 
rounding medullary  substance.  In  general,  the  properties  of  the  spinal 
marrow,  and  especially  its  sensibility,  seem  to  reside  mainly  on  its  surface  ; 
for  slight  contact,  even  of  the  vascular  membranes  covering  the  posterior 
columns,  caused  acute  pain. 

The  first  experiment  of  Sir  C.  Bell  consisted  in  laying  open  the  spinal 
canal  of  a  living  rabbit,  and  dividing  the  posterior  roots  of  the  nerves  that 

*  Annales  de  Chimie  et  de  Physique,  torn,  xxiii  p.  436. 


28 

supply  the  lower  limbs.     The  animal  was  able  to  crawl.     In  his  second 
trial  he  first  stunned  the  rabbit,  and  then  exposed  tbe  spinal  marrow.  On 
irritating  the  posterior  roots,  no  motion  was  induced  in  any  part  of  the 
muscular  frame  ;  but  on  grasping  the  anterior  roots,  each  touch  of  the  for- 
ceps was  followed  by  a  corresponding  contraction  of  the  muscles  supplied 
by  the  irritated  nerve.     Magendie  has  described*  the  following  experi- 
ments, which  he  has  since  declared  were  made  without  any  knowledge  of 
the  prior  ones  of  Sir  C.  Bell.     The  subjects  chosen  for  the  operation 
were  puppies  about  six  weeks  old  ;  for  in  these  it  was  easy  to  cut  with  a 
sharp  scalpel  through  the  vertebrae  and  to  expose  the  medulla.     In  the  first 
the  posterior  roots  of  the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves  were  divided,  and  the 
wound  closed  :  violent  pressure,  and  even  pricking  with  a  sharp  instru- 
ment, awakened   no  sensation   in  the  limb  supplied  by  the   nerves  which 
had  been  cut  ;  but  its  motive  power  was  uninjured.     A  second  and  a 
third  trial  gave  the  same  results.     Magendie  then- divided  in  another  ani- 
mal, though  with  some  diflSculty,  the  anterior  roots  of  the  same  nerves  on 
one  side.     The  hind  limb  became  flaccid  and  entirely  motionless,  though 
it  preserved  its  sensibility.     Both  the  anterior  and  posterior  roots  were 
cut  in  the  same  subject  with  destruction  of  motion  and  sensation.     In  a 
second  paper|  Magendie  has  related  the  following  additional  facts  :     The 
introduction  of  nux  vomica  into  the  animal  economy  is  well  known  to 
give  rise  to  violent  tetanic  convulsions  of  the  whole  muscular  system. 
This  property  was  made  available  as  a  test  of  the  functions  of  the  sepa- 
rate orders  of  nervous  roots.     It  was  found  that,  while  all  the  other  mus- 
cles of  the  body  were  agitated,  when  under  the  influence  of  this  poison,  by 
violent  spasmodic  contractions,  the  limb,  supplied  by  nerves  whose  ante- 
rior roots  had  been  previously  divided,  remained  supple  and  motionless. 
But  when  the  posterior   roots  only  had  been  cut,  the  tetanic  spasms  were 
universal.     It  would  seem,  however,  that  the  seats  of  the  two  faculties  of 
conducting  motion  and  sensation  are  not  strictly  insulated  by  exact  ana- 
tomical lines,  but  that  they  rather  pass  into  each  other  with  rapidl}'  de- 
creasing intensity.     Thus  irritation  of  the  anterior  roots,  when  connected 
with  the  medulla,  gives  birth,  along  with  motive  phenomena,  to  some 
evidences  of  sensibility  ;  and,  vice  versa,  stimuli  applied  to  the  posterior 
roots,  also  undivided,  occasion  slight  muscular  contractions.     In  this  last 
case  it  is,  indeed,  probable  that  the  irritation  travelled  from  the  posterior 
roots  upwards  to  the  brain  in  the  accustomed  channel,  and  gave  rise  to  a 
perception  of  pain,  which  prompted  the  muscular  effort.     Indeed,  after 
division  of  the  posterior  nervous  roots,  ordinary  stimulants,  applied  to  the 
ends   not  connected  with  the  medulla,  produced  no  apparent  effects  ; 
though  the  galvanic  fluid  directed  upon  either  order  of  roots  gave  rise  to 

•  Joumai  de  Physiologic,  torn.  ii.  p.  276.  August,  1822.  f  ^id.  torn.  ii.  p.  366. 


29 

muscular  contractions.     These  were  more  complete  and  energetic  when 
the  anterior  roots  were  the  subjects  of  the  experiment. 

Besides  the  evidence  thus  obtained  by  direct  experiments  on  living  ani- 
mals, several  important  facts  have  been  gathered  from  the  pathology  of 
the  nervous  system  in  man.  These  consist  of  cases  of  insulated  paralysis 
of  either  motion  or  feeling,  referred  to  the  changes  in  structure  observed 
after  death.  Sir  Charles  Bell  has  himself  recorded  several  examples  of 
this  kind  strongly  confirming  his  experimental  results  ;  and  others  of  simi- 
lar tendency  are  scattered  through  thn  successive  volumes  of  Magendie's 
Journal.*  But  it  must  be  admitted  that  evidence  of  this  kind  is  sel- 
dom distinct  and  conclusive.  The  structural  changes,  induced  by  disease, 
are  rarely  so  circumscribed  in  seat  and  extent  as  to  represent  adequately 
the  operations  of  the  scalpel ;  and  often  when  they  are  thus  isolated  with- 
in anatomical  bounding  lines,  they  affect,  by  pressure,  or  by  the  spread  of 
the  same  morbid  process,  in  a  degree  too  slight  to  leave  decided  traces,  the 
functions  of  contiguous  parts,  thus  clouding  the  judgments  of  the  best 
pathologists,  and  invalidating  their  inferences.  There  is,  however,  a  very 
remarkable  case  described  by  Professor  Royer  Collard,  to  which  these  ob- 
jections do  not  apply.  Sprevale,  an  invalided  soldier,  was  upwards  of 
seventeen  years  the  subject  of  medical  observation  in  the  Maison  de  Sante 
of  Charenton.  This  individual  remained  for  the  last  seven  years  of  his 
life  with  the  legs  and  thighs  permanently  crossed,  and  totally  incapable  of 
motion,  though  retaining  their  sensibility.  On  opening  after  death  the 
spinal  canal,  there  was  found  the  pultaceous  softening  {ramollissement)  of 
the  whole  anterior  part  of  the  medulla,  and  of  almost  the  whole  of  the 
fibrous  cords  which  form  it.  The  anterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves  had 
also  lost  their  accustomed  consistency ;  while  the  posterior  surface  of  the 
spinal  cord,  and  its  investing  membrane,  were  healthy.  Several  of  the 
cases  observed  by  Sir  Charles  Bell  furnish  also  unequivocal  proof  of  the 
soundness  of  the  views  developed  by  experiment. 

There  exist,  indeed,  few  truths  in  physiology  established  on  so  wide 
and  solid  a  basis  of  experimental  research  and  pathological  observation  as 
those  deduced  by  Sir  Charles  Bell,  the  original  discoverer,  and  by  Magen- 
die,  his  successor  in  the  path  of  inquiry,  respecting  the  offices  of  the  spinal 
medulla.  This  organ  may  now  be  regarded  as  mainly,  if  not  solely,  a  me- 
dium of  intercourse  between  the  external  world  and  the  brain,  and  again 
between  the  brain  and  the  voluntary  muscles,  its  two  anterior  columns 
being  subservient  to  motion,  its  two  posterior  to  sensation.  In  the  pre- 
sent state  of  our  knowledge  it  would  be  fruitless  to  try  to  penetrate  into 
the  minute    philosophy  of  these  actions  :  but  it  seems  probable,  from  re- 

*  See  in  particular  Dr.  RuUier's  case,  torn.  iii.  p.  173  ;  and  Dr.  Korefi's,  torn,  iv. 
p.  376 


30 

cent  discoveries  on  the  ultimate  anatomy  of  tissue,  that  these  actions  are 
molecular,  having  their  place  in  the  globular  elements,  into  which  all  liv- 
ing textures  are  resolvable  by  microscopic  analysis ; — that  the  physical 
changes,  e.  g.  impressed  by  external  objects  on  the  delicate  net-work  of 
nerve  which  invests  the  tegumentary  membranes  and  open  cavities,  are 
propagated  thence,  from  particle  to  particle,  along  the  continuous  fila- 
ments, to  their  origins  in  the  posterior  spinal  columns,  and  thence  to  the 
central  point,  where  they  become  objects  of  perception  ; — and  that  the 
motive  stimulus  of  volition  is  similarly  transmitted  down  the  anterior  co- 
lu-mis  and  nerves,  to  the  organs  of  locomotion.  Indeed,  it  is  a  legitimate 
inference  from  Sir  Charles  Bell's  discoveries,  that  a  simple  nervous  fila- 
ment, or  medullary  collumn,  can  only  propagate  an  impression  in  one  line 
of  direction,  viz :  either  towards  or  from  the  central  seat  of  perception 
and  of  will  ;  and  this  curious  law  of  nervous  actions  would  seem  to  point 
at  some  insensible  molecular  motion  as  their  essential  condition. 

It  remains  to  investigate  the  arguments  which  have  been  supposed  to 
prove  the  residence  in  the  spinal  marrow  of  the  power  of  originating  and 
controlling  the  actions  of  the  heart.  This  question  has  been  matter  of 
eager  controversy,  from  its  bearing  upon  the  general  relations  of  nerve 
and  muscle.  Without  prejudging  this  latter  topic,  it  may  simplify  its  fu- 
ture consideration,  and  will  at  the  same  time  be  more  consistent  with 
strict  arrangement,  to  state  here  merely  the  facts  which  have  reference  to 
the  spinal  medulla. 

The  work  of  Legallois,  entitled  "  Experiences  sur  le  Principe  de  la  Fie, 
notamment  sur  celui  des  Mouvemens  du  Cmir  et  sur  le  Siege  de  ce  Prin- 
cipe^''''* was  the  first  remarkable  essay  on  the  relations  between  the  heart 
and  the  spinal  cord.  It  will,  however,  be  sufficient  to  allude  in  general 
terms  to  the  conclusions  of  Legallois,  since  they  have  been  entirely  sub- 
verted by  the  subsequent  researches  of  Dr.  Wilson  Philip  and  M.  Flou- 
rens.  Legallois's  main  doctrine  was,  that  the  principle  which  animates 
each  part  of  the  body  resides  in  that  part  of  the  spinal  medulla  whence  its 
nerves  have  their  origin  ;  and  that  it  is  also  from  the  spinal  cord  that  the 
heart  derives  the  principle  of  its  life  and  its  motion-f.  The  experimental 
proof  supposed  to  establish  these  propositions  consisted  in  destroying  in 
ditferent  rabbits  portions  of  the  cervical,  dorsal,  and  lumbar  medulla.  Ces- 
sation of  the  heart's  action  was  affirmed  to  be  the  constant  result  of  the 
operation  ;  but  even  in  some  of  Legallois's  own  experiments,^  the  mo- 
tions of  the  heart  continued  after  eonsiderable  injury  had  been  inllicted  on 
the  spinal  cord,  and  especially  on  its  lower  divisions.  Still  more  une- 
quivocal is  the  evidence  that  has  been  advanced  by  Dr.  Wilson  Philip,  in 
his  Inquiry  into  the  Laws  of  the  Vital  Functions.     His  experiments,  which 

•  (Euvres  de  Legallois,  torn.  i.  pp.  97,  99,  &,c.         f  P-  259.        J  pp.  100,  101, 105. 


FIG.  4, 


Front  view  of  a  section  of  the  Spinal  Cord,  and  Spinal  Nerves. 


A — Spinal  Cord. 

B — Spinal  Nerve. 

C — Motor  branch  of  Spinal  Nerve. 

D — Ganglion  of  posterior  branch  of  Spinal  Nerve. 


/ 


31 

were  very  numerous  and  judiciously  varied,  show  that  the  circulation 
continues  long  after  entire  removal  of  the  spinal  marrow,  and  that  by 
artificially  maintaining  respiration,  the  motions  of  the  heart  may  be  almost 
indefinitely  prolonged.  Flourens  in  the  10th  vol.  of  the  Alem.  de  VAca- 
demie*  has  lately  confirmed  Dr.  Philip's  views :  he  has  shown  that  the 
circulation  is  entirely  independent  of  the  spinal  marrow.  The  influence 
apparently  exerted  is  only  secondary,  being  due  to  the  suspension  of  the 
respiralor)'^  movements.  Thus  all  those  portions  of  the  spinal  marrow 
which  can  be  destroyed  in  the  different  classes  of  animals  without  arrest- 
ing respiration,  may  be  removed  without  affecting  the  circulation.  In 
fishes  and  frogs  the  entire  spinal  cord  may  be  destroyed  without  checking 
the  heart's  motions,  because  in  these  classes  the  medulla  oblongata  pre- 
sides exclusively  over  the  respiratory  function. 


NERVES. 

The  classification  of  nerves,  which  is  most  convenient  to  the  physiolo- 
gist, is  based  upon  their  vital  properties  or  functions.  Such  an  arrange- 
ment would  distribute  them  into — 1,  nerves  of  motion  ;  2,  nerves  both  of 
motion  and  sensation ;  3,  the  nerves  ministering  to  the  senses  of  sight, 
smell,  and  hearing  ;  and  4,  the  ganglionic  system,  or,  according  to  Bichat, 
nerves  of  organic  life.  Sir  Charles  Bell  has  added  a  fifth  class,  compris- 
ing nerves  which  he  supposes  are  dedicated  to  the  respiratory  motions. 
But  it  will  afterwards  appear  that  the  existence  of  an  exclusive  system  of 
respiratory  nerves  is  not  supported  by  sufficient  evidence. 

The  first  class  of  nerves  exercising  the  single  office  of  conveying  motioa 
comprehends  the  3rd,  4th,  6th,  portio  dura  of  the  7th,  the  9th,  and  per- 
haps two  divisions  of  the  8th,  viz :  the  glossopharyngeal  and  spinal  ac- 
cessory. Mr  H.  Mayo's  experiments,  detailed  in  his  Anatomical  and 
Physiological  Commentaries^  No.  11,  (and  Journal  de  Physique,  torn,  iii.) 
throw  much  light  on  the  functions  of  several  of  these  nerves.  The  mo- 
tions of  the  iris,  he  shows,  require  the  integrity  of  the  third  pair,  division 
of  these  nerves  being  always  followed  by  full  dilatation  of  the  pupils, 
which  cease  to  be  obedient  to  the  stimulus  of  light.  If  the  divided  end 
of  the  nerve,  communicating  with  the  eye,  be  pinched  by  the  forceps,  the 
iris  contracts.  Hence  it  is  apparent  that  diminution  of  the  aperture  of  the 
pupil  is  the  result  of  action,  and  dilatation  of  the  pupil  the  result  of  relaxa- 
tion of  the  iris.  Flourens  has  shown  that  complete  extirpation  of  the 
tubercula  quadrigemina  also  paralyses  the  iris,  and  that  irritation  of  those 
bodies  excites  its  contractions.     The  same  effect  is  noticed  by  Mayo  to- 

•  p.  626. 


32 

arise  from  division  or  irritation  of  the  optic  nerve.  He  divided  the  optic 
nerves  within  the  cranium  of  a  pigeon  immediately  after  decapitation 
When  the  end  of  the  nerve  connected  with  the  ball  of  the  eye  was  seized 
in  the  forceps,  no  action  ensued  ;  but  Avhen  the  end  attached  to  the  brain 
w^as  irritated,  the  iris  immediately  contracted.  These  several  experi- 
ments clearly  indicate  the  dependence  of  the  iris  upon  the  optic  nerve, 
upon  the  tubercula  from  which  one  root  of  that  nerve  springs,  and  upon 
the  third  pair.  The  stimulus  of  light  impinges  upon  the  retina,  is  con- 
veyed along  the  optic  nerve  through  the  tubercle  to  the  sensorium, 
whence  the  motive  impression  is  propagated  to  the  iris  by  the  third  ence- 
phalic nerve. 

It  is  not  so  easy  to  define  the  precise  mode  of  action  of  the  pathetici,or 
fourth  pair  of  nerves.  Sir  Charles  Bell*  supposes  that  they  are  destined 
"to  provide  for  the  insensible  and  instinctive  rolling  of  the  eyeball,  and 
to  associate  this  motion  of  the  eyeball  with  the  winking  motions  of  the 
eyelids."  He  even  conjectures  that  "  the  influence  of  the  fourth  nerve 
is,  on  certain  occasions,  to  cause  a  relaxation  of  the  muscle  to  which  it 
goes."  It  is  certain,  however,  from  its  exclusive  distribution  to  the  supe- 
rior oblique  muscle,  that  the  fourth  is  a  nerve  of  motion.  The  sixth 
nerve  is  also  a  nerve  of  voluntary  motion,  and  is  sent  to  the  rectus  exter- 
nus  of  the  eyeball. 

Sir  Charles  Bell  has  placed  the  portio  dura  of  the  seventh  pair  among 
his  respiratory  nerves.  There  is,  however,  no  doubt  that  it  is  simply  a 
motive  nerve,  and  that  it  is  indeed  the  only  nerve  of  motion  which  sup- 
plies all  the  muscles  of  the  face,  except  those  of  the  lower  jaw  and  palate. 
Division  of  this  nerve  occasions  no  expression  of  pain,  according  to  Bell ; 
but  Mayo's  experience  is  opposed  to  this  absence  of  sensibility.  (■  "  The 
motion  of  the  nostril  of  the  same  side  instantly  ceased,  after  its  section  in 
an  ass,J  and  that  side  of  the  face  remained  at  rest  and  placid  during  the 
highest  excitement  of  the  other  parts  of  the  respiratory  organs."  These 
and  similar  observations  are  all  consistent  with  the  opinion  that  the  sev- 
enth is  simply  a  nerve  of  voluntary  motion.  It  will  afterwards  appear 
that  it  has  no  claim  to  any  further  endowment. 

Mr.  Herbert  Mayo  infers  from  his  experiments,  that  the  three  divisions 
of  the  eighth  pair  are  all  nerves  both  of  motion  and  sensation.  Thus  the 
glossopharyngeus  is  a  nerve  of  motion  to  the  pharynx,  and  perhaps  of  sen- 
sibility to  the  tongue.  He  observed  that  "  on  irritating  the  glossopharyn- 
geal nerve  in  an  animal  recently  killed,  the  muscular  fibres  about  the 
pharynx  acted,  but  not  those  of  the  tongue. "§     Irritation  of  the  spinal 

*  JVatural  System  of  JVerves,  p.  358. 

t  See  Mr.  H.  Mayo's  Anatomical  and  Physiological  Commentaries,  Part  I.  ;  and 
Outlines  of  Human  Physiology,  2nd  edit.,  p.  334.  %  pp.  105, 107 

§  Outlines  of  Human  Physiology,  2nd  edit,  p.  337. 


33 

acccessorv  produced  both  muscular  contractions  and  pain.  The  par  va- 
gum,  he  conceives,  bestows  sensibility  on  the  membrane  of  the  larynx, 
besides  convevino;  the  motive  stimulus  to  its  muscles.  This  nerve  has 
been  the  subj'.-ct  of  experiment  from  the  earliest  times,  and  Legallois  has 
minutely  described  the  results  obtained  by  successive  inquirers.*  Tbese 
were  sino^ularly  discordant,  and  gave  origin  to  the  most  opposite  theories 
of  the  mode  of  action  of  the  par  vagum.  In  the  greater  number  of  expe- 
riments, section  of  this  nerve  was  followed,  after  a  longer  or  shorter  inter- 
val, by  death.  Piccolhomini  contended  that  the  division  of  the  nerve  was 
fatal  from  its  arresting  the  movements  of  the  heart,  and  after  him  Willis 
supported  the  same  doctrine.  By  Haller,  on  the  contrary,  the  cause  of 
death  was  sought  in  disturbance  of  the  digestive  functions.  Bichat  and 
Dupuytren  seem  to  have  been  the  first  to  obtain  a  glimpse  of  the  true  seat 
of  injury.  The  former  remarked  that  the  respiration  became  very  labori- 
ous after  section  of  the  nerve,  and  Dupuytren  distinctly  traced  death  to 
asphyxia.  Legallois  has  established  by  numerous  experiments  the  accu- 
racy of  this  last  view.  He  has  shown  that  in  very  young  animals  death 
is  the  immediate  consequence  of  the  operation  of  cutting  either  the  par 
vagum  or  its  recurrent  branch,  and  that  the  suddenness  of  the  effect  is  due 
to  the  narrowness  of  the  aperture  of  the  glottis  in  early  age.  In  adult 
animals,  the  asphyxia  is  induced  by  the  effusion  of  serous  fluids  and  ropy 
discolored  mucus  into  the  bronchial  tubes  and  air-cells.  More  recently, 
Dr.  Wilson  Philip  has  practised  the  section  of  the  par  vagum  with  an  es- 
pecial reference  to  its  influence  upon  digestion.  He  divided  the  nerve  be- 
low the  origin  of  the  inferior  laryngeal  branch,  as  in  this  case  the  dyspnoea 
is  much  less  considerable  than  when  the  wound  is  inflicted  on  the  higher 
portion. I  It  was  found,  in  all  these  trials,  that  food  introduced  into  the 
stomach  after  the  operation  remained  wholly  undigested.  Hence  Dr. 
Philip  infers  the  dependence  of  secretion  upon  nervous  influence,  a  conclu- 
sion, it  has  been  remarked  by  Dr.  Alison,  not  logically  deducible  frojn  the 
experimental  data. J 

The  par  vagum  cannot  then,  it  is  obvious,  be  included  in  the  class  of 
nerves  subservient  solely  to  motion  ;  and  it  is  even  doubtful  whether  the 
other  two  divisions  of  the  eighth  pair  are  not  also  endowed  with  sensi- 
bility. Respectmg  the  function  of  the  ninth,  or  lingual,  there  is,  how- 
ever, no  place  for  hesitation.  It  has  been  experimentally  proved  by  Mr. 
Mayo  to  supply  the  muscles  of  the  tongue ;  though  he  also  asserts  that 
pinching  it  with  the  forceps  excited  pain.  Three  of  these  nerves,  the 
third,  sixth,  and  ninth,  arise,  it  was  first  remarked  by  Sir  Charles  Bell, 
from  a  tract  of  medullary  matter  continuous  with  the  anterior  column  of 

*  CEuvres,  p.  154,  ct  seq.  t  Experimental  Inquiry,  3rd  edit.,  p.  109. 

X  Dr.  Alison,  Journal  of  Science,  vol.  ix.  p.  106. 


34 

the  spinal  marrow  ;  and  hence  their  exclusive  oflBce  of  conductina;  motive 
impressions. 

II.  There  are  thirty-two  pairs  of  nerves  of  similar  anatomical  origin 
and  composition,  which  possess  the  twofold  office  of  communicating  mo- 
tion and  sensation.  Of  these,  all  excepting  one  (the  fifth  pair  of  the  cere- 
brel  nerves)  spring  from  the  spinal  marrow.  These  thirty-one  pairs  are 
precisely  analogous  in  formation,  being  all  constituted  of  two  distinct 
series  of  roots,  one  from  the  anterior  column,  and  one  from  the  posterior 
column  of  the  spinal  marrow.  The  posterior  funiculi  collected  together 
form  a  ganglion,  seated  just  before  this  root  is  joined  by  the  anterior  root. 
It  has  been  already  stated  that  the  power  of  propagating  sensation  resides 
in  the  posterior  column,  and  in  the  nervous  roots  arising  from  it,  and  that 
the  motive  faculty  has  its  seat  in  the  anterior  column  and  roots.  The  evi- 
dence, also,  supplied  by  Bell  and  Magendie,  that  the  spinal  nerves  are 
hence  nerves  of  double  office,  has  been  fully  detailed.  It  remains,  then, 
to  establish  the  title  of  the  fifth  pair  of  cerebral  nerves  to  be  included  in 
the  same  class  with  the  spinal  nerves. 

The  analogy  in  structure  and  mode  of  origin  between  the  fifth  pair  and 
the  nerves  of  the  spine  has  baen  long  matter  of  observation.  Prochaska 
has  thus  distinctly  noticed  it  in  a  passage  of  his  Essay  De  Structura  Ner- 
vorum, published  in  1779,  first  pointed  out  to  me  by  my  friend  Dr.  Holme : 
"  Quare  omnium  cerebri  nervorum,  solum  quintum  par  post  ortum  suum 
more  nervorum  spinalium,  ganglion  semilunare  dictum,  facere  debet  ?  sub 
quo  peculiaris  funiculorum  fasciculus  ad  tertium  quinti  paris  ramum, 
maxillarem  inferiorem  dictum,  properat,  insalutato  ganglio  semilunari,  ad 
similitudineni  radicum  anteriorum  nervorum  spinalium?"  Sommerring 
has  also  pointed  out  with  equal  clearness  the  resemblance  in  distribution 
between  the  smaller  root  of  the  fifth  and  the  anterior  roots  of  the  spinal 
nerves.  But  Sir  Charles  Bell  was  the  first  to  establish  the  identity  of 
their  functions,  and  to  arrange  them  prominently  in  the  same  natural  divi- 
sion. His  experiment  consisted  in  exposing  the  fifth  pair  at  its  root,  in  an 
ass,  the  moment  the  animal  was  killed.  ''  On  irritating  the  nerve,  the  mus- 
cles of  the  jaw  acted,  and  the  jaAv  was  closed  with  a  snap.  On  dividing 
the  root  of  the  nerve  in  a  living  animal,  the  jaw  fell  relaxed."  In  another 
experiment  the  superior  maxillary  branch  of  the  fifth  nerve  was  exposed. 

"  Toucning  this  nerve  gave  accute  pain; the  side  of  the  lip  was 

observed  to  hang  low,  and  it  was  dragged  to  the  other  side."  Sir  Charles 
Bell  concluded  that  the  fifth  nerve  and  its  branches  are  endowed  with  the 
attributes  of  motion  and  sensation.  This,  though  correct  as  regards  the 
nerve  itself,  viewed  as  a  whole,  is  strictly  true  only  of  the  lowest  of  its 
three  divisions,  viz  :  the  inferior  maxillary.  The  ophthalmic  and  the  su- 
perior maxillary,  the  subject,  of  the  last  experiment,  are  nerves  simply  of 
sensation.     Mr    Herbert  Mayo  in  the  Essay  already  referred  to,  has 


35 

pointed  out  tnis  error,  and  has  defined  with  minute  precision  the  relative 
offices  of  the  fifth  and  seventh  nerves.  By  a  careful  dissection  of  the  fifth 
nerve  he  found  that  the  anterior  branch,  or  smaller  root,  which  goes,  as 
Prochaska  was  aware,  entirely  to  the  inferior  maxillary,  is  distributed  ex- 
clusively to  the  circumflexus  palati,  the  pterygoids,  and  temporal  and 
masseter  muscles.  He  observed  that  section  of  the  supra  and  infra  orbitar 
branches,  and  of  the  inferior  maxillary,  near  the  foramina,  whence  they 
emerge,  induces  loss  of  sensation  in  the  corresponding  parts  of  the  face. 
It  may  then  be  regarded  as  fully  proved  that  the  trigeminus,  or  fifth  pair, 
is  the  nerve  which  bestows  sensation  on  the  face  and  its  appendages,  and 
motion  only  on  the  muscles  connected  with  the  lower  jaw.  The  other 
muscles  of  the  face  derive  their  motive  power  from  the  portio  dura  of  the 
seventh  nerve. 

M.  Magendie  has  also  published  several  memoirs  on  the  functions  of 
the  fifth  pair.  In  these  he  attempts  to  prove  that  the  olfactory  nerve  is 
not  the  nerve  of  smell ;  that  the  optic  is  but  partially  the  nerve  of 
vision  ;  and  that  the  auditory  is  not  the  principal  nerve  of  hearing.  It  is 
in  the  fifth  pair  that  he  supposes  all  these  distinct  and  special  endowments 
to  reside.  But  the  experimental  proof  will  be  found  to  be  singuhnly  in- 
conclusive. The  olfactory  nerves  were  entirely  destroyed  in  a  dog.  ..f- 
ter  the  operation  it  continued  sensible  to  strong  odours,  as  of  ammonia, 
acetic  acid,  or  essential  oil  of  lavender ;  and  the  introduction  of  a  probe 
into  the  nasal  cavity  excited  the  same  motions  and  pain  as  in  an  unmuti- 
lated  dog.  The  fifth  pair  was  then  divided  in  several  young  animals,  the 
olfactory  being  left  entire.  All  signs  of  the  perception  of  strongly  odor- 
ous substances,  as  sneezing,  rubbing  the  nose,  or  turning  away  the  head, 
entirely  disappeared.  From  these  facts  Magendie  infers  that  the  seat  of 
the  sensations  of  smell  is  in  the  fifth,  and  not  in  the  first  pair  of  nerves. 
It  is  obvious  that  Magendie  has  confounded  two  modes  of  sensation,  which 
are  essentially  distinct  in  their  nature  and  in  their  organic  seat,  viz :  the 
true  perceptions  of  smell,  and  the  common  sensibility  of  the  nasal  pas- 
sages. The  phenomena,  which  he  observed  to  cease  after  the  section  of 
the  fifth  nerve,  are  the  results  of  simple  irritation  of  the  pituitary  mem- 
brane, and  are  manifestly  wholly  unconnected  with  the  sense  of  smelling, 
since  they  are  producible  by  all  powerful  chemical  agents,  even  though 
inodorous,  as,  for  example,  by  sulphuric  acid.  No  proof  has  been  given 
that  the  true  olfactory  perceptions  do  not  survive  the  destruction  of  the 
fifth  pair.  Indeed,  in  a  subsequent  paper,  Magendie  confesses  that  the 
loss  of  sensibility  in  the  nasal  membrane,  after  section  of  the  fifth,  does 
not  prove  the  residence  of  the  sense  of  smell  in  the  branches  of  that  nerve ; 
but  merely  that  the  olfactory  nerve  requires,  for  its  perfect  action,  the  co- 
operation of  the  fifth  pair,  and  that  it  possesses  only  a  special  sensibility  to 
odorous  particles. 


36 

There  is  even  less  ground  for  supposing  that  the  fifth  pair  is  in  any  de- 
gree subservient  to  the  senses  of  sight  and  hearing.  After  cutting  this 
nerve  on  one  side,  the  flame  of  a  torch  was  suddenly  brought  near  the 
eye,  without  inducing  contraction  of  the  pupil ;  but  the  direct  light  of  the 
sun  caused  the  animal  to  close  its  eyelids.  Thus  the  sensibility  of  the  re- 
tina, though  somewhat  impaired,  was  not  destroyed  by  division  of  the 
fifth  pair.  But  section  of  the  optic  nerves  was  immediately  followed  by 
total  blindness.  In  another  rabbit  Magendie  divided  the. fifth  pair  on  one 
side,  and  the  optic  nsrve  on  the  other.  The  animal,  he  states,  was  com- 
pletely deprived  of  sight,  though  the  eye,  in  which  the  fifth  pair  only  had 
been  cut,  remained  susceptible  to  the  action  of  the  solar  rays.  JNo  evi- 
dence, however,  is  offered  to  show  that  the  animal  was  entirely  blind ; 
on  the  contrary,  the  only  change  observed,  on  approaching  a  torch  to  an 
uninjured  eye,  was  contraction  of  the  iris ;  and  this  we  are  told  was  act- 
ually observed  in  the  eye  of  the  side,  on  which  the  fifth  nerve  had  been 
divided. 

Magendie  has  assigned  another  singular  function  to  the  fifth  pair,  viz : 
to  preside  over  the  nutrition  of  the  eye.  Twenty-four  hours  after  section 
of  this  nerve,  incipient  opacity  of  the  cornea  was  observed,  which  gradu- 
ally increased  till  the  cornea  became  as  white  as  alabaster.  There  was 
also  great  vascularity  of  the  conjunctiva  extending  to  the  iris,  with  secre- 
tion of  pus,  and  formation  of  false  membranes  in  the  anterior  chamber. 
About  the  eighth  day,  the  cornea  began  to  detach  itself  from  the  sclerotica, 
the  centre  ulcerated,  and  the  humours  of  the  eye  finally  escaped,  leaving 
only  a  small  tubercle  in  the  orbit.  In  this  experiment,  the  nerve  had  been 
divided  in  the  temporal  fossa,  but  when  cut  immediately  after  leaving  the 
pons  Varolii,  the  morbid  changes  were  less  marked,  the  movements  of  the 
globe  of  the  eye  were  preserved,  the  inflammation  was  limited  to  the  supe- 
rior part  of  the  eye,  and  the  opacity  occupied  only  a  small  segment  of  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  cornea.  After  division  of  the  nerve  near  its  origin  in  the 
medulla,  no  traces  of  disease  were  discoverable  in  the  eye  till  the  seventh 
day,  and  these  symptoms  never  became  very  prominent.  Several  cases 
have  been  since  recorded  of  structural  disease  of  this  nerve  in  the  human 
subject,  with  the  concomitant  symptoms.  That  of  Laine,  described  by 
Serres  in  the  4th  vol.  of  Magendie's  Journal^  furnishes  strong  support  to 
the  views  of  Magendie.* 

A  different  explanation  of  this  fact  and  of  others,  which  have  a  tendency 
to  refer  secretion  and  nutrition  to  the  control  of  the  nervous  system,  has 
been  proposed  by  Dr.  Alison.  Mucous  surfaces-  are  protected  from  the 
contact  of  air  and  foreign  bodies  by  a  copious  secretion,  which  is  evidently 
regulated  in  amount  by  their  sensibility,  since  it  is  increased  by  any  un- 

*  See  also  a  case  of  destruction  of  the  olfactory  nerves,  torn.  v. 


37 

usual  irritation.  This  is  especially  true  of  the  membrane  of  the  eye. 
Now  section  of  the  fifth  pair  is  known  to  paralyse  the  sensibility  of  that 
organ,  and  the  contact  of  air  or  other  irritating  body  upon  the  insensible 
membrane,  instead  of  inducing  an  augmented  mucous  discharge,  will  ex- 
cite the  inflammatory  process  described  by  Magendie.  The  disorder  of 
the  digestive  function,*  which  followed  division  of  the  par  vagum  in  the 
experiments  of  Dr.  Wilson  Philip,  and  the  ulceration  of  the  coats  of  the 
bladder  after  injary  of  the  lower  part  of  the  spinal  marrow,  are  attributed 
by  Dr.  Alison  to  the  same  cause. 

The  class  of  nerves  which  comprehends  the  fifth  pair  and  the  thirty-one 
pairs  of  spinal  nerves,  becomes,  after  the  union  of  their  roots,  invested 
with  a  twofold  endowment,  and  continues  so  throughout  their  entire 
course  and  final  distribution  to  the  muscular  tissue.  It  would  appear, 
indeed,  from  a  later  paper  of  Sir  Charles  Bell,|  that  nerves  of  sensation, 
as  well  as  of  motion,  are  necessary  to  the  perfect  action  of  the  voluntary 
muscles.  "  Between  the  brain  and  the  muscles  there  is  a  circle  of  nerves ; 
one  nerve  conveys  the  intluence  from  the  brain  to  the  muscle,  another 
gives  the  sense  of  the  condition  of  the  muscle  to  the  brain."  In  the  case 
of  the  spinal  nerves  this  circle  of  intercourse  is  at  least  probable ;  but 
proof  of  its  necessity  must  be  obtained,  from  observing  the  habitudes  of 
those  encephalic  nerves,  which  minister  exclusively  to  motion.  Now  it 
is  found,  on  minute  dissection,  that  the  muscles  of  the  eyeball,  which  are 
supplied  by  the  third,  fourth,  and  sixth  motive  nerves,  also  receive  sensi- 
tive filaments  from  the  ophthalmic  branch  of  the  fifth  ;  and  that  the  mus- 
cles of  the  face,  to  which  the  portio  dura  is  distributed,  are  also  furnished 
with  branches  of  sensation  from  the  fifth.  Sir  Charles  Bell  has  further 
shown  that  the  muscles  of  the  lower  jaw,  to  which  the  motive  impression 
is  propagated  by  the  muscular  branch  of  the  inferior  maxillary,  draw  ner- 
vous supplies  also  from  the  ganglionic  or  sensitive  branch  of  that  division 
of  the  fifth  pair.  This  complicated  provision  has  its  origin,  he  supposes, 
in  its  being  "  necessary  to  the  governance  of  the  muscular  frame  that 
there  should  be  consciousness  of  the  state  or  degree  of  action  of  the  muscles." 

111.  The  olfactory,  auditory,  and  optic  nerves  are  gifted  with  a  special 
sensibility  to  the  objects  of  the  external  senses,  to  which  they  respec- 
tively minister.  Magendie  seems  to  have  been  the  first  to  prove,  experi- 
mentally, that  they  do  not  also  share  the  common  or  tactile  sensibility. 
He  exposed  the  olfactory  nerves,  and  found  that,  like  the  hemispheres  of 
the  brain  from  which  they  spring,  that  they  are  insensible  to  pressure, 
pricking,  or  even  laceration.  Strong  ammonia  was  dropped  upon  them 
without  eliciting  any  signs  of  feeling.  The  optic  nerve,  and  its  expan- 
sion on  the  retina,  participate  with  the  olfactory  in  this  insensibility  to 

•  Outlines  of  Physiology,  p.  71.  f  Philosophical  Transattiotis,  1826,  p.  163. 


38 

stimulants.  This  was  proved  by  Magendie  in  the  human  subject  as  well 
as  in  animals.  In  performing  the  operation  of  depressing  the  opaque  lens, 
he  repeatedly  touched  the  retina  in  two  different  individuals  without 
awakening  the  slightest  sensation.  The  portio  mollis,  or  acoustic  nerve, 
was  also  touched,  pressed,  and  even  torn  without  causing  pain. 

IV.  The  functions  of  the  ganglia,  of  the  great  sympathetic  nerve,  and 
its  intricate  plexuses  and  anastomotic  connexions,  are  matter,  at  present, 
of  conjecture.  Dr.  Johnstone,  in  an  Essay  on  the  Use  of  the  Ganglions, 
published  in  1771,  has  described  a  few  inconclusive  experiments  on  the 
cardiac  nerves.  He  supposes  that  "ganglions  are  the  instruments  by 
which  the  motions  of  the  heart  and  intestines  are  rendered  uniformly  in- 
Voluntary," — a  notion  which  Sir  Charles  Bell  has  shown  to  be  totally  un- 
sound. The  best  history  of  opinions,  to  which  indeed  our  knowledge  re- 
duces itself,  will  be  found  in  the  physiological  section  of  Lobstein's  work, 
De  Nervi  Sympathetici  Fabrica,  Usu,  et  Morbis* 

In  the  earliest  of  his  communications  to  the  Royal  Society,  as  well  as 
in  his  last  work  on  the  Nervous  System,|  Sir  Charles  Bell  has  maintain- 
ed the  existence  of  a  separate  class  of  nerves,  subservient  to  the  regular 
and  the  associated  actions  of  respiration.  The  origins  of  these  nervesj 
"  are  in  a  line  or  series,  and  from  a  distinct  column  of  the  spinal  marrow. 
Behind  the  corpus  olivare,  and  anterior  to  that  process,  which  descends 
from  the  cerebellum,  called  sometimes  the  corpus  restiforme,  a  convex 
strip  of  medullary  matter  may  be  observed.  From  this  tract  of  medullary 
matter,  on  the  side  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  arise,  in  succession,  from 
above  downwards,  the  portio  dura  of  the  seventh  nerve,  the  glossopharyn- 
geus  nerve,  the  nerve  of  the  par  vagum,  the  nervus  ad  par  vagum  acces- 
sorius,  and,  as  I  imagine,  the  phrenic  and  the  external  respiratory  nerves." 
The  fourth  pair  is  also  received  into  the  same  class. 

This  doctrine  of  an  exclusive  system  of  respiratory  nerves,  associated 
in  function  by  virtue  of  an  anatomical  relation  of  their  roots,  has  not,  as 
Sir  Charles  Bell  seems  himself  aware, §  received  the  concurrence  of  many 
intelligent  physiologists  of  this  country  or  of  the  Continent.  Mr.  Her- 
bert Mayo,  in  the  admirable  Essay  already  referred  to,  was  the  first  to 
point  out  the  true  relations  of  the  fifth  and  seventh  nerves.  He  has 
shown  that  the  muscles  of  the  face,  excepting  those  already  enumerated, 
which  elevate  the  lower  jaw,  receive  their  motive  nerves  exclusively 
from  the  seventh,  and  consequently  that  this  nerve  must  govern  all  their 
motions,  voluntary  as  well  as  respiratory.  But  Dr.  Alison  in  his  very 
elaborate  paperjl  "  On  he  Physiological  Principle  of  Sympathy,"  has  cast 

*  Pans,  1823.  t  "tto.  1830. 

X  The  A^rvous  System  of  the  Human  Body,  p.  129,  4to,  1830. 

§  0/).«<.,p.  115. 

II  Transactions  of  the  Medico-Chirur^ical  Society  of  Edinburgh,  182b',  vol.  ii.  p.  166. 


39 

considerable  doubts  on  the  soundness  of  this  part  of  Sir  Charles  Bell's  ar- 
rangement, as  respects  not  only  the  Individual  nerves  thus  classed  together, 
but  even  the  general  principle  on  which  the  entire  system  rests.     The 
reasoning  of  Dr.  Alison  consists,  first,  In  referring  the  phenomena  of  natu- 
ral and  excited  respiration  to  the  comprehensive  order  of  sympathetic  ac- 
tions.    In  these  "  the  phenomenon  observed  Is,  that  on  an  Irritation  or 
stimulus  being  applied  to  one  part  of  the  body,  the  voluntary  muscles  of 
another,  and  often  distant  p-^rt,  are  thrown  into  action."     Now  it  has 
been  long  since  fully  established  by  Dr.  Whytt,  that  these  associations  In 
function  cannot  be  referred  to  any  connexions,  either  in  origin  or  in  course, 
of  the  nerves  supplying  remote  organs  so  sympathizing  ;  and  that  a  sensa- 
tion is  the  necessary  antecedent  of  the  resulting  muscular  action.     Thus 
it  Is  known  that  these  actions  cease  in  the  state  of  coma  ;  are  not  excited 
when  the  mind  is  strongly  impressed  by  any  other  sensation  or  thought ; 
and  that  the  same  muscular  contractions  may  be  induced  by  the  Irritation 
of  different  parts  of  the  body,  provided  the  same  sensation  be  excited.  Dr. 
Alison  has,  however,  failed  to  show*  that  the  essential  acts  of  inspiration, 
viz  :  the  contractions  of  the  diaphragm  and  Intercostals,  require  the  inter- 
vention of  a  sensation.     Their  continuance  in  the  state  of  coma,  and  hi 
the  experiments  of  Legallois  and  Flourens  after  the  entire  removal  of  the 
brain,  and  their   distinct  reference  by  these  two  inquirers  to  the  medulla 
oblongata,  which  has  never  been   supposed  to  be  the  seat  of  sensation, 
prove  them  to  be  independent  of  the  will  and  of  perception.     But  this  is 
true  only  of  the  essential,  not  of  the  associated  respiratory  phenomena. 

Dr.  Alison  proceeds  to  show  that  there  is  equal  reason  for  classing  al- 
most all  the  nerves  of  the  brain,  and  many  more  of  the  spinal  nerves,  with 
those  exclusively  named  respiratory  by  Sir  Charles  Bell.  Thus  the  lin- 
gual nerve  governs  an  Infinite  number  of  motions  strictly  associated  with 
respiration  :  the  inferior  maxillary  "  moves  the  muscles  of  the  lower  jaw 
in  the  action  of  sucking, — an  action  clearly  Instinctive  when  first  performed 
by  the  infant,  frequently  repeated  voluntarily  during  life,  and  always  itt 
connexion  with  the  act  of  respiration."  Again,  the  sensitive  branches  of 
the  fifth  pair  cooperate  in  the  act  of  sneezing.  But  If  these  nerves  be  ad- 
mitted into  the  system,  the  fundamental  principle  of  that  system,  viz  :  ori- 
gin in  a  line  or  series.  Is  at  once  violated.  Nor  Is  this  connexion  in  origin 
more  than  matter  of  conjecture,  as  regards  two  of  the  most  Important  of 
the  nerves,  classed  by  Sir  Charles  Bell  himself  as  respiratory, — the  phre- 
nic and  the  external  respiratory.  These  two  nerves  branch  from  the  cer- 
vical or  regular  double-rooted  series.  Moreover,  the  circumstance  of  ris- 
ing In  linear  succession  is  not  found  to  associate  nerves  in  function.  "  Be- 
tween the  roots  of  the  phrenic  nerve  and  those  of  the  intercostals,  there 

*  p.  176,  and  note. 


40 

intervene  in  the  same  series  the  origins  of  the  three  lowest  cervical  nerves, 
and  the  first  dorsal,  which  go  chiefly  to  the  axillary  plexus  and  to  the 
arm,  and  which  are  not  respiratory  nerves." 

In  recapitulation,  the  following  facts  are  among  the  most  important  that 
have  been  fully  ascertained  in  the  physiology  of  the  nervous  system  : 

1.  One  universal  type  has  been  followed  in  the  formation  of  the  nervous 
system  in  vertebrated  animals.  The  brain  of  the  human  foetus  is  gradu- 
ally evolved  in  the  successive  months  of  uterine  existence;  and  these 
stages  of  progressive  developement  strictly  correspond  with  permanent 
states  of  the  adult  brain  at  inferior  degrees  of  the  animal  scale. 

2.  These  successive  increments  of  cerebral  matter  are  found  to  be  ac- 
companied by  parallel  advances  in  the  manifestation  of  the  higher  in- 
stincts and  of  the  mental  faculties. 

3.  That  the  brain  is  the  material  organ  of  all  intellectual  states  and 
operations,  is  proved  by  observation  on  comparative  developement,  as  well 
as  by  experiments  on  living  animals,  and  by  the  study  of  human  patho- 
logy. But  there  does  not  exist  any  conclusive  evidence  for  referring  se- 
parate faculties,  or  moral  affections,  to  distinct  portions  of  brain. 

4.  Certain  irregular  movements  are  produced  by  injuries  of  the  cor- 
pora striata,  thalami  optici,  crura  cerebelli,  and  semi-circular  canals  of  the 
internal  ear. 

5.  The  tubercula  quadrigemina  preside  over  the  motions  of  the  iris,  and 
their  integrity  seems  essential  even  to  the  functions  of  the  retina.  They 
are  also,  according  to  Flourens,  the  points,  at  which  irritation  first  begins 
to  excite  pain  and  muscular  contractions. 

6.  The  cerebellum  appears  to  exercise  some  degree  of  control  over  the 
instruments  of  locomotion  ;  but  the  precise  nature  and  amount  of  this  in- 
fluence cannot  be  distinctly  defined. 

7.  The  cerebrum,  cerebellum,  and  medulla  oblongata  possess  the  fac- 
ulty of  acting  primordially,  or  spontaneously,  without  requiring  foreign  ex- 
citation. The  spinal  cord  and  the  nerves  are  not  endowed  with  sponta- 
neity of  action,  and  are  therefore  termed  subordinate  parts. 

8.  The  medulla  oblongata  exercises  the  office  of  originating  and  regu- 
lating the  motions  essential  to  the  act  of  respiration.  By  virtue  of  its  con- 
tinuity with  the  spinal  marrow,  it  also  participates  in  the  functions  of  that 
division  of  nervous  matter. 

9  The  function  of  the  spinal  cord  is  simply  that  of  a  conductor  of  mo- 
tive impulses,  from  the  brain  to  the  nerves  supplying  the  muscles,  and  of 
sensitive  impressions  from  the  surface  of  the  body  to  the  sensorium  com- 
mune. These  two  vital  offices  reside  in  distinct  portions  of  the  spinal  me- 
dulla,— the  progagation  of  motion  in  its  anterior  columns,  the  transmission 
of  sensations  in  its  posterior  columns.     There  is  no  necessary  dependence 


41 

of  the  motions  of  the  heart,  and  the  other  involuntary  muscles,  on  the  spi- 
nal marrow. 

10.  The  nerves  are  comprehended  in  the  four  following  classes  : — 
I.  Nerves  simply  of  motion ;  11.  Of  motion  and  sensation  ;  III.  Of  three 
of  the  senses  ;  IV.  The  ganglionic  system. 

I.  The  nerves  of  motion  are  the  third,  fourth,  sixth,  portio  dura  of  the 
seventh,  and  the  ninth.  It  is  not  ascertained  whether  the  glossopharyn- 
geal and  spinal  accessory  nerves  belong  to  this  or  to  the  second  class. 

11.  The  function  of  ministering  both  to  motion  and  sensation  is  possess- 
ed by  the  fifth  pair  of  cerebral  nerves,  and  by  the  spinal  nerves,  which 
agree  precisely  in  anatomical  composition.  The  par  vagum,  however, 
which  is  one  of  the  irregular  nerves,  has  also  a  twofold  endowment. 

III.  This  division  comprises  the  first  and  second  pairs,  and  the  portio 
mollis  of  the  seventh  pair.  These  nerves  are  insensible  to  ordinary  stimu- 
lants, and  possess  an  exclusive  sensibility  to  their  respective  objects,  viz : 
odorous  matter,  light,  and  serial  undulations. 

IV.  The  system  of  the  great  sympathetic  nerve,  and  its  associated 
plexuses  and  ganglia. 

6 


42 


CHAPTER    II. 

views  of  the  structure  of  the  erain. 

Figure  5,  ^ 

Represents  the  base  of  the  brain  and  the  cerebellum. 

.i;  I  Are  the  rio;ht  and  left  hemispheres  of  the  brain, 
AB  ^  ^ 

FF,  The  cerebellum. 

AA,  The  anterior  lobe. 

e  e,  The  line  which  denotes  the  separation  between  the  anterior  lobe  and 

the  middle  lobe. 

DD,  The  middle  lobe. 

BB,  The  posterior  lobe. 

e,  The  po7is  Varolii,  which  brings  the  two  sides  of  the  cerebellum  into 

communication.     It  is  also  named  the  Tuber  annulare. 

f,  The  Medulla  oblongata. 
rr,  The  Corpora  pyramidalia- 
s  s,  The  Corpora  olixaria. 

1 1,  The  Corpora  restiformia  are  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  Corpora  pyr- 
amidalia. 

1.  First  pair,  or  olfactory  nerves,  arise  by  three  origins.     These  unite 

and  proceed  forwards  and  inwards  in  a  groove  in  the  inferior  surface 
of  the  anterior  lobes  of  the  brain,  and  form  a  greyish  swelling  or  gan- 
glion. From  this  ganglion  a  great  number  of  filaments  proceed 
through  the  cribriform  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone,  and  are  distributed 
upon  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  nose.  It  is  the  nerve  of  the  sense 
of  smell. 

2.  Second  pair,  or  optic,  arise  principally  from  the  anterior  corpora  qua- 

drigemina.  Each  nerve  passes  outwards  through  the  optic  foramen 
in  the  sphenoid  bone,  and  is  expanded  upon  the  retina.  It  is  the 
nerve  of  the  sense  of  sight. 

3.  Third  pair,  or  motores  oculorum,  originate  from  the  motor  tract  of  the 

spinal  cord,  immediately  after  they  have  passed  through  the  pons 
Varolii.  Each  nerve  escapes  through  the  sphenoidal  fissure,  and 
supplies  five  of  the  muscles  within  the  orbit  with  motor  filaments. 

4.  Fourth  pair,  or  trochleareSj  originate  from  the  processus  e  cerebello  ad 

testes  and  valvula  of  Vieussens.  Each  nerve  passes  out  from  the 
cranium  at  the  sphenoidal  fissure,  and  is  entirely  distributed  upon 
the  superior  oblique  muscles  of  the  eyeball.     It  is  a  motor  nerve. 


FIG.    5. 


43 

5  Fifth  pair.  These  nerves  issue  from  the  surface  of  the  brain,  near  the 
junction  of  the  pons  Varolii  and  cms  cerebelli,  but  actually  arise  from 
the  restiform  bodies.  Each  nerve  escapes  from  the  cranium  by 
three  separate  openings,  and  is  extensively  distributed  upon  the  orbit 
and  other  parts  of  the  face.  Part  of  the  filaments  of  this  nerve  are 
sensitive,  and  part  motor. 

6.  Sixth  pair  originate  from  the  pyramidal  bodies,  as  they  are  about  to 

enter  the  pons  Varolii.  Each  nerve  escapes  through  the  sphenoidal 
fissure,  and  is  entirely  distributed  upon  the  external  rectus  muscle  of 
the  eyeball.     It  is  a  motor  nerve. 

7.  Portio  dura  of  the  seventh  pair  originate  from  the  restiform  bodies. 

Each  nerve  is  extensively  distributed  in  the  muscles  of  the  face  and 
external  ear.  It  is  the  motor  nerve  of  the  muscles  of  expression  of 
the  face. 

8.  Portio  moUis  of  the  seventh  pair,  or  auditory  nerves,  (eighth  pair  of 

some  authors,)  arise  principally  from  a  small  grey  svrelling  on  the 
upper  surface  of  the  restiform  bodies  at  the  side  of  the  fourth  ventri- 
cle. Each  nerve  is  distributed  upon  the  internal  ear,  and  is  the 
nerve  of  the  sense  of  hearing. 

9.  Glossopharyngeal  nerves,  or  upper  division  of  the  eighth  pair,  (ninth 

pair  of  some  authors,)  arise  from  the  restiform  bodies  near  the  sul- 
cus vrhich  separates  them  from  the  olivary,  and  are  distributed  upon 
the  pharynx  and  mucous  membrane  at  the  back  part  of  the  tongue . 
It  is  a  sensitive  nerve. 

10.  Par  vagum,  or  pneumogastric  nerves,  or  principal  division  of  the 
eighth  pair,  (tenth  pair  of  some  authors,)  originate  in  the  same  line 
w^ith,  and  close  upon,  the  glossopharyngeal.  These  nerves  are  ex- 
tensively distributed  upon  the  larynx,  pharynx,  trachea,  oesophagus, 
heart,  lungs,  and  stomach.  Part  of  the  filaments  of  this  nerve  are 
sensitive,  and  part  are  motor. 

11.  Spinal  accessory  nerves,  or  lower  division  of  the  eighth  pair,  (elev- 
enth pair  of  some  authors,)  originate  from  the  upper  part  of  the  spi- 
nal chord,  in  the  same  line  with  the  two  preceding  nerves.  They 
enter  the  cranium  by  the  foramen  magnum,  and  pass  out  again  from 
the  cranium  through  the  foramen  lacerum,  along  with  the  other  two 
divisions  of  the  eighth  pair.  It  is  principally,  if  not  entirely,  a  motor 
nerve. 

12.  Hypoglossal  or  ninth  pair  (twelfth  pair  of  some  authors).  Each  ori- 
ginates from  the  sulcus  between  the  pyramidal  anl  olivary  bodies, 
and  escapes  from  the  base  of  the  cranium  through  the  anterior  con- 
dyloid foramen,  and  is  distributed  UDon  the  muscles  of  the  tongue . 
It  is  the  motor  nerve  of  the  tongue. 


44 


Figure  6. 

The  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain  cut  through  the  corpus  callosum, 
pons  Varolii,  medulla  oblongata,  and  cerebellum. 
MM,  Convolutions,  flat — color,  redish  grey.  * 

A,  Medulla  oblongata  cut  through  the  median  line.     Color,  outer  portion 

bluish  white — inner  portion,  redish  grey, 
a,  Pyraniidle  body. 

B,  Pons  Varolii,   or  tuber  annulare.     Color,  white  outside — inside,  re- 

dish  grey. 
c,  Tubercula  quadrigemina. 

D,  Crus  cerebri. 

E,  The  great  inferior  ganglion — posterior  striated  body,  (thalamus) — 

color,  bluish  white. 

F,  The  great  superior  ganglion — anterior  striatetl  body — color,  redish 

grey- 

G,  Annular  ganglion. 

H,  Corpus  callosum — color,  bluish  white    .  .■ 

K,  Fissura  Silvii. 

L,  The  cerebellum. 

e.  The  arbor  vita — color,  white,  in  the  redish  grey  ground  of  the  incised 

cerebellum. 
T,  The  tentorum,  seperatiug  the  cerebellum  from  the  brain, 
ii,  Locus  niger. 


FIG-    6. 


FIG.    7. 


45 


FZOURE    7. 

The  cerebellum,  and  its  connection  with  the  brain  or  cerebrum. 
AA,  The  cerebellum — color,  redish  grey. 
B,  Processus  vermiculares.  * 

n,  Processus  e  cerebello  ad  testes — semi-transparent — color,  bluish  white, 
a  a,  The  posterior  corpora  quadrigemina — color,  bluish  white. 
c  c,  The  anterior  corpora  quadrigemina — color,  bluish  white, 
dd,  The  great  inferior  ganglions — posterior  striated  bodies  (thalamus) — ■ 

color,  bluish  white, 
mm,  Posterior  part  of  the  great  superior  ganglions — anterior  striated 

bodies — 'Color,  redish  grey. 
e,  Pineal  gland — color,  redish  grey. 
i,  Third  ventricle. 


46 


Figure  §. 

A  horizontal  section  of  the  brain  at  a  depth  of  about  an  inch  from 
its  base,  or  under  surface. 

e  e,  Convolutions,  or  cortical  part  of  the  brain — color,  redish  grey. 
u,  Fourth  ventricle. 
V,  Posterior  commissure — color,  white. 

s,  Third  ventricle,  or  separation  between  the  great  ganglions, 
dd,  Great  inferior  ganglions — color,  bluish  white. 
X,  Middle  commissure, 
n,  Anterior  commissure. 

pp.  Great  superior  ganglions — striated — color,  redish  grey. 
t,  Anterior  opening  into  the  lateral  ventricles. 


FIG.    8. 


FIG.    9. 


M 


M 


47 


Figure  9. 

The  cerebellum,  medulla  oblongata,  and  pons  Varolii  removed,  the  brain 
then  cut  along  the  median  line  and  laid  open,  to  show  its  ventricles  and 
their  fibrous  structure. 
MM,  The  anterior  part  of  the  brain. 
NN,  Posterior  part  of  the  brain. 

e  e,  Vertical  sections  of  the  great  inferior  ganglions — color,  bluish  white. 
c  c,  The  black  substance  iu  the  centre  of  the  great  inferier  ganglions. 
o  o,  The  cords  of  the  mammary  bodies  which  plunge  into  the  interior  of 

the  great  inferior  ganglions. 
t,  Mammary  body  of  the  right  side,  the  left  being  cut  away, 
r  r.  Optic  nerves; 
n  n,- Olfactory  nerves, 
a  a,  Great  superior  ganglions — color,  redish  grey. 


48 


Figure  10, 

Exhibits  various  parts  about  the  base  of  the  brain,  with  the  decussation 

of  the  fibres  of  the  p;yTamidal  bodies. 

r.  Medulla  oblongata. 

c  c,  Decussation  of  the  fibres  of  the  pyramidal  bodies,  which  explains  the 
influence  of  the  lateral  cerebral  parts  of  the  brain  upon  the  opposite 
sides  of  the  body.  These  fibres  cross  the  mesial  line  of  the  body 
one  above  another  from  below  upwards  like  plaited  straw.  Those 
of  the  right  side  come  from  the  left  pyramidal  body,  and  those  of  the 
left  side  from  the  right  pyramidal  body,  and  is  a  constant  peculiarity, 
modified  only  by  the  number  of  the  decussating  fibres.  They  are 
contracted  in  their  course  in  passing  the  olivary  bodies  a  a,  and  then 
diverge  as  seen  in  the  figure. 

m,  Auditory  nerve. 

n.  Facial  nerve.  The  primary  bundle  of  fibres  of  the  cerebellum  are  here 
seen  to  plunge  into  it  between  these  nerves. 

b.  Part  of  the  annular  protuberance,  or 'pons  Varolii,  plunging  into  the 
cerebellum. 

s,  Cerebellar  ganglion.  • 

p.  Mammary  bodies,  with  the  diverging  cords  to  which  they  are  attached. 

u,  Optic  nerve.  "  The  optic  nerves  decussate  partially,  and  is  the  cause 
why  the  eye  is  frequently  deranged  on  the  same  side  as  that  on 
vvhich  the  brain  is  diseased." — Spurzheim. 

h  h,  "  Nervous  fibres  that  expand  in  the  convolutions  and  contribute  to 
their  forrmation." — Spurzheim. 

i  i,  Olfactory  nerves. 

v,  Side  of  the  great  lateral  ventricle. 

34,  35,  36,  37,  38,  The  fibres  which  pass  through  the  great  cerebral 
ganglions,  and  ultimately  expand  into  the  convolutions  of  the  brain. 

DD,  Converging  convolutions. 


FIG.   10 


FIG.  11. 


c — Internal  structure  of  the  convolutions.     See  p.  52. 

e — Fibres  of  the  convolutions  agglutinated  by  a  very  delicate  neurilema. 


49 


Figure   11, 

Represents  the  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain,  in  which  the  convo- 
lutions are  cut  away  to  the  depth  of  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch* 
to  show  the  fibres  radiating  from  the  centre  of  the  outer  surface  of 
the  great  inferior  ganglion  into  the  convolutions. 

The  white  spot  in  the  centre  of  the  figure  represents  the  outer  surface 
of  the  great  inferior  ganglion  over  which  the  fibres  are  drawn  with  great 
accuracy  from  the  original. 

7 


50 


Figure  12, 

Is  a  fine  view  of  a  vertical  section  of  the  brain  through  the  convolu- 
tions, the  white  substance,  the  great  inferior  ganglion,  and  the  cerebellum. 

This  section  is  made  through  the  ganglion  to  the  depth  of  about  the 
quarter  of  an  inch  from  its  outer  surface,  and  through  the  middle  of  the 
cerebellar  ganglion. 

0,  Great  inferior  ganglion. 

m,  Fibres  radiating  from  the  surface  of  the  ganghon.  . 

1,  Cerebellar  ganglion  (corpus  dentatum). 
n,  Arbor  vitse. 

Some  of  the  principal   organs  formed  by  the  convolutions  of  the  brain 
are  numbered  thus  : 
n,  Amativeness,  or  sexual  love. 

2,  Philoprogenitiveness,  or  love  of  offspring. 

3,  Inhabitiveness,  or  attachment  to  home. 

4,  Concentrativeness,  or  power  of  mental  concentration. 

5,  Approbativeuess,  or  love  of  approbation. 

6,  Self-esteem. 

7,  Firmness. 

8,  Reverence. 

9,  Benevolence. 

10,  Imitation. 

11,  Comparison,  or  power  of  comparing  one  thing  with  another. 

12,  Eventuality,  or  power  of  observing  action. 

13,  Individuality,  or  power  of  observing  existence. 

14,  Language,  or  power  of  learning  or  using  verbal  signs. 


FIG.  12. 


FIG.  13. 


51 


Figure   13, 

A  perpendicular  section  of  the  brain,  not   far  from  the  mesial  hne. 

The  fibres  of  the  white  or  medullary  substance  radiate  as  seen  in  the 
figure  from  the  base  of  the  brain  into  the  convolutions,  the  folds  of  which 
are  plunged  into  the  white  substance,  generally  from  a  line  to  an  inch 
deep. 

e  e.  Is  a  section  of  one  of  the  corpora  restiforma. 
c.  Is  a  section  of  one  of  the  corpora  pyramidalia. 
b.  Is  the  pons  Varolii, 
g,  Is  one  of  the  crura  of  the  brain. 

s,  Is  the  cerebellar  ganglion,  surrounded  by  the  arbor  vitse. 
34,  35,  37,  38  and  11,  Are  the  cerebral  fibres,  which,  originating  in  the 
medulla  oblongata,  pass  under  the  pons  Varolii,  through   the  crura, 
and  corpora  striata,  and  great  inferior  ganglions,  and  ultimately  ex- 
pand into  the  convolutions  of  the  brain. 
47,  48,  Situation  of  the  cerebellum  within  the  skull. 

These  crura  contain  cineriterous  matter  in  their  interior,  from  which 
additional  fibres  are  continually  sent  off  as  they  advance  to  join  and 
strengthen  those  that  have  come  from  below. 

The  cerebral  crura  are  besides  divided  into  two  parts,  viz  :  an  anterior 
and  external,  and  a  posterior  and  internal  mass,  the  limits  of  which  are 
marked  by  two  superficial  furrows.  They  are  the  roots  of  the  primary 
bundles  of  fibres  of  the  brain  which  diverge  as  they  advance  to  form  the 
immense  mass  of  the  hemispheres. 

A  great  portion  of  these  fibres  pass  to  and  through  the  ganglions  in  their 
course  to  the  convolutions,  from  which  another  set  of  fibres  converge 
through  the  white  substance,  and  corpus  callosum  to  the  same  ganglions 
in  the  centre  of  the  brain. 


52 


Figure   14, 


Is  a  view  of  the  inside  of  the  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain  with 
the  convolutions  cut  away,  to  show  the  converging  fibres  from  the  con- 
volutions to  the  corpus  callosmn,  which  communicate  with  the  great 
cerebral  ganglions  by  means  of  a  superficial  band  or  layer  culled  the  semi- 
circular tapeworm.  A  section  of  the  great  inferior  ganglioti  is  removed, 
which  shows  its  white  color  in  strong  contrast  with  the  dark  or  redish 
grey  color  of  a  portion  of  the  great  superior  ganglion  inclosed  between 
it  and  the  front  part  of  the  corpus  callosum. 

"  The  convolutions  internally  consist  of  white  fibres,  which  are  cover- 
ed on  their  extremities  with  cineriterous  substance.  The  fibres  which 
terminate  the  nervous  bundles  of  the  cerebral  crura  are  not  all  of  the  same 
leno-th.  Many,  especially  of  those  which  are  situated  on  the  outer  sides 
of  the  convolutions,  terminate  immediately  beyond  the  exterior  walls  of 
the  cavities  ;  the  others  extend  to  distances  progressively  greater  as  they 
run  more  centrally,  those  of  the  interior  extending  farthest  of  all.  (See 
fio-ure  11,  convolution  c)  It  is  in  consequence  of  this  peculiar  structure  that 
prolongations  and  depressions  are  formed  on  the  surface  of  the  hemis- 
pheres. The  cineriterous  substance  follows  all  the  forms  composed  by  the 
white  fibres,  and  covers  every  elevation  and  depression  with  a  layer. 
These  layers  meet  in  the  middle  line  of  the  convolutions,  and  are  slightly 
agglutinated  by  means  of  a  very  delicate  nuT\\ema.''''-Spiirzheim.  Fig.  11,  e. 

"  The  corpus  callosum  extends  anterior!}'  and  posteriorly  beyond  the 
striated  bodies  (great  superior  and  inferior  ganglions,  fig.  14).  Its  thick- 
ness at  either  extremity  is  greater  than  at  its  middle.  The  fibres  which 
compose  the  folds  of  the  corpus  callosum  proceed  evidently  from  the 
convolutions  which  form  the  most  anterior  and  posterior  parts  of  the 
hemispheres,"  which  communicate  with  the  great  cerebral  ganglions  by 
means  of  a  superficial  band  or  layer  called  the  semi-circular  tapeworm. 

"  Nothing  can  be  easier  than  by  dissection,  to  prove  the  two  orders  of 
cerebral  fibres,  the  diverging  and  the  converging,  and  to  show  that  the 
mass  or  bundle  called  corpus  callosum  belongs  to  the  converging  order." 
"  Their  direction  is  consequently  entirely  different  from  the  bundles  (of 
fibres)  constituting  either  of  the  two  great  cerebral  ganglions." 

"  The  convolutions  are  for  the  most  part  inclined  slightly  to  the  roof 
of  the  ventricles — they  rarely  stand  up  vertically.  Their  peripheral  edge 
is  frequently  depressed,  and  this  gives  them  an  appearance  similar  to  that 
which  a  fold  of  paper  takes  when  its  edge  is  pressed  lightly  inwards." 
Ibid.  fig.  12. 

The  converging  fibres,  like  the  diverging  ones  before  described,  are 
double,  one  set  of  each,  of  which  is  connected  with  the  surface  of  the 


FIG.    14. 


A — Front  part  of  the  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain. 
B — Great  inferior  ganglion. 
C — Great  superior  ganglion. 


53 

brain  through  the  cineriterous  substance  of  the  convolutions,  and  the 
other  with  the  surface  of  the  ventricles.  See  fig.  9,  fig.  11,  and  fig.  14. 
The  opposite  ends  of  the  converging  fibres  are  connected  with  the  great 
cerebral  ganglions,  while  the  opposite  ends  of  the  diverging  fibres  are 
connected  with  the  flexor  and  extensor  muscles  and  w^ith  the  serous  and 
mucous  surfaces  of  the  different  parts  of  the  body.  Drs.  Gall  and  Spurzheim 
say,  "  the  same  nervous  fibres  do  not  go  to  the  muscles  and  skin,"  and 
that  "  the  spinal  marrow  consists  of  nerves  of  motion  and  of  feeling." 
Physiognomical  System  of  Drs.  Gall  and  Spurzheim,  1S15,  p.  23  to 
25.  Sir  Charles  Bell  demonstrated  the  correctness  of  these  opinions 
in  his  work,  entitled  "An  Exposition  of  the  Natural  System  of  the 
Nerves  of  the  Human  Body,  1823." 

"  Drs.  Gall  and  Spurzheim  have  the  merit  of  having  discovered  and  first 
taught  the  true  anatomy  of  the  brain.  For  many  years  their  representa- 
tions of  the  structure  of  this  organ  were  ridiculed,  and  the  accuracy  of 
them  denied  with  the  greatest  pertinacity ;  but  they  are  now  very  gene- 
rally admitted  to  be  correct.  Some  errors  may,  perhaps,  be  discovered  in 
them  ;  but  their  general  truth  is  beyond  question. 

In  surveying  the  relations  of  the  parts,  it  is  useful  to  begin  with  the 
spinal  marrow. 

In  1810,  Drs  Gall  and  Spurzheim  represented  the  spinal  marrow  as 
consisting  of  a  tract  for  motion,  and  one  for  sensation  ;*  and  in  1818,  Dr. 
Spurzheim  published  strong  reasons  for  the  inference  that  certain  of  the 
nerves  proceeding  from  it  perform  the  functions  of  motion,  while  others 
communicate  sensation. |  Several  years  afterwards.  Sir  Charles  Bell  de- 
scribed it  as  consisting  of  two  halves,  a  right  and  left,  extending  its  whole 
length.  According  to  his  first  view,  he  described  each  lateral  portion  as 
consisting  of  three  tracts  or  columns  ;  the  anterior-lateral  giving  origin  to 
the  nerves  of  voluntary  motion  ;  the  posterior-lateral  giving  origin  to  the 
nerves  of  sensation  ;  the  middle-lateral  to  the  nerves  connected  with  res- 
piration. J  The  capital,  or  top  of  the  spinal  column,  is  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata. Cruveilhier  and  Bellingeri  deny  the  accuracy  of  Sir  Charles  Bell's 
opinions  on  this  subject.  Bellingeri  divides  the  spinal  marrow  into  three 
double  columns,  and  assigns  motion  to  the  front  and  back,  and  the  in- 
stinctive movements  to  the  middle  column.  He  regards  the  grey  matter 
of  the  spinal  cord  as  connected  with  sensation.  §  At  all  events,  Sir  Charles 

*  Anatomic  et  Physiologie,  (fcc,  p.  67,  4to.     Paris,  1810. 

t  Observations  sur  la  Folie,  par  G.  Spurzheim,  pp.  26,  27.    Paris,  1818. 

X  In  his  paper,  read  before  the  Royal  Society  on  the  30th  April,  1S3.5,  he  appears  to 
have  renounced  this  opinion,  and  now  describes  the  posterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves 
as  attached  to  the  lateral  or  middle  columns,  or  middle  lateral ;  p.  231,  3d  edition  of 
"The  Nervous  System." 

§  De  Medulla  Spinali,  pp.  89,  93,  95,  117. 


54 

Bell's  view,  that  motion  belongs  to  the  anterior,  and  sensation  to  the  pos- 
terior roots  of  the  spinal  nerves,  is  admitted  by  Tiedemann,  Miiller,  and 
the  highest  physiological  authorities,  and  I  here  assume  it  to  be  correct. 

At  the  upper  extremity  of  the  spinal  marrow,  and  in  continuation  of  its 
anterior,  or  motory,  tract,  we  meet  with  the  corpora  pyramidalia. 

These  bodies  consist  of  medullary  fibres,  which  decussate  at  their  lower 
extremity  (c  c  Fig.  10). 

The  fibres  of  the  corpora  pyramidalia  proceed  upwards  through  the 
pons  Varolii  (B  Fig.  6). 

After  escaping  above  its  upper  border,  the  greatest  number  of  them  pass 
still  upwards,  and  form  the  anterior  and  external  bundles  of  the  crura 
cerebri,  {g  Fig.  13)  and  the  exterior  part  of  the  corpora  striata,  and  ulti- 
mately they  expand  into  the  inferior,  anterior,  and  exterior  convolutions 
of  the  anterior  and  middle  lobes  of  the  brain  :  Gall,  Phys.  du  Cerveau, 
vol.  i.  p.  279. 

There  is  an  observable  proportion  between  the  size  of  the  corpora  pyra- 
midalia and  that  of  the  convolutions  now  mentioned. 

A  portion  of  the  fibres  of  the  corpora  pyramidalia  pass  into  the  great 
ganglion  of  the  middle  and  posterior  lobes,  commonly,  but  erroneously, 
named  the  optic  thalami,  (o.  Fig.  12)  and  ultimately  constitute  part  of 
the  posterior  lobes  of  the  brain  :  Solly  on  the  Brain,  p.  233  ;  Spurzheim's 
Physiog.  System,  p.  38.* 

Finally,  a  number  of  fibres  proceed  from  the  lower  extremity  of  the 
corpora  pyramidalia,  near  the  point  of  decussation,  accompanied  by  a 
number  of  fibres  which  originate  in  the  anterior,  or  motory,  tract  of  the 
spinal  cord,  immediately  below  said  point,  to  the  cerebellum  :  Solly  on 
the  Brain,  p.  155. 

The  fibres  of  the  corpora  pyramidalia  thus  constitute  the  great  mass  of 
the  anterior  lobes  ;  and  enter  into  the  substance  of  the  middle  lobes  ;  into 
that  of  the  posterior  lobes  ;  and  into  that  of  the  cerebellum. 

The  corpora  olivaria,  (C  C  Fig.  3)  and  corpora  restiformia  (T  T  Fig.  3) 
are  placed  at  the  summit  of  the  posterior- lateral  columns  of  the  spinal 
cord,  which  are  devoted  to  sensation.'f     The   corpora  olivaria  pass  up- 

*  The  passage  of  certain  fibres  from  the  corpora  pyramidalia  into  the  posterior  lobes 
appears  not  to  be  well  ascertained,  and  I  am  not  certain  that  I  correctly  interpret  these 
authorities  in  citing  them  in  support  of  this  opinion.  From  the  influence,  however, 
which  the  mental  organs  situated  in  these  lobes  exercise  over  various  instinctive  motions 
of  the  body,  I  anticipate  that  a  direct  connection  will  yet  be  traced  between  them  and 
the  motory  tract  already  ascertained,  or  that  an  additional  tract  for  manifesting  instinc- 
tinc  movements  will  be  discovered,  with  which  they  and  the  organs  of  the  other  feelings 
will  be  found  to  be  connected. 

t  "  In  the  composition  of  the  spinal  cord,"  says  Mr.  Solly,  "  we  can  observe  no  line 
of  demarcation  by  which  the  tract  of  sensation  may  be  distinguished  from  that  of  motion, 
but  a  portion  of  the  cord  anterior  to  the  posterior  fissure  is  distinctly  ascertained  to  be 


55 

wards  into  the  pons  Varolii^  and  form  the  posterior  and  interior  parts  of 
the  crura;  thence  they  proceed  through  the  great  posterior  ganglion, 
(thalami  nervorum  opticorum)  and  then  expand  partly  into  the  convolu- 
tions of  the  anterior  lobe,  lying  on  its  superior  surface,  towards  the  mesial 
line,  partly  into  the  superior  convolutions  towards  the  mesial  line  of  the 
middle  lobe  ;  but  chiefly  into  the  convolutions  of  the  posterior  lobes  : 
Gall,  Physiologie  du  Cerveau,  tome  i.  p.  281. 

Sir  Charles  Bell  says  that  the  fibres  of  the  middle  lateral  columns  decus- 
sate at  the  same  point  as  that  at  which  the  corpora  pyramidalia  decussate. 

The  fibres  of  the  corpora  restiformia  ascend  and  form  the  chief  part  of 
the  cerebellum ;  but  a  portion  of  them  proceeds  still  upwards,  and  enters 
into  the  composition  of  the  posterior  lobes  of  the  brain. 

In  the  centre  of  the  cms  cerebri,  the  fibres  of  the  motory  tract  (D  in 
Figure  6)  are  separated  from  the  fibres  of  the  sensory  tract  to  the  left  of 
the  letter  c  in  Figure  6,  by  a  portion  of  cineritious  substance  denominated 
the  locus  niger. 

The  two  hemispheres  of  the  brain'are  separated  by  the  falciform  process 
of  the  dura  mater,  which  descends  between  them  to  the  corpus  callosumox 
great  commissure.  The  different  parts  of  the  brain  are  brought  into  com- 
munication with  each  other  by  means  of  the  following  commissures, 
which  Mr.  Solly  arranges  under  three  heads  ;  the  transverse,  longitudinal, 
and  oblique. 

The  transverse  commissures,  six  in  number  : 

1.  The  great  transverse  commissure  of  the  hemispheres,  or  the  corpus 

callosum. 

2.  The  pineal  commissure. 

3.  The  posterior  commissure,  or  commissure  of  the  posterior  cerebral 

o;ano;lia. 

4.  The  soft  commissure,  or  commissure  also  of  the  posterior  cerebral 

ganglia. 

5.  The  anterior  commissure,  or  commissure  of  the  corpus  striatum,  or 

anterior  cerebral  ganglia. 

appropriated  to  this  function."  "  I  shall  assume,  therefore,  that  the  line  of  demarcation 
is  about  the  middle  of  the  lateral  aspect  of  the  cord,  and  that  the  sensory  column,  or 
tract  of  sensation,  consists  of  two  portions,  the  one  posterior  to  the  fissure  referred  to, 
and  consequently  named  the  posterior  column,  the  other  anterior  to  it,  constituting  part 
of  the  antero-lateral  column."— So%  on  the  Human  Brain,  p.  225.  I  recommend  to 
the  attention  of  those  readers  who  regard  the  want  of  lines  of  demarcation  between  the 
different  cerebral  organs  as  a  fatal  objection  to  Phrenology,  the  preceding  observation  of 
Mr.  Solly,  that  the  same  difficulty  occurs  in  distinguishing  the  tract  of  sensation  from 
that  of  motion  in  the  spinal  cord.  Nevertheless  he  does  not  hesitate  to  state  that  the 
essential  functions  of  these  different  parts  of  the  cords  are  positively  ascertained.  His 
own  remark  is,  that  "  it  is  quite  possible  that  perfect  distinctness  of  parts,  as  regards 
their  function,  without  any  visible  line  of  separation,  may  exist;"  p.  153. 


56 

6.  The  commissure  of  the  cerebellum,  or  pons  Varolii. 
The  longitudinal  commissures,  two  in  number  : 

1.  The  superior  longitudinal  commissure. 

2.  The  inferior  longitudinal  commissure,  or  fornix.     It  connects  the 
parts  of  the  same  hemisphere. 

The  oblique  commissure  is  single.     It  consists  of, 
1.  The   inter-cerebral  commissure,  or  processus  e  cerebello  ad  testes^ 
with  the  valve  of  Vieussens. — Solly  on  the  Human  Brain,  p.  194. 


OF    THE    CEREBELLUM. 

The  cerebellum  consists  of  three  portions,  a  central  and  two  lateral. 

The  cerebellum  proceeds,  in  the  first  instance,  from  the  corpora  resti- 
formia.  The  fibres  of  these  bodies  proceed  upwards,  enter  into  the  cor- 
pus dentatum  (cerebellar  ganglion)  of  the  cerebellum,  and  finally  expand 
into  its  laminae  or  folds, — Gall,  lib.  cit.  pp.  250,  251.* 

Certain  fibres,  already  described,  arising  from  the  summit  of  the  ante- 
terior  column  of  the  spinal  marrow,  and  from  the  lower  extremity  of  the 
corpora  pyramidalia  or  motory  tract,  proceed  upwards  and  laterally,  and 
enter  the  cerebellum.  Mr.  Solly  (p.  57)  has  the  merit  of  having  first 
clearly  demonstrated  the  course  of  these  fibres,  although  Drs.  Gall  and 
Spurzheim  have  alluded  to  their  existence. 

The  pons  Varolii  is  the  great  commissure  uniting  the  two  lateral  por- 
tions of  the  cerebellum. — Gall,  lib.  cit.  p.  258. 


OF    THE    CORPORA    QUADRIGEMINA. 

Certain  fibres  originating  in  the  corpora  olivaria,  are  said  by  Tiede- 
mann|  to  form  the  corpora  quadrigemina  (acFig7).  Reil  says  that 
some  of  the  fibres  of  the  corpora  pyramidalia  go  to  them. 

The  superior  pair  of  the  corpora  quadrigemina,  or  tubercles,  are  regarded 
by  Dr.  Gall  as  ganglions,  which  give  origin  to  the  optic  nerves  {lib.  cit. 


*  The  corpora  restiformia,  says  Mr.  Solly,  or  the  processus  e  cerebello  ad  medullam 
oblongatam,  "  are  not,  as  they  have  been  usually  described,  bodies  which  are  formed 
solely  by  the  jwstcrior  columns  ;  nor  are  they  bodies  which  consist  of  fibres  from  the 
posterior  columns,  to  which  some  fibres  from  the  anterior  columns  are  added,  the  addi- 
tional fibres  lying  perfectly  parallel  to  those  of  the  posterior  columns  ;  but  they  are  bo- 
dies which  consist  of  fibres  that  interlace  in  rather  an  intricate  manner,  the  interlacing 
fibres  consisting  of  some  from  the  antei'o-lateral,  and  some  from  the  posterior  columns  j" 
p.  158. 

t  On  the  Anatomy  of  Fcetal  Brain,  pp.  182,  183;  Bennett's  translation. 


57 

p.  121.)     The  functions  of  the  inferior  pair  are  not  ascertained.     They 
are  placed  on  the  upper  part  of  the  medulla  oblongata  (c  Fig.  6.) 

A  broad  band  of  medullary  substance,  "  thick  laterally,  but  extremely 
thin  in  the  centre,"  passes  from  the  cerebellum  upwards  and  forwards  to 
the  tubercles,  commonly  called  the  processus  e  cerebello  ad  testes,  and 
the  valvula  of  Vieussens  (n  Fig.  7). — Solly,  lib.  cit.  p.  178. 


RELATION  BETWEEN  THE  STRUCTURE  AND  THE  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  BRAIN. 

The  convolutions  of  the  brain  appear  to  stand  in  a  relation  to  the  spinal 
marrow  analogous  to  that  which  the  superficial  expansions  of  the  nerves 
of  the  external  senses,  of  motion,  and  sensation,  on  their  respective  or- 
gans, bear  to  it. 

The  convolutions  of  the  anterior  lobes  of  the  brain*  manifest  the  intel- 
lectual faculties.  I 

The  Intellectual  Faculties  enable  man  to  perceive  objects  that  exist, 
their  qualities  and  relations ;  and  when  acting  together,  they  constitute 
Will. 

The  convolutions  which  manifest  these  faculties  spring  from  the  cor- 
pora pyramidalia^  which  are  now  generally  considered  to  be  the  top  of  the 
motory  tract  of  the  spinal  marrow.  Here,  then,  is  a  direct  relation  be- 
tween the  convolutions  which  manifest  Will,  and  the  motory  tract  which 
executes  Will  ;  an  arrangement  that  appears  to  accord  with  the  best  es- 
tablished principles  of  Physiology. 

The  convolutions  of  the  middle  and  those  of  the  posterior  lobes  of  the 
brain,  manifest  the  Propensities  and  Sentiments,  or  Feelings. 

These  convolutions  spring  chiefly  from  the  corpora  olivaria,  but  partly 
also  from  the  corpora  restiformia.  These  bodies  constitute  the  top  of  the 
sensory  tract  of  the  spinal  cord. 

The  cerebellum  springs  from  the  corpora  restiformia,  which,  as  has  just 
been  mentioned,  is  viewed  as  a  portion  of  the  top  of  the  sensory  tract  of 
the  spinal  marrow. 

The  function  of  the  cerebellum  is  to  manifest  the  instinct  of  reproduc- 
tion, which  also  is  one  of  the  feelings  of  the  mind. 

But,  in  the  next  place,  certain  fibres  proceeding  from  the  corpora  pyr- 
amidalia,  or  motory  tract,  enter  into — 
The  middle  lobes, 

*  Precisely  speaking,  it  is  only  the  anterior,  inferior,  and  lateral  convolutions  of  the 
anterior  lobe  which  manifest  intellect.  The  superior  convolutions  of  this  lobe  mani- 
fest eentiments  or  feelings. 

t  The  evidence  of  the  functions  of  the  convolutions  is  stated  in  the  different  works  on 
Phrenology. 

8 


68 

The  posterior  lobes,  and 
The  cerebellum. 

While,  therefore,  the  convolutions  of  the  anterior  lobes*  are  formed  of 
fibres  connected  with  the  motory  tract,  the  convolutions  composing  the 
posterior  and  middle  lobes,  and  the  cerebellum,  are  composed  of  fibres 
connected  with  both  the  motory  and  sensory  tracts. 

The  middle  and  posterior  lobes,  and  the  cerebellum,  manifest  a  variety 
of  different  feelings,  each  particular  feeling  being  connected  with  a  par- 
ticular part  of  these  masses,  as  is  explained  in  the  works  on  Phrenology. 

Each  of  these  feelings  acts  upon,  and  manifests  itself  by  means  of  the 
muscular  system.  Thus  fear,  rage,  affection,  or  any  other  feeling, 
communicates  great  energy  of  action  to  the  muscles  of  voluntary  mo- 
tion. 

Each  of  the  feelings  instinctively  impresses  motions  on  the  muscular 
system  pecular  to  itself,  and  expressive  of  its  distinctive  character,  which 
motions  are  named  by  phrenologists  its  natural  language.  Thus,  the  or- 
gan of  Self-Esteem,  when  predominantly  large,  produces  an  instinctive 
tendency  to  carry  the  head  and  body  reclining  backwards.  The  organ  of 
Firmness,  when  predominantly  large,  produces  the  tendency  to  support 
the  body  in  a  stiffly  erect  position,  as  if  the  spinal  cord  were  supported 
by  a  rod  of  iron  running  along  its  whole  length.  The  cerebellum  also 
impresses  peculiar  motions  on  the  muscular  system  expressive  of  its  cha- 
racter. These  motions,  as  I  have  said,  are  instinctive ;  that  is  to  say, 
they  are  the  instantaneous  and  direct  results  of  the  activity'  of  the  several 
feelings,  and  not  the  consequences  of  intellectual  perception  and  will. 

The  arrangement  of  structure  by  which  each  of  these  organs  of  fee'.ing 
is  supplied  with  fibres  in  direct  connection  with  the  motory  tract,  is  in 
harmony  with  this  influence  of  the  emotions  over  the  motions  of  the 
body.  But  we  should  expect  a  separate  tract  for  instinctive  motion, 
which  is  clearly  distinguishable  from  voluntary  motion,  and  also  that  the 
organs  of  the  feelings  should  be  connected  directly  with  it.  There  is  still 
much  obscurity  in  the  views  of  physiologists  concerning  the  connection  of 
the  middle  and  posterior  lobes  with  the  motory  tract. 

Again,  it  is  certain  that  the  mental  emotions  exercise  a  powerful  influ- 
ence over  the  organic  functions  ;  when  agreeable,  they  stimulate  them  to 
healthy  action,  and  when  painful,  they  depress  their  energies,  and  pro- 
duce liability  to  disease.  Reciprocally,  when  the  organic  functions,  such 
as  digestion,  respiration,  and  secretion  are  disordered,  an  irritable  and  dis- 
tressing state  of  the  mental  feelings  is  induced. 

The  intimate  relations  between  the  convolutions  of  the  brain  devoted 

*  Excepting  always  those  on  the  upper  surface  which  manifest  feelings,  and  which 
derive  their  origin  from  tlie  sensory  tract  as  before  described. 


59 

to  the  mental  emotions  and  the  sensory  tract  of  the  spinal  cord,  is  in  har- 
mony with  these  facts. 

The  habit  of  contending  with  intellectual  difficulties,  if  unconnected 
with  feeling,  does  not  injure  the  organic  functions  so  severely  as  do  strong 
and  painful  emotions  ;  but  it  weakens  the  locomotive  powers.  Sedulous 
students  of  abstruse  problems,  acquire  a  great  aversion  to  locomotion. 

These  facts  correspond  with  the  arrangements  of  structure  by  which 
the  convolutions  of  the  anterior  lobes  devoted  to  intellect,  spring  from  the 
motory  tract,  and  are  less  intimately  connected  with  the  sensory  tract  of 
the  spinal  marrow. 

The  convolutions  of  the  anterior  lobes  bear  an  analogy  to  the  periphe- 
ral expansion  of  a  simple  nerve  of  motion  ;  while  the  convolutions  of  the 
middle  and  posterior  lobes,  and  the  cerebellum,  bear  an  analogy  to  the 
peripheral  expansion  of  the  combined  nerves  of  sensation  and  motion. 

The  functions  of  the  convolutions  of  the  brain,  and  of  the  laminae  of  the 
cerebellum,  being  to  manifest  respectively  thought  and  mental  feeling, 
they  do  not  produce  what,  for  distinction's  sake,  may  be  called  bodily  pain. 

These  convolutions  and  the  cerebellum,  although  situated,  when  man 
is  in  the  erect  position,  above  the  spinal  cord,  neverthless  stand  in  the 
same  relation  to  it,  as  do  the  peripheral  expansions  of  the  cerebral  nerves  ; 
that  is  to  say,  they  are  composed  of  the  distal  ends  of  the  fibres,  which 
can  be  traced  inwards  to  the  spinal  cord. 

If  an  experimenter  were  to  separate  the  motory  branch  of  the  fifth 
nerve,  (arising  in  the  cms  cerebri.,*  the  motory  tract,)  and  expanding  on 
the  head  and  face, — from  the  sensory  branch  of  the  same  nerve  (arising 
from  the  posterior  columns  of  the  spinal  cord,  about  an  inch  and  a  half 
below  the  pons  Varolii,  the  sensory  tract,  j  along  its  whole  course ;  and 
if  he  were  to  destroy  the  former,  or  motory  branch,  at  its  periphery,  the 
animal  would  experience  no  pain.,  because  this  is  a  nerve  of  motion  ;  and 
no  convulsions  would  ensue  until  the  lesions  reached  close  upon  the  mo- 
tory tract  itself  ;|  because  the  influence  of  irritation  on  nerves  of  motion  is 
propagated  only  outwards  from  the  spinal  cord  ;  and  in  the  case  here  sup- 
posed, the  mutilations  and  irritations  would  proceed  inwards  from  the 
distal  extremity  of  the  nerve  towards  the  spinal  marrow.  The  whole 
portions  of  the  nerve  lying  outwards  from  the  point  of  irritation,  as  this 

*  Mr.  Solly  describes  this  branch  as  arising  from  the  "  inter-cerebellar  commissure, 
very  close  to  the  cerebellum," — Lib.  cit.^.  249  ;  but  he  adds,  that  its  origin  from  these 
fibres  proves  they  *'  must  be  a  portion  of  the  motor  tract." — P.  251. 

t  I  here  suppose  the  whole  filaments  to  be  destroyed,  commencing  from  the  periphery. 
If  the  nerve  were  merely  irritated  at  any  part  of  its  course,  the  muscles,  which  derive 
their  filaments  from  the  part  of  the  nerve  below  the  point  irritated,  would  be  thrown 
into  contraction,  while  those  deriving  their  filaments  from  points  above  the  part  irritated 
would  remain  quiescent. 


60       • 

point  by  successive  mutilations  approached  the  spinal  marrow,  would  be 
necessarily  destroyed,  and  therefore  could  produce  no  movements. 

When  Magendie,  Flourens,  and  other  physiologists,  cut  away  the  con- 
volutions of  the  anterior  lobes,  they  performed  an  experiment  analogous 
to  this  which  I  have  now  described.  They  commenced  at  the  distal  ex- 
tremity of  the  fibres  of  the  convolutions  which  are  connected  with  the  mo- 
tory  tract,  and  they  destroyed  them  in  proportion  as  they  carried  their 
ablations  towards  the  spinal  cord.  Whatever  the  functions  of  these  con- 
volutions might  be,  the  power  of  manifesting  them  must  obviously  have 
ceased  by  their  destruction  ;  and  as  it  was  known  that  the  convolutions  of 
the  brain  do  not  manifest  ordinary  sensation,  they  were  not  authorized, 
by  the  analogy  of  the  nerves,  to  expect  either  pain  or  convultions  to  be 
excited  until  they  arrived  at  the  motory  tract  itself;  which  accordingly 
was  actually  the  case.  When  Magendie  cut  the  corpora  striata  and  tu- 
bercles, the  animals  "  rolled,"  "  went  forward,  "  extended,"  and  "  bent 
their  heads  and  extremities." 

Again,  if  the  nerves  of  motion  and  sensation  ramified  on  the  hand  were 
destroyed  in  combination,  commencing  from  the  surface  of  the  skin  at  the 
extremity  of  the  fingers,  and  proceeding  upwards  to  the  spinal  cord,  pain 
would  be  felt,  because  a  nerve  of  sensation  had  been  destroyed,  and  such 
nerves  propagate  their  impressions  inward  from  their  peripheral  expan- 
sions towards  the  spinal  cord  and  brain  ;  but,  for  the  reason  before  stated, 
there  would  be  no  convulsions,  until  the  motory  tract  of  the  spinal  cord 
itself  was  reached  and  irritated. 

The  experiments  of  Magendie  and  Flourens,  in  cutting  away  the  con- 
volutions of  the  middle  and  posterior  lobes  of  the  brain,  were  analogous 
to  this  supposed  proceeding.  They  removed  parts  which  manifest  men- 
tal emotions,  but  do  not  produce  pain  ;  and  the  organs  being  destroyed, 
no  emotions  and  no  pain  were  manifested.  These  organs  are  connected 
by  some  fibres  with  the  motory  tract,  but  these  fibres  were  cut  away  from 
their  distal  extremities,  and  no  effect  on  motion  was  produced  until  the 
motory  tract  itself  was  assailed  ;  all  which  facts  accord  with  the  views  of 
the  structure  and  functions  of  the  brain  and  spinal  marrow  now  presented. 

These  experimenters  held  Dr.  Gall's  discovery  of  the  functions  of  the 
convolutions  of  the  brain  in  too  much  contempt  to  allow  themselves  to  see 
these  plain  connections  and  results.  Indeed  they  did  not  proceed  as  if  it 
were  possible  that  his  ideas  could  be  true.  Still  their  experiments,  how- 
ever little  calculated  to  throw  light  on  the  functions  of  the  convolutions, 
produced  phenomena  which  harmonized  with  the  functions  ascribed  to 
these  parts  by  Dr.  Gall.  Cuvier  reports,  that  when  Flourens  destroyed 
the  hemispheres,  the  animals  so  mutilated  became  "  quite  drowsy  ;"  they 
"  had  no  will  of  their  own,"  and  "  made  no  spontaneous  motion."  Fur- 
ther, "  he  pricked  the  hemispheres  without  producing  either  contraction 


61 

of  the  muscles  or  any  apparent  pain  to  the  animal."  In  short,  Flourens 
found  that,  by  cutting  downwards  from  the  surface  of  the  convolutions  of 
the  brain,  he  did  not  cause  either  muscular  contraction,  or  excite  pain, 
until  he  arrived  "  at  the  top  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  at  the  spot  where 
the  quadrigeminal  bodies  are  attached  to  it,"  but  that,  by  irritating  the 
motory  and  sensory  tracts  at  this  point,  he  produced  both  pain  and  con- 
vulsions.    Magendie  produced  motion  by  iiritating  the  corpora  striata. 

These  facts  appear  to  show  that  the  proper  or  peculiar  functions  of  the 
sensory  and  motory  tracts  commence  at  these  parts  ;  and  they  accord  with 
Dr.  Gall's  views  of  the  structure  and  functions  of  the  convolutions. 

In  irritating  the  brain  from  below  upioards,  Flourens  found  that,  after 
he  had  passed  the  point  at  which  the  tubercles  are  attached,  his  operations 
produced  neither  pain  nor  convulsions. 

This  fact  also  accords  with  the  views  of  the  structure  and  functions 
now  presented.  If  the  convolutions  had  been  organs  of  motion  or  of  or- 
dinary sensation,  convulsions  and  pain  should  have  followed  by  irritating 
their  fibres  at  the  end  next  the  spinal  marrow  ;  but  their  functions  are  to 
manifest  intellectual  perception  and  mental  emotions,  and  Flourens  does 
not  report  that  these  powers  were  not  disturbed  by  his  irritations.  There 
are  no  muscles  which  receive  nerves  of  motion,  nor  mucous  surfaces 
which  receive  nerves  of  sensation,  above  the  corpora  striata  and  corpora 
quadrigemina  in  the  brain.  These  fibres,  therefore,  which  ultimately 
constitute  the  convolutions,  although  proceeding  from  the  motory  and 
sensory  tracts,  may  reasonably  be  presumed  to  perform  functions  distinct 
from  motion  and  sensation.  Our  view  is,  that  they  are  the  organs  of 
mental  faculties  which  use  muscular  motion  and  sensation  as  their  instru- 
ments of  manifestation  ;  and  the  relations  of  the  convolutions  to  the  two 
tracts  in  question  accord  Avith  this  idea. 

Finally,  it  will  be  observed  that  the  fibres  of  the  cerebellum  spring 
from  the  sensory  tract,  and  also  from  the  motory  tract,  and  that  it  is  situa- 
ed  close  to  the  commencement  of  these  tracts,  assuming  the  commence- 
ment to  be  at  the  tubercles,  as  asserted  by  Flourens. 

The  results  observed  by  Flourens  in  his  experiments  on  the  cerebel- 
lum, as  reported  by  Cuvier,  were  these  :  "  During  the  ablation  of  the 
first  slices  of  the  cerebellum,  only  a  little  weakness  and  a  want  of  har- 
mony in  the  movements  occur.  At  the  removal  of  the  middle  slices,  an 
almost  general  agitation  is  the  result.  The  animal,  continuing  to  hear 
and  to  see,  executes  only  abrupt  and  disorderly  movements.  Its  faculties 
of  flying,  walking,  standing  up,  &c.,  are  lost  by  degrees.  When  the  cere- 
bellum is  removed,  the  faculty  of  performing  regulated  movements  has  en- 
tirely disappeared." 

Although  muscular  motion  is  excited,  according  to  jNIagendie,  by  irri- 
tating the  corpora  striata,  and,  according  to  Flourens,  by  irritating  the 


62 

tubercles,  the  precise  points  at  which  this  influence  of  irritation  com- 
mences is  not  well  ascertained.  In  cutting  away  the  hemispheres  of  the 
brain,  the  entire  convolutions  appear  to  have  been  removed  without  mus- 
cular action  having  been  induced ;  whereas  it  is  said  that  movements 
were  manifested  on  removing  the  first  slices  of  the  cerebellum.  These 
facts,  if  they  were  not  liable  to  great  complication  and  uncertainty  from 
the  deep  injuries  in  which  they  involved  the  nervous  system  in  general, 
would  appear  to  shew  that  the  surface  of  the  laminae  of  the  cerebellum  is 
moie  directly  related  to  the  motory  tract  than  is  the  surface  of  the  con- 
volutions of  the  brain.  The  motions,  however,  described  by  Flourens  as 
accompanying  the  mutilations,  may  have  been  caused  by  intense  pain, 
arising  from  irritation  communicated  through  the  cerebellum  to  the  sen- 
sory tract,  or  by  irritation  communicated  through  the  same  medium  to 
the  motory  tract,  in  consequence  of  the  very  close  approximation  of  the 
cerebellum  to  these  tracts.  Whether  the  difference  of  the  effects  pro- 
duced by  injuring  the  convolutions,  and  by  injuring  the  laminse  of  the 
cerebellum,  may  have  arisen  from  the  closer  approximation  of  the  cere- 
bellum than  of  the  convolutions,  to  both  the  motory  and  sensory  tracts, 
it  is  difficult  to  determine ;  but  not  one  of  these  results  excludes  the  fact 
that  the  cerebellum  manifests  the  instinct  of  reproduction. 

Farther,  there  is  no  specification  of  the  depth  to  which  either  the  first 
slices,  or  the  second  slices,  in  these  experiments  extended,  while  the  last 
slices  extirpated  the  cerebellum  entirely,  or  cut  down  directly  on  the  sen- 
sory and  motory  tracts.  If  we  consider  the  connection  and  close  ap- 
proximation of  the  cerebellum  to  the  motory  and  sensory  tracts,  we 
shall  have  no  difficulty  in  discovering  how  very  applicable  the  follow- 
ing words  of  Cuvier  are  to  the  phenomena  which  ensued  upon  these 
operations  :  "  After  all,"  says  he,  "  it  must  be  observed,  that  in  too 
deeply  extirpating  the  tubercles,  we  interfere  with  the  medulla  oblongata 
and  then  violent  convulsions,  which  last  long,  make  their  appearance." 
He  might  have  said,  with  equal  reason,  that  when  we  too  deeply  extir- 
pate the  cerebellum,  we  interfere  with  the  medulla  oblongata;  and  we 
need  not  be  surprised  that  an  animal  which  has  suffered  this  mutilation 
should  appear  as  "in  a  state  of  apparent  drunkenness,"  unable  to  regu- 
late its  movements. 

Dr.  Vimont  considers  that  the  processus  vermicidaris,  or  middle  portion, 
of  the  cerebellum,  does  not  perform  the  same  functions  with  the  two  late- 
ral masses ;  and  he  states  that  he  had  found  it  "  always  large  in  the 
climbing  animals,  such  as  the  cat,  the  squirrel,  and  the  martin  ;  and  in 
those  whose  footsteps  are  very  sure,  or  which  are  able  to  walk  easily  on 
sloping  ground,  or  on  steep  places."  Mr.  Solly,  on  the  other  hand,  ob- 
serves on  this  point  as  follows  :  "  Reil  held,  with  Gall  and  Spurzheim, 
and  I  have  no  doubt  he  was  correct  in  his  opinion,  that  the  '  cerebellum  is 


63 

not  composed  of  elementary  portions  essentially  different,  but  is  one  ho- 
mogeneous mass.'  As  I  understand  the  cerebellum,  it  is  one  instrument 
for  the  production  of  power,  and  not  many  instruments  united  together. 
It  consists,  like  the  cerebrum,  of  two  hemispheres  united  anteriorly  by  a 
commissure  called  the  pons  Varolii ;  and  by  Reil,  it  is  described  as  being 
united  posteriorly  by  another  commissure,  which,  projecting  on  its  upper 
and  under  surface,  forms  what  have  been  called,  from  their  appearance, 
the  processus  vermijormis  superior  and  inferior.  I  confess  this  portion  of 
the  cerebellum  does  not  appear  to  me  to  be  an  apparatus  of  union,  but 
rather  a  centre  of  power  placed  in  the  mesial  line,  and  connected  laterally 
with  the  two  hemispheres,  perfectly  analogous  to  the  cerebellum  of  the 
bird  and  hare  ;  Reil  himself  stating  that,  in  the  brain  of  the  hare,  there  is 
little  more  than  a  vermiform  process.  Indeed,  a  mere  section  of  it  ought 
to  be  sufficient  to  convince  us  that  it  is  no  true  comissure." — Lib.  cit. 
p.  196.  I  leave  the  reader  to  form  his  own  judgment  whether  the  whole 
cerebellum  performs  a  single  function  ;  or  if,  as  Dr.  Vimont  thinks,  the 
middle  portion  is  connected  with  motion,  and  the  two  lateral  portions 
with  the  instinct  of  reproduction. 

Professor  Broussais  says,  "  I  ascribe  the  direction  of  the  (voluntary) 
movements,  the  acts,  the  aptitudes,  which  have  a  reference  to  generation, 
to  the  influence  of  the  cerebellum.  But  I  maintain  that  these  cannot  be 
accomplished  without  the  permission,  nay,  without  the  assistance,  of  the 
brain  ;  and  that  it  is  in  this  sense  alone  that  the  cerebellum  can  be  con- 
sidered as  the  regulator  of  muscular  action." 

These  remarks  agree  with  the  views  of  the  structure  before  presented. 
The  cerebellum  is  composed  of  fibres  connected  with  the  motory  tract, 
and  of  fibres  connected  with  the  sensory  tract.  It  is  an  organ  of  feeling, 
but  it  also  influences  voluntary  motion  by  instinctive  impulses,  as  the 
other  feelings  do.  It  is  obvious  that  it  may  accomplish  this  effect  by 
means  of  the  fibres  before  described,  which  connect  it  directly  with  the 
motory  tract  of  the  spinal  cord. 

Dr.  Broussais  continues — "  The  brain  always  remains  master  of  the 
movements  of  the  cerebellum  tending  towards  the  act  of  generation,  so  as 
to  be  able  to  assist  them  ;  and  it  effectually  exerts  this  power,  in  a  variety 
of  circumstances,  as  every  one  knows."  The  view  of  the  structure  be- 
fore presented,  which  regards  the  anterior  lobe  as  the  organ  of  will,  and 
as  composed  of  fibres,  connected  directly  with  the  motory  tract,  accords 
with  these  remarks  of  Broussais.  The  will^  by  means  of  the  powerful  and 
direct  influence  which  the  anterior  lobe  exerts  over  the  motory  tract, 
"  remains  master"  of  all  the  voluntary  movements. 

It  is  now  generally  admitted  by  physiologists,  that  the  optic  nerves  ter- 
minate in  the  corpora  quadrigemina,  which  are,  in  fact,  their  proper  gan- 
glia.    The  functions  of  the  retina  and  optic  nerve  are  to  receive  and  trans- 


64 

mit  the  impressions  of  light  to  the  brain.  It,  therefore,  is  an  organ  of 
sensation.  These  impressions,  however,  instinctively  produce  a  great 
variety  of  muscular  movements,  especially  in  the  eye  itself  and  its  integu- 
ments. 

The  corpora  quadrigemina,  which  are  its  ganglia,  are  derived  from  the 
corpora  restiformia,  or  sensory  tract.*  But  Reii  says,  that  these  corpora 
also  derive  fibres  from  the  corpora  pyramidalia,  or  motory  tract.  This 
structure  corresponds  with  the  idea  that  the  optic  nerves  are  organs  of 
sensation,  but  that  they  also  influence  motion. 

Farther,  the  eyes  are  moved  by  the  third  pair  of  nerves,  or  common 
ocuLo-MuscuLAR,  and  by  the  fourth  pair,  or  innek  oculo-muscular. 
Mr.  Solly  describes  the  third  pair  as  connected  by  one  portion  "  with 
the  motor  tract  in  its  passage  through  the  pons  Varolii.  The  other  por- 
tion is  partly  lost  in  the  locus  niger,  and  party  mingled  with  those  fibres 
which  the  inter-cerebral  commissure,  or  processus  e  cerebello,  sends 
through  at  this  point."  (p.  246.)  line,  fourth  pair  "  arise  from  the  inter- 
cerebral  commissure,  close  to  the  optic  tubercles  ;  the  nerves  proceed,  in 
fact,  from  those  fibres  which  descend  to  the  centre  of  the  crus  cerebri,  so 
that  we  at  once  observe  an  immediate  connection  between  the  fourth 
pair  and  the  third,  and,  as  we  shall  presently  see,  with  the  motor  root  of 
the  fifth  also."  p.  247. 

This  structure,  which  derives  the  nerves  that  move  the  eyes  from  the 
motory  tract,  is  calculated  to  render  them  subject  to  the  will,  while  their 
origin  also  from  "  the  inter-cerebral  commissure,  close  to  the  optic  tuber- 
cles,'''' is  in  harmony  with  their  subserviency  to  the  instinctive  impulses 
of  the  organ  of  vision.  Many  motions  of  the  eyes  are  instinctive,  and 
many  voluntary.  The  circumstance  of  the  eyes  being  provided  with  two 
nerves  of  motion,  and  one  of  them,  the  third  pair,  having  a  double  root, 
strengthens  the  conjecture  that  there  may  be  two  motory  tracts,  one  for 
voluntary  and  another  for  instinctive  motion.  Some  of  Mr.  Grainger's 
observations  seem  to  favor  this  idea. 

*  There  is  still  some  obscurity  in  the  works  of  different  anatomists  on  this  point; 
which  arises  probably  from  a  want  of  precision  in  their  views  of  the  exact  limits  of  the 
olivary  and  restiform  bodies. 


FIG-  15. 


65 


CHAPTER    III 


GANGLIONIC   SYSTEM    OF    VEGETATIVE    LIFE. 


Figure  15, 

Is  a  view  of  the  ganglions  of  the  organs  of  the  body,  and  other  struc- 
tures, connected  with  tiie  great  sympathetic  nerve,  reduced  from  Manec's 
grand  plate,  by  John  Harrison  Curtis,  Esq.,  London. 
AAAA,  Semilunar  ganglion  and  solar  plexus.     The  ganglion  is  placed 

upon  the  base  of  the  two  pillars  of  the  diaphragm,  one  being  on  each 

side,  and  the  right  generally  larger  than  the  left. 

B,  Small  splanchnic  nerve.     Consists  in  the  union  of  two  or  three  twigs, 

furnished  by  the  last  thoracic  ganglia. 

C,  Great  splanchnic  nerve.     Formed  by  the  junction  of  three,  four,  five, 

or  eight  twigs,  coming  from  as  many  thoracic  ganglia. 
DDD,  Thoracic  ganglia.     Ten  or  eleven  in  number,  corresponding  with 
the  posterior  part  of  the  lateral  side  of  the  body  of  the  dorsal  verte- 
brae ;  most  of  them  rest  on  the  head  of  the  ribs ;  others  correspond 
with  the  level  of  the  intercostal  space. 

E,  Internal  branches.    All  of  them  are  attached  upon  the  body  of  the  ver- 

tebree,  and  advance,  ramifying  and  communicating  with  each  other, 
towards  the  median  line,  where  they  are  distributed  over  the  oeso- 
phagus and  the  aorta. 

F,  External  branches.     Two  for  each  ganglion,  very  different  from  each 

other;  one  large,  red,  pulpous,  and  going  to  the  intercostal  nerve; 
the  other  much  smaller,  white,  giving  off  no  twigs,  and  passing  from 
the  intercostal  to  the  ganglion. 

G,  Right  coronary  plexus.     Passes  between  the  pulmonary  artery  and 

the  aorta,  and  accompanies  the  anterior  coronary  artery. 
9 


6G 

H,  Left  coronary  plexus.  Passes  before  the  left  branch  of  the  pulmo- 
nary artery,  goes  to  the  posterior  side  of  the  heart,  and  accompanies 
the  left  coronary  artery. 

I,  Inferior  cervical  ganglion.     Placed  behind  the  vertebral  artery. 

J,  Inferior  twig.s.  Commonly  a  single  branch  communicating  with  the 
first  thoracic  oan2;lion. 

K,  External  threads.  Very  slender,  and  communicating  with  the  last 
cervical  and  the  last  two  dorsal  pairs  ;  some  filaments  pass  round  the 
subclavian  artery. 

L,  Internal  twigs.  Very  minute,  and  distributed  to  the  longus  colli,  upon 
the  anterior  part  of  the  spine :  some  of  them  descend  to  the  pulmo- 
nary plexus. 

M,  Anterior  threads.  Two  or  three  in  number,  constituting  the  inferior 
cardiac  nerves. 

N,  Middle  cervical  ganglion.  Placed  on  a  level  with  the  body  of  the 
fifth  or  sixth  cervical  vertebra,  and  covered  by  the  internal  jugular 
vein. 

O,  Interior  twigs.  Three  or  four  in  number,  all  passing  over  the  infe- 
rior cervical  ganglion. 

P,  External  twigs.  Vary  much  in  number,  and  give  off  ramifications 
communicating  with  the  cervical  pairs  and  the  phrenic  nerve. 

Q,  Superior  cervical  ganglion.  Situated  on  the  anterior  and  lateral  part 
of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  cervical  vertebrae. 

R,  Superior  branches.  Two  in  number,  and  placed  behind  the  internal 
carotid  artery. 

S,  Inferior  branch.  Rarely  double,  and  descends  upon  the  great  rectus 
muscle  as  far  as  the  middle  cervical  ganglion. 

T,  External  branches.  Their  number  very  variable  ;  they  communicate 
with  the  first,  second,  and  third  cervical  pair. 

U,  Submaxillary  ganglion.  Situated  upon  the  internal  side  of  the  sub- 
maxillary gland,  a  little  below  the  stylo-glossal  muscle. 

V,  Vidian  nerve.  A  branch  springing  from  the  posterior  side  of  the 
spheno-palatine  ganglion. 

W,  Naso-palatine  branch.  One  of  the  internal  branches  of  the  spheno- 
palatine ganglion,  entering  the  nasal  fossce  by  the  spheno-palatine 
foramen. 

X,  Spheno-palatine  ganglion.  Placed  in  the  summit  of  the  zygomatic 
fossa. 

Y,  Ophthalmic  ganglion.  Situated  in  the  orbit,  and  occupies  the  exter- 
nal side  of  the  optic  nerve. 

Z,  Auditory  nerve  and  membrane  of  the  tympanum,  containing,  within 
its  cavity,  four  small  bones,  viz :  the  stapes,  the  incus,  the  malleus, 
and  the  os  orbiculare 


G7 

1,  Renal  plexuses.  Furnished  by  threads  coming  from  the  solar  and 
coeliac  plexuses,  and  from  the  last  dorsal  ganglion,  the  first  lumbar, 
and  the  small  splanchnic  nerve. 

2  2,  Lumbar  ganglia.  Commonly  four  or  five  ;  the  first  corresponds 
with  the  body  of  the  first  lumbar  vertebra,  the  last  vs'ith  the  fifth. 

3,  Internal   branches.     Numerous  ;  go  downwards  and   inwards  to  the 

aorta,  where  they  are  lost  in  the  aortic  plexus. 

4,  External  branches.     Two  of  these,  at  least,  arise  from  each  ganglion; 

they  follow  a  course  more   or  less  flexuous  towards  the  anterior 
branches  of  the  lumbar  nerves. 

5,  Aortic   flexus.     Formed  by  threads  from  the   solar  plexus,  superior 

mesenteric,  renal,  small  splanchnic  nerve,  and  internal  branches  of 
the  lumbar  cranglia. 

The  "  ganglions,"  connected  with  the  great  sympathetic  nerve,  are  bo- 
dies composed  of  two  nervous  substances  ;  the  white  or  fibrous,  and  the 
gelatinous  or  pulpy,  into  which  the  first  is  plunged.  The  pulpy  matter 
of  the  ganglions  is  commonly  of  a  grey  color,  of  different  degrees  of  in- 
tensity ;  sometimes,  however,  it  has  a  yellowish,  a  redish,  or  a  whitish 
cast.  It  is  easily  distinguishable  from  the  nervous  filaments  which  it 
surrounds.  The  fibres  of  the  white  substance,  the  second  element  of  the 
ganglions,  anastomose  repeatedly  ;  they  also  cross  each  other  frequently  ; 
sometimes  in  every  direction,  or,  in  their  course,  parallel  with  that  of  the 
nerve  upon  which  the  ganglion  is  formed.  Ganglions  of  this  last  kind 
are  commonly  oval  shaped,  but  those  in  which  several  nerves  meet  and 
inosculate,  have,  for  the  most  part,  very  irregular  forms. 

"  The  nerves  frequently  emanate  from  distant  and  opposite  sources  to 
unite,  anastomose,  or  twine  together,  and  then  to  separate  and  run  off  in 
different  directions.  This  is  the  particular  arrangement  to  which  the 
term  plexus  is  applied." — Spurzheiin. 

In  regard  to  the  character  and  functions  of  the  great  sympathetic  nerve, 
its  ganglions,  and  the  nerves  that  issue  from  thein,  Bichat  says, — "  The 
ideas  of  anatomists  upon  this  important  nerve,  seem  to  me  very  little  ac- 
cordant with  what  nature  proclaims  to  be  just.  All  agree  in  representing 
it  as  a  medullary  cord,  extending  from  the  head  to  the  os  sacrum,  send- 
ing various  branches,  in  its  course,  to  the  neck,  the  chest,  and  the  abdo- 
men ;  having,  in  short,  a  distribution  analogous  to  the  spinal  nerve,  from 
which,  or  from  those  of  the  neck,  it  is  said  by  some  to  derive  its  origin. 
Whatever  the  name  chosen  to  designate  it  may  chance  to  be,  sympathe- 
tic, intercostal,  or  trisplanchnic,  the  mode  of  considering  it  will  still  be 
found  to  remain  unchanged. 

"  This  mode  I  regard  as  altogether  erroneous.  In  fact,  there  exists  no 
such  nerve,  as  these  names  are  used  to  signify.  That  which  is  taken 
for  a  nerve   is,  in  truth,  but  a  suit  of  comnun'rations  between  different 


68 

nervous  centres,  situated  at  various  distances  from  each  other.     These 

centres  are  the  ganglions,  scattered  through  the  different  regions  of  the 
body.  They  have  all  an  independent  and  isolated  action.  Each  is  a  par- 
ticular focus,  sending  a  multitude  of  ramifications,  to  carry  into  the  re- 
spective organs  the  irradiations  of  the  centre  whence  they  proceed." 

"  What  anatomist,"  he  continues,  "  has  not  been  struck  by  differences 
among  the  nerves  ?  Those  of  the  brain  are  larger,  whiter,  more  dense, 
less  numerous,  and  offering  few  varieties ;  whilst  extreme  tenuity,  great 
number,  especially  around  the  plexuses,  greyish  color,  peculiar  softness 
of  tissue,  frequently  accruing  varieties,  are,  on  the  other  hand,  the  distin- 
guishing characters  of  the  nerves  that  issue  from  the  ganglions.  The 
only  exception  in  either  are  in  the  branches  of  communication  between 
the  cerebral  nerves  and  in  a  few  of  the  twigs  that  unite  the  little  nervous 
centres." 

"  A  glance,"  says  Bichat,  "  enables  us  to  discover  the  greatest  differ- 
ence among  them  (the  ganglions.)  There  is  evidently  as  great  a  distinc- 
tion between  the  ganglions  and  the  nerves  that  issue  from  them,  as  there 
is  between  the  cerebral  nerves  and  the  brain  itself  There  is  difference 
of  consistency  and  other  outward  qualities,  and  there  is  difference  of  pro- 
perties." 

On  these  and  other  observations  of  Bichat  on  the  same  subject,  Spurz- 
heim  remarks,  that  "  notwithstanding  all  this,  the  opinion  in  regard  to 
the  use  of  the  ganglions,  which  Johnstone,  Bichat,  and  Reil  entertained, 
and  which  others  have  adopted  from  them,  is  by  no  means  exact.  They 
do  not  interrupt  the  reciprocal  influence  of  the  brain  and  nerves  of  the 
spinal  cord,  nor  of  the  brain  and  viscera  of  the  chest  and  belly,  either  in 
the  healthy  or  pathological  state  of  the  body.  They  most  certainly  do 
not  prevent  impressions  made  on  parts  supplied  with  nerves  from  them, 
or  diseased  sensations  of  the  viscera  from  being  felt.  On  the  contrary,  the 
ganglions  would  appear  essential  to  the  structure  of  the  nerves  of  sensa- 
tion. They,  however,  abstract  the  parts  they  furnish  with  nervous  en- 
ergy, from  the  influence  of  the  will.  They  also  originate  nervous  fibres, 
and  serve,  farther,  as  points  of  communication  between  different  nerves. 
Lastly,  as  the  existence  of  a  nervous  fluid  is  not  impossible,  nay,  as  in 
all  likelihood  such  a  fluid  does  exist,  the  ganglions  may  probably  aid  in 
its  secretion  or  evolution,  and  modify  its  circulation  or  distribution." 

Willis  and  many  of  the  old  anatomists  have  ascribed  to  the  ganglions 
the  secretion  of  what  they  call  the  vital  spirits. 

On  a  comparison  of  all  the  facts  which  have  come  to  my  knowledge  in 
regard  to  the  structure,  situation,  connection,  and  use  of  the  ganglions, 
connected  with  the  great  sympathetic  nerve,  1  have  no  doubt  they  do 
"evolve"  a  nervous  fluid,  and  have  none  but  the  fluid  they  evolve  is 
magnetic. 


FIG.    16. 


69 

i 

They  are  undoubtedly  nervous  centres,  and  consecutive  ma^netio 
poles,  and  each  a  particular  focus,  sending  a  multitude  of  ramifications  to 
conduct  into  the  respective  organs  the  irradiations  of  the  centre  from 
which  the  nerves  proceed,  to  maintain  Ly  the  action  of  the  magnetic 
forces  continued  motion  of  the  organs  of  the  body  and  other  structures 
with  which  they  are  connected.  They  are  elementary  organs  of  vegeta- 
tive life,  having  the  semilunar  ganglions  and  strong  magnetic  poles  resting 
on  the  pillars  of  the  diaphragm  fur  a  common  centre,  and  a  connection 
with  the  brain  and  cerebellum  by  the  great  sympathetic  nerve  at  n,  Fig.  7, 
which  completes  the  circuit  of  their  connection  with  the  brain,  cerebel- 
lum, organs  of  the  body,  and  other  structures. 

Bichat  divided  correctly  the  ganglions,  nerves,  and  plexuses  into  nu- 
merous apparatuses,  individually  necessary  to  the  offices  of  the  different 
organs  ;  and  Spurzheim,  from  his  knowledge  of  the  subject,  believed  that 
division  to  be  founded  in  nature.  The  nervous  masses  of  vegetative  life 
he  also  believed  were  independent  of  those  of  phrenic  life,  in  as  far  as  their 
existence  was  concerned,  and  also  recognised  their  communications  be- 
tween themselves,  and  with  the  masses  of  the  phrenic  functions. 


GANGLIONIC    SYSTEM    OF    PHRENIC    LIFE. 


Figure   16, 

Is  intended  to  show  at  one  view  the  situation  and  comparative  size 
of  the  ganglions  of  the  brain,  cerebellum,  medulla  oblongata,  and  spinal 
nerves. 

a  a,  Great  superior  ganglions — color,  redish  z^ey. 
b  6,  Great  inferior  ganglions — color,  bluish  white. 
c  e,  Cerebellar  ganglions — color,  bluish  white. 
i  i,  Olivary  ganglions — color,  bluish  white. 
hhh,  Ganglions  of  spinal  nerves. 
n  n,  Pyramidal  bodies — color,  bluish  white. 
0  o,  Restiform  bodies — color,  bluish  white. 
d  dy  Posterior  quadrigeminal  bodies — color,  bluish  white. 
c  c,  Anterior  quadrigeminal  bodies — color,  bluish  white. 
»,  Pineal  gland — color,  redish  grey. 
/,  Medulla  oblongata — color,  bluish  white. 
«,  Spineal  cord — color,  bluish  white. 
tJ,  Middle  cineriterous  portion  of  spinal  cord — color,  redish  grey. 


70 

The  ganglions  of  the  brain,  cerebellum,  and  spinal  nerves,  or  those  be- 
lon<^in<^  to  phrenic  life,  are  more  or  less  round  or  oval,  and  are  composed 
of  the  white  fibrous  and  cineriterous  substance,  the  latter  surrounding  the 
former  like  the  ganglions  of  vegetative  life,  except  the  great  superior  gan- 
glion, in  which  the  redish  grey,  cineriterous,  and  the  white  fibrous  sub- 
stance are  disposed  in  alternate  layers. 

The  former  arrangement  of  the  two  different  substances,  or  different 
kinds  of  matter  in  the  other  ganglions,  corresponds  with  the  arrangement 
of  the  same  kinds  of  matter  in  the  brain  and  cerebellum,  which  is  reversed 
in  the  crura,  medulla  oblongata,  and  spinal  cord.   (Fig.  6  and  15.) 

Physioloo;ists  have  given  us  no  light  on  the  subject  of  the  cause  of  such 
disposition  of  these  substances.  We,  however,  know  that  different  kinds 
of  matter  maintain  different  forces,  and  that  one  of  thece  forces  repels  and 
at  the  same  time  expands,  while  the  other  attracts  and  contracts.  We 
also  know  the  repulsive  force  diverges,  or  is  a  diverging  force,  (Fig.  13,) 
and  the  attractive  force  converges,  and  is,  therefore,  a  converging  force, 
(Fig.  14,)  and  corresponds  with  the  arrangement  of  the  fibres  of  the 
brain ;  and  as  they  are  good  conductors  of  the  magnetic  forces,  it  cannot 
require,  with  a  knowledge  of  all  these  facts,  a  very  great  effort  of  the  ima- 
gination to  see  that  the  diverging  fibres  may  radiate  from,  and  the  con- 
verging fibres  point  to,  a  pole  in  the  centre  of  the  brain. 

Assuming,  then,  that  the  different  kinds  of  matter  of  which  the  brain 
is  composed  is  imbued  with  these  forces,  then  the  order  in  which  they 
are  disposed,  necessarily  establishes  converging  lines  of  the  magnetic 
forces,  from  the  redish  grey  cineriterous  matter  in  the  surface  of  the  brain 
to  the  great  inferior  ganglions,  while  diverging  lines  of  the  forces  are  es- 
tablished between  the  redish  grey  matter  of  the  great  superior  ganglions, 
and  the  same  kind  of  matter  in  the  convolutions  ;  for  the  white  fibrous 
matter  in  the  centre  of  the  brain,  and  the  redish  grey  matter  in  its  cir- 
cumference, would  attract  each  other,  when  one  of  their  forces  would 
converge ;  while  the  redish  grey  matter  of  the  great  superior  ganglions, 
and  of  the  surface  of  the  brain,  would  repel  each  other,  when  their  oppo- 
site forces  would  diverge,  and  thus  correspond  with  the  converging  and 
diverging  fibres. 

The  action  of  the  diverging  and  converging  forces  may  be  demonstrated 
in  various  ways  ;  one  of  the  most  simple  of  which  is  their  action  on  iron 
filings,  when  attached  to  poles  of  the  same  and  of  opposite  denominations. 
When  attached  to  poles  of  the  same  denominations  they  repel  and  expand, 
as  seen  in  fig.  17,  but  when  attached  to  poles  of  opposite  denominations, 
they  attract  and  contract,  as  seen  in  fig.  18,  with  a  power  proportioned 
to  the  quantity  of  the  forces  in  the  spaces  they  occupy. 

There  can  be  no  dispute  about  these  facts,  either  in  regard  to  the  order 
in  which  the  different  kinds  of  matter  are  disposed  in  the  brain,  the  direc- 


FIG.    IT. 


FIG.  1 


FIG.    19. 


FIG    .20 


71 

tion  of  its  fibres,  or  the  action  of  these  forces,  which  demonstrate  their 
accordance,  with  the  necessary  arrangements,  to  form  a  pole  in  a  central 
part  of  the  brain  ;  for  they  are  subjects  of  the  plainest  occular  demonstra- 
tion, and  it  only  remains  to  show  a  connection  of  the  brain  with  these 
forces,  in  diiierent  and  extensive  surfaces,  to  demonstrate  the  necessary 
existence  of  one  or  more  poles  in  this  organ. 

In  studying  this  subject,  it  will  be  necessary  to  examine  the  different 
structures  of  the  body,  as  a  mechanist  does  a  mechine,  before  we  can  un- 
derstand either  the  kind  of  power  by  which  motion  is  produced  in  the 
human  system  or  the  sources  from  which  it  is  derived. 


EXCRETING    SYSTEM. 

On  viewing  the  human  frame,  we  find  it  covered  with  a  membranous 
complex  structure  called  the  skin.  Besides  three  membranes  which  are 
classed  under  the  general  term  skin  or  integuments,  there  are  found  in  it 
innumerable  minute  globular  bodies  called  papillary  glands.  These  little 
globate  bodies  are  found  to  be  highly  organized,  having  minute  arteries 
terminating,  and  minute  veins  commencing,  in  their  structure.  They  are 
fouild  also,  by  means  of  magnifying  glasses  of  great  power,  to  have  mi- 
nute ducts  issuing  from  them,  and  terminating  every  where  with  open 
orifices  on  the  surface  of  the  skin. 

On  an  examination  of  the  organs,  as  the  brain  and  spinal  cord,  eyes, 
heart,  lungs,  liver,  spleen,  pancreas,  kidneys,  cystis,  uterus,  stomach,  and 
intestines,  we  find  them  all,  without  a  solitary  exception,  covered  with  a 
kind  of  skin  called  a  serous  membrane,  in  which  is  inclosed  an  incalcula- 
ble number  of  minute  glands  or  elementary  organs,  with  ducts  termi- 
nating in  open  orifices  on  the  surfaces  of  these  membranes,  like  those  of 
the  common  covering  of  the  body.  The  glands  of  both  structures  are 
found,  on  an  examination  of  the  orifices  of  these  ducts,  to  excrete  an 
aqueous  or  watery  fluid,  by  which  these,  surfaces  are  constantly  main- 
tained in  a  humid  or  moist  state.  The  great  quantity  of  this  fluid  seen 
running  off"  from  the  skin,  and  its  accumulation  in  the  cavities  containing 
the  organs,  when  these  glands  are  excited  to  inordinate  action,  attest  both 
the  perfection  of  their  mechanism  and  their  fitness  for  their  specific  use. 

If  we  now  proceed  to  examine  the  membrane  which  lines  the  internal 
parts  of  the  body,  we  shall  find  it,  with  slight  modifications,  characterized 
by  the  same  structure  as  the  serous  membranes.  This  modification  prin- 
cipally consists  in  its  having  what  is  called  a  villous,  instead  of  a  serous 
surface,  like  the  serous  membranes.  We  find  the  whole  tract  of  the  ali- 
mentary canal,  including  the  mouth,  sesophagus,  stomach,  and  intestines, 
lined  with  this  membrane,  fB  well  as  the  internal  parts  of  every  organ. 


72 

On  a  minute  examination  of  the  structure  of  the  mucous  membranes,  we 
find  them,  like  the  skin  and  serous  membranes,  enclosing  numerous  little 
round  or  ova!  glands  or  villi,  as  they  are  termed,  having,  like  the  papil- 
lary glands  of  the  skin,  their  appropriate  arteries,  veins,  and  ducts  termi- 
nating with  open  orifices  on  the  surface.  They  are  farthei  characterized 
by  numerous  little  cavities,  crypts  or  follicles,  as  they  are  called,  which 
have  more  or  less  a  spheroidal  shape,  and  which  also  open  upon  the  sur- 
faces of  these  membranes.  These  ducts  and  follicles  are  found  to  be  fill- 
ed with  a  semi-fluid  or  mucus,  which  is  constantly  issuing  from  them, 
and  which  spreads  upon  these  membranous  surfaces. 

In  pursuing  this  subject,  we  have  thus  found  two  different  kinds  of  sur- 
faces disposed  in  two  different  ways,  and  thus  covered  with  two  different 
kinds  of  fluids ;  and  it  is  easy  to  see  that  there  must  have  been  some  ob- 
ject in  this  order  and  disposition  of  these  different  kinds  of  matter. 

On  investigating  the  nature  or  qualities  of  these  fluids,  it  is  found  that 
the  excretions  from  the  skin  and  serous  membranes  are  more  or  less  acid, 
and  those  from  the  mucous  membranes  more  or  less  alkaline.  They  are 
sometimes  so  strongly  acid  and  alkaline  as  to  excite  the  curiosity  of  the 
most  common  observer.  The  acid  is  found  to  be  the  muriatic  and  the 
alkali,  soda  and  muriate  of  soda  or  common  salt.  The  acids  and  alkalies 
which  possess  directly  opposite  properties,  and  have  at  the  same  time  the 
strongest  affinities  for  each  other,  are  universally  diffused  in  the  earth  as 
well  as  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms.  They  constitute  two 
great  and  principal  divisions  of  matter,  one  of  which,  the  acid,  for  the 
sake  of  distinction,  is  called  negative  matter,  and  the  other,  the  alkali, 
positive.  Now  it  is  satif<factorily  ascertained,  from  repeated  experi- 
ments, that  each  of  these  different  kinds  of  matter  gives  out  constantly  an 
innate  and  different  kind  of  force.  It  is  also  ascertained  in  the  same 
manner  that  the  alkaline  or  positive  matter  gives  out  the  negative  force, 
and  that  the  acidified  gives  out  the  positive.  The  positive  matter  then, 
on  the  internal  surfaces  of  the  body  and  organs,  is  constantly  giving  out 
the  negative  force,  and  the  negative  matter  on  the  external  surfaces  of  the 
body  and  organs,  the  positive  force.  Besides  the  immense  quantities  of 
these  forces  accumulated  on  the  different  surfaces  by  the  process  of  excre- 
tion, large  quantities  are  constantly  evolved  in  the  decomposition  of  food, 
in  the  process  of  digestion  ;  and  in  the  decomposition  of  the  air,  in  the 
process  of  breathing.  On  a  further  examination  of  the  human  structure, 
we  find  four  hundred  and  thirty-six  muscles  of  different  forms  disposed  in 
different  ways  for  the  purpose  of  producing  motion.  We  know  that  they 
are  formed  for  this  purpose,  for  we  can  see  that  some  of  them  expand, 
and  others  contract,  when  we  move  the  body  or  limbs.  For  when  we 
bend  an  arm,  we  find  that  the  muscles  on  the  outside  of  it  expand,  while 
those  on  the  inside  contract.     On  extendiag  the  arm,  we  find  this  order 


73 

reversed;  for  then  the  muscles  on  the  inside  expand,  while  those  on  the 
outside  contract  with  equal  force.  One  end  of  each  of  these  muscles  is 
attached  to  the  lower  part  of  the  bone  belonging  to  the  upper  part  of  the 
arm,  called  the  humerus,  and  the  other  ends  are  attached  to  the  lower  end  of 
the  bones  of  the  lower  part  of  the  arm,  near  the  wrist,  called  the  ulna  and 
radius  ;  so  that  while  the  lower  part  of  these  bones  is  pushed  on  one  side, 
when  the  muscles  of  that  side  are  expanded,  it  is  pulled  at  the  same  time 
on  the  opposite  side,  when  the  muscles  on  that  side  are  contracted  ;  and 
thus  motion  is  produced  by  the  simultaneous  action  of  these  muscles. 

Now  it  is  a  remarkable  fact,  that  every  one  of  these  four  hundred  and 
thirty-six  muscles  which  thus  produce  motion  in  different  parts  of  the 
body,  is  covered  with  a  membrane,  the  outer  surface  of  which  has  a  se- 
rous, and  the  inner  side  a  mucous  surface  ;  hence  these  membranes  are 
called  mucO'Serous  membranes.  All  these  different  surfaces,  then,  like 
those  of  the  skin  and  membranes  of  other  parts  of  the  body,  are  covered 
with  different  kinds  of  matter,  presenting  together  immense  surfaces,  from 
which  constantly  issue  two  forces  of  different  kinds. 

The  reader  who  has  seen  a  common  galvanic  battery,  cannot  fail  to  ob- 
serve that  this  arrangement  of  surfaces  corresponds  with  that  of  the  dif- 
ferent metallic  surfaces  of  the  battery.  He  will  also  notice  that  these 
forces  thus  maintained  on  these  membranous  surfaces,  exactly  correspond 
with  those  necessarily  maintained  on  different  surfaces  of  the  battery. 
The  two  forces  are  conducted  from  the  two  metallic  surfaces  to  the  poles 
of  the  battery  by  two  metallic  wires,  and  if  we  can  now  find  conductors 
to  convey  the  forces  from  the  skin  and  different  membranous  surfaces  to 
poles,  the  resemblance  will  be  complete  and  satisfactory. 

In  pursuing  this  subject  we  first  find  numerous  minute  threads,  called 
nerves,  penetrating  the  little  glands  of  the  skin,  serous  and  mucous  mem- 
branes, and  every  fibre  of  a  muscle.  On  tracing  these  nerves,  we  see 
them  uniting  together  and  increasing  in  size  in  proportion  to  the  distance 
from  these  surfaces,  and  at  length  conjoining  with  the  brain  and  spinal 
cord.  The  spinal  cord  is  formed  into  four  columns,  united  first  with  a 
broad  base,  and  then  with  the  brain 

These  forces  are,  therefore,  conducted  from  the  skin  and  membranous 
surfaces  and  concentrated  in  the  brain  to  form  poles,  or  a  motive  power 
to  put  in  motion  this  apparently  complicated  yet  really  simple  machinery. 

This  structure,  arrangement,  and  order  of  the  different  parts  of  the  hu- 
man body,  were  well  known  to  Malpighi,  Ruych,  Haller,  Hunter,  and 
Bichat,  and  are  recognized  by  every  anatomist  of  the  present  age,  and  now 
present  to  our  view  a  galvanic  battery  altogether  superior  to  any  ever 
made  by  man. 

The  forces  elicited  from  different  kind  of  matter,  and  known  by  the 
names  of  electricity,  magnetism,  and  galvanism,  are  now  believed,  by  sci- 
10 


74 

entific  men,  to  be  the  same,  their  effects  only  being  varied  by  common 
causes  ;  and  there  can  now  be  no  doubt  ihat  they  are  innate  in  every  kind 
of  matter,  either  in  an  organized  or  unorganized  state,  in  quantities  propor- 
tioned to  the  density  of  the  matter  or  other  abiUty  to  retain  them  ;  the 
quantity  obtained  from  even  one  drop  of  water  having  been  found  suf- 
ficient to  put  a  small  battery  in  motion. 

The  common  galvanic  battery  was  first  constructed  by  Galvani,  and 
hence  called  the  galvanic  battery,  fig.  19. 

It  is  in  two  parts.  A  is  the  battery,  and  B  B  the  poles  connected  with 
the  battery  A  by  two  copper  wires  C  C.  The  battery  is  constructed  with 
alternate  circles  or  layers  of  sheet  copper  and  sheet  zinc.  The  circles  of 
copper  are  connected  at  D,  and  the  circles  of  zinc  at  E.  These  connec- 
tions terminate  in  thimbles,  in  which  mercury  is  placed,  to  cover  the 
ends  of  the  copper  wires,  and  connect  them  with  the  magnet. 

The  poles  of  the  battery  BB  are  made  of  round  soft  iron,  bent  in  the 
form  of  a  horse-shoe,  and  then  wound  with  six  coils  of  copper  wire,  cov- 
ered first  with  oiled  silk,  and  terminating  in  thimbles,  as  seen  at  F  F.  If 
the  battery  A  be  now  placed  in  a  jar  of  water  in  which  a  mixture  of  sul- 
phuric and  nitric  acid  has  been  poured,  the  acid  begins  to  act  upon  the 
circles  of  copper  and  zinc,  and  the  two  latent  forces  being  liberated  by 
this  action,  are  attracted  separately  along  the  opposite  wires  to  the  poles 
of  the  battery.  The  pole  which  is  connected  with  the  copper  circles 
will  be  positive,  and  that  connected  with  the  zinc  will  be  negative. 

Iron  and  steel  rings,  discs,  and  iron  and  steel  of  any  other  form  can  be 
magnetised  on  the  poles  of  such  a  battery,  and  one  or  more  poles  commu- 
cated  from  them  to  these  metallic  instruments,  and  from  these  to  others. 

In  pursuing  the  investigations  which  resulted  in  an  entire  conviction 
of  the  necessary  existence  of  a  pole  in  the  centre  of  the  brain,  strong  sus- 
picions were  excited  of  the  existence  of  a  secondary  pole,  in  each  lobe  of 
the  cerebellum,  from  the  direction  of  the  fibres  to  their  ganglions,  and 
from  the  manner  in  which  they  radiated  from  them,  and  also  of  the  exis- 
tence of  a  secondary  pole  in  each  of  the  anterior  lobes  of  the  cerebrum, 
from  the  convergance  of  the  convolutions,  on  one  side,  and  their  promi- 
mence  on  the  other,  in  the  organs  of  casuality  ;  fig.  20. 

The  brain  and  cerebellum  would  then,  if  these  suspicions  were  well 
founded,  present  the  phenomenon  of  a  strong  pole  in  the  centre  between 
its  middle  lobes,  and  in  the  third  ventricle,  and  four  secondary  poles  in  its 
circumference ;  and  as  no  example  of  such  an  arrangement  of  poles  could 
be  found  in  the  whole  range  of  the  science  of  magnetism,  it  rendered  such 
an  arrangement  of  them  in  the  brain  improbable.  A  disc  of  saw  plate, 
however,  eight  inches  in  diameter,  and  the  tenth  of  an  inch  thick,  with  a 
round  hole  in  the  middle,  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  Avhich  would  represent  a 


F  I  (i .  21 


^^<^;^§0^§§iMlJii/!^>>^ 


FIG.    2  2  - 


75 

middle  horizontal  section  of  the  brain,  was  now  submitted  to  actual  expe- 
riment, in  the  following  manner  : — 

The  middle  of  the  plate  or  disc  was  carefully  let  down  in  a  perpendicu- 
lar direction  on  the  middle  of  the  positive  pole  of  the  galvanic  battery, 
and  after  having  remained  there  a  moment,  was  raised  from  its  position  in 
a  perpendicular  direction,  turned  over,  and  the  opposite  side  of  the  plate 
placed  upon,  and  then  removed  from  the  negative  pole  of  the  battery  in 
the  same  manner. 

The  plate  was  then  covered  with  white  paper,  and  fine  iron  filings  were 
strewed  over  it,  through  a  fine  sieve,  when  they  were  immediately  ar- 
ranged by  the  forces  in  the  plate  in  the  manner  seen  in  fig.  21. 

This  experiment  was  repeated  eleven  times  on  plates  of  from  four  to 
fifteen  inches  in  diameter,  and  always  with  the  same  result.  It  may 
therefore  be  inferred  to  be  constant.  It  presents  the  double  phenomenon 
of  a  strong  pole  in  the  centre  of  the  open  space,  in  the  centre  of  the  plate, 
and  four  secondary  poles  or  satelites  in  the  circumference  ;  corresponding 
precisely  with  those  before  traced  in  the  brain  and  cerebellum. 

On  applying  the  dipping  needle  to  these  poles,  they  were  found  to  be  of 
different  denominations.  Those  in  the  circumference  at  cc,  were  found 
to  be  positive,  and  those  at  dd  negative  poles.  When,  however,  the  or- 
der of  magnetising  on  the  different  poles  of  the  battery  was  reversed,  the 
character  of  the  pole  in  the  centre  was  changed  from  a  positive  to  a  nega- 
tive pole,  and  the  positions  of  the  positive  and  negative  poles  in  the  cir- 
cumference were  also  changed ;  the  positive  occupying  the  positions  of 
the  negative,  and  the  negative  those  of  the  positive  poles,  as  seen  in  fig. 
22.  The  secondary  poles  in  the  circumference  of  the  brain  must  be, 
therefore,  of  opposite  denominations,  in  the  order  of  those  seen  in  the  disc. 

The  magnetic  axis  of  the  positive  and  that  of  the  negative  secondary 
poles,  cross  each  other  in  the  centre  of  the  open  space  in  the  inside  of  the 
disc,  each  forming  two  sides  of  an  inverted  plane  triangle,  the  base  of 
each  of  which,  from  the  form  of  the  disc,  necessarily  forming  a  spherical 
side  of  a  triangle,  and  as  the  latter  is  in  the  circle  of  the  disc,  and  as  this 
disc  is  a  middle  section  of  a  hollow  sphere,  it  necessarily  follows  that  when 
a  hollow  sphere  or  body,  more  or  less  round,  is  magnetised  in  the  same 
manner,  inverted  cones  are  formed.  For  as  the  disc  is  a  middle  section 
of  a  sphere,  so  are  the  plane  and  spherical  sides  of  the  triangles  middle 
sections  of  inverted  cones. 

The  diverging  and  converging  forces  of  the  pole  in  the  centre  of  the 
disc,  act  constantly  on  the  same  kinds  of  forces  of  the  secondary  poles  in 
its  circumference,  according  to  their  laws,  in  a  contrary  direction,  and 
consequently  arrange  the  magnetised  iron  filings,  around  the  latter  in  cir- 
cles, as  seen  in  fig.  21. 

On  a  careful  measurement  of  the  angles  of  lines,  drawn  from  the  centre 


76 

of  the  secondary  poles  of  one  denomination,  in  one  hemisphere,  to  the  se- 
condary poles  of  an  opposite  denomination,  in  another  hemisphere,  from 
the  median  line  between  the  two  hemispheres,  in  well  formed  brains, 
they  were  found  to  correspond  very  nearly  with  the  angles  of  the  magne- 
tic axis  in  the  disc,  from  a  line  drawn  from  a  to  b,  fig.  23.  (See  AAFF, 
fig.  5,  DD  ss,  fig.  10,  and  BB  CC,  fig.  16.) 


Figure  23, 

The  brain  is  seen  placed  on  its  base,  and  laid  open  by  an  incision  along 
the  median  line,  through  the  corpus  callosum,  the  substance  between 
the  great  superior  and  great  inferior  ganglions  of  each  hemisphere,  and 
medulla  oblongata.     The  primary  bundles  of  fibres  of  the  cerebellum  cut 
away,  to  show  its  ganglions  and  vegetative  structure  ;  and  a  part  of  the 
anterior  portion  of  the  brain  also  cut  away,  to  show  its  fibres,  cut  at  right 
angles  with  their  direction. 
BB,  Anterior  portion  of  the  brain. 
CC,  Ganglions  of  the  cerebellum. 
EE,  Corpus  callosum. 
A,  Third  venticle. 
a  a,  Anterior  quadrigeminal  bodies. 
c  c,  Posterior  quadrigeminal  bodies. 
/,  Connection  of  posterior  quadrigeminal  bodies, 
c,  Connection  of  the  great  sympathetic  nerve. 
dd,  Division  of  the  striated  bodies  into  two  parts,  to  show  the  passage  of 

the  great  bundles  of  fibres,  b. 
s,  Pineal  gland  with  its  anterior  cords. 
w,  Interior  of  fourth  ventricle. 
n  n,  Great  inferior  ganglions. 
pp,  Great  superior  ganglions. 
X  X,  White  fibres  in  fourth  ventricle. 
V,  Posterior  commissure. 
r,  Middle  or  soft  commissure. 
0,  Anterior  commissure. 


SECRETING    SYSTEM. 

I  have  in  the  previous  part  of  this  chapter  given  a  concise  view  of  the 
motive  system,  which  was  formed  for  the  purposes  of  motion.  The  ex- 
cretions, it  will  have  been  seen,  are  attracted  from  the  blood  and  then  re- 
pelled from  the  body.     On  a  farther  examination  of  the  human  structure, 


FIG.  23. 


FIG.  2  4. 


FIG.  26, 


FIG.  25. 


FIG  27. 


77 

we  find  another  system  in  which  chyle  is  attracted  from  the  mass  in  the 
intestines  ;  lymph,  from  the  lymphatic  glands,  and  fluids  from  the  sto- 
mach as  well  as  from  every  other  cavity  of  whatever  size  or  kind  in  the 
whole  structure,  and  conveyed  to  the  heart.  We  find,  therefore,  one  for- 
mative system  in  which  the  fluids  are  attracted  to  the  centre  of  the  body, 
and  a  motive  system  by  which  they  are  repelled  from  it. 

The  existence  of  such  a  system  as  this  is  indispensible,  not  only  to  fur- 
nish the  fluids  necessary  for  the  support  and  growth  of  the  body,  but  to 
supply  the  waste  of  those  that  are  necessarily  repelled  from  it,  to  maintain 
its  different  surfaces  in  positive  and  negative  states,  for  the  purposes  of 
motion. 

This  system  consists  of  a  vast  number  of  minute  vessels  taking  their 
origin  with  patulous  or  expanded  orifices  in  almost  every  part  of  the  skin, 
serous  and  mucous  membranes,  and  in  nearly  all  the  most  minute,  as  well 
as  the  largest  cavities  of  the  body.  They  unite  and  increase  in  size  as 
they  advance  from  these  surfaces  and  cavities,  in  two  divisions,  one  from 
the  upper,  and  the  other  from  the  lower  part  of  the  body,  and  at  length 
unite  with  two  large  veins  very  near  the  heart  called  venee  cavae.  In 
their  course  to  these  veins  they  pass  into  and  then  out  of  a  great  number 
of  glands,  varying  in  size  from  that  of  a  very  small  seed  to  a  large  bean, 
which  attract  from  the  blood  and  mix  with  the  fluids  in  these  vessels  a 
semi  fluid  called  lymph,  and  are  hence  called  lymphatic  glands.  When 
these  are  viewed  through  a  magnifying  glass,  we  can  see  the  vessels  and 
the  nerves  b  b  and  c  c,  penetrating  the  gland  on  one  side  and  passing  out 
of  it  on  the  other,  as  seen  in  fig.  24. 

The  lymph  secreted  by  these  glands  is  very  thin,  under  the  influence 
of  the  natural  temperature  of  the  body  in  health,  but  when  it  is  reduced 
the  lymph  becomes  more  or  less  thick,  according  to  the  amount  of  the 
reduction,  and  its  motion  in  these  minute  vessels  become  more  or  less 
difficult.  Some  of  these  vessels  become  entirely  obstructed  in  this  way, 
and  the  lymph  secreted  by  many  of  these  glands,  is  accumulated  in  them 
in  consequence  of  these  obstructions  by  which  the  glands  themselves  are 
expanded. 

By  these  accumulations  the  glands  are  sometimes  enlarged  in  various 
parts  of  the  body,  to  the  size  of  that  seen  in  the  figure,  before  they  cease 
secreting,  when  the  accumulated  lymph  begins  to  harden  down,  and 
sometimes  in  a  few  weeks  or  a  few  months  becomes  as  hard  as  old  cheese, 
and  looks,  as  well  as  cuts  like  it.  On  opening  the  gland  with  a  scalpel 
in  this  state,  its  interior  presents  a  beautiful  conglobate  arrangement  of  the 
acini,  as  seen  in  fig.  25,  and  as  the  same  is  seen  through  a  magnefying 
glass,  fig.  26. 

The  organization,  it  will  be  seen,  is  geometrical,  and  constitutes  a  beau- 
tiful comparison  with  the  conglobate  form  of  snow,  as  seen  through  a  mi- 


croscope,  (  Fig.  27,)  constructed  geometrically  in  the  atmosphere  with  the 
same  forces  that  produce  motion  in  the  gland.  The}-  are  no  doubt  magne- 
tised bodies,  having,  like  the  brain,  a  pole  in  the  centre  and  four  satelites 
in  their  circumference. 

There  are  two  classes  of  these  glands,  in  regard  to  size  and  situation, 
which  are  connected  with  the  brain,  through  the  spinal  cord,  by  the 
nerves  of  sensation,  while  the  mucous  glands  of  the  mucous  and  muco- 
serous  membranes  are  connected  with  it,  through  the  same  channel,  by 
the  m.otor  nerves  or  nerves  of  motion.  The  lymphatic  glands  of  the 
laro-est  class  are  situated  in  places  near  the  structures  to  which  they  be- 
long,  and  are  called  by  different  names,  according  mostly  with  the  names 
given  to  the  places  in  which  they  are  found,  while  their  satelites,  with 
which  they  are  connected,  or  those  of  the  smallest  and  most  numerous 
class  are  situated  in  the  substance  of  the  structures. 

The  thymus  gland  of  the  first  class  is  situated  under  the  sternum  or 
breast  bone, — assists  in  the  office  of  secretion  for  the  infant,  and  disap- 
pears at  an  age  when  every  other  part  of  the  animal  system  becomes  per- 
fectly developed.  The  pineal  gland  is  situated  in  the  brain,  glandula 
concatenata;  or  series  of  glands  in  the  neck,  the  thyroid  gland  upon  the 
cricord  cartilage  in  the  lower  and  front  part  of  the  neck,  the  bronchial 
around  the  bronchial  tubes,  the  cardiac  near  the  heart,  the  axillary  in  the 
armpits,  the  dorsal  along  the  dorsal,  and  lumbar  along  the  lumbar  verte- 
brae, the  mesenteric  in  the  mesentery,  the  pelvic  in  the  pelvis,  the  sacral 
in  the  sacrum,  the  inguinal  in  the  groin,  and  popliteal  in  the  ham,  &c. 

The  series  of  these  glands  along  the  neck  with  some  of  their  satelites, 
together  with  the  principal  nerves  of  the  neck  and  face,  with  which  they 
are  connected,  and  which  continue  along  the  whole  length  of  the  spine 
under  the  names  of  dorsal,  lumbar,  and  sacral  glands,   before  noticed, 
may  be  seen  in  fig.  28. 
a.  Porta  dura  of  the  seventh  nerve. 
6,  Branches  ascending  along  the  side  of  the  head, 
c.  Branches  to  the  eyelids. 

rf,  Branches  to  the  muscles  which  move  the  nostrils. 
e.  Branches  to  the  side  of  the  neck  and  throat. 
^,  Connections  formed  with  the  cervical  nerves. 
a,  Par  vagum,  or  pneumogastric  nerve  distributed  to  the  larynx,  lungs, 

heart,  stomach,  &c. 
h,  Spinal  accessary  nerve, 
i.  Ninth  nerve  or  lingualis. 
j,  Sympathetic  nerve. 
k,  Laryngeal  nerve. 
/,  Recurrent  laryngeal  nerve- 
w,  Frontal  nerve,  a  branch  of  the  fifth 


FIG.   28. 


79 

n,  Superior  maxillary  nerve,  a  branch  of  the  fifth. 

o,  Maiadibula  labialis,  a  branch  of  the  fifth. 

p^  Temporal  branches  of  the  second  division  of  the  fifth. 

9,  Sub  occipital  nerve  ;  the  first  of  the  spine. 

r,  Second  cervical  nerve. 

/,  Third  cervical  nerve. 

On  an  examination  of  the  fluid  that  has  passed  through  the  lymphatic 
glands  on  its  way  to  the  heart,  with  a  magnifying  glass,  it  is  found  to 
contain  a  great  number  of  minute  round  bodies  of  a  white  or  milky  color, 
which  are  accumulated  in  the  blood  and  form  its  globules.  And  as  every 
part  of  the  body  is  found  to  be  made  up  of  minute  round  bodies  connected 
together  by  connecting  substance,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  they  are 
formed  in  these  conglobate  glands,  after  the  pattern  of  their  acini. 

These  positive  secretions,  with  the  chyle  from  the  intestines,  are  at- 
tracted to  the  heart,  and  then  repelled  from  it  through  the  arteries  to  be 
deposited  for  the  renewal  and  growth  of  the  body,  as  well  as  for  supply- 
ing the  excreting  system  with  the  necessary  fluids  for  excretion,  and  the 
secreting  system  for  secretion. 

A  full  and  constant  supply  of  these  secretions  or  round  elementary  bo- 
dies and  connecting  substance,  was  necessary  to  maintain  the  body  in  a 
healthy  state,  and  as  the  supply  through  these  glands  was  liable  to  inter- 
ruptions from  various  causes,  a  large  organ,  called  the  spleen,  was  con- 
structed with  acini  to  secrete  the  same  fluids,  and  furnish  at  all  times  the 
necessary  quantities  for  the  exigencies  of  the  body. 

We  sometimes  eat,  and  at  the  same  or  other  times,  drink  more  than  is 
necessary  to  supply  the  wants  of  the  secreting  and  excreting  systems,  or 
more  than  they  can  secrete  or  excrete  ;  and  as  this  excess  or  superabund- 
ance must,  with  that  which  was  necessary,  be  attracted  into  the  circu- 
lating mass  of  fluids,  it  was  necessary  to  have  other  organs  to  separate 
the  excess  of  positive  and  negative  matter  ;  for  under  other  circum- 
stances the  body  would  be  soon  overloaded  with  matter,  and  motion 
would  consequently  cease. 

The  liver  was  therefore  formed  to  separate  the  superabundance  of  po- 
sitive, and  the  kidneys  the  superabundance  of  negative  matter. 

The  positive  matter  thus  excreted  might  be,  and  is  accumulated  first 
in  a  cistern  or  gall  bladder,  and  then  conveyed  through  a  tube  into  the 
intestines,  and  mixed  with  other  positive  matter  there ;  but  it  would  not 
do  to  have  the  negative  matter  excreted  by  the  kidneys,  and  accumulated 
in  its  cistern  or  bladder,  conveyed  through  a  tube  into  the  intestines,  be- 
cause it  was  necessary  to  keep  them  constantly  covered  with  positive 
matter,  and  it  was  consequently  conveyed  to  the  surface  in  another  di- 
rection. 

Plants  have  a  similar  secreting  system  ;  the  fibrous  or  hairy  roots  of 


so 

plants  are  vessels  with  open  orifices,  through  which  nutritious  matters 
are  attracted  from  the  earth  to  the  bulbs  or  poles  of  their  roots,  and  are 
thence  repelled  in  other  vessels  through  the  whole  of  the  cellular  and 
vascular  tissues  of  the  plant,  tertiiinating  in  the  vasa  propria  and  conglo- 
bate glands,  which  secrete  the  peculiar  fluids  of  the  species. 

These  fluids  are  magnetised  and  changed  from  the  positive  to  the  ne- 
gative state  in  the  leaves  and  buds  or  lungs  of  the  plants,  which  attract 
and  repel  the  air  through  appropriate  tubes,  and  are  then  attracted  to 
their  bulbs  to  be  again  repelled  from  them  as  before,  and  deposited  for 
their  nourishment  and  growth. 

Plants  have  also  an  excreting  system  in  their  skin  or  bark,  as  well  as 
in  membranes,  similar  to  those  of  animals,  and  while  those  on  the  surface 
are  maintained  like  those  of  animals  in  a  negative  state,  those  of  their  in- 
ternal surfaces  are  maintained  in  a  positive  state.  Their  excretions  from 
their  globate  glands  in  the  bark  and  membranes,  are  like  those  of  the  dif- 
ferent species  of  animals  different  in  different  species. 

The  calyx  and  stalks  of  the  moss  rose,  as  well  as  of  many  others  of 
the  same  species,  are  more  or  less  covered  with  prominent  glands,  from 
which  is  repelled  an  aromatic  fluid. 

Their  fragrance  or  perfume,  and  that  of  the  different  kinds  of  willow, 
with  the  geraniums,  as  well  as  other  nectariferous  flowers  of  the  higher 
orders  of  plants,  are  like  those  of  the  higher  orders  of  animals,  the  pro- 
ductions of  their  excreting  systems,  and  form,  like  theirs,  a  delightful 
contrast  with  the  disgusting  odors  from  the  same  systems  in  the  noxious 
and  lower  orders  of  the  vegetable,  as  well  as  of  the  animal  kingdom. 


ai 


CHAPTER    IV, 


SENSATION    AND    MOTION. 


The  form  and  developemetit  of  the  convolutions  of  the  brain  differ  more 
or  less,  not  only  in  the  different  hemispheres,  but  in  different  individuals, 
like  the  different  forms  of  the  body,  head,  ears,  eyes,  and  nose. 

The  nerves  are  connected  with  the  brain,  medulla  oblongata,  and  spinal 
cord  by  a  broad  base,  (Fig.  3,  p.  24  ;  fig.  4,  p.  25  ;  fig.  5,  p.  42  ;  fig.  10, 
p.  48  ;  fig.  16,  p.  69,)  and  with  the  convolutions,  slvin,  membranes,  and 
muscles  by  fibres  or  small  filaments.  The  nerves  are  therefore  the  cords 
of  communication  between  the  convolutions,  skin,  membranes,  and  mus- 
cles, and  are  good  conduclors  of  the  megnetic  forces,  while  the  other  parts 
of  the  body  are  non-conductors  of  these  forces,  and  these  are  precisely 
the  necessary  conditions  and  arrangements  for  the  purpose  of  accumulating 
these  forces  in  the  centre,  and  a  knowledge  of  the  sensations  in  the  con- 
volutions in  the  circumference  of  the  brain. 

The  elements  of  sensation  are  produced  by  a  modification  of  the  mag- 
netic forces  in  the  ganglions  of  phrenic  life,  and  are  repelled  to  the  skin 
and  serous  surfaces  of  the  body  by  one  set  of  nerves  of  sensation,  while 
the  sensations,  produced  in  the  skin  and  serous  surfaces,  are  attracted  to 
the  convolutions  by  another.  These  ganglions  were  consequently  distri- 
buted to  the  proper  situations  to  produce  such  results. 

If  we  divide  the  posterior  branch  D,  of  the  spinal  nerve  B,  fig.  4,  p.  25, 
or  a  branch  of  the  nerve,  sensation  cea?.es  m  the  part  to  which  it  is  distri- 
buted, but  the  power  of  motion  continues  the  same  as  before.  If,  how- 
ever, we  divide  the  motor  branch  of  the  nerve  C,  the  power  of  motion 
ceases  also.  So  if  we  first  divide  the  branch  C,  or  any  of  its  branches, 
the  power  of  motion  ceases  in  the  part  to  which  it  is  distributed,  but 
11 


82 

sensation  continues  the  same  as  before.  They  are  therefore  the  nerves 
of  sensation  and  voluntary  motion,  and  are  common  to  all  animals  from 
the  worm  up  to  man.  By  them  we  feel  and  move, — feel  pain  and  plea- 
sure, and  recede  from  one  or  advance  to  the  other,  according  to  the  incli- 
nation excited  by  the  sensation. 

Inclinations,  agreeable  or  disagreeable,  are  concomitant  of  and  belong 
to  the  opposite  qualities  of  the  sensations,  like  the  expansions  to  the  re- 
pulsions and  the  contractions  to  the  attractions,  and  they  follow  them  in 
the  same  order. 

Sensation,  inclination,  motion,  and  form  are  then,  in  this  order,  the  at- 
tributes of  these  male  and  female  forces,  and  are  the  agents  by  which  all 
nature  is  formed  and  animated ;  by  which  the  stars,  sun,  earth,  planets, 
and  their  satelites  were  formed,  animated,  and  are  moved  in  orbits  with 
unerring  precision,  and  by  which  all  the  orders,  genera,  species  and  va- 
rieties of  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms  were  formed  with  a  preci- 
sion, and  adorned  with  a  beauty  that  defies  imitation. 

Nothing  can,  therefore,  equal  the  adaptation  of  these  forces  to  produce 
such  results  ;  for  besides  their  unlimited  power,  which  can  make  a  world 
tremble  like  a  leaf,  the  great  velocity  of  their  motions  and  their  great  and 
almost  inconceivable  tenuity,  enable  them  to  penetrate  the  most  minute 
orifices,  and  construct  an  infinite  variety  of  bodies  of  every  form  and  size, 
and  produce  motion  in  the  smallest  with  the  same  geometrical  accuracy 
as  in  the  largest  structures. 

There  are  thirty-nine  pair  of  nerves  distributed  through  the  body,  for 
different  and  specific  purposes  ;  and  as  an  organ  is  supposed  to  be  requir- 
ed for  the  fulfilment  of  each,  there  must  be  in  that  case  thirty-nine  organs 
of  the  brain  and  cerebellum,  including  the  eyes,  nose,  and  ears,  and  is 
supposed  to  be  a  maximum  number  which  necessarily  places  man  at  the 
head  of  the  animal  creation. 


Observations  by  Dr.  F.  J.  V.  Broussais,  Member  of  the  Institute  of 
France,  Professor  to  the  Faculty  of  Medicine  at  Paris,  &c.,  &c.,  on 
THE  Organ  and  Propensity  of  Amativeness.  Extracted  from  his 
Cours  de  Phrenologie.  Bailliere,  Paris  and  London,  1836  ;  8vo.,  p.  164. 

"  Professor  Broussais,  after  describing  the  cerebellum  and  the  functions 
ascribed  to  it  by  Dr.  Gall,  whose  opinions  he  adopts,  as  being  supported 
by  his  own  observations,  proceeds,  on  page  164  of  his  Cours  de  Phreno- 
logie, as  follows  : — 

The  vivisectors,  or  those  who  practise  experiments  on  living  animals, 
have  considered  the  cerebellum  as  the  regulator  of  muscular  movements. 
They  found  on  the  assertion,  that  when  the  cerebellum  is  injured  by  cut- 


S3 

ting  slices  out  of  it,  the  muscular  movements  become  disordered,  the  ani- 
mal can  no  longer  direct  them  according  to  its  will,  or  according  to  the 
end  which  it  appears  to  have  in  view ;  but  similar  results  are  obtained 
when  sections  are  cut  away  from  the  base  of  the  brain,  towards  the  quad- 
rigeminal  tubercles  for  example;  in  a  word,  at  the  points  where  the 
principal  nerves  of  muscular  movement  unite. 

I  acknowledge  that  I  do  not  comprehend  the  meaning  of  the  function 
ascribed  to  the  cerebellum,  expressed  in  these  terms — the  regulator  of 
muscular  movements.  In  aid  of  what  faculty  does  the  cerebellum  regulate 
these  movements  ?  Is  it  for  the  intellect,  for  the  will  ?  This  is  not 
proved.  The  will  regulates  motion  in  the  infant  as  well  as  in  the  adult, 
in  the  eunuch  and  in  the  entire  man  ;  and  yet  the  cerebellum  differs  much 
in  these  different  cases.  I  know  that  it  may  be  alleged  that  it  executes 
both  functions ;  that,  in  point  of  fact,  it  diminishes  in  volume  when  it  no 
longer  excites  to  generation,  but  that  it  preserves  sufficient  dimensions  to 
regulate  movements.  I  do  not  deny  it  to  exert  an  influence  on  the  volun- 
tar3'  movements,  as  will  immediately  be  seen  ;  I  mean  to  prove  only  that 
this  is  not  its  sole  function,  and  that  it  exerts  a  considerable  influence  on 
the  act  of  generation. 

Does  it  regulate  muscular  movements  in  reference  to  the  fulfilment  of 
its  own  functions  .'  I  believe  that  it  does,  under  certain  conditions.  This 
kind  of  regulating  power,  then,  would  be  nothing  more  than  a  prerogative 
belonging  to  it  in  relation  to  the  generative  functions  ;  on  this  point  I 
shall  enter  into  some  explanations.  I  have  observed  in  some  animals — 
in  fowls,  for  example — that  a  blow  inflicted  on  the  nape  of  the  neck, 
makes  the  animal  draw  back ;  makes  it  walk  backwards  sometimes  for 
several  seconds.  Some  diseases  of  the  cerebellum  produce  the  ten- 
dency to  fall  backwards.  A  young  man,  in  whom  this  organ  was 
affected,  in  consequence  of  solitary  erotic  excesses,  felt  himself  inclined  to 
draw  backwards,  and  occasionally  fell  backwards.  But  do  these  facts 
prove  that  the  cerebellum  is  the  regulator  of  the  muscles  in  all  cases  ? 
They  would  rather  lead  us  to  think  that  this  organ  specially  exerts  an  in- 
fluence on  the  extensor  muscles  of  the  head,  on  those  of  the  spine,  those 
of  the  pelvis,  and  of  the  organs  contained  in  it,  which  are  seen  to  enter 
into  great  activity  in  the  act  of  copulation ;  in  short,  on  the  muscles  of 
which  the  organ  makes  the  greatest  use  in  executing  its  generative  func- 
tion. I  can  positively  affirm,  that  the  capacity  for  regulating  the  muscu- 
lar movements,  or  manual  dexterity,  or  dexterity  of  any  kind,  are  not  at 
all  in  relation  to  the  cerebellum.  I  have  positive  evidence  that  men  pos- 
sessing a  large  cerebellum  can  be  extremely  awkward. 

There  is  another  organ,  that  of  constructiveness,  which  appears  to  ex- 
ert a  much  greater  influence  over  the  regularity  of  voluntary  movements, 
and  to  which  manual  dexterity  appears  to  belong.     We  shall  study  it  in 


84 

a  subsequent  part  of  our  course.     The  organ  of  resistance  may  be  men- 
tioned also  as  conducing  to  this  effect. 

Let  us,  however,  consider  a  little  more  at  length  the  relations  of  the 
cerebellum  with  the  muscular  apparatus  of  locomotion. 

The  brain  influences  all  the  muscles.  This  is  a  fact  proved  in  the  most 
positive  manner  by  pathology  and  pathological  anatomy.  An  effusion,  a 
rupture  which  takes  place  at  the  converging  points  of  ihe  fibres  of  one  of 
the  lobes  of  the  cerebellum,  produces  as  complete  a  hemiplegia  as  that 
which  results  from  effusions  occurring  in  the  corpora  striata  and  optic 
thalamic  which  belong  to  the  brain ;  whence  it  evidently  follows  that  all 
the  locomotive  muscles  are  in  communication,  by  their  nerves,  with  the 
cerebellum.  We  have  no  reason,  therefore,  to  be  surprised  that  the  ex- 
cite'ment  of  the  cerebellum  convulses  them,  and  that  the  compression  of 
the  same  organ  paralyses  them.  Moreover,  all  the  muscles  assist  more 
or  less  in  the  accomplishment  of  the  act  of  generation,  although  some 
contribute  to  it  more  powerfully  than  others.  It  is  necessary,  therefore, 
that  all  of  them,  without  exception,  should  be  in  connection  with  the 
brain. 

Let  us  still  add  a  few  remarks,  which  may  assist  in  throwing  light  on 
the  question. 

We  assert  that,  in  the  normal  state,  the  cerebellum  alone  is  not  compe- 
tent to  move  the  muscles.  No  fact  is  more  certain  ;  for  if  the  brain  do 
not  act,  or  if  it  act  incompletely,  the  movements  necessary  for  the  accom- 
plishment of  generation  do  not  take  place.  It  follows  that  the  cerebellum 
alone  is  not  sufficient  to  execute  voluntary  movements,  and  that  to  ac- 
complish this  object  the  intervention  of  the  brain  is  necessary.  It  may 
be  granted,  that  the  cerebellum  excites  them  and  regulates  them  when 
the  brain  acts  in  concert  with  it,  and  the  will  assists.  That  it  induces 
the  brain  to  regulate  them,  with  a  view  to  the  fulfilment  of  its  functions, 
is  a  fiict  which  may  be  observed  in  many  of  the  domestic  animals,  both 
birds  and  quadrupeds,  in  which  the  movements  connected  with  genera- 
tion commence  whenever  the  individuals  of  the  other  sex  are  perceived  to 
be  in  a  determinate  attitude.  Every  one  knows  that  even  the  presence  of 
the  female  is  not  necessary  to  give  rise  to  these  movements,  for  they 
commence  in  the  dog  whenever  we  raise  it  up  in  a  certain  manner.  It  is 
clear  that  if  his  brain  did  not  act,  the  cerebellum  alone  would  not  execute 
these  movements.  But  if  the  brain  assist,  the  cerebellum  will  not  fail  to 
legulate  them  after  its  own  manner,  under  the  conditions  just  mentioned  ; 
or  rather  to  cause  them  to  be  regulated  by  the  will,  on  which  it  acts  as  an 
instinct.  Let  us  add  that,  although  the  will  may  direct  these  movements 
in  man,  we  must  acknowledge  that  they  are  first  reduced  to  a  determinate 
order  by  the  cerebellum,  because  it  is  this  organ  alone  which  excites 


85 

them  in  the  lower  animals,  who  cannot  be  taught  by  education,  and  in 
■whom  they  cease  to  appear  after  castration. 

I  ascribe,  then,  the  direction  of  the  movements,  the  acts,  the  aptitu  ""es, 
■which  hav^e  a  refeience  to  generation,  to  the  influence  of  the  cerebellum. 
But  I  maintain  that  these  cannot  be  accomplished  without  the  permission, 
nay,  without  the  assistance,  of  the  brain  ;  and  that  it  is  in  this  sense  alone 
that  the  cerebellum  can  be  considered  as  the  regulator  of  muscular  action. 
Thus  the  brain  always  remains  master  of  the  movements  of  the  cerebel- 
lum tending  towards  the  act  of  generation,  so  as  to  be  able  to  arrest  them  ; 
and  it  effectually  exerts  this  power,  in  a  variety  of  circumstances,  as 
every  one  knows. 

You  are  aware  that  Gall  has  availed  himself  of  a  passage  in  an  ancient 
Greek  author  to  support  his  opinion  on  the  cerebellum.  But  that  passage 
is  of  no  consideration  in  the  present  state  of  the  science.  We  have  much 
better  methods  of  arrivinsr  at  the  truth.  Gall  has  the  honor  of  having;  es- 
tablished  the  proposition,  as  a  positive  fact,  that  the  cerebellum  is  the 
primary  organ  of  generation.  In  demonstrating  this  point,  he  proceeded 
by  the  method  of  direct  or  empirical  observation, — that  is  to  say,  by 
establishing,  by  numerous  facts,  that  persons  in  whom  the  posterior 
and  inferior  part  of  the  head  is  much  developed,  and  who  have  the  cere- 
bellum large,  are  more  inclined  to  the  generative  act  than  those  whose 
heads  present  a  different  developement.* 

These  observations  of  Dr.  Gall  have  been  subsequently  confirmed  by 
all  inquirers  who  have  studied  the  subject  with  due  attention,  and  espe- 
cially with  impartiality;  and  phrenologists  possess  considerable  collec- 
tions of  skulls  and  casts  which  support  them.  The  evidence  is  so  con- 
clusive, that  the  generative  function  is  ascribed  to  the  cerebellum,  but 
■without  being  able  to  affirm  that  it  executes  no  other  functions. "I" 

Nevertheless,  some  individuals,  who  are  opposed  to  phrenology,  main- 
tain that  the  generative  propensity  has  been  observed  very  powerful  in 
persons  who  had  scarcely  any  cerebellum,  or  whose  cerebellum  had  been 
destroyed,  or  in  whom  only  the  rudiments  of  it  existed. J  I  do  not  know 
to  what  extent  such  alleged  facts  merits  our  confidence.  For  my  own 
part,  I  declare  that  they  will  inspire  me  with  none,  until  they  shall  have 
been  verified  by  phrenologists.  It  is  necessary  to  be  on  one's  guard 
against  facts  which  are  attested  only  by  the  adversaries  of  a  science,  be- 

*  It  will  be  observed  that  the  question  here  does  not  relate  to  any  action  exerted  by 
the  cerebellum  on  the  muscles,  but  to  an  impulse  communicated  to  the  genital  organs. 

I I  have  stated  in  most  of  my  works,  the  opinion  that  the  cerebellum  also  exercises 
an  influence  on  all  the  viscera.  It  is  known  that,  when  over  irritated,  it  excites  vomit- 
ing, &c. 

I  It  has  not  been  said  that  these  individuals  were  incapable  of  regulating  their  muscu- 
lar movements. 


86 

cause  it  is  well  known  to  what  extent  the  spirit  of  speculation  may  lead 
to  falsehood  in  assertion.  We  exhibit  collections  of  positive  facts,  and  we 
daily  repeat  our  observations.  If  some  exceptions  exist,  we  do  not  deny 
them,  but  set  them  down  as  points  to  be  explained.  It  is  not  sufficient 
to  shew  us  merely  single  cases  ;  our  opponents  must  make  collections  in 
contradiction  to  ours,  and  the  histories  of  the  individuals  must  be  com- 
pletely authentic.  This  has  not  been  done,  and  we  are  justified  in  doubt- 
ing the  truth  of  these  assertions.  I  defy  those  who  advance  them  to  pro- 
duce proofs, — I  shall  not  say  superior  to  those  which  we  exhibit,  but  at 
all  equal  to  them.  For  my  own  part,  whenever,  since  I  knew  the  sys- 
tem of  Gall,  I  have  been  consulted  by  individuals  who  complained  of  the 
inactivity  or  infidelity  of  the  generative  organs,  I  have  immediately  di- 
rected my  attention  to  the  cerebellum,  and  I  have  always  found  it  very 
depressed.  When  children  have  been  presented  to  me,  who,  before  the 
age  of  puberty,  have  manifested  an  extraordinary  propensity  towards  the 
sexual  act,  and  who  have  divined  the  process  supplementary  to  it,  I  have 
always  found  the  cerebellum  very  largely  developed.  This  has  never 
failed.  I  defy  the  opponents  to  produce  pathological  facts  which  can  be 
weighed  in  the  balance  against  those  which  I  possess  of  this  description. 
Dr.  Gall  has  also  remarked  that  diseases  which  irritate  the  cerebellum, 
maintain  the  organs  of  generation  in  a  state  of  morbid  excitement.  No- 
thing is  more  true.  M.  Serres  has  made  the  same  observation  ;  and  se- 
veral other  observers,  worthy  of  confidence,  have  reported  analogous 
facts.  Other  contradictory  facts  have  been  cited.  It  has  been  said  that 
inactivity  of  the  genital  organs  has  coincided  with  other  diseases  of  the 
cerebellum,  such  as  scirrhous  tumors  and  tubercles.  Who  does  not  know 
that  chronic  diseases  causes  organs  to  lose  the  power  of  exercising  their 
functions  .''  Even  a  smatterino-  of  medical  knowledo;e  is  sufficient  to  be 
convinced  of  this  truth.  Thus,  a  disease  of  the  cerebellum,  which  at 
first  presented  the  characteristics  of  inflammation,  and  was  attended  by 
excitement  of  the  muscles  and  of  the  functions  of  generation,  may  termi- 
nate in  degeneration  of  the  parts,  which  shall  produce  inertness  in  the  or- 
gan, and  destroy  this  excitenjent.  The  objections,  then,  are  not  of  much 
weight.  Besides,  without  forcing  facts,  without  straining  our  ingenuity, 
without  hunting  for  sophisms,  who  does  not  know  that  a  moderate  ex- 
citement of  the  brain  exalts  the  movements  of  the  moral  and  intellectual 
faculties,  and  that  a  more  powerful  excitement,  which  induces  congestion, 
paralyses  them  .''  Why  will  it  not  be  allowed  that  the  cerebellum,  when 
excited  to  a  certain  extent,  may  increase  the  activity  of  the  genital  organs, 
and  that,  at  a  later  stage,  when  congested  to  excess,  it  may  paralyse 
them.  This  should  be  the  case;  and,  indeed,  cannot  be  otherwise  But 
the  adversaries  of  a  doctrine  take  advantage  of  all  facts  which  appear  to 
them  to  be  capable  of  shaking  its  credit. 


87  « 

It  has  been  said,  also,  that  extraordinary  and  morbid  excitement  of  the 
genital  organs  has  taken  place  in  coincidence,  or  in  connection,  with  dis- 
eases of  the  spinal  marrow.  I  can  easily  conceive  this  to  be  the  case ; 
because  the  nerves  which  communicate  feeling  and  activity  to  the  gene- 
rative organs  do  not  proceed  directly  from  the  cerebellum  to  them ;  they 
descend  through  the  spinal  marrow.  Why,  then,  if  the  spinal  marrow  be 
irritated,  should  these  nerves  not  excite  the  genital  organs  .'  This  is  very 
conceivable,  and  we  see  proofs  of  it  in  the  interesting  work  of  M.  Olivier 
d'Angers,  as  well  as  in  the  experiments  of  Dr.  Segalas,  who  has  produced 
emissions  in  guinea  pigs,  by  irritating  the  spinal  marrow  in  the  lumbar 
region.  A  nervous  trunk,  when  irritated,  produces  excitement  in  all 
the  parts  on  which  the  nervous  filaments  proceeding  from  it  are  rami- 
fied. 

Thus  it  appears  that  all  these  objections  are  of  very  little  importance, 
and  can  do  nothing  to  invalidate  the  results  of  direct  observations,  which 
are  constantly  repeated. 

Dr.  Gall  has  been  so  bold  as  to  hazard  the  statement  that  the  develope- 
ment  of  the  genital  organs  exercises  no  influence  on  their  activity ;  that 
they  may  be  inert  although  very  much  developed,  if  the  cerebellum  be 
very  little  so.  At  first  1  refused  to  admit  the  correctness  of  this  fact ;  but 
experience  has  proved  to  me  that  it  is  true.  I  have  ascertained  the  inert- 
ness of  the  genital  organs  in  man,  although  very  considerably  developed  ; 
but  the  cerebellum  was  depressed.  I  have  ascertained  also  the  contrary, 
in  opposite  conditions,  in  such  a  manner  that  I  can  no  longer  doubt.  I 
assure  you  that  it  has  not  been  from  rashness,  nor  without  reflection  and 
numerous  observations,  that  I  have  ventured  to  take  up  the  defence  of 
phrenology.  I  have  multiplied  observations,  as  far  as  it  has  been  possi- 
ble for  me  to  do  so,  before  entering  the  lists  of  its  defenders. 

We  must,  however,  consider  the  manner  in  which  the  cerebellum  acts 
in  executing  the  function  of  generation,  which  appears  to  be  its  principal 
function.  Perhaps  Gall  has  scarcely  entered  into  sufficient  details  on  this 
subject.  I  shall  attempt,  so  far  as  my  limited  ability  will  permit,  to  sup- 
ply this  defect. 

The  cerebellum  certainly  does  not  form  the  ideas  connected  with  gene- 
ration :  these  belong  to  their  proper  organs  (in  the  anterior  lobe  of  the 
brain).  This  fact  is  very  observable  in  the  lower  animals.  Many  of 
them,  whose  ideas  are  very  obtuse,  nevertheless  present  a  very  powerful 
instinct  of  generation.  Erotic  ideas,  then,  must  not  be  ascribed  to  the 
cerebellum  ;  it  is  by  the  manner  in  which  the  latter  excites  the  brain 
that  it  calls  up  these  ideas  in  man ;  it  keeps  them  up,  because  a  relation 
has  gradually  become  established  between  it  and  ideas  of  that  kind.  When 
the  perceptions  of  the  senses  have  arrived  at  the  intellect,  these  percep- 
tions become  associated  with  the  cerebellum  in  proportion  as  this  organ  is 


I  88 

increased  in  growth,  in  the  same  manner  as  other  ideas  associate  them- 
selves with  other  feelings.* 

In  a  former  lecture  I  have  given  some  explanations  on  this  point.  Do 
not  therefore,  reo-ard  the  cerebellum  as  the  immediate  seat  of  sexual  ideas, 
but  as  the  organ  which  excites  these  ideas,  and  as  a  means  of  keeping 
them  up  and  of  recalling  them. 

The  cerebellum  appears  to  be  the  primitive  organ  which  excites  the 
oro-ans  of  generation  to  secretion  and  erection  at  the  developement  of 
puberty.  The  cerebellum  begins  to  grow  large  before  the  organs  of  gene- 
ration develope  their  powers.  Thus,  it  is  the  cerebellum  which  puts 
them  in  action,  which  impels  them  to  develope  themselves,  and  which, 
in  short,  excites  them  to  the  secretion  of  a  prolific  fluid  and  erection. 
But,  at  the  same  time,  it  excites  the  encephalic  apparatus.  It  acts,  then, 
in  two  directions  ;  for  the  ideas  relative  to  generation  assume  an  entirely 
different  color,  when  the  cerebellum  is  developed,  from  that  which  they 

•  This  portion  of  the  text  will  probably  appear  obscure  to  readers  who  are  not  ac- 
quainted with  phrenology.  It  may  be  thus  elucidated.  According  to  phrenology,  the 
intellectual  faculties  alone  form  ideas,  and  they  are  manifested  by  the  anterior  lobe  of 
the  brain.  The  feelings  are  connected  with  the  posterior  and  middle  lobes  ;  and  the 
intensity  of  each  feeling  bears  a  proportion  (other  conditions  being  equal,)  to  the  size  of 
of  its  own  special  organ,  and  not  to  the  size  of  the  intellectual  organs.  Hence,  if  lascivi- 
ous objects  be  presented  to  the  eyes,  or  addressed  to  the  ears  of  two  different  individ- 
uals, they  may  see  them,  and  hear  them,  and  understand  them,  with  equal  precision,  by 
means  of  their  intellectual  organs,  if  these  be  equal ;  but  if,  in  the  one,  the  cerebellum 
be  extremely  deficient,  the  objects  will  excite  in  him  a  very  feeble  sexual  emotion  ; 
while,  if  the  cerebellum  be  very  large  in  the  other,  they  will  make  a  deep  impression, 
and  call  forth  a  lively  interest  in  him.  In  this  case,  the  ideas  or  conceptions  of  the  ob- 
jects (being  equally  clear  in  both  individuals,)  depend  on  one  set  of  organs,  (the  intel- 
lectual,) which  they  possess  in  an  equal  degree  ;  while  the  emotion  (differing  so  widely 
in  intensity)  depends  on  another  organ,  (the  cerebellum,)  in  the  size  of  which  they  dif- 
fer ;  in  other  words,  it  is  not  the  cerebellum,  but  the  anterior  lobe,  which  forms  ideas.  I 
have  found  these  views  confirmed  by  many  facts.  For  example, — those  individuals  in 
society  whose  delicacy  is  most  sensitive,  when  allusions  are  made  to  the  sexual  feeling, 
are  nut  those  who  have  a  small  cerebellum,  and  in  whom  the  feeling  itself  is  most  weak 
Such  persons,  although  their  intellect  be  good,  are  dull  in  apprehending  these  allusions 
when  veiled  ;  and  when  the  expressions  used  are  too  distinct  to  be  misunderstood,  they 
appear  to  them  to  partake  as  much  of  the  character  of  impertinences  as  of  indelicacies. 
On  the  contrary,  when  the  cerebellum  is  large,  and  the  corresponding  feeling  is  strong, 
in  combination  with  large  organs  of  the  moral  sentiments,  which  furnish  purifying  and 
controlling  motives,  the  persons  thus  constituted  are  extremely  sensitive  to  indelicate 
allusions.  They  dicine  them  even  when  shrouded  in  the  most  studied  ambiguity  ;  they 
understand  their  nature,  and  could  enjoy  them,  but  that  their  moral  feelings  condemn 
them  ;  and  from  this  conflict  and  condemnation  arises  the  sensitiveness  of  their  minds 
in  regard  to  such  topics.  When  the  cerebellum  is  very  large,  and  the  moral  organs  are 
deficient,  there  is  a  want  of  delicacy  corresponding  to  the  deficiency  of  the  purifying 
and  controlling  powers.  The  individual  is  then  very  much  in  the  condition  of  the  lower 
animals  in  regard  to  this  feeling. — Translator. 


89 

previously  possessed.  It  excites  the  sentiments  and  intellect.  Moreover, 
the  cerebellum  receives  excitement  from  the  genital  organs  depending  on 
the  double  cause  which  I  have  just  mentioned,  secretion  and  erection. 
There  is  a  reciprocity  of  action  between  them.  Thus  the  sexual  excitement 
may  begin  by  the  imagination,  or  by  the  perception  of  the  object,  or  origi- 
nate in  the  organs  of  generation  themselves.  1  must  avoid  entering  into 
details  on  this  point.  In  the  last  case,  as  soon  as  the  organs  are  excited, 
they  communicate  a  stimulus  either  to  the  cerebellum,  which  reacts  on 
the  brain,  or  to  the  brain,  which  in  its  turn  excites  the  cerebellum. 

The  cerebellum  is  maintained  in  its  normal  degree  of  developement  by 
the  continuance  of  the  generative  action.  If  the  genital  organs,  the  or- 
gan of  secretion  in  particular,  which  is  the  foundation  of  this  function, 
disappear,  the  cerebellum  diminishes.  Castration  proves  this  fact  :  the 
cerebellum  becomes  depressed,  the  lower  part  of  the  head  shrinks,  while 
the  other  parts  preserve  nearly  their  original  dimensions.  When  the  bull 
is  converted  into  an  ox,  the  nape  of  the  neck  is  observed  sensibly  to 
shrink.  Nevertheless,  this  shrinking  does  not  proceed  so  far  as  it  does 
when  castration  has  been  performed  before  the  developement  of  the  or- 
gans of  generation  and  of  the  cerebellum  ;  and  the  muscular  system  pre- 
serves a  greater  volume  and  more  energy  in  animals  which  have  been 
castrated  after  the  evolution  of  the  genital  organs,  than  in  those  who  have 
been  mutilated  before  it.  This  is  a  fact  which  has  been  often  observed, 
and  which  is  now  turned  to  account.  If  one  wishes  to  have  a  strong 
horse,  for  example,  it  is  usual  not  to  subject  him  to  castration  until  after 
he  has  been  completely  developed.  In  this  case,  the  falling  in  of  the 
nape  of  the  neck  never  goes  so  far  as  if  the  operation  had  been  performed 
before  the  evolution  of  his  generative  system,  although  it  does  take  place 
to  a  perceptible  extent.  Hence  it  is  clear  that  the  cerebellum  preserves 
its  normal  volume  as  long  as  the  genital  organs  preserve  their  action  ;  and 
that,  when  this  action  is  withdrawn,  the  cerebellum,  and  the  muscles 
also,  losing  their  activity,  experience  a  diminution  in  volume. 

There  is  another  important  fact  which  has  been  turned  to  advantage 
on  both  sides  of  this  argument.  When  castration  takes  place  in  man, 
after  the  complete  developement  of  the  genital  organs,  he  continues  to 
form  erotic  ideas,  while  he  entertains  none,  if  the  operation  has  been  per- 
formed before  puberty.  Every  one  knows  that  in  those  countries  in 
which  their  manners  tolerate  this  species  of  mutilation,  certain  eunuchs 
continue  to  feel  an  inclination  for  the  other  sex  when  they  have  suffered 
castration  only  after  complete  developement.  Those  who  cultivate  Ro- 
man literature  will  recollect  certain  verses  of  Juvenal,  too  coarse  to  be 
quoted,  in  which  he  castigates  the  lubricity  of  the  Roman  ladies.  He 
mentions  that  they  did  not  mutilate  the  young  men  chosen  for  their  baths, 
and  with  whom  they  intended  to  abuse  themselves,  until  after  the  com- 
12 


90 

plete  developement  of  puberty.  At  this  epoch,  the  cerebellum  having 
acquired  its  full  developement,  had  modified  the  other  organs  of  the  en- 
cephalon  in  such  a  manner  that  erotic  ideas  did  not  disappear  completely, 
and  that  erection  could  still  take  place  without  secretion. 

Another  physiological  and  pathological  observation  appears  to  me  to 
merit  attention.  When  erotic  excitement  has  been  long  abused,  it  estab- 
lishes in  the  nerves  of  the  whole  generative  system,  in  those  of  the 
neighboring  organs,  and  even  in  all  the  lumbar  and  femoral  muscles,  a 
mode  of  action,  accompanied  by  a  kind  of  sensation  which  tends  to  pass 
from  pleasure  into  pain,  and  which,  for  want  of  a  better  phrase,  may  be 
named  une  volupte  douloureuse.  This  perversion  of  sensibility  does  not 
cease  to  make  progress,  and  ends  in  a  considerable  diminution  of  the  mus- 
cular vigor  of  these  regions.  The  species  of  semi-paraplegia  which  re- 
sults from  it  is  generally  incurable. 

I  shall  now  exhibit  some  specimens  of  the  cerebellum.  In  this  head 
(shewing  a  cast  to  his  audience,)  there  is  an  enormous  developement  of 
it.  The  distance  between  the  two  ears  is  prodigious,  even  disgusting  and 
repulsive,  from  the  resemblance  which  it  bears  to  a  brute.  This  man 
was  guilty  of  several  crimes  against  chastity  in  England,  each  more 
abominable  than  another,  which  forced  him  to  go  into  exile.  You  will 
observe  also  that  those  parts  (at  the  sides  of  the  head,)  where  the  selfish 
propensities  are  situated,  surpass  in  developement  all  the  other  regions  of 
the  encephalon,  and  greatly  exceed  the  intellectual  organs  in  size.  No 
controlling  power  opposed  the  action  of  the  organs  which  produced  his 
crimes.  You  have  here  (showing  other  casts,)  examples  of  the  cerebel- 
lum much  developed  in  men  who  possessed  distinguished  intellectual  fa- 
culties with  elevated  sentiments,  and  their  high  reputation  proves  that 
the  generative  instinct  never  led  them  to  reprehensible  actions.  Here 
again  is  the  head  of  a  man  who  was  passionately  devoted  to  natural  his- 
tory, and  curious  in  collections.  He  was  very  fond  of  women.  You  ob- 
serve that  the  cerebellum  is  very  much  developed  ;  but  the  higher  facul- 
ties are  very  powerful,  they  were  cultivated,  and  the  honorable  recol- 
lections which  the  savant  has  left  behind  him,  shew  that  the  organ  of 
generation  did  not  reign  despotically  over  his  conduct. 

The  same  observation  applies  to  the  head  of  Gall,*  and  to  many  others 
which  it  is  unnecessary  to  present. 

Here,  again,  is  the  head  of  Pigault-Lebrun,  whose  romances  partake 
largely  of  the  erotic  quality,  but,  after  all,  are  not  gross.  You  see  in  this 
other  head  the  perceptive  organs  well  developed,  much  self  esteem  and  love 


*  The  cerebellum  was  largely  developed  in  Gall,  and  although  the  feeling  did  not 
subjugate  his  intellect,  it  produced  irregularities  of  conduct  which  were  reprehensi- 
ble. — Translator. 


NERO 


CEREBELLUM  VERY  LARGE.    CEREBELLUM  LARGE. 
AARON  BURR.  AARON  BURR. 


CEREBELLUM  LARGE. 


CEREBELLUM  LARGE. 


^4H''§ 


f% 


Cerebellum  moderate. 


Cerebellum  small. 


Cerebellum  moderate. 


Cerebellum  very  small 


Bust  of  the  skull  of  a  murderer. 


Cerebellum  large. 


Cerebellum  very  large. 


91 

of  approbation,  in  a  word,  organs  capable  of  guiding  the  action  of  the  cere 
bellum.  I  wish  you  always  to  study  the  organs  in  this  manner,  I  mean  in 
their  mutual  relations.  I  could  greatly  multiply  these  observations  ;  but 
as  we  are  obliged  to  take  our  examples  from  persons  who  are  well  known, 
to  inspire  the  greater  confidence,  one  feels  a  delicacy  in  bringing  too  many 
forward. 

I  shall  now  shew  you  several  examples  of  an  opposite  [description. 
This  head  is  that  of  a  mathematician  who  felt  aversion  to  the  sex,  and 
was  never  married.  He  has  the  reputation  of  having  remained  in  the 
'  virgin  state.  Here  is  another  whose  condition  was  precisely  the  same. 
You  may  easily  conclude  that  their  actions  were  dictated  by  those  regions, 
which  you  perceive  to  be  predominant,  the  anterior  and  superior,  and  not 
by  the  posterior  region,  the  depression  of -which  is  strikingly  conspicuous. 

I  here  shew  you  the  head  of  Bontillier,  a  brigand.  He  was  abandoned 
from  the  first  to  all  sorts  of  vices,  and  at  last  degraded  by  the  crime  of 
parricide.  You  observe  the  enormous  developement  of  the  posterior  and 
lateral  regions,  and  no  adequate  powers  of  control  in  the  anterior  lobe. 
He  was  besides  uneducated.  There  is  always  a  deficiency  in  the  de- 
velopement of  the  controlling  organs  in  those  men  who  have  been  guilty 
of  disgraceful  crimes  in  relation  to  the  cerebellum. 


AUXILLIART    FACULTIES. 

After  these  details,  I  shall  notice  the  organs  which  favor  the  action  of 
the  cerebellum,  and  those  which  tend  to  repress  it.  I  shall  follow  this 
course  in  examining  all  the  other  organs,  wherever  they  admit  of  my  do- 
ing so.  The  organs  which  favor  the  action  of  the  cerebellum  are  those  of 
the  soft  affections,  of  friendship  and  attachment,  and  especially  those  of 
the  love  of  children,  imitation,  the  sentiment  of  mirthfulness,  ideality  or 
imagination,  a  considerable  activity  of  the  perceptive  organs,  particularly 
of  music  and  of  benevolence.  All  these,  to  use  a  vulgar  expression,  lend 
strength  to  temptation. 


ANTAGONIST    FACULTIES. 

The  feelings  and  intellectual  faculties  which  act  in  a  contrary  direc- 
tion to  the  cerebellum,  are  rage,  hatred,  cunning,  and  circumspection ; 
because  these  last  organs  force  men  to  reflect,  and  during  reflection  the 
activity  of  the  instinct  of  propagation  diminishes.  The  organ  of  acquisi- 
tiveness may  be  added  ;  almost  all  misers  are  indifferent  to  sexual  plea- 
sures.    This  is  a  remarkable  fact.     One  of  the  greatest  enemies  of  this 


92 

function  is  shame,  combined  with  a  want  of  self-confidence,  especially 
when  these  two  are  remarkably  strong.     Want  of  self-confidence  pro- 
duces much  relative  impotency ;  that  is  to  say,  impotency  which  exists 
only  in  certain  circumstances,  and  which  may  occur  with  a  suflnciently 
vigorous  generative  power.    I  assure  you,  without  hesitation,  that  I  have 
been  much  assisted  by  the  system  of  Dr.  Gall  in  my  diagnosis  of  ana- 
phrodisia  {the  want  of  the  generative  power.)     I  easily  recognise  the  in- 
dividuals in  whom  the  defect  of  power  is  relative  merely,  caused  by  the 
want  of  courage  and  self-confidence,  combined  with  a  large  developement 
of  the  organ  of  credulity  (wonder).  Such  are  the  inen  who  are  made  to  be- 
lieve that  their  scrotum  is  tied,(qu'ils  ont  I'aiguillette  nouee,) words  which 
may  be  paraphrased  by  the  expression,  that  they  labor  under  relative  im- 
potency.    The  opposite  conditions  are  not  less  striking  for  the  observer ; 
for  the  men  who  have  abundance  of  self-conceit  always  act  up  to  their 
means,  whatever  these  may  be.     It  is,  therefore,  not  without  cause  that 
coxcombs,  presumptuous  persons,  and  even  fools,  are  renowned  for  their 
success  with  the  fair  sex.     It  is  curious  to  trace  the  relations  of  these 
vulgar  opinions  to  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  brain. 

On  the  other  hand,  and  in  regard  to  the  influence  of  the  intellect,  it  is 
not  the  less  certain,  that  the  generative  power  is  enfeebled  by  the  sustain- 
ed exercise  of  reflection,  by  abstract  researches  into  causation,  and  by  me- 
ditation ;  by  the  excessive  study  of  mathematics,  and  by  all  those  kinds  of 
labor  which  tend  to  call  the  nervous  energies  towards  the  organs  of  thought 
situated  in  the  anterior  lobe.     An  excessive  developement  of  the  organs 
of  order  and  weight  are  not  favorable  to  the  functions  of  the  cerebellum. 
Men  extremely  formal,  regulated,  and  methodical,  experience  in  these  dis- 
positions a  kind  of  counterpoise,  which  preserves  them  from  excesses  to 
which,  otherwise,  this  organ  would  prompt  them.    At  the  same  time  you 
will  bear  in  mind  that  the  organ  is  sometimes  so  predominant  that  it  over- 
comes all  these  obstacles ;  but  unless  it  is  so  to  a  great  extent,  it  may  be 
guided  by  these  other  powers.     The  effect  of  these  influences  may  be  ob- 
served in  both  sexes,  but  more  particularly   in  women,  for  whom,  in 
general,    celibacy    is  less   distressing    than    for    men.     In    a    word,   all 
the    feelings   which   tend    to    egotism,    (according    to    Dr.    Sarlandiere, 
who  admits  a  group  of  this  nature,)  all  the  faculties  which  dispose  to  re- 
flection and  meditation,  furnish  checks  against  the  abuses  of  the  organ  of 
generation ;  while  gaiety,  dissipation,  pride,  presumption,  imagination, 
and  intellectual  idleness,  all  contribute  to  increase  its  activity. 

An  extremely  large  developement  of  the  cerebellum  tends  to  produce 
excesses,  of  which  the  following  are  the  consequences  :  These  excesses 
induce  exhaustion  of  the  nervous  energy  more  efficaciously  than  the  ex- 
traordinary activity  of  any  other  propensity,  because  the  act  of  generation 
partakes  to  some  extent  of  the  nature  of  a  convulsion.     It  weakens  pro- 


93 

digiously  the  locomotive  power,  and  at  the  same  time  the  vigor  of  the 
intellectual  faculties,  in  such  a  manner  that  it  is  one  of  those  functions, 
the  excess  of  which  is  the  most  prejudicial  to  the  individual.  A  multi- 
tude of  diseases  are  the  results  of  its  abuse,  and  especially  convulsive  af- 
fections, disturbances  of  circulation,  and  derangement  of  digestion.  Its 
moral  eftects  are  disorder  in  affairs ;  for  such  excesses  induce  stupidity, 
or  at  least  a  deplorable  indolence. 

These  consequences  should  not  be  lost  sight  of  in  education.  Those 
young  persons  who  feel  themselves  in  danger  of  being  overcome  by  this 
propensity,  should  betake  themselves,  in  due  time,  to  the  corrective  in- 
fluences which  we  have  pointed  out,  if  they  do  not  wish  to  expose  them- 
selves to  moral  and  physical  degradation,  and  abridge  the  course  of  their 
existence. 


DEFECT    OF    DEVELOPEMENT. 

The  effects  of  deficient  developement  of  the  cerebellum  may  be  men- 
tioned. This  defect  weakens  the  benevolent  affections  :  we  have  already 
remarked  that  the  malevolent  affections  tend  to  depress  the  generative 
functions.  Defect  of  the  cerebellum  permits  the  egotistical  sentiments  to 
assume  the  ascendancy.  The  best  judges  of  human  nature  desire  always 
to  see  this  propensity  rather  a  little  too  vigorous  than  too  weak.  It  then 
exercises  a  favorable  influence  on  the  benevolent  affections.  This  fact  is 
certain.  Eunuchs  afford  evidence  of  it.  The  selfishness  of  these  beings 
is  proverbial.  In  our  day  they  do  not  act  important  parts  in  public  af- 
fairs ;  but  history  presents  us  with  examples  of  eunuchs  who  were  minis- 
ters of  state,  generals  of  armies,  in  a  word,  distinguished  personages.  Al- 
most always,  egotism,  coldness  of  heart,  defect  of  benevolence,  and  jeal- 
ousy, have  characterized  them.* 

*  The  doctrine  in  the  text  appears  to  be  rather  vaguely  expressed.  The  organ  of  ama- 
tiveness  never  produces,  as  its  proper  function,  any  other  feeling  than  that  of  love  be- 
tween the  sexes,  and  it  is  not,  therefore,  a  generous  or  moral  propensity.  Its  direct 
object  is  the  gratification  of  the  being  who  experiences  its  impulses.  It  exercises,  how- 
ever, an  extraordinary  influence  in  exciting  to  activity  all  the  other  organs  with  which 
it  is  combined  ;  but  there  is  no  preference,  in  this  respect,  in  favor  of  the  moral  organs. 
If  it  be  large,  and  be  combined  with  large  moral  organs,  it  will  stimulate  them  into  acti- 
vity towards  the  opposite  sex,  and  a  young  man  will  then  become  chivalrously  kind, 
good,  and  brave,  in  every  thing  regarding  women.  Its  influence  will  he  the  same  in 
the  case  of  the  opposite  sex.  They,  under  the  influence  of  a  similar  combination,  will 
be  kind  and  generous  to  men.  The  extraordinary  interest  which  some  women  feel  in 
boys,  out  of  all  reasonable  proportion  to  their  love  of  girls,  arises  from  the  same  combi- 
nation. 

But  if  the  same  degree  of  the  organ  of  amativeness  be  combined  with  deficient  moral, 
and  large  animal  organs,  it  will  stimulate  the  latter,  and  the  unhappy  possessor  of  this 


94 

Depraved  manifestations  of  this  propensity  have  much  less  reference  to 
the  predominance  of  the  cerebellum  than  has  been  generally  believed. 
This  species  of  corruption  is  owing  rather  to  the  deficiency  of  the  moral 
and  intellectual  faculties.  It  is  favored  by  bad  education,  by  example,  by 
the  sequestration  of  the  sexes.  Certain  other  propensities  may  contribute 
to  it,  such  as  the  love  of  children,  for  these  affections  are  nearly  related. 
The  propensity,  in  some  persons,  to  enjoy  their  own  sex  may  also,  ac- 
cording to  some  late  observations,  occasionally  bear  reference  to  the  indi- 
vidual himself  possessing  several  feminine  qualities.  It  is  suspected,  for 
example,  that  the  taste  which  prompts  a  man  to  substitute  one  of  his  own 
sex  for  a  woman,  proceeds  from  the  predominance  of  some  organs  pecu- 
liar to  woman,  particularly  in  the  passive  object.  In  like  manner,  the 
analogous  vice  in  females,  supposes  a  woman  who  possesses  masculine 
qualities  by  the  configuration  of  her  brain.  These  ideas  are  not  my  own. 
They  were  communicated  to  me  by  a  phrenologist,  an  accurate  observer, 
who  will  publish  them  by  and  bye.  I  am  far  from  appropriating  them. 
They  are  very  interesting  ;  because  it  is  repugnant  to  reason  to  ascribe  to 
the  generative  propensity,  Mhich  has  such  a  determinate  and  direct  ob- 
ject, as  the  approach  of  the  two  sexes,  disgraceful  vices,  that  degrade 
men  without  realizing  the  object  intended  by  nature. 

The  generative  instinct  acquires  vigor  by  exercise,  if  the  act  has  not 
been  carried  so  far  as  to  exhaust  the  strength  and  deteriorate  the  organs. 
It  is  weakened  by  inactivity.  This  fact  is  easily  proved  by  observing 
Cenobites  and  all  persons  who  live  in  celibacy.  After  having  painfully 
resisted  the  propensity  in  youth,  both  sexes  at  last  become  entirely  mas- 
ters of  it,  to  such  a  degree  as  scarcely  to  feel  its  existence  at  an  age  at 
which  those  who  have  been  in  the  practice  of  exercising  it  moderately, 
still  enjoy  decided  powers  of  reproduction. 

These  remarks  accord  perfectly  with  the  previous  observations  which 
I  made  relative  to  castration.  We  state  that  the  generative  organ  long 
maintains  its  activity  in  the  male  sex,  when  it  is  properly  exercised,  pro- 
vided no  organic  affection  exist  in  the  vicera  ;  while  it  decays  in  the  op- 
posite conditions. 

combination  will  become  only  the  more  sensual,  brutal,  selfish,  and  ferocious,  the  more 
he  is  governed  by  his  cerebellum.  This  power  of  the  cerebellum  to  excite  the  organs  of 
the  animal  propensities,  where  these  predominate,  explains  the  atrocious  murders  which 
some  men  commit  on  the  victims  of  their  sexual  passion,  not  only  in  the  fury  of  storming 
besieged  towns,  but  in  cool  blood.  Many  years  ago  I  saw  a  man  and  woman  walking 
on  the  brink  of  the  precipitous  rock  which  forms  the  western  front  of  Salisbury  Craigs, 
near  Edinburgh.  A  few  minutes  afterwards  I  heard  an  alarm,  and  saw  the  body  of  the 
woman  lying  at  the  foot  of  the  sloping  bank  below  the  rock,  dashed  to  pieces.  Her 
paramour  had  pushed  her  over  the  precipice  to  avoid  the  consequences  of  his  illicit 
love.  He  escaped  down  the  slanting  side  of  the  hill,  and  was  never  afterwards  heard 
of. — Translator. 


95 


I  have  treated  of  this  function  at  considerable  length,  because  it  is  very 
important,  and  phrenologists  in  general  ascribe  to  it  a  high  rank.  It  is, 
indeed,  the  most  indispensible  of  all,  for  it  leads  to  the  preservation  of  the 
species;  p.  187. 


96 


CHAPTER    V 


APPLICATION    OF    THE    MOTIVE  POWER    OF    THE  HUMAN    SYSTEM    TO   DETER- 
MINE THE  CHARACTER  OF  A  LARGE  CLASS  OF  CHRONIC  DISEASES. 


The  motion  of  the  magnetic  forces,  along  the  spinal  nerves,  furnish 
us  vrith  the  means  of  distinguishing,  with  great  fecility  and  perfect  preci- 
ison,  a  large  class  of  chronic  diseases  of  the  organs  and  limbs. 

This  class  of  diseases,  often  mistaken  by  the  best  physicians,  and 
known  by  the  general  name  of  tubercular  disease,  attacks  and  consigns,  to 
a  premature  grave,  its  millions,  every  year,  of  the  most  amiable  and  talent- 
ed portion  of  our  race  ;  and  as  these  symptoms  are  believed  to  be  of  great 
importance  both  to  the  physican  and  his  patients,  I  shall  select  and  copy 
here,  from  my  Case  Book,  a  few  cases  in  which  these  magnetic  symptoms 
were  practised,  to  show  the  ease  and  certainty  with  which  the  disease  is 
now  distinguished. 

Mrs.  J.  P.,  of  good  constitution,  light  complexion,  and  naturally  full 
habit,  aged  22  years. 

Called  to  see  her  January  11th,  1835.  She  has  a  swelling  on  the 
right  side  of  her  neck  and  face,  which  commenced  about  the  10th  of  No- 
vember last,  and  has  been  out  of  health  about  three  years. 

Suspecting  tubercula,  and  without  making  further  inquiries,  and  in  the 
presence  of  a  number  of  gentlemen  and  ladies,  I  commenced  an  examina- 
tion of  the  lymphatic  glands  along  both  sides  of  the  spine,  and  first  with 
those  of  the  first  cervical  vertebroe,  and  pressed  with  the  finger  upon  one 
lying  close  to  the  right  side  of  the  vertebrae,  and  of  the  size  of  a  very 
small  bean,  which  produced  a  scream  from  severe  spasmodic  pain,  which, 
on  every  repetition  of  the  pressure,  darted  violently  and  with  the  rapidity 


97 

of  lightning  into  the  external  cervical  and  submaxillary  tubercles,  and  into 
the  upper  jaw,  ear,  and  right  side  of  the  head  ;  and  on  her  complaining 
of  its  darting  also  into  her  throat,  I  examined  it,  and  found  two  tubercles 
rising  conspicuously  in  the  right  tonsil,  and  one  in  the  gum  of  the  upper 
jaw,  all  of  which  were  very  sore,  and  also  painful  under  pressure.  I  now 
applied  pressure  in  the  same  way  to  these  cervical  and  submaxillary  tu- 
bercles on  the  side  of  the  neck  and  the  under  jaw,  which  produced  the 
same  kind  of  pain  in  them,  which,  at  every  repetition  of  the  pressure, 
darted  violently  along  the  neck  and  under  the  clavicle  into  the  upper  por- 
tion of  the  right  lung.  I  now  applied  pressure  to  the  left  side  of  the  first 
vertebra,  on  a  still  smaller  tubercle,  and  she  screamed  again,  and  pointed 
her  finger  to  the  spot  the  pain  darted  to,  on  the  upper  portion  of  the  left 
side  of  the  neck,  and  on  examination  I  found  there  a  large  submaxillary 
tubercle,  and  on  applying  pressure  to  this,  the  scream  was  again  repeated, 
and  she  at  the  same  time  applied  her  hand  to  the  left  breast  or  mamma, 
and  then  pointed  out  the  course  of  the  pain  from  the  tubercle  along  the 
neck  and  under  the  clavicle  into  the  breast.  I  now  examined  it,  and 
found  it  every  where  literally  crammed  with  tubercles  of  the  size  of  peas  ; 
breast  one-third  larger  than  the  right ;  color  of  the  skin  natural.  The 
other  breast  flaccid  every  where,  and  neither  gland  or  tubercle  to  be  felt 
in  it  or  in  the  axilla  of  the  left  side. 

The  small  tubercles  along  the  right  side  of  the  other  cervical  vertebrae 
were  sore  or  tender,  and  pressure  on  the  upper  ones  sent  darting  pains 
into  the  right  side  of  the  neck,  and  on  the  left  side  of  the  lower  one  into 
the  region  of  the  heart,  and  checked  her  breathing.  Pressure  applied  now 
on  the  sides  of  the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth  dorsal,  produced  pain 
which  darted  into  the  stomach  ;  and  on  the  second,  third,  fourth,  and  fifth 
lumbar,  produced  the  most  severe  spasmodic  pain,  and  darted  violently 
into  the  uterus.  Pressure  on  the  sides  of  the  other  vertebrae  produced  no 
pain  or  effect  whatever. 

I  now  inquired  at  what  time  she  first  discovered  tubercles  or  swellings 
on  the  side  of  her  neck }  She  answered,  about  the  first  of  June,  or  the 
first  of  July,  her  attention  was  first  directed  to  one  on  the  side  of  her  face 
in  front  of  the  ear,  that  was  very  sore,  and  at  times  painful,  and  that  at 
such  times  there  was  "  soreness  along  the  chords"  of  the  neck,  but  "  ne- 
ver thought  of  examining  there  for  tubercles."  I  now  told  her  she  must 
have  white  swellings  of  some  of  her  joints  or  limbs,  besides  that  of  the 
neck  and  face,  when  she  presented  her  left  arm  permanently  flexed  in  an 
obtuse  angle.  On  removing  the  clothing  from  this  arm,  it  presented  a 
white  swelling  of  the  elbow  joint  and  arm.  The  swelling  of  the  arm  was 
united  to  that  of  the  joint,  and  extended  more  than  half  way  to  the 
shoulder,  and  there  was  plainly  felt  along  the  under  side  of  this  swelling, 
or  under  and  inner  side  of  the  arm,  a  large  or  wide  ganglia  of  tubercles, 
13 


98 

extending  from  the  elbow  six  or  seven  inches  above  it.  These  tubercles 
were  of  the  size  of  peas,  near  the  elbow,  but  became  gradually  smaller, 
and  of  the  size  of  small  seeds  where  they  were  lost  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  swelling. 

I  inquired  now,  whether  she  had  any  other  swellings  about  her,  when 
she  answered,  "  no,  that's  all,"  but  I  told  her  it  would  not  do, — she  must 
have  white  swellings  of  the  limbs  and  joints  of  the  right  side,  as  well  as 
of  the  left ;  and  after  viewing  me  for  a  moment  with  an  expression  of 
hesitancy,  she  began  to  make  preparations  to  show  me  her  right  leg.  It 
was  swelled  from  the  ankle  to  the  knee,  and  had  an  elastic  and  puffy  feel, 
and  I  plainly  felt  along  the  front  and  sides  of  the  tibia,  small  tubercles 
from  the  size  of  small  seeds  to  that  of  a  small  pea.  She  now  told  me  she 
would  show  me  the  other  one.  It  was  swelled,  and  in  all  respects  like 
that  of  the  right  leg. 

Diagnosis,  tubercula  of  the  uterus,  both  legs,  left  arm,  left  breast,  heart, 
stomach,  right  lung,  cavity  of  the  ear,  right  lobe  of  cerebellum,  right  side 
of  the  neck,  upper  jaw  of  right  side,  and  right  tonsil. 

On  applying  the  stethescope  to  the  region  of  the  heart,  I  found  its  ac- 
tion strong,  and  it  appeared  to  strike  hard  against  the  ribs,  but  its  sound 
was  subdued  or  muffled,  and  its  action  M'as  felt  and  heard  under  the  clavi- 
cle of  the  right  side,  very  nearly  as  plain  as  in  its  own  region,  but  could 
hear  it  very  slightly  under  the  left  clavicle,  and  left  and  right  side  of  the 
back.  The  respiration  was  natural  in  every  part  of  the  chest,  except  in 
the  upper  portion  of  the  right  lung,  where  it  was  very  slight,  and  at  times 
inaudible.  Diagnosis  by  stethescope.  Hypertrophy  of  the  heart  and  tu- 
berculated  upper  and  front  portion  of  the  right  lung. 

I  now  inquired  into  the  history  of  this  case,  which  is  as  follows  : — 

The  disease  commenced  about  three  years  since,  when  she  was  living 
in  Cincinnati,  and  soon  after  an  attack  of  cholera,  with  the  usual  symptoms 
of  chlorosis.  Her  catamenia  commenced  M^ien  she  was  fifteen,  but  ap- 
peared but  twice  during  that  year,  and  only  two  or  three  times  a  year 
since  that  time,  and  then  only  from  the  influence  of  medicine,  up  to  the 
first  of  December,  1833,  when  she  was  married. 

Previous  to  her  marriage,  they  had  been  absent  eleven  weeks,  but  ap- 
peared in  a  day  or  two  after,  and  have  reappeared  since  that  time  oftener 
than  before,  in  a  proportion  of  about  two  to  one,  but  have  always  been 
very  slight  or  small  in  quantity.  About  three  years  since,  a  discharge 
commenced  from  the  uterus  which  was  adhesive,  and  of  a  white  or  milky 
color,  and  after  a  few  months  became  of  a  yellow  color,  with  cheesy  mat- 
ter or  flocculi,  and  has  continued  to  this  time.  Her  feet  and  ankles  began 
to  sv/ell  about  six  months  after  the  discharge  commenced,  and  about  a 
year  from  that  time,  her  legs  began  to  swell  and  be  painful.  Her  back  be- 
came very  weak  soon  after  the  discharge  commenced,  and  has  continued 


99 

so  to  this  time,  and  she  has  frequently  more  or  less  pain  along  the  lum- 
bar vertebrae.  About  the  middle  of  December,  1833,  and  two  weeks  after 
her  marriage,  her  left  arm  began  to  swell  and  be  painful,  and  in  the  first  part 
of  June  last,  her  left  breast  began  to  swell,  and  she  soon  began  to  feel  dart- 
ing pains  in  it  at  intervals  of  from  one  to  five  or  six  days,  which  still  con- 
tinue, and  are  gradually  becoming  more  frequent  and  violent.  In  the  first 
part  of  July  last,  her  right  ear  began  to  swell,  was  very  red,  and  soon  be- 
came very  painful,  and  the  pain  extended  through  the  cavity  of  the  ear 
into  the  right  and  middle  portion  of  the  head,  and  in  three  days  the  swel- 
ling of  the  ear  subsided  and  left  a  tubercle  of  the  size  of  a  pea  on  the  up- 
per side  of  the  jaw,  near  the  ear  ;  but  the  pain  in  the  internal  ear  and  head 
has  continued  with  intervals  of  ease.  On  the  10th  of  November  last,  this 
tubercle  began  to  enlarge,  and  to  be  irritated  ;  and  the  external  cervical 
and  submaxillary  tubercles  of  the  same  side  began  to  increase  in  size,  and 
to  be  painful,  and  soon  after  the  throat,  with  the  gum  of  the  upper  jaw  of 
the  right  side  became  sore  and  painful,  and  in  a  few  days  after,  the  right 
side  of  the  neck,  with  the  lower  and  upper  jaw,  began  to  swell,  and  with 
the  ear  and  right  side  of  the  head  became  very  painful.  Her  heart  began 
to  beat  very  hard  about  the  last  of  November,  and  this  strong  or  hard 
beating  continues.  On  the  26th  of  December  she  began  to  cough  and  ex- 
pectorate, and  this  cough  and  expectoration  continues. 

Her  stomach,  from  the  commencement  of  the  disease  in  the  uterus,  has 
been  more  or  less  disordered  with  the  first  mild  and  then  acute  symptoms 
of  dyspepsia — bowels  confined. 

The  marasmus  has  been  slow  but  constant,  and  is  now  much  advanced, 
with  flaccidity  of  the  muscles. 

The  disease,  it  will  be  seen  by  the  history  of  this  case,  was  traced  with 
great  accuracy  to  the  different  organs  and  limbs.  It  was  then  in  an  ac- 
tive state,  in  consequence  of  a  cold  ;  for  when  I  repeated  the  examination, 
about  two  weeks  from  that  time,  after  the  cold  had  subsided,  and  the  dis- 
ease had  consequently  become  passive,  the  pain  produced  by  pressure  did 
not  dart  into  the  diseased  organs  as  before. 

We  can,  therefore,  not  only  determine  the  character  of  the  disease  by 
these  symptoms,  which  are  constant  in  all  the  cases,  but  we  can  deter- 
mine whether  it  is  in  its  active  or  passive  state,  in  patients  of  all  ages  and 
conditions,  without  any  pi'evious  knowledge  of  them. 

When  the  disease  commences  in  one  organ  or  limb,  it  is  frequently  pro- 
pagated to  the  other  organs  or  limbs,  as  is  seen  in  this  and  the  following 
ca^es  : — 

Mrs.  T.  S.,  aged  31  years.  She  came  to  see  me  August  14, 1836,  and 
says  she  has  been  out  of  health  about  five  years.  The  examination  in 
her  case  was  commenced  as  usual,  by  an  examination  of  the  spine,  and 
first,  of  the  first  cervical  vertebra. 


100 

Pressure  on  a  small  tubercle  of  the  right  side  of  it  produced  severe 
pain,  which  darted  into  the  right  side  of  the  throat,  and  right  side  of  the 
head.  Pressure  on  the  right  side  of  it  produced  pain,  which  darted  into 
the  left  side  of  her  throat.  Pressure  on  the  sides  of  the  second  joint  also 
produced  pain,  which  darted  into  the  upper  and  front  part  of  the  neck. 
Pressure  on  the  2,  3,  4,  and  5  dorsal,  produced  severe  pain,  which  dart- 
ed into  the  stomach.  Pressure  on  the  right  side  of  the  7,  8  and  9  pro- 
duced severe  pain  also,  which  darted  into  the  region  of  the  liver.  Pres- 
sure on  the  3  and  4  lumbar  dorsal  was  painful.  Pressure  on  the  other 
cervical  dorsal  and  lumbar  vertebrjE,  produced  no  pain  or  effect  whatever. 

I  now  examined  the  line  of  glands  along  the  neck,  and  under  the  jaws, 
and  found  them  very  much  enlarged,  and  told  her  that  her  tonsils  and  pa- 
late were  enlarged,  and  that  she  had  dyspepsia,  chronic  inflammation  of 
the  liver  and  leucorrhcea,  besides  swellings  of  some  of  her  limbs. 

She  said  that  was  right,  and  that  the  disease  commenced  in  the  uterus 
five  years  before,  and  about  a  year  after  it  commenced  in  her  liver,  and 
in  a  few  months  after  that,  in  her  stomach  ;  and  that  it  was  now  nearly 
three  months  since  her  ankles  and  legs  began  to  swell.  It  is  now  a  year 
since  her  catamenia  disappeared,  and  they  have  not  since  returned.  On 
examining  her  throat,  found  the  tonsils  and  palate  very  much  enlarged, 
and  the  tongue  one-third  larger  than  natural.  The  tonsils  are  very  sensi- 
ble to  pressure,  and  have,  with  the  palate  and  rest  of  the  throat,  a  dark 
red  color,  and  during  the  last  few  weeks  the  act  of  deglutition,  or  of 
swallowing  solid  food,  has  been  difficult  and  painful.  She  has  had  more 
or  less  [pain  in  the  right  side  of  her  head  with  dizziness,  during  the  last 
few  months.     She  is  also  very  pale,  feeble,  and  emaciated. 

Mr.  W.,  merchant,  aged  28  years,  called  upon  me  May  — ,  1836,  who 
told  me  he  had  been  out  of  health  a  number  of  years,  and  had  been  grow- 
ing much  worse  during  the  last  few  weeks. 

On  applying  pressure  to  the  2,  3,  and  4  dorsal  it  produced  a  dull  pain 
in  these  vertebrae.  Pressure  on  the  right  side  of  the  spine,  between  the 
7  and  8  and  8  and  9  dorsal,  produced  the  same  kind  of  pain  Pressure 
on  the  right  side,  between  the  12th  dorsal  and  first  lumbar  vertebra,  pro- 
duced severe  pain,  which  darted  into  the  region  of  the  right  kidney, 
showing  the  disease  in  an  active  state  in  the  last  organ,  and  in  a  passive 
state  in  the  liver  and  stomach.  There  also  appeared  to  be  a  swelling 
along  the  right  side  of  the  spine,  extending  from  the  9th  dorsal  to  the  5th 
lumbar  vertebra,  which  had  a  puffy  or  elastic  feel,  and  on  comparing  this 
with  the  left  side  of  the  spine,  this  swelling  and  puffiness  was  very  con- 
spicuous. Diagnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  liver,  stomach,  right  kidney, 
and  spine. 

The  disease,  he  informed  me,  commenced  in  the  liver  about  three  years 
before,  and  that  it  was  about  a  year  since  it  commenced  in  his  stomach, 


FIG.     29. 


Cervical  vertebra- 


I'ress  licrr  to  fiiiH 
symptoms  of  tubui- 
lula  of  the  head, 
ihioat,  and  tongue. 

'Icre  to  find  them  of 
I  lie  arms. 

Ili'ie  to  find  them 
if    the    lungs    and 

lieart. 

Here  to  find  them  of 
il](^  stomach  and 
laisfe  intestines. 


IIiTo  to  find  them  of 
I  lie  liver. 

Here  to  liiid  them  of 
I  lie  small  intestines. 

Here  to  find  them  of 
ilie  kidneys. 

Here  to  find  them  of 
I  lie  uterus. 

And    here     to    find 
llieiii  of  the  genital 

organs. 


101 

and  three  weeks  since  it  extended  to  his  kidney,  and  gave  him  the  most 
serious  alarm  for  his  safety.  He  has,  as  usual  in  such  cases,  consulted 
and  employed  a  number  of  physicians  in  this  case,  and  rigidly  followed 
their  prescriptions,  and  yet  the  disease  in  the  liver  continued  to  grow 
worse — was  extended  to  the  stomach,  and  has  now  extended  to  the  rio-ht 
kidney,  and  right  side  of  the  spine. 

These  forces  point  to  the  disease  in  every  other  part  of  the  system  that 
may  be  tuberculated,  in  the  most  arbitrary  manner,  as  in  these  cases 
without  any  regard  to  the  classification  of  nosologists,  or  the  pedantic 
theories  of  the  schools. 

In  tubercula  of  the  stomach,  and  its  immediate  appendages,  called  dys- 
pepsia, pressure  between  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th,  and  sometimes  5th  and  6th 
dorsal  spaces,  (counting  from  the  last  or  large  joint  of  the  neck,)  pro- 
duces pain. 

In  tubercula  of  the  liver,  called  chronic  inflammation  of  the  liver,  or 
liver  complaint,  pain  is  produced  by  pressing  on  the  right  side,  between 
the  7th  and  8th,  and  8th  and  9th  dorsal  spaces,  and  directly  opposite  to 
the  lower  part  of  the  right  shoulder  blade 

In  tubercula  of  the  spleen,  pain  is  produced  by  pressure  on  the  left  side 
of  the  last  named,  or  7th  and  Sth,  and  8th  and  9th  dorsal  spaces,  and  op- 
posite to  the  lower  part  of  the  left  shoulder  blade. 

In  tubercula  of  the  right  kidney,  pain  is  produced  by  pressure  on  the 
right  side  of  the  space  between  the  12th  or  last  dorsal,  and  first  lumbar 
vertebra,  and  in  tubercula  of  the  left  kidney,  pain  is  produced  by  pres- 
sure on  the  left  side  of  the  12th  dorsal  and  1st  lumbar. 

In  tubercula  of  the  uterus,  called  leucorrhcea,  chlorosis,  amenorrhoea, 
and  menorrhagia,  pain  is  produced  by  pressure,  between  the  2d  and  3d, 
and  3d  and  4th,  and  sometimes  4th  and  Sth  lumbar  spaces,  or  between 
all  the  joints  of  the  small  of  the  back,  expect  the  1st  and  2d. 

In  tubercula  of  the  genital  organs,  pain  is  produced  by  pressure,  be- 
tween the  Sth  or  last  lumbar  space,  and  the  os-coxyx. 

This  pain,  produced  by  pressure,  is  always  more  or  less  severe,  in  pro- 
portion to  the  severity  of  the  disease.  If  there  is  but  little  disease,  the 
pressure  will  produce  but  little  pain ;  but  if  there  is  much  disease,  the 
pain  will  be  severe. 

The  disease,  in  whatever  organ  it  may  be,  is  always  either  active  or 
passive,  and  if  it  is  active,  when  such  pressure  is  made,  this  pain,  on  every 
repetition  of  the  pressure,  will  dart  into  the  diseased  organ,  with  a  force  or 
violence,  proportioned  to  the  intensity  of  the  disease. 


102 

These  are  the  natural  and  scientific  symptoms  of  the  disease  in  its 
active  and  passive  state  in  the  organs — they  are  produced  by  natural 
causes,  and  are  very  plain,  invariable,  and  easily  understood. 

When  the  disease  has  commenced  in  one  organ  or  limb,  it  is  frequenti}'- 
propagated  from  that  to  another  organ  or  limb,  as  in  the  case  of  Mrs.  J.  P. 
— cases  in  which  it  is  propagated  from  the  tonsils  and  uvula  to  the  lungs, 
and  from  the  stomach  to  the  lungs,  and  from  the  liver  to  the  stomach, 
and  from  the  uterus  to  the  ankles,  legs,  and  stomach,  are  very  common. 

In  distinguishing  the  disease,  and  in  tracing  it  in  the  different  organs 
and  limbs,  I  commenced  and  pursued  the  examinations  as  detailed  in  the 
cases  appended  to  this  work  as  I  commonly  do,  without  any  previous 
knowledge  of  them.  Any  person  of  common  education  and  capacity 
may  easily  distinguish  the  disease  in  the  same  way,  in  any  of  the  organs 
or  limbs. 

In  examining  patients  with  chronic  diseases,  it  should  not  be  forgotten 
that  the  disease  is  sometimes  in  an  active,  but  most  commonly  in  a  passive 
state.  If  the  disease  were  constantly  in  an  active  state,  patients  would 
die  with  it  in  a  few  weeks,  like  those  with  acute  diseases,  instead  of 
living  as  they  do  months,  and  sometimes  years.  We  can  always  tell,  in 
an  instant,  whether  it  is  in  an  active  or  passive  state,  in  the  organs,  by 
pressure  in  the  proper  places  on  the  spine.  If  the  disease  is  active,  the 
pain  produced  by  the  pressure  will  dart  into  the  diseased  organ  with  a 
violence  proportioned  to  the  intensity  of  the  disease,  but  if  it  is  in  a 
passive  state,  pressure  produces  pain  in  the  spine  only,  which  does  not 
dart  into  the  diseased  organ  as  in  its  active  state,  but  is  more  or  less 
severe  in  proportion  to  the  progress  of  the  disease. 

In  many  cases  of  the  disease  affecting  the  different  organs,  pain  more 
or  less  severe  is  felt  along  the  vertebrse,  when  none  is  felt  in  the  diseased 
organ.  We  frequently  find  the  same  phenomenon  in  disease  of  the 
hip-joint,  where  the  pain  is  in  the  knee  instead  of  the  hip. 

Patients  consequently  refer  the  disease  to  the  place  where  the  pain  is 
felt,  and  some  physicians  who  have  no  more  knowledge  than  they,  agree 
with  them,  and  apply  their  remedies  to  the  same  place.  Large  blisters 
have  been  applied  to  the  knee,  and  cupping,  blistering,  setons,  issues  and 
the  moxa  to  the  spine  in  such  cases  without  mercy  during  many  months, 
and  an  enormous  amount  of  suffering  has  been  frequently  endured  in  this 
way  with  little  or  no  benefit  to  the  patient. 

Pain  is  also  produced  by  pressure  on  the  chronic  enlargements  or  white 
swellings  of  the  joints  and  limbs. 

In  these  cases  large  tubercles,  as  well  as  smaller  ones  will  be  found  on 
one  or  both  sides  of  the  neck  or  groin,  and  always  on  the  same  side  with 
the  disease. 


103 

CAUSE  OF  THE  SYMPTOMS. 

When,  in  the  last  stage  of  this  disease,  motion  ceases  in  these  organs, 
or  death  ensues,  we  find,  on  examination,  that  they  are  all  enlarged, 
thickened  or  swollen,  and  their  specific  gravity  much  increased.  On  a 
further  examination  we  find  the  primary  lymphatic  glands  attached  to 
the  organs  with  the  subsidiary  glands  in  their  substance,  as  also,  those 
of  the  series  along  the  side  of  the  spine,  with  their  satellites  (coimected 
with  the  organs  through  the  spinal  nerves)  tuberculated. 

In  tubercula  of  the  lungs,  or  consumption,  the  tubercles  are  generally 
found  occupying  the  upper  portion  of  the  lungs,  and  the  left  lung  more 
frequently  than  the  right.  They  are  frequently  formed  in  clusters,  like 
clusters  of  grapes,  as  may  be  seen  at  F'and  G  in  Fig.  21,  (representing 
a  back  view  of  the  organs,  spinal  cord,  and  its  connection  with  the  spinal 
nerves,  the  great  sympathetic  nerves,  with  the  ganglions  or  consecutive 
poles  and  series  of  lymphatic  glands).  At  other  times,  the  tubercles  are 
seen  either  thinly  scattered  about  in  one,  or  in  one  and  a  part  of  another, 
or  in  both  lungs  ;  but  at  other  times  one  or  both  lungs  are  nearly  every 
where  filled  with  them,  and  are  in  this  organ  generally  of  the  size  of 
peas,  when  they  have  arrived  to  their  mature  state.  They  then  begin 
to  soften  in  the  middle,  when  the  whole  mass  is  gradually  changed  into 
a  thin  fluid,  mixed  with  cheesy  matter,  which  soon  makes  its  way  into 
the  bronchial  or  air  tubes,  and  excites  cough  and  expectoration  of  tuber- 
culous matter.  Sometimes,  however,  although  rarely,  it  makes  its  way 
into  the  cavity  of  the  pleura,  and  produces  pneumato-thorax. 

In  the  cases  where  there  are  only  a  few  tubercles  in  the  luno-s,  and  at 
a  sufficient  distance  to  prevent  them  from  breaking  into  each  other,  and 
one  or  two  soften  down,  and  produce  a  small  excavation,  they  do  not  ne- 
cessarily endanger  life ;  for  in  such  cases  patients  may,  and  do  live  many 
years,  although  they  may  have  two  or  three  such  excavations  form  every 
year. 

In  the  cases  where  they  are  in  clusters,  and  after  one  has  softened 
down  and  produced  a  small  excavation,  others  adjoining  it  soften  down 
and  break  into  it,  and  in  a  few  days  or  weeks,  produce  in  this  way  exca- 
vations proportioned  to  the  size  of  the  clusters ;  and  these  may  be  from 
half  an  inch  to  two  inches  in  diameter ;  and  when  the  whole  of  one  or 
both  lungs  are  nearly  every  where  crowded  with  tubercles  in  a  mature 
state,  a  large  excavation  is  generally  formed,  which  might  contain  an 
orange. 

Haemoptysis  or  hemorrhage  from  the  lungs,  frequently  accompanies 
consumption ;  and  when  blood  is  raised  in  small  quantities,  not  much 
exceeding  a  wine  glass  full,  it  is  generally  exuded  from  the  mucous  mena- 


104 


Spinal     nerves    con- 
nected with  tlie  left       J] 
arm. 


Left  lung. 


Stomach. 


Spleen. 


Portion  of  the  small 
iiitcsimes  and  inesen- 
tary. 


Left  kidney. 


Uterus. 


Spinal  nerve  con- 
nected with  the  sa- 
crum. 

Spinal  nerves  distri- 
buted to  the  lower 
limbs. 


Spinal  cord. 


Spinal     nerves     con- 
E  nected  with  the  right 


Right  lung. 


TT   '■    Stomach. 


,Liver. 


■^ Small     intestine    and 

inosentary. 


L Right  kidney. 


]\yj —"Uterus. 

Tvr'm..-. Spinal     nerve      con- 

-"^  "  nected  with  the  sacrum 

Spinal    nerves    distri- 

O   "N:' — bated     to     the    lower 

limbs. 


brane  of  the  bronchia,  in  place  of  its  ordinary  excretions,  and  is  com- 
monly a  slight  affection  requiring  little  or  no  attention ;  but  when  raised 
in  larger  quantities,  it  is  almost  always  the  consequence  of  the  eflFusion  of 
blood  into  the  air  cells  ;  and  is  an  affection  which,  from  its  exact  resem- 
blance to  the  effusion  of  blood  in  the  brain,  in  apoplexy,  is  now  called 
pulmonary  apoplexy. 

These  glands,  around  which  the  blood  has  been  effused,  are  larger  than 
natural,  and  are  in  clusters,  and  occupy  a  circumscribed  space,  commonly 
from  one  to  three  inches  in  diameter,  in  the  centre  of  which  a  clot  of 
blood  is  sometimes  found. 


105 

Young  people  who  lead  a  sedentary  life,  and  do  not  consequently  give 
to  all  their  muscles,  or  the  connecting  substance  of  the  organs,  that  ex- 
ercise which  is  necessary  to  health,  are  very  subject  to  hemorrhage  from 
the  lungs.  The  muscles  and  connecting  substance  do  not  have  their  na- 
tural exercise,  and  consequently  do  not  get  their  natural  portion  of  nou- 
rishment from  the  secreting  organs.  They  become  soft  and  weak,  while 
the  secretions  or  nourishment  which  should  have  been  absorbed  by  them 
accumulate  in  the  secreting  organs,  and  distend  them.  The  blood  accu- 
mulates in  the  vessels  around  them,  and  bursts  from  the  feeble  barriers 
or  connecting  substance  and  muscles  with  which  they  are  surrounded. 
The  blood  consequently  either  gushes  from  the  lungs,  when  the  patients 
generally  linger  a  few  months,  or  the  heart  or  some  of  its  large  vessels 
give  way,  and  they  instantly  sink  never  to  rise  again. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  lungs  may  also  be  produced  by  an  aneurism 
breaking  into  the  bronchia,  or  by  the  rupture  of  a  blood  vessel  in  an  ex- 
cavation ;  but  these  cases  are  very  rare,  and  are  quickly  followed  by 
death.  v 

Chronic  Bronchitis  should  not  be  confounded,  as  it  frequently  is, 
with  tubercular  consumption.  It  can  always  be  distinguished  from  the 
latter  disease  by  the  absence  of  the  symptoms  we  have  given  to  distin- 
guish it.  Pressure  on  the  space  between  the  7th  and  last  cervical  verte- 
brae, and  first  dorsal,  produces  no  pain  or  effect  whatever  in  chronic 
bronchitis,  or  pulmonary  catarrh,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  and  dissec- 
tions show  it  to  be  a  chronic  disease  of  the  mucous  glands  of  the  mem- 
brane that  lines  the  inside  of  the  bronchial  or  air  tubes  of  the  lungs, 
which  have  no  connection  with  the  nerves  of  sensation. 

The  mucous  membranes,  therefore,  have  really  no  sensibility;  and  all 
their  apparent  sensibility  is  the  consequence  of  the  presence  of  the  papil- 
lary lymphatic  glands  which  rise  from  the  serous  membranes,  conspicu- 
ously through  them  in  some  places,  for  the  purposes  of  sensation,  as  in 
the  tongue,  nose,  and  genital  organs. 

In  tubercula  of  the  heart,  its  power  or  force  is  increased  in  the  first 
stage  of  the  disease,  in  consequence  of  the  thickening  and  hardening  of 
its  walls,  which  either  terminates  in  an  effusion  from  its  serous  surface, 
and  consequent  dropsy  of  the  chest,  or  in  the  last  stage  begins  to  soften 
down,  become  weak,  till  at  length  the  blood  bursts  through  its  feeble  bar- 
riers into  the  pericardium.  In  tubercula  of  the  stomach  H.H.,  called 
dyspepsia,  the  tubercles  are  generally  small,  and  are  found  thinly  scattered 
about  in  its  membranes  and  in  clusters,  as  seen  in  the  figure,  producing 
a  thickening  of  the  organ  in  patches  of  a  size  and  number  according  with 
the  dimensions  of  the  clusters. 

In  tubercula  of  the  liver  I.  the  tubercles  are  sometimes  in  clusters, 


106 

and  at  other  times  only  a  few  are  found  in  it,  as  is  frequently  seen  in  the 
tuberculated  livers  of  cattle  and  hogs. 

Adhesions  of  the  tubercu'lated  portions  of  this  organ  are  sometimes 
formed  with  the  intestines,  stomach,  or  peritoneum,  through  which  tu- 
berculous matter  from  its  abscesses  is  discharged  into  the  intestines, 
stomach,  or  on  to  the  surface  of  the  body. 

In  tubercula  of  the  spleen  J.  and  the  kidnies  L.L.,  the  tuberculations 
are  similar  to  those  observed  in  the  liver,  and  need  not  be  repeated. 

In  tubercula  of  the  intestines  K.K.,  the  disease  is  always  found  most 
intense  in  the  small  intestines,  in  consequence  of  their  intimate  connec- 
tion with  the  mesenteric  glands,  involved  in  the  same  disease  with  their 
satellites  in  the  membranes  of  these  intestines  at  the  same  time.  The 
tubercles  are  found  more  or  less  thinly  scattered  about  in  them,  and  in 
clusters,  producing  a  thickening  of  these  intestines  in  patches  like  those 
of  the  stomach,  and  at  last  terminate  in  ulceration. 

In  tubercula  of  the  uterus  M.M.,  called  in  its  different  stages  amen- 
orrhoea,  leucorrhcea,  menorrhagia,  and  chlorosis,  the  tubercles  are  in 
different  cases  found  in  different  parts  of  it,  sometimes  in  its  body,  at 
other  times  in  its  neck,  and  frequently  in  both,  producing  a  thickening  of 
its  body,  neck,  and  membranes,  with  an  enlargement  of  a  part  or  of  the 
whole  organ. 

A  suppression  of  the  catamenia,  more  or  less  complete,  or  a  mucous 
discharge  from  its  mucous  membrane,  a  muco-serous  discharge  from  both 
the  mucous  and  serous  membranes,  with  prolapsus  uteri,  ulceration  or 
hemorrhage  are  the  uniform  consequences  of  these  tuberculations,  in- 
volving either  the  whole  or  different  parts  of  the  structure. 

In  tubercula  of  the  muscles,  called  in  its  first  stage  chronic  rheumat- 
ism, the  tubercles  are  generally  found  near  the  extremities  of  the  muscles, 
or  near  the  joints,  and  in  its  last  stage  in  the  fascia  or  membranes  enclos- 
ing the  muscles. 

The  swellings  that  arise  over  these  tubercles,  from  the  accumulation  of 
their  secretions  in  the  lymphatic  vessels,  are  soft  and  pufiy,  without  dis- 
colouration of  the  skin,  and  are  hence  called  white  swellings,  when  af- 
fecting the  limbs  or  joints  of  the  limbs.  They  are,  however,  sometimes 
called  by  other  names,  when  the  disease  appears  along  the  joints  of  the 
spinal  column,  as  King's  evil  in  the  neck,  curvature  and  distortion  of  the 
spine,  spinal  disease,  spinal  irritation,  nervous  disease,  and  nervous  irri- 
tation of  the  spine,  showing  most  conclusively  an  entire  want  of  knowl 
ed2:e  of  the  true  character  of  the  disease. 

These  swellings  terminate  in  ulceration  or  abscess,  and  generally  dis- 
charge their  tuberculous  matter  upon  the  surfaces  of  the  joints  or  limbs. 
The  bones,  like  every  other  part  of  the  body,  are  formed  with  the  round 


107 

elementary  bodies,  including  the  lymphatic  and  other  glands,  with  their 
vessels  and  nerves,  but  have  a  solid  instead  of  the  soft  and  elastic  con- 
necting substance  of  the  organs,  membranes,  muscles,  and  skin,  for  the 
purpose  of  covering  and  protecting  some,  and  of  supporting  every  part 
of  the  whole  system.  When  the  disease  commences  in  them,  it  goes 
through  its  natural  order  as  it  does  in  the  organs,  membranes,  muscles, 
and  skin,  of  tuberculation,  swelling,  and  ulceration  or  abscess.  In  its 
active  state,  in  bones  of  very  hard  texture,  the  pain  is  sometimes  very 
violent,  and  of  the  kind  called  spasmodic,  in  consequence  of  their  slow 
and  difficult  expansion;  but  there  is  generally  but  little  pain,  with 
long  intervals  of  ease ;  and  when,  in  the  course  of  the  disease,  the  ele- 
mentary organs  of  which  the  bones  are  formed,  are  destroyed  by  ulcera- 
tion, the  small  excavations,  once  occupied  by  them,  are  very  conspicuous, 
and  the  channels  of  their  vessels  and  nerves  easily  traced. 

CAUSE    OF    THE    TUBERCULATIONS. 

The  frequent  changes  in  the  atmosphere,  from  the  positive  to  the  nega- 
tive state,  and  its  modification  at  the  same  time  by  heat  and  cold,  is  a 
common  cause  of  tubercula  of  the  organs  and  limbs ;  because  these 
changes  and  modifications  of  the  atmosphere  produce  corresponding  chan- 
ges in  the  positive  and  negative  states  of  our  bodies,  and  modifications  of 
the  secretions  and  excretions. 

When  the  organs  or  limbs  are  tuberculated  from  this  or  any  other 
cause,  they  are  more  or  less  sensible  to  pressure,  because  it  contracts 
them ;  but  when  the  pressure  is  removed  they  expand,  and  the  pain 
ceases.  So  when  the  atmosphere  is  damp  and  cold,  it  is  in  a  negative 
state,  and  the  attractions  and  contractions  are  prevailing  over  the  repul- 
sions and  expansions,  and  contract  the  tuberculated  organs  or  limbs,  when 
such  patients  have  more  pain,  and  feel  more  dull  and  heavy  than  they  do 
when  the  atmosphere  is  clear  and  dry,  and  in  a  positive  state.  For  when 
the  atmosphere  changes  from  the  positive  to  the  negative  state,  the  body 
changes  at  the  same  time  from  the  positive  to  the  negative  state.  When 
attractions  and  contractions  commence  in  the  tuberculated  organs  and 
limbs,  and  produce  dull  or  aching  pains,  which  torture  such  patients  more 
or  less,  until  the  atmosphere  changes  froin  the  negative  to  the  positive 
state,  when  the  pains  cease,  and  they  arise  from  their  cots,  throw  open 
the  doors,  and  walk  abroad  with  buoyant  spirits. 

Tuberculated  organs  and  limbs  are  also  not  only  concomitant  of,  but 
frequently  the  consequence  of  intermittent,  yellow,  bilious,  and  typhus 
fevers,  diarrhceas  and  dysenteries,  &c. 

7 


108 

"  This  influence  of  the  meteorologico-medical  constitution  of  the 
weather  is  appreciable  even  on  external  diseases,  wounds,  and  opera- 
tions. Dessault  and  Bichat  paid  much  attention  to  this  subject ;  and  the 
rich  collection  of  the  memoirs  of  the  old  Academy  of  Surgery  furnishes 
numerous  examples  of  allusion  to  it." 

But  not  only  do  the  different  seasons  of  the  year  exert  a  decided  influ- 
ence upon  the  general  characters  of  prevailing  diseases,  but  even  the  va- 
rious periods  of  a  single  day  appear  to  have  a  somewhat  analogous  effect. 
It  was  a  favorite  doctrine  of  Hippocrates,  that  there  was  a  strict  relation 
between  the  action  of  the  diurnal  revolution  and  that  of  the  annual  revo- 
lution of  the  sun  on  the  production  and  the  progress  of  diseases  ;  sicnt  in 
anno  continentur  periodi  aigriludinum^  eodem  modo  una  die.  The  morning  was 
the  analogue  of  the  Spring,  the  noon  was  the  analogue  of  Summer,  the  eve- 
ning represented  Autumn,  and  night  corresponded  with  the  Winter.  The 
year  was  thus  considered  only  a  lengthened  day,  and  each  day  a  year  ex- 
cessively contracted.  Many  of  our  medical  classics,  who  have  belonged 
to  the  Hippocratic  school  of  medicine,  have  confirmed  and  illustrated  these 
views  of  the  old  Coan  by  numerous  observations  :  we  may  mention  the 
names  of  Sydenham,  Triller,  Baillou,  Ramazzini,  and  Huxham,  as  among 
the  most  distinguished  writers  of  this  school.  The  most  important  of 
their  conclusions  are  these  : — 

"  Various  diseases  exhibit  certain  features  of  change  during  the  day 
and  during  the  night ;  patients,  too,  in  their  turn,  have  their  feelings  af- 
fected differently  in  a  similar  manner  ;  and  physicians  have  remarked  that, 
even  at  different  periods  of  a  single  diurnal  epoch — that  is  to  say  in  the 
time  between  the  rising  and  setting  of  the  sun — diseases  often  exhibit  di- 
verse phenomena." 

Thus  inflammatory  diseases,  those  which  are  characterized  by  an  ex- 
altation of  the  vital  forces,  undergo  usually  towards  morning  their  chief 
exacerbations :  at  the  same  period  too  their  inversion  most  frequently 
takes  place. 

Catarrhal  and  mucous  fevers,  which  are  generally  characterized  by  the 
slowness  of  their  movements,  and  the  atony  which  accompanies  them, 
commence  most  frequently,  and  also  become  most  exasperated,  on  the 
approach  of  night. 

Bilious  fevers,  which  seem  to  occupy  a  place  between  inflammatory 
and  mucous  diseases,  have  their  paroxysms  as  well  as  their  most  frequent 
invasion  about  noon. 

The  period  of  the  paroxysms  approaches  to  either  the  morning  or  the 
evening,  according  as  the  prevailing  diathesis  is  of  a  sthenic  or  of  an 
asthenic  character. 

It  is  during  the  day,  that  by  far  the  greatest  number  of  accessions  and 
paroxysms  of  intermittent  fevers  occur-     On  the  other  hand,  the  exacer- 


109 

bations  of  hectic  fever  usually  occur  in  the  evening  and  during  the 
night ;  the  sweats  take  place  almost  exclusively  towards  the  morning. 

Ramazzini,  in  his  account  of  the  epidemic  constitution  of  1690,  de- 
scribes an  ataxic  remittent  fever,  of  which  all  the  symptoms  became 
greatly  aggravated  on  the  approach  of  sunset.  The  patients  were  alarm- 
ingly ill  during  the  whole  night ;  but  from  the  first  appearance  of  the 
sun,  all  the  bad  symptoms  ceased,  and  the  patients  could  rise  and  walk 
about,  velut  ungues  ad  soleni,  cutem  curantes,  erecti — to  use  the  expression 
of  the  writer. 

Huxham,  too,  in  his  beautiful  treatise  on  malignant  angina,  remarks 
that  this  disease,  during  its  entire  progress,  presented  exacerbations  dur- 
ing the  evening ;  and  that,  even  when  the  patients  were  tranquil  and 
comfortable  during  the  day,  the  symptoms  always  became  aggravated  in 
the  evening. 

We  may  here,  with  advantage,  allude  to  a  curious  approximation,  that 
has  recently  occurred  to  our  minds,  between  the  facts  now  mentioned  and 
the  beautiful  discovery  of  M.  Daguerre. 

According  to  the  observations  of  this  gentleman,  the  hours  in  the  morn- 
ing and  in  the  evening,  equidistant  from  noon,  and  corresponding,  there- 
fore, to  the  same  amount  of  elevation  of  the  sun  above  the  horizon,  are 
not,  however,  equally  favorable  for  the  production  of  photographic  ima- 
ges. He  has  found  that  at  all  seasons  of  the  year,  in  circumstances  of  the 
atmosphere  apparently  exactly  similar,  the  image  is  formed  a  little  more 
quickly  at  seven  o'clock  in  the  morning,  for  example,  than  at  five  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon,  at  eight  p.  m.  than  at  four  p.  m.,  and  at  nine  a.  m.  than 
at  three  p.  m. 

Now,  if  such  be  the  case  with  the  action  of  light  on  dead  matter,  there 
may  be  something  analogous  to  it  in  its  influence  on  living  bodies  both  in 
disease  and  in  health.  The  human  frame,  it  is  well  known,  is  more  sen- 
sitive than  the  most  delicate  instruments  that  can  be  made  ;  why  then  may 
it  not  be  acted  upon  in  some  peculiar  way  by  the  ever-varying  conditions 
of  the  light  and  heat  of  the  sun  ?  It  is,  therefore,  quite  possible  that  the 
discovery  of  M.  Daguerre  may  give  rise  to  the  discovery  of  many  pheno- 
mena in  physiological  and  medical  science. 

The  great  fact  of  the  diurnal  movements  is  seen  not  only  in  some  acts 
of  human  life,  but  also  in  many  phenomena  observed  among  the  lower 
animals.  But  the  same  law  does  not  apply  to  all,  or  give  rise  to  uniform 
results  ;  for  the  influence  of  light  and  heat  is  often  manifested  in  a  man- 
ner that  is  difierent  and  even  quite  opposite,  not  only  in  individuals,  but 
even  in  tribes  both  of  the  animal  and  of  the  vegetable  kingdom.  There 
are  some  nocturnal  species  of  animals  among  mammals,  birds,  reptiles,  and 
insects. 


no 

The  same  phenomenon  of  diurnal  movements  is  observed  in  several 
functions  of  vegetable  life.  Every  one  has  heard  of  the  sleep  of  plants, 
Flora's  clock,  &c.,  &c.  Draparnaud  has  observed  that  at  the  end  of 
autumn,  when  the  weather  begins  to  become  cool,  the  flowers  of  the  ipo- 
moea  violacea,  and  of  several  species  of  mirabilis,  which  are  usually  night- 
blowing  flowers,  open  at  this  period  of  the  year  during  the  day  also. 

Analogous  diurnal  movements  have  been  observed  in  various  pheno- 
mena of  meteorology ;  as,  for  example,  in  the  indications  of  the  compass 
and  the  barometer.  It  is  at  the  hottest  hours  of  the  day  that  hail  is  gene- 
rated most  abundantly,  and  in  Europe  it  almost  always  falls  during  the 
day. 

It  is  probably  by  following  out  such  analogies  as  these,  in  bringing  them 
together,  and  comparing  them,  that  we  may  hope  to  discover  the  laws 
which  these  phenomena  obey,  and  the  general  causes  which  give  rise  to 
them. —  Gaz.  Medicale. 

Man,  however,  before  he  can  succeed  in  the  objects  of  such  compari- 
sons, must  first  learn  the  universal  cause  of  motion,  and  the  laws  by 
which  it  is  governed,  through  the  whole  range  of  the  solar  system,  when 
he  will  learn  it  is  to  the  laws  of  the  magnetism  of  the  human  system,  and 
of  the  medium  which  surrounds  it,  to  which  he  must  look  to  "  discover 
the  phenomena  they  obey  ;"  for  our  mother  earth  is  a  magnetised  body, 
and  imparts  its  elements  of  sensation,  inclination,  and  motion  to  man  and 
the  myriads  of  bodies  belonging  to  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms. 
It  is  magnetised  geometrically,  or  in  the  most  regular  and  perfect  manner, 
as  is  shown  by  collating  the  numerous  observations  on  the  dip  and  varia- 
tion,— has  two  magnetic  poles,  which  mark  the  arctic  and  antarctic  cir- 
cles, determine  those  of  the  tropics,  and  the  inclination  of  the  earth's  axis 
to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic. 

These  poles,  with  their  meridians,  revole  from  east  to  west,  by  the  in- 
fluence of  the  repulsive  and  expansive  force  of  our  magnetised  sun,  while 
the  earth  revolves  on  its  axis,  and  in  its  orbit,  from  west  to  east,  by  the 
influence  of  his  attractive  and  contractive  force. 

The  annual  rate  of  motion  of  these  poles  determines  both  the  amount  of 
the  repulsive  force,  and  the  diameter  of  the  sun  as  seen  from  the  earth ; 
while  the  amount  of  this  force  upon  the  earth,  with  the  varying  inclina- 
tion of  its  axis,  from  the  spiral  motion  of  its  magnetic  poles,  determines 
alike  its  form,  and  a  long  period  of  revolution  in  another  orbit. 

The  earth  moves  in  this  orbit,  as  in  the  former,  from  west  to  east,  and 
the  ocean  moves  slowly  over  it,  from  east  to  west,  at  the  same  time,  by 
the  force  of  the  spiral  motions  of  these  poles,  draining  the  valleys  and 
mountains  on  one  side  of  our  globe,  and  inundating  in  its  course  those  on 


Ill 

the  other.*  In  the  mean  time  the  magnetic  poles  traverse  the  northern 
and  southern  hemispheres,  pass  the  equator  with  the  axis  in  the  plane  of 
the  ecliptic,  and  then  mount  to  the  opposite  terrestrial  poles,  with  the 
axis  perpendicular  to  it.*  They  then  descend  with  the  axis,  as  before, 
pass  the  equator,  and  again  mount  to  the  terrestrial  poles,  in  one  entire  re- 
volution of  the  magnetic  poles,  the  ocean,  and  of  the  earth  in  this  orbit. 

During  this  revolution  of  the  ocean  and  the  poles,  two  geological  stra- 
ta are  formed  over  our  globe, — in  the  valleys  and  upon  the  mountains, — 
and  they  are  necessarily  of  two  kinds,  or  a  positive  and  a  negative  stra- 
tum,! which,  with  the  remains  of  volcanic  disruptions,  answers  in  the 
most  positive  manner  all  the  demands  of  geology  ;  while  the  motion  of 
the  earth  in  this  orbit  disclose  the  cause  of  the  astonishino;  changes  which 
have  taken  place  in  the  climate,  and  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  king- 
doms, over  every  part  of  our  globe;  for  every  part  of  the  earth  passes 
through  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  in  every  revolution,  and  feels,  in  its 
turn,  every  where  alike  the  never  fading  influence  of  a  tropical  sun. 

If  man  could,  at  any  time,  be  satisfied  with  the  knowledge  he  had  at- 
tained, he  might  rest  here  from  his  labors,  and  contemplate  in  detail  the 
effects  of  this  influence  over  every  part  of  the  earth  ;  but  the  mammoth, 
the  mygalonix,  and  the  long  list  of  other  ancient  animals  of  a  similar  size, 
having  disappeared  from  the  earth,  he  can  have  no  rest  until  he  shall 
have  ascended  to  the  highest  pinnacle  of  the  temple  of  science,  where  he 
can  see  in  the  vast  expanse  before  him  the  earth  moving  round  the  sun 
in  this  orbit;  has  marked  the  other  changes,  produced  by  the  varying  in- 
clination of  its  axis  to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  and  has  learned  the  causes 
which  have  sustained  these  huge  animals  on  the  earth  during  one  period 
of  time,  and  overwhelmed  them  in  another.     Where  he  can  view  the 

*  The  water  is  now  falling  in  the  European  and  rising  in  the  North  American  conti- 
nent. It  is  receding  in  the  Baltic,  by  actual  measurement,  at  the  rate  of  about  5  feet  in 
100  years  ;  and  from  numerous  observations  of  different  persons  along  the  Atlantic  coast 
of  this  continent,  the  water  is  supposed  to  be  rising  here  at  the  rate  of  about  3  feet  in  100 
years. 

*  According  to  La  Place,  the  angle  of  the  earth's  axis  with  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic, 
does  not  vary  more  than  about  2"  40'.  The  calculations  from  which  he  obtained  this 
result  were,  however,  founded  upon  the  hypothesis,  that  the  increase  and  decrease  of 
this  angle  is  produced  by  the  attractions  of  the  planets  or  of  Jupiter.  He  knew  nothing 
of  the  spiral  motions  of  the  magnetic  poles,  their  rate  of  motion,  time  of  revolution 
round  the  earth  from  east  to  west,  or  of  their  great  revolutions  from  pole  to  pole,  and 
consequently  knew  nothing  of  the  amount,  or  of  the  true  cause  of  the  variation  of  this 
angle. 

t  The  magnetic  character  of  the  northern  and  southern  hemispheres  are  changed  every 
time  the  magnetic  poles  pass  the  equator.  Two  strata  are  therefore  formed  in  every 
revolution  ;  one  of  which  is  a  positive  and  the  other  a  negative  .stratum,  or  one  stratum 
of  one  kind  of  rock,  and  the  other  of  another  kind,  which  corresponds  with  the  order  in 
which  they  are  uniformly  found  in  the  earth. 


112 

earth  revolving  round  the  sun  in  a  perfect  circle,J  with  its  axis  perpen- 
dicular to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic, — the  magnetic  poles  and  magnetic 
meridians  corresponding  with  the  terrestrial  poles  and  terrestrial  meri- 
dians, and  the  sun  shining  in  triumph  from  pole  to  pole  in  every  part  of  its 
annua]  orbit.  Where  he  can  see  the  continents  and  islands  covered  every 
where  with  a  luxuriant  foliage,  with  majestic  forests  and  elysian  fields, 
during  one  period  of  time ;  and  the  poles  at  the  equator,  the  axis  in  the 
plane  of  the  ecliptic,  and  the  earth  moving  round  the  sun  in  its  extreme 
elliptical  orbit,  shorn  of  its  vegetation,  covered  with  snow,  and  presenting 
every  where  a  cold  and  barren  waste,  saving  a  zone  or  belt,  in  the  extreme 
oblique  apparent  course  of  the  sun  in  another. 

He  can  then  see  that  the  quantity  of  vegetation  on  the  earth  is  very  lit- 
tle, or  minimum,  when  the  earth's  axis  is  in  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  ;  and 
very  abundant,  or  at  its  maximum,  when  it  is  perpendicular  to  it  ;  and  he 
can  then  comprehend  the  reasons  why  these  animals  were  supported  in 
abundance  in  one  period,  and  became  extinct  in  another. 

He  can  also  see  from  this  eminence  that  the  number,  as  well  as  the 
size,  of  animals  on  the  earth,  is  minimum  in  the  middle  of  the  iron  and 
forlorn  age,  when  the  axis  is  in  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  and  maximum, 
in  the  middle  of  the  golden  and  happy  age,  when  it  is  perpendicular  to  it. 

These  great  changes  in  the  relative  position  of  the  earth's  axis  with  the 
plane  of  the  ecliptic,  and  the  consequences  resulting  from  them,  were  well 
known  to  the  ancients,  and  were  taught  in  their  temples  from  time  imme- 
morial, and  are  beautifully  described  by  ancient  and  modern  poets. 

"  That  forms  are  chang'd  I  grant,  that  nothing  can 
Continue  in  the  figure  it  began : 
The  golden  age  to  silver  was  debas'd  : 
To  copper  that,  our  metal  came  at  last. 

The  face  of  places,  and  their  forms,  decay ; 
And  that  is  solid  earth  that  once  was  sea : 
Seas,  in  their  turn,  retreating  from  the  shore. 
Make  solid  land  what  ocean  was  before  ; 
And  far  from  strands  are  shells  of  fishes  found, 
And  rusty  anchors  fixed  on  mountain  ground : 
And  what  were  fields  before,  now,  wash'd  and  worn 
By  falling  floods  from  high,  to  valleys  turn. 
And  crumbhng  still,  descends  to  level  lands  ; 
And  lakes,  and  trembling  bogs,  are  barren  sands : 
And  the  parch 'd  desert  floats  in  streams  unknown, 
Wand'ring  to  drink  of  waters  not  her  own  ; 

t  It  is  now  ascertained,  by  accurate  observations,  that  the  earth  is  slowly  approachino- 
the  sun.  It  is  mainly  the  consequence  of  the  periodical  decreasing  eUipticity  of  the 
earth's  orbit,  and  not  from  a  resisting  medium,  as  commonly  supposed  ;  for  the  earth 
can  approach  the  sun  from  no  other  cause,  except  that  of  its  condensation  by  the  action 
of  the  magnetic  forces,  which  cannot  be  appreciable,  except  by  observations,  taken  at 
very  distant  periods  of  time. 


113 

Here  nature  living  fountains  opes  ;  and  there 
Seals  up  the  wombs  where  living  fountains  were  ; 
Or  earthquakes  stop  their  ancient  course,  and  bring 
Diverted  streams  to  feed  a  distant  spring." 

Dryde.n's  Pythagorean  Philosophy.* 

Having  thus  seen  and  contemplated  the  various  effects  of  the  physical 
causes  produced  by  the  varying  inclination  of  the  earth's  axis  to  the  plane 
of  the  ecliptic  ;  and  having  assured  himself  that  we  are  again  advancing 
in  another  golden  and  happy  age,  and  that  the  time  v^^ill  again  come 
"  when  there  shall  be  no  more  thence  an  infant  of  days,  nor  an  old 
man  that  hath  not  filled  his  days,''^  but  "when  a  child  shall  die  an 
hundred  years  old,  and  the  age  of  a  man  shall"  again  "  be  as  the  age  of 
a  tree ;"  he  may  then  direct  his  view  to  the  other  revolving  orbs  in  our 
system,  where  he  can  see  the  planets  with  the  ever  changing  phases  of 
their  satellites  in  an  immense  plane,  passing  in  review  before  him  with 
great  rapidity  around  the  sun  in  their  annual,  and  with  a  very  slow 
motion,  in  their  millionary  orbits.  Some  with  their  axis  in  this  plane, 
and  the  orbits  of  their  satellites  perpendicular  to  it,  in  the  middle  of  their 
iron  or  forlorn  age  of  general  deluge  ;  and  some  with  their  axis  perpen- 
dicular to  this  plane,  and  the  orbits  of  their  satellites  parallel  with  it  in 
the  middle  of  their  golden  and  happy  age  ;  while  the  axis  of  others,  with 
the  orbits  of  their  satellites,  are  seen  to  be  variously  inclined  to  this  plane, 
presenting,  with  the  changes  of  their  tropical  and  polar  circles,  and  with 
the  variety  of  their  plumage,  the  most  enchanting  scenery  ever  beheld 
by  man. 

The  remains  of  the  ancient  temples  of  the  Eastern  nations,  as  the  Phe- 
nicians.  Persians,  Assyrians,  Egyptians,  Chinese,  and  Hindoos,  on  which 
their  astronomical  observations  were  made,  and  which  have  withstood 
the  assaults  of  time  during  an  immense  period,  and  of  the  barbarians  dur- 
ing the  last  2noo  years,  attest  both  the  great  importance  these  nations 
attached  to  the  science  of  astronomy,  and  the  untiring  industry  with 
which  they  pursued  their  studies  in  it.  They  were  their  observatories 
and  their  temples  of  science,  in  which  the  highest  branches  of  astronomy 
were  taught,  as  well  as  the  elements  of  that  science  now  taught  among 
the  Western  nations. 

The  hi2;her  branches  included  a  knowledge  of  the  magnetism  of  the 
earth,  of  the  motions  of  the  magnetic  poles  around  it,  from  east  to  west, 
the  phenomena  of  the  variation  of  the  needle,  the  spiral  motions  of  the 

*  Pythagoras  spent  22  years  in  Egypt  and  India  to  complete  his  education  ;  and,  on 
his  return  to  his  native  country,  taught  the  system  of  astronomy  he  learnt  there,  the 
elements  of  which  were  long  after  published  by  Copernicus,  and  are  now  called  the  Co- 
pernican  system. 

15 


114 

magnetic  poles,  the  revolution  of  the  ocean,  and  of  the  earth's  axis  in  its 
millionary  orbit,  as  well  as  the  changes  produced  on  the  earth  by  the  con- 
tinued operation  of  these  causes. 

According  to  the  received  chronology  of  the  Western  nations,  the  oldest 
observatory  was  on  the  temple  of  Belus ;  and  historians  inforna  us  that 
Berosus,  the  astronomer  of  Babylon,  told  Alexander,  and  the  philosophers 
who  accompanied  him  in  his  expedition,  about  330  years  B.  C,  that  it 
was  then  430,000  years  since  the  earth's  axis  was  in  the  plane  of  the 
ecliptic,  and  presented  them  with  astronomical  observations  during  that 
period. 

This  period,  however,  must  have  been  longer,  or,  in  other  words,  they 
could  not  have  been  mean  years,  for  the  motion  of  the  earth  on  its  axis 
varies  in  the  different  ages,  and  is  minimum  when  the  axis  is  in  the  plane 
of  the  ecliptic,  and  maximum  when  it  is  perpendicular  to  it ;  the  mean  an- 
nual rate  acknowledged  by  the  Eastern  nations,  and  proved  by  the  observa- 
tions of  Pytheas  330  years  B.  C,  as  compared  with  the  observations  at  Pa- 
ris in  1801,  being  33'"  45"",  whereas  the  mean  rate  of  the  period  given 
by  Berosus,  ascertained  by  dividing  66*^  10',*  the  angle  of  the  axis  at  that 
time  with  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  by  430,000,  is  only  33'"  15""  Besides 
the  depression  of  the  terrestrial  meridians,  or  the  depression  of  the  terres- 
trial poles,  varies  also  in  the  different  ages,  and  is  minimum  or  0  when 
the  axis  is  in  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  and  maximum  or  32'  26"  when  it 
is  perpendicular  to  it,  making  a  depression  of  16'  13"  at  each  pole,  and  a 
protrusion  at  the  equator  of  16'  13. "I  The  magnetic  poles  then,  in 
placing  the  axis  in  a  perpendicular  position,  in  regard  to  the  plane  of  the 
ecliptic,  traverse  the  earth  from  the  equator  90° — 16'  13".  Now,  2,000 
years  at  the  mean  rate,  the  number  of  years  required  to  be  added  to  the 
number  given  by  Berosus,  to  complete  the  maha  yucjX  of  432,000  years,  is 
18'  36"  40'",  and  if  we  now  subtract  from  this  amount  the  16'  13" 
it  will  leave  2'  23"  40'",  equal  (at  the  mean  rate)  to  270  years  from 
the  fall  of  Babylon  to  the  end  of  the  maha  yug,  and  the  commencement  of 
the  call  yug^  of  144,000  years,  making  in  the  whole,  at  the  completion 
of  this  last  period,  576,000  years,  or  one-quarter  of  a  revolution  of  the 
earth  in  this  orbit. 

There  cannot,  it  is  believed,  be  any  mistake  in  these  facts  which  can 

*  There  should  be  added  to  this  amount  2'  03"  18'"  45""  for  refraction,  which 
would  make  the  true  angle  of  the  axis  at  that  time  66"  12'  03"  18'"  45"". 

t  The  amount  of  the  depression  at  each  pole,  on  the  15th  September,  1837,  as  calcu- 
lated by  the  action  of  the  magnetic  forces,  was  11'  59"  22'"  16"",  and  the  protrusion 
at  the  equator  11'  59"  22'"  16"",  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  but  these  were  the  exact 
amounts  of  the  depression  at  the  poles,  and  of  the  protrusion  at  the  equator,  at  that  time. 

X  A  term  of  three  agesoi  144,000  years  each,  used  by  the  ancient  astronomers. 

§  Age  of  heat. 


115 

make  any  material  variation  in  the  results  we  have  obtained,  except,  per- 
haps, in  the  exact  amount  of  the  number  given  by  Berosus,  which  might 
have  been  a  few  years  more  or  less,  and  omitted  to  be  mentioned  by  the 
historian.  It  was  probably  about  60  years  more  ;  for  the  philosophers  of 
Babylon,  in  common  with  those  of  other  eastern  countries,  who  had  been 
admitted  in  the  inner  temple,  and  initiated  into  the  Elysian  mysteries, 
proclaimed  every  where,  in  language  expressive  of  great  joy,  the  com- 
mencement of  a  new  and  happy  age,  about  330  years  after  the  taking  of 
Babylon  by  Alexander. 

It  was,  therefore,  about  431,670  mean  years  from  the  time  the  axis 
was  in  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  to  the  fall  of  Babylon,  and  the  number 
given  by  Berosus,  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  earth  on  its  axis  dur- 
ing that  period. 

The  Egyptians  claimed  to  have  accurately  observed  373  eclipses  of  the 
sun,  and  S32  of  the  moon,  during  a  period  of  48,853  years,  or  from  Vul- 
can to  Alexander.  The  Hindoos,  who  are  now  universally  acknowledged 
to  be  the  oldest  astronomers,  allege  that  one  of  their  books  was  written 
near  the  middle  of  the  last  golden  age,  or  at  a  period  when  the  angle  of 
the  axis  with  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  was  89*^  14'.*  They  also  claim  to 
have  observed  1,577,917,828  days  in  a  maha-yug^  from  sun  rise  to  sun  rise, 
which  gives  365d.  15h.  31'  31"  24'",  for  the  mean  length  of  a  day 
during  that  period,  which  is  now  reduced  to  365d.  6h.  9'  11"  30"', 
makins:  a  decrease  of  9h.  21'  19"  54'"  since  the  time  of  the  mean,  and 
a  difference  of  about  '455  years  in  a  period  of  about  433,841  years,  or 
since  the  axis  was  in  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  and  the  deluge  at  its  max- 
mum.| 

*  The  angle  of  the  earth's  axis  with  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  may  hereafter  be  obtained 
with  accuracy,  at  any  time,  by  adding  to  the  angle,  found  at  Paris  in  ISOl,  33'"  45"" 
for  every  year  after  that  time,  and  the  small  amount  of  increase  of  this  rate.  The  time  of 
year  in  which  the  observation  was  made  should  also  be  known,  when  either  the  angle  of 
the  axis  or  the  obliquity  of  the  ecliptic  may  be  determined,  at  any  time,  with  perfect  ac- 
cury,  to  the  end  of  this  period,  unless  the  observation  at  Paris  should  require  a  small 
correction  for  solar  nutation,  which  is  said  to  be  too  small  to  be  detected  by  observation, 
but  which  is  shown  by  the  action  of  the  magnetic  forces  of  the  sun  on  those  of  the  earth, 
to  amount  to  2"  39'"  39"",— the  diameter  of  the  circle  in  which  the  terrestrial  pole 
moves  around  the  mean  pole  being  5"  19"'  18'"'. 

Obliquity  of  the  ecliptic,  by  observation  at  Paris  in  1801,  23'=,  27'  58". 

Obliquity  of  the  ecliptic,  by  calculation  in  1841,  23°,  27'  35"  30'". 

The  average  increase  of  tlie  mean  rate  amounts  to  only  1"  03""  in  a  thousand 
years. 

t  The  water  is  equally  diffused  over  the  earth  and  covers  the  valleys  when  the 
deluge  is  at  its  maximum.  When  the  angle  of  the  axis  with  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic, 
begins  to  decrease,  the  ocean  begins  to  recede  from  the  equator,  and  spreads  over  the 
valleys. 


116 

The  length  of  a  day  is  now  11"  less  than  it  was  in  the  time  of  Hyppar- 
chus,  276  B.  C  * 

It  would  be  easy  to  add  to  these  evidences,  which  are  regarded  as  con- 
clusive, a  long  list  of  well  established  facts,  which  correspond  with  them, 
but  it  cannot  be  necessary  to  do  so,  for  many  of  them  will  naturally  recur 
to  the  mind  of  the  intelligent  reader. 

Having  now  advanced  in  the  golden  age  more  than  1840'|"  years,  we 
find  the  average  heat  of  the  earth,  and  the  average  age  of  man  increas- 
ing, and  there  can  be  no  doubt  but  they  will  both  go  on  increasing  in 
a  gradually  increasing  ratio  to  the  middle  of  this  age,  or  until  the  earth's 
axis  is  again  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic.  J 

We  find,  therefore,  that  besides  the  diurnal  and  annual  changes  in  the 
temperature,  and  constitution  of  the  atmosphere,  man  is  subject  to  other 
great  changes  in  the  temperature  and  constitution  of  the  atmosphere, 
which  belong  to  long  periods  of  time,  and  which  n^t  only  produce  great 
changes  in  the  diseases  to  which  he  is  subject,  but  great  and  remarkable 
changes  in  the  moral  and  physical  character  of  our  race,  and  hence  the 
necessity  of  corresponding  changes  in  the  treatment  of  diseases. 

Having  shown  the  magnetic  symptoms  to  be  constant  and  uniform 
in  a  large  class  of  chronic  diseases,  and  the  remote  and  proximate  causes 
which  produce  them,  with  the  causes  which  change  their  character  in  dif- 
ferent periods  of  time,  we  may  now  show  that  the  age  in  which  we  live 
demands  a  radical  change  in  the  treatment  of  diseases,  by  deinonstrating 
the  fact  that  the  cases  of  the  large  class  of  tubercular  diseases  of  the  or- 
gans and  limbs,  uniformly  lost  by  the  old  empirical  remedies,  may  now  be 
as  uniformly  saved  by  a  very  different  and  scientific  treatment,  adapted  to 
the  scientific  symptoms  by  which  they  are  distinguished. 

The  change  in  the  character  of  inflammatory  diseases  during  the  last 
30  years  is  very  great ;  for  patients  affected  with  diseases  of  this,  class, 
will  not  now  usually  bear  with  impunity,  more  than  about  one-half  of  the 
depletion,  that  was  required  and  sustained  at  that  period. 

*  The  angle  of  the  Moon's  axis  with  the  plane  of  its  orbit  is  about  4",  and  is  in- 
creasing at  the  annual  rate  of  6'"  36""  in  an  increasing  ratio  ;  and  will  become  perpen- 
dicular to  the  plane  of  its  orbit  in  142,155  mean  yeai-s,  or  at  the  same  time  the  earth's 
axis  becomes  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic.  The  plane  of  the  equator  and 
the  plane  of  the  Moon's  orbit  will  then  correspond  with  the  plane  of  the  ecUptic. 

t  1845. 

J  The  amount  of  the  average  increase  of  the  heat  of  the  earth,  is  about  one  quarter 
more  than  that  found  by  M.  Arago. 

The  bills  of  mortality  and  the  rates  of  life  insurance  show  that  the  age  of  man  is  in- 
creasing. According  to  the  ancients,  the  minimum  age  of  man  is  only  70  years,  and 
his  mean  age  only  about  300,  while  his  maximum  age  is  more  than  900  years. 


117 

This  amount  of  change  in  the  character  of  diseases  will  appear  very 
great,  as  it  is,  for  the  time  ;  but  it  is  not,  however,  greater  than  the  other 
great  changes  in  the  intellectual  and  physical  character  of  man  during  the 
same  period,  from  the  great  and  continued  changes  in  the  physical  causes 
by  which  he  is  surrounded,  and  which  must  go  on  increasing  with  an  in- 
creasing ratio  to  the  end  of  this  age,  when  they  will  arrive  at  their  max- 
imum. 

The  ocean  is  depressed  at  the  poles  at  the  rate  of  50  yards  for  every 
1000  years,  and  is  protruded  at  the  equator  the  same  number  of  yards  in 
the  same  time  ;  it  is  also  protruded  in  other  latitudes  severally  as  fol- 
lows, in  periods  of  1000  and  100  years. 


Lat. 


'oles. 

1000  Years. 

100  Years. 

Equator. 

1000  Years. 

100  Yaars. 

0 

Yds. 

Yds. 

o 

Yds. 

Yds. 

90 

50 

5 

Lat. 

00 

50 

5 

67i 
61i 
54 

25 
18 
10 

1 

22 1 
28| 
36 

25 
18 
10 

1 

49i 
47f 

5 

1 
I 

4 

40i 
42| 

5 
2i 

1 
F 

4 

45  0  0  45  0  0 

The  depression  of  the  ocean,  it  will  be  seen,  is  maximum  at  the  pole& 
and  minimum  in  lat.  45° ;  while  the  protrusion  of  the  ocean  is  maximum 
at  the  quator,  and  minimum  in  lat.  45°.  The  deluge  is  consequently 
maximum  in  the  latitudes  north  of  45°  in  the  northern,  and  in  the  lati- 
tudes south  of  450  in  the  southern  hemisphere,  when  the  earth's  axis  is 
in  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  ;  and  it  is  also  maximum  in  the  middle  lati- 
tudes, or  those  between  45°  and  the  equator,  when  it  is  perpendicular  to 
it.  Man  and  other  animals  are  consequently  driven,  in  different  ages, 
from  the  latitudes  of  the  maximum  floods  between  50^  and  90°  to 
the  latitudes  or  the  minimum  floods,  between  40°  and  50°,  where  the 
earth  is  constantly  habitable,  and  where  a  greater  quantity  of  animal  mat- 
ter must  consequently  accumulate  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  earth. 
This  corresponds  with  the  observations  of  M.  Bailly,  who  found  the 
greatest  quantity  of  animal  matter  between  44°  and  45^.  The  action  of 
the  magnetic  forces  upon  the  ocean  must  necessarily  produce  a  current  in. 
it  from  the  equator  towards  the  poles  at  one  period,  and  from  the  poles 
towards  the  equator  at  another.  This  fact  is  observed  during  the  present 
period  ;  and  the  currents  are  from  the  poles  towards  the  equator. 

The  force  of  these  currents  is  maximum  at  the  poles  and  minimum  in, 
the  low  latitudes,  where  they  are  merged  in  the  force  of  the  currents- 
from  east  to  west,  produced  by  the  repulsive  force  of  the  sun.     Note  C. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


REMEDIES    FOR    TUBERCULAR    DISEASES. 


Having  learned  the  symptoms  by  which  we  can  with  ease  and  cer- 
tainty distinguish  tubercula  of  the  organs  or  limbs,  and  having  also 
found  the  remote  and  proximate  cause  of  these  symptoms,  we  have  sur- 
mounted the  greatest  difficulties  we  had  to  encounter,  to  effect  the  great 
object  we  had  in  view — that  of  saving  from  a  premature  grave  a  great 
number,  every  year,  of  the  fairest  and  most  talented  portion  of  our  race. 

The  object  is  therefore  worthy  of  our  greatest  ambition,  and  we  should 
pursue  it  with  an  ardor  corresponding  to  its  great  importance. 

Before  undertaking  to  remedy  disease,  &c.,  it  will  be  necessary  for  us 
to  find  the  proper  materials  by  which  we  may  repair  injuries  to  the  hu- 
man system  as  a  machinist  does  to  repair  the  injuries  to  a  machine  ;  and 
for  this  purpose,  it  will  not  only  be  necessary  to  refer  to  the  laws  of  mo- 
tion, but  to  the  phenomena  attendant  on  tubercular  swellings  of  the  or- 
gans and  limbs. 

We  have  seen  in  the  illustrations  of  the  laws  of  motion  by  which  the 
body  is  governed,  that  repulsions  expand  and  attractions  contract.  If 
then  an  organ  or  limb  is  increasing  in  size,  it  follows  that  the  repulsive 


119 

and  expansive  force  within  the  organ  is  prevailing  over  its  attractive  and 
contractive  force.  It  also  necessarily  follows,  that  to  reduce  these  swell- 
ings, it  is  important  that  the  attractive  and  contractive  force  prevail  over 
the  repulsive  and  expansive  force. 

Nature  frequently  cures  cases  of  this  disease  by  a  change  in  the  action 
of  these  forces  in  this  order.  Thousands  of  cases  of  tubercular  disease 
of  the  stomach,  intestines,  and  liver,  under  the  names  of  fevers,  diar- 
rhoeas, and  dysenteries,  produced  in  the  hot  months,  when  the  repulsive 
and  expansive  force  in  the  atmosphere  is  prevailing  over  its  attractive 
and  contractive  force,  are  cured  in  the  cool  months,  when  the  attractive 
and  contractive  force  of  the  atmosphere  is  prevailing  over  the  repulsive 
and  expansive  force.  When  the  hot  weather  commences,  then  those 
diseases  begin  to  appear ;  and  when  the  change  of  season  gives  to  cool 
weather  the  ascendant,  they  begin  to  disappear,  as  is  well  known  to  the 
most  common  observers. 

If  we  can  now  find  means  to  counteract  the  force  by  which  the  organs 
and  limbs  are  thus  expanded,  we  shall  not  only  be  able  to  assist  nature 
in  repairing  the  injuries  sustained  during  the  progress  of  these  expan- 
sions in  the  hot  months,  but  we  shall  be  able  to  repair  the  injuries  in  the 
cases  in  which  these  natural  influences  have  failed.     On  an  examination 
of  the  natural  constitution  of  matter,  we  find  there  are  two  great  divi- 
sions in  the  earth,  one  of  which  has  a  contractive,  and  the  other  an  ex- 
pansive force  ;  or  the  contractive  force  of  one,  and  the  expansive  force 
of  the  other,  have  a  great  preponderance  over  their  opposite  forces.     We 
allude  to  the  acids  and  the  alkalies.     The  immense  quantity  of  muriatic 
acid,  and  of  soda,  required  to  form  the  muriate  of  soda  or  common  salt 
in  the  ocean  and  in  the  land,  shows  that  these  two  kinds  of  matter- are 
very  generally  diffused,  and  were  first  condensed  with  the  water  from  the 
gases  which  probably  constituted  our  globe  in  its  primeval  state.     And 
as  the  muriatic  acid,  or  the  chlorine  gas  concentrated  in  the  muriate  of 
soda,  forms  the  basis  of  the  other  acids,  or  a  large  proportion  of  the  acids 
of  our  earth,  so  it  is  probable  soda  or  a  gas  concentrated  in  it,  forms 
the  base  of  the  greatest  number  of  alkaline  bodies.     However  this  may 
be,  we  know  that  chlorine  combined  with  other  negative  matter,  has  a 
strong  power  of  contraction  ;  and  soda  united  with  other  positive  matter, 
a  strong  power  of  expansion.     We  have  familiar  examples  of  the  first  in 
the  case  of  acids,  and  of  the  last  in  the  case  of  soaps.     If,  therefore,  we 
can  convey  to  the  tuberculated  organs  and  limbs,  constantly  and  steadily, 
a  harmless  negative  matter,  in  quantities  suflacient  to  make  the  attrac- 
tions and  contractions  in  the  organs  and  limbs  prevail  over  the  repulsions 
and  expansions,  we  ought  to  be  able  to  cure  these  diseases  in  their  first 
stages  as  uniformly  as  they  are  produced. 

Physicians  have  long  been  in  the  habit  of  prescribing  chlorine  for  their 


120 

patients,  combined  with  negative  matter — with  mercury,  under  the  names 
of  chloride  of  mercury,  commonly  called  muriate  or  oxy-muriate  of  mer- 
cury, and  sub-chloride  of  mercury  or  calomel,  and  with  iron,  commonly 
called  muriate  of  iron. 

They  have  also  been  sometimes  in  the  habit  of  prescribing  it  in  com- 
bination with  gold,  under  the  names  of  chloride  and  per-chloride  of  gold, 
and  these  combinations  have  been  taken  into  the  stomach,  mixed  with 
the  chyle,  attracted  to  the  heart,  and  then  repelled  from  it,  through  the 
arteries,  to  every  part  of  the  body,  or  to  every  part  of  every  organ,  limb, 
or  other  structure. 

These,  with  Iodine,  to  which  I  have  already  referred,  are  the  reme- 
dies principally  relied  on  by  physicians  to  cure  or  palliate  this  class 
of  diseases.  They  are,  however,  differently  selected,  and  they  are  pre- 
scribed in  doses  differing  according  to  the  diversities  of  medical  opinion. 
The  difference  in  the  intervals  of  time,  also,  in  which  these  remedies  are 
directed  to  be  taken,  is  very  great ;  and  the  result  of  such  practice  is 
that  which  might  very  naturally  be  expected — an  almost  constant  fail- 
ure in  curing  the  disease,  and  consequently  an  entire  want  of  confidence 
in  their  efficacy. 

We  have,  on  the  contrary,  very  successfully,  during  a  period  of  more 
than  twenty-five  years,  prescribed  chlorine,  united  with  gold  and  other 
neo-ative  matter,  (by  processes  which  it  would  be  both  tedious  and  use- 
less to  describe  here,)  in  the  form  of  a  pill,  in  the  same  quantity  and  in 
the  same  intervals  of  time,  in  all  conditions  of  patients  affected  with 
chronic  diseases  of  this  class.  Note  A. 

As  the  series  of  lymphatic  glands  or  secreting  organs  along  the  spi- 
nal column,  and  their  satellites  around  the  vertebrae,  with  the  spinal 
nerves  are  involved  more  or  less  in  the  disease  of  the  organs  with  which 
they  are  connected, — I  use,  also,  a  plaster  composed  of  bitumen  and 
iron,  placed  on  the  spine,  for  the  purpose  of  making  the  skin  under  it 
excrete  a  mucous  or  positive  matter,  instead  of  its  natural  aeriform  or 
negative  matter  during  the  progress  of  the  cure  ;  and  for  the  same  rea- 
son, the  plaster  is  also  applied  over  the  white  swellings  of  any  part  of 
the  body,  joints  or  limbs.  Large  quantities  of  the  magnetic  forces  are 
evolved  in  the  process  of  the  decomposition  of  these  remedies  in  the 
oro-ans,  and  on  the  surface  of  the  skin,  which  increase  the  strength  of  the 
primary  and  consecutive  poles  situated  within  the  organs — gradually  re- 
duce the  tuberculated  organs  and  limbs — remove  the  compression  of  the 
nerves  and  re-establish  the  natural  action  of  the  motive  power  of  the 
system.  Note  B. 

As  a  per-chloride  of  gold  and  soda  is  one  of  the  principal  articles  that 
enter  into  the  composition  of  the  pills,  we  are  pleased  to  be  able  to  in- 
troduce here  the  following  notice  from  a  French  periodical,  of  its  effects 


121 

in  the  class  of  diseases  in  which  we  have  so  long  used  it,  and  to  which 
our  attention  was  directed  by  the  kindness  of  a  friend  : 

"  M.  Legrand,  to  whom  the  profession  is  already  indebted  for  a  valua- 
ble work  on  the  employment  of  salts  of  gold  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis, 
has  recently  proposed  in  a  memoir  read  before  the  Academy,  apparently 
with  much  reason,  the  use  of  the  same  mineral  in  the  cure  of  scrofula, 
when  it  affects  the  soft  parts  of  the  human  frame,  as  the  skin,  the  adi- 
pose and  cellular  tissue,  certain  parts  of  the  mucous  membranes,  and  par- 
ticularly the  lymphatic  glands,  both  external  and  internal,  and,  in  short, 
any  texture  not  osseous  or  immediately  connected  with  the  osseous  tex- 
ture. 

"  This  agent,  M.  Legrand,  exhibits,  either  externally  by  means  of  au- 
riferous frictions,  or  by  dressing  the  sores  with  pure  gold  in  the  form  of  an 
impalpable  powder  mixed  with  lard  ;  or,  internally,  in  the  form  of  pills  or 
pastilles,  or  rubbed  on  the  mucous  papillated  surface  of  the  tongue.  In 
the  first  case,  that  of  impalpable  powder,  one-sixtieth  part,  or  about  four 
or  five  grains  of  gold  powder,  are  made  into  an  ointment  with  half  an 
ounce  of  lard.  M.  Legrand,  however,  thinks  he  has  ascertained  that  it 
has  not  a  medicinal  action  on  the  economy  equal  to  that  of  the  oxides  or 
of  the  salts. 

"  The  forms  of  the  mineral  most  strongly  recommended  are,  the  oxide  of 
gold  by  potass ;  the  oxide  of  gold  by  tin,  occasionally  called  the  stannate 
of  gold  ;  and,  lastly,  the  per-chloride  of  gold  and  soda,  more  generally 
known  under  the  name  of  the  muriate  of  gold  and  soda,  in  the  order  now 
specified,  the  most  energetic  being  placed  last.  These  last  preparations 
are  indeed  so  active,  that  they  cannot  be  administered  in  doses  above 
l-15th,  l-12th,  or  1-lOth  of  a  grain;  and  in  large  doses  they  would  pro- 
duce most  serious  disturbance  in  the  economy. 

"  These  preparations,  however,  unlike  antimony,  arsenic,  or  mercury, 
are  void  of  corrosive  properties,  and  seem  chiefly  to  excite  the  animal 
tissues  to  more  salutary  action ;  and,  according  to  M.  Legrand,  they  are, 
when  not  sanative,  not  injurious.  Hence  their  use  may  be  much  longer 
continued  than  those  of  the  preparations  of  mercury  or  arsenic." 

M.  Legrand  is  mistaken  in  supposing  that  the  per-chloride  of  gold  has 
a  curative  effect  in  disease  of  "  certain  parts  of  the  mucous  membranes." 
It  has  no  effect  whatever  on  the  mucous  glands,  and  no  apparent  effect 
upon  any  part  of  these  membranes,  nor  has  my  combination  of  it,  except 
in  cases  where  the  disease  of  the  membrane  is  dependent  on  tubercular 
disease  of  the  serous  membrane  to  which  it  is  united,  and  which  disap- 
pears with  the  disease  of  the  latter.  He  is  also  mistaken  in  supposing 
it  has  no  sanative  effect  in  osseous  textures.  It  must  be  admitted,  how- 
ever, that  it  has  very  little,  when  used  alone,  compared  to  its  action  in 
the  combination  in  which  I  use  it. 


122 

The  energy  and  efficiency  with  which  these  medicines  must  act,  on 
the  principles  of  magnetism,  may  be  inferred  from  the  following  extract 
from  Farraday's  Researches  on  the  "  Absolute  quantity  of  magnetism  in 
matter." 

"  If  two  wires,  one  of  platina  and  one  of  zinc,  each  one-eighteenth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  placed  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  apart,  and  immer- 
sed to  the  depth  of  five-eights  of  an  inch  in  acid,  consisting  of  one  drop 
of  oil  of  vitriol,  and  four  ounces  of  distilled  water,  at  a  temperature  of 
about  60  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and  connected  at  the  other  extremities  by 
a  copper  wire,  eighteen  feet  long  and  one-eighteenth  of  an  inch  in  thick- 
ness, yielded  as  much  electricity  (magnetism)  in  little  more  than  three 
seconds  of  time,  as  a  Ley  den  battery  of  fifteen  equal  jars  of  such  a  size 
that  each  contains  one  hundred  and  eighty-four  square  inches  of  glass, 
coated  on  both  sides,  independent  of  the  bottoms,  and  charged  by  thirty 
turns  of  a  very  large  and  powerful  plate  electrical  machine  in  full  action. 
This  quantity,  though  suiBcient  if  passed  at  once  through  the  head  of  a 
rat  or  cat,  to  have  killed  it  as  by  a  flash  of  lightning,  was  evolved  by  the 
mutual  action  of  so  small  a  portion  of  the  zinc  wire  and  water  in  con- 
tact with  it,  that  the  loss  of  weight  sustained  by  either  would  be  inap- 
preciable by  our  most  delicate  instruments." 

Mr.  Farraday  deduces  from  his  experiments  that  the  quantity  of  elec- 
tricity belonging  to  a  compound  matter  is  identical  with  the  quantity 
necessary  to  effect  a  separation  into  its  elements.  Hence  may  be  inferred 
the  enormous  quantity  of  electricity  contained  in  a  single  grain  of  water, 
from  the  quantity  required  for  its  decomposition.  "  It  must  be  in  quan- 
tity sufficient  to  sustain  a  platinum  wire  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  red  hot, 
in  contact  with  the  air,  for  three  minutes  and  three-quarters."  "  I  have 
endeavored,"  he  says,  "  to  make  a  comparison  by  the  loss  of  weight  of 
such  a  wire,  in  a  given  time,  in  such  an  acid,  but  the  proportion  is  so  high 
that  I  am  almost  afraid  to  mention  it.  It  would  appear  that  800,000 
such  charges  of  the  Leyden  battery,  as  I  have  referred  to,  would  be  ne- 
cessary to  supply  electricity  sufficient  to  decompose  a  single  grain  of 
water ;  or,  if  I  am  right,  to  equal  the  quantity  of  electricity,  which  is 
naturally  associated  with  the  elements  of  that  grain  of  water,  endowing 
them  with  their  natural  chemical  affinity." 

The  influence  of  magnetism  on  animals  in  augmenting  the  force  of  the 
contractions  and  expansions  of  the  muscles,  and  in  altering  the  morbid  and 
establishing  the  natural  secretion,  has  been  proved  by  a  great  number  of 
facts.  The  experiments  of  Dr.  Philip  are  so  well  known  to  the  medical 
and  philosophical  world,  that  it  is  almost  an  act  of  supererogation  to  repeat 
them ;  but  as  this  little  work  is  intended  for  all  classes  of  readers,  we  deem 
it  advisable  to  introduce  an  abstract  of  them  Dr.  Philip  "  found  that  the 
secretion  of  the  gastric  juice  in  the  stomach,  which  had  been  suspended 


123 

by  the  division  of  the  8th  pair  of  nerves,  was  restored  on  establishing 
the  voltaic  current  of  electricity  through  the  divided  portion  of  the  nerves 
next  to  the  stomach  The  accuracy  of  the  experiment  on  which  this 
conclusion  is  founded,  was  for  a  long  time  disputed  ;  but  it  has  been  lately 
satisfactorily  established,  by  their  careful  repetition  at  the  Royal  Institu- 
tion by  Dr.  Philip,  in  conjunction  with  Mr.  Brodie.  Dr.  Philip  appears 
also  to  have  succeeded  in  showing,  that  when  the  lungs  and  muscles  are 
deprived  of  their  proportion  of  the  nervous  influence,  so  that  their  func- 
tions are  impeded,  and  the  breathing  has  become  difficult  and  laborious, 
increased  facility  is  obtained  in  carrying  on  these  movements  by  the 
stimulus  of  the  galvanic  power. 

"  It  appears,  then,  from  these  facts,  that  the  galvanic  energy  is  capable 
of  supplying  the  place  of  the  nervous  influence  ;  so  that,  by  means  of  its 
assistance,  the  stomach,  otherwise  inactive,  digests  its  food  as  usual,  and 
the  muscular  apparatus  of  the  lungs  are  roused  from  a  state  of  compara- 
tive torpor  to  one  of  healthy  action."  Dr.  Philip,  indeed,  contends  "that 
the  inferences  deducible  from  these  experiments  establish  the  identity  of 
galvanism,  electricity,  and  nervous  influence." 

Directions  for  using  the  remedies. 

One  pill  must  be  taken  night  and  morning,  during  three  weeks,  after 
which  one  pill  every  night ;  except  in  cases  of  children  under  three 
years  and  over  one  year  and  a  half,  when  half  of  a  pill  only  must  be 
given  every  night  on  going  to  bed,  until  the  disease  is  cured,  no  matter 
what  the  state  of  the  stomach  or  intestines.  In  cases  of  children  under 
a  year  and  a  half  old  and  over  three  months,  a  quarter  of  a  pill  may  be 
taken  at  bedtime  in  any  convenient  medium. 

For  children,  the  pill  may  be  dissolved  in  water  at  the  rate  of  four  tea 
spoonsful  of  water  to  one  pill,  if  care  is  taken  to  shake  the  solution  well 
before  using;  it. 

Privation  in  dieting  is  neither  necessary  nor  proper  during  the  use  of 
these  pills  ;  but  on  the  contrary  the  most  nourishing  food  must  be  taken 
in  all  cases  where  the  stomach  will  bear  it,  and  it  will  always  be  borne 
after  a  few  days  use  of  the  pills. 

Patients  must  not  only  take  the  most  nourishing  food,  but  must  take 
any  kind  the  appetite  craves ;  that  is  when  they  have  eat  all  they  can 
of  one  kind  of  food,  they  may  take  what  they  can  of  another,  and  then  of 
another,  &c. 

As  soon  as  the  swellings  begin  to  lessen  in  the  organs  or  limbs,  the 
latter  are  flaccid  and  weak,  and  want  support ;  they  must  get  it  from 
food. 


124 

DirectiaKS  for  using  the  Plaster  in  cases  where  the  disease  is  affecting  the 
organs,  as  in  consumption,  dyspepsia,  SfC. 

In  tubercula,  or  what  is  called  scrofula  or  chronic  disease,  affecting 
the  head  or  face,  the  plaster  must  be  applied  to  the  middle  and  upper 
part  of  the  back  of  the  neck  or  upper  cervical  vertebrae — in  consump- 
tion, and  also  in  chronic  disease  or  hypertrophy  of  the  heart,  it  must  be 
applied  over  the  lovrer  half  of  the  neck  and  extend  dovs^n  between  the 
shoulders  over  the  first,  second,  and  third  joints  of  the  neck,  or  dorsal 
vertebrae, — in  dyspepsia  it  must  be  applied  over  the  first,  second,  third, 
fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  joints  of  the  back  between  the  shoulders,  or  from 
the  large  and  last  joint  of  the  neck  to  the  seventh  dorsal  vertebrae — in 
chronic  disease  of  the  liver  it  must  be  applied  over  the  seventh,  eighth 
and  ninth  dorsal  vertebrae — in  chronic  disease  of  the  spleen  it  must  be 
applied  over  the  same  vertebrae — in  chronic  disease  of  the  intestines  and 
mesentery  or  chronic  diarrhoea,  it  must  be  applied  over  the  eleventh  and 
twelfth  dorsal,  and  first  and  second  lumbar  vertebrae — in  the  uterus  or 
chronic  disease  of  this  organ  or  leucorrhoea,  chlorosis  or  menorrhagia,  it 
must  be  applied  over  all  the  joints  of  the  small  of  the  back  or  lumbar 
vertebrae.  In  such  cases,  the  leather  or  cloth  for  the  plaster  may  be  cut 
five  inches  wide,  and  spread  very  thin  three  inches  wide,  leaving  a  mar- 
gin on  the  sides  and  ends  of  about  an  inch,  and  must  be  renewed  by 
adding  a  little  more  of  the  plaster,  as  often  as  the  plaster  becomes  loose 
and  does  not  adhere.  If  the  plaster  is  renewed  very  often,  or  oftener 
than  once  in  two  or  three  days,  and  spread  thick,  it  will  in  some  cases 
make  the  back  very  sore ;  and  in  such  cases,  it  may  be  discontinued  two 
or  three  days,  or  until  the  pimples  it  produces  are  healed,  and  then  re- 
applied as  before,  and  its  use  continued  until  the  disease  is  cured. 

As  the  disease  very  frequently  affects  more  than  one  organ  at  the 
same  time,  as  the  stomach  and  liver,  or  the  lungs,  stomach  and  liver,  the 
plaster  should  in  such  cases  be  placed  over  all  the  joints  through  which 
the  spinal  nerves  are  connected  with  the  diseased  organs. 

In  the  cases  in  which  the  disease  of  the  organs  is  not  very  severe, 
the  pills  alone  will  be  sufficient  to  cure  it  without  the  aid  of  the  plaster, 
and  in  the  bad  cases  that  would  require  two  or  three  boxes  of  the  pills, 
the  plaster  may  generally  be  discontinued  after  the  use  of  one  or  two 
boxes. 

Directions  for  using  the  Plaster  in  ivhite  swellings  of  the  limbs,  jaw  and 
neck,  and  in  ulcers  and  abscesses. 

The  plaster  must  be  spread  very  thin  (it  is  no  matter  how  thin)  on 
India  rubber  cloth,  which  is  much  better  than  any  other,  or  thick  oiled 
silk,  or  the  rough  side  of  a  piece  of  oil  cloth,  or  on  very  thin  and  soft 


125 

leather,  or  on  glazed  cotton  or  linen  cloth,  and  of  a  size  sufficient  to 
cover  the  tubercles,  ulcers,  abscesses,  or  white  swellings,  or  painful  part 
of  the  system,  and  applied  to  them  and  removed  and  renewed  once  in 
every  day,  either  by  adding  a  very  little  more  of  the  plaster,  and  what 
will  be  barely  sufficient  to  give  it  a  new  surface,  or  by  spreading  a  new 
plaster. 

If,  on  removing  the  plaster,  much  of  it  should  adhere  to  the  skin,  it 
may  be  washed  off  with  soap,  and  the  plaster  re-applied,  and  this  course 
must  be  pursued  until  the  tubercles,  ulcers,  and  abscesses  or  white  swel- 
lings are  removed.  Small  vesicles  appear  under  the  plaster  in  a  few 
days  after  it  is  applied  filled  with  lymph,  but  they  soon  disappear,  and 
others  are  formed  and  disappear,  and  require  no  attention  whatever. 

Observations  on  the  use  of  the  remedies  in  different  cases. 

When  white  swellings  of  the  joints  or  limbs,  over  which  these  plasters 
are  applied,  are  cured,  they  are  always  smaller  than  the  corresponding 
well  joints  or  limbs,  unless  from  long  continued  disease  the  bones  of  a 
joint  or  limb  have,  before  its  application,  become  permanently  enlarged. 

There  are  ninety  pills  in  a  box,  a  number  sufficient,  with  a  box  of 
plaster,  to  last  a  patient  nine  weeks,  and  to  cure  any  of  the  recent  cases 
of  the  disease  in  any  of  its  forms.  In  cases,  however,  of  long  con- 
tinuance, or  in  the  last  stage,  it  will  sometimes,  from  obvious  causes, 
which  I  have  not  room  here  to  explain,  require  two  or  three  boxes  of 
each. 

These  remedies,  which  I  have  used  in  my  practice  for  more  than 
twenty-five  years,  and  during  the  time  I  have  been  investigating  the 
phenomena  of  tubercula,  and  about  which  there  is  no  mistake,  are  very 
active,  but  never  produce  any  injurious  or  disagreeable  effect  upon  the 
stomach,  or  any  other  part  of  the  system,  or  any  other  that  is  noticed  by 
such  patients,  except  a  steady  improvement  in  all  the  symptoms  ae- 
pendent  on  chronic  tubercula. 

Improvement  in  health  commences  immediately,  or  very  soon  after 
the  commencement  of  the  use  of  the  remedies,  and  their  action  con- 
tinues steadily  and  forcibly,  and  cannot  be  easily  diverted  from  their 
purpose,  and  the  cure  progresses  steadily,  with  a  steady  increase  of 
strength  and  flesh,  unless  it  be  checked  by  colds  which  sometimes  retard, 
but  rarely,  or  never,  prevent  a  cure. 

These  remedies  cure  all  the  different  forms  of  tuberculss  in  their  first 
stages,  and  a  great  majority  of  those  in  the  last  stage  of  the  disease, 
known  by  the  symptoms  we  have  described,  but  called  by  different 
names  according  to  their  situation  or  other  circumstances  attending  them, 
viz.,  scrofulous  sore  eyes,  and  ulcers  of  the  cornea — ulcers  of  the  ears — 
8 


126 

disease  of  the  antrum  and  nose — tinea  capitis  or  scald  head — king's  evil 
and  goitre  in  the  neck — mercurial  disease  or  chronic  enlargement  of  the 
tongue  and  tonsils — chronic  enlargement  of  the  breast,  or  mammse,  in- 
cluding cancer  in  its  first  stage — phthisis  or  consumption — hypertrophy 
of,  or  chronic  enlargement  of  the  heart — dyspepsia,  or  chronic  disease 
of  the  stomach — chronic  disease  of  the  liver,  or  liver  complaint — tabes 
mesenterica,  or  chronic  diarrhoea — chronic  disease  of  the  uterus,  or  leu- 
corrhoea,  amenorrhcea,  chlorosis,  menorrhagia,  and  incipient  cancer  of 
the  uterus — ulcerated  legs,  fever  sores — disease  of  the  spine,  disease  of 
the  hip  joint — white  swellings  of  the  joints  or  limbs — morbid  alterations 
of  structure  in  the  synovial  membranes — chronic  rheumatism  (tuber- 
culated  muscles)  or  cases  where  one  of  these  forms  of  the  disease  is 
complicated  with  the  same  disease  in  another  organ  or  limb. 

In  typhus  fevers  the  secreting  organs  or  lymphatic  glands  of  the  small 
intestines  with  those  of  the  mesentary,  as  well  as  the  series  along  the 
spine,  are  always  tuberculated,  and  dissections  in  such  cases  always 
show  those  of  the  small  intestines  and  mesentary  in  a  state  of  ulcera- 
tion. Dissections  also  show  that  other  organs  are  tuberculated  at  the 
same  time,  as  the  brain  and  its  membranes,  stomach,  liver,  &c. ;  and 
pressure  along  the  spinal  colum  shows  that  such  patients  have  the  symp- 
toms of  tuberculated  organs.  And  these  symptoms  are,  whenever  they 
are  present,  the  evident  indications  that  the  remedies  are  the  true 
ones,  no  matter  by  what  names  systematic  nosologists  or  other  medical 
writers  may  have  chosen  to  call  the  disease.  In  diseases  which  have 
been  confounded  by  nosologists  with  tubercula,  but  which  from  the 
absence  of  these  symptoms,  as  well  as  from  the  evidences  of  post  mor- 
tem examinations,  have  manifestly  no  connexion  with  them,  as  in 
chronic  bronchitis  and  other  affections  of  the  bronchial  tubes,  &c.,  these 
remedies  are  entirely  useless. 

The  liver  and  spleen  are  frequently  found  to  be  enlarged  during  and 
after  intermittent  fevers ;  and  we  always  find  these  symptoms  in  these 
fevers  after  the  first  or  inflammatory  stage  is  past,  and  we  frequently 
find  by  these  symptoms  that  the  stomach  or  some  other  organ  is  tuber- 
culated at  the  same  time.  We  also  find  these  symptoms  in  remittent  or 
bilious  fevers  after  the  first  or  inflammatory  stage  ;  and  when  such 
patients  do  not  begin  to  gain  health  and  strength  after  that  stage  is  past, 
it  is  almost  always  in  consequence  of  the  ulcerated  state  of  the  small  in- 
testines, ("as  is  now  well  known  to  physicians)  when  these  will  be  found 
to  be  the  appropriate  remedies.  They  have  saved  many  such  patients, 
as  well  as  those  with  typhus  fever,  when  in  the  last  part  of  the  last 
stage  of  the  disease,  after  the  common  remedies  had  entirely  failed. 

Scarlet  fever  is  acute  tubercular  disease  of  the  serous  surface  of  the 
muco-serous  membran*>  of  the  throat,  which  is  extended  to  other  serous 


127 

surfaces,  as  those  of  the  stomach,  lungs,  skin  and  other  organs.  It 
goes  through  its  acute  or  inflammatory  stage  in  four  or  five  days,  when 
it  becomes  chronic,  and  demands  the  use  of  these  remedies  to  reduce  the 
tuberculations,  remove  the  great  and  extensive  compressions  of  the 
nerves,  and  re-establish  the  natural  action  of  the  forces  which  produce 
motion  in  the  system.  When,  therefore,  such  patients  do  not  begin  to 
recover  soon  after  the  acute  stage  is  passed,  no  time  should  be  lost  in  the 
application  of  these  remedies. 

The  yearly  number  of  cases  in  which  we  used  these  remedies  was  at 
first  very  few,  but  they  gradually  increased  with  the  improvements  in 
the  remedies  suggested  by  long  experience,  when  in  1835,  or  from  the 
1st  January,  1835,  to  December  31st  of  the  same  year,  they  amounted  to 
163.  I  took  notes  of  these  cases  in  which  the  disease,  affecting  the 
different  organs  and  limbs,  was  in  the  proportion  seen  in  the  following 
schedule : — ■ 

Neck 18 

Neck  and  eyes 2 

Neck,  nose,  and  spine 1 

Neck,  tongue,  tonsils,  and  right  leg 1 

Neck,  jaw,  tonsils,  ear,  cerebellum,  breast,  heart,  stomach, 

uterus,  one  arm  and  both  legs 1 

Neck  and  lung 2 

Neck  and  stomach 1 

Neck  and  mesentery 3 

Tongue,  tonsils,  and  uvula 1 

Tongue,  tonsils,  and  right  leg 1 

Nose  and  face 2 

Lungs,  (first  stage) 21 

Lungs,  last  stage  with  tubercles  in  a  mature  state 1 

Lungs,  with  excavations 5 

Luno-s  and  both  legs,  and   one  ankle,  with  excavation  of 

both  lungs 1 

Heart 3 

Heart  and  liver 4 

Stomach 19 

Liver ^ 

Stomach  and  lungs 18 

Kidney  (leftj 1 

Liver  and  kidney  (right j    1 

Liver  and  stomach ^ 

Liver  with  abscess 3 

119 


128 

Brought  forward,         119 

Mesentery 1 

Uterus  and  legs 3 

Uterus  and  lun^s 2 

Uterus  and  stomach 6 

Joints  and  limbs 31 

Unknown 1 

Whole  number  of  cases  in  1835,         163 

Of  these  cases  the  number  cured  is 154 

Cases  not  cured,  in  consequence  of  not  using  the  remedies 
a  sufficient  length  of  time 3 

Of  the  cases  which  have  died,  the  first  was  that  of  Master  N.,  of 
Columbus,  aged  16  or  17  years,  whom  I  never  saw,  and  of  whose  case 
I  know  nothing,  except  that  it  was  about  ten  j-ears  since  it  commenced. 

The  second  case  was  that  of  Mrs.  B.,  of  M.,  in  the  last  part  of  the 
last  stage  of  tubercula  of  the  mesentery,  with  a  frightful  marasmus. 

The  third  case  was  that  of  Mrs.  K.,  of  M.,  with  a  cancer  of  the  uterus 
in  a  state  of  ulceration,  complicated  with  abscess  of  the  liver,  which 
was  discharging  matter  through  the  right  side  in  four  places. 

The  fourth  case  was  that  of  j\Ir.  W.  W.,  of  M.  Michigan,  with  tuber- 
culated  right  leg,  left  hand,  heart,  and  scalp  over  the  right  frontal,  and 
right  parietal  bones.  The  leg  and  also  the  scalp  ulcerated  in  tAvo  places. 
He  died  of  compression  of  the  brain,  in  consequence  of  the  injudicious 
use  of  nitrate  of  silver,  which  had  been  frequently  applied  by  the  direc- 
tion of  his  physicians,  to  the  upper  part  of  the  parietal  bone,  and  pene- 
trated through  it  to  the  brain,  as  shown  by  dissection. 

The  fifth  case  was  that  of  Mrs.  S.,  of  Cincinnati,  with  tuberculated 
left  lung  in  a  mature  state  ;  and  sixth,  the  case  of  Mrs.  C,  of  Cincinnati, 
with  hypertrophy  of  the  heart,  and  excavation  of  both  lungs. 

We  have  taken  but  a  few  notes  of  the  numerous  cases  in  which  we 
have  used  these  remedies  since  1835  ;  but  from  all  we  have  learned  of 
the  result  of  them,  we  are  induced  to  believe  that  the  proportion  between 
those  that  have  been  cured  by  these  remedies,  and  those  in  which  they 
have  failed,  does  not  vary  much  from  that  shown  in  the  above  year,  or 
from  those  of  former  years. 

We  are  familiar  with  the  use  of  the  stethescope,  having  used  it  in  a 
great  number  of  cases  since  1824,  and  cannot  be  mistaken  in  regard  to 
the  excavations  in  the  lungs  mentioned  in  the  above  cases,  which  show 
results  in  the  use  of  these  remedies  as  a  cure  for  tubercular  disease  en- 
tirely unknown  to  any  other  course  of  treatment.  They  also  show  the 
importance  of  commencing  the  use  of  these  remedies  in  the  early  stage 


129 

of  the  disease  in  this  organ,  and  the  uncertainty  of  the  results  when  in 
the  last  stage. 

The  cases  of  this  disease  affecting  the  neck,  called  king's  evil,  are  all 
cured  with  these  remedies,  excepting  only  those  which  have  terminated 
in  cancer,  and  which  are  easily  distinguished  by  physicians — first  by  the 
solidity  of  the  tumor,  with  the  close  adherence  and  dark  color  of  the 
skin,  and  lastly  by  its  fungus  ulcers  with  granulated  surfaces  and  everted 
edges  of  the  skin.  The  symptoms  which  1  have  so  often  mentioned,  also 
enable  us  to  distinguish  tubercula  from  cancer  of  the  mamm?e  or  breast,  in 
which  these  remedies,  like  every  other,  fail.  All  the  other  cases  of  tu- 
bercula, particularly  white  swellings  of  the  body,  joints,  or  limbs,  yield 
readily  under  the  use  of  these  remedies,  including  those  in  a  state  of  ul- 
ceration. 

The  cases  of  the  disease  in  the  stomach  called  dyspepsia,  are  generally 
cured  with  the  greatest  rapidity,  probably  in  consequence  of  the  great 
quantity  of  the  magnetic  forces  evolved  in  the  decomposition  of  the  pills 
in  that  organ. 

When  the  small  intestines  are  tuberculated,  the  habit  is  costive  in  the 
first  stage  of  the  disease;  but  when  in  the  last  stage,  the  tubercles  be- 
come ulcerated,  the  habit  is  changed,  and  diarrhoea  commences.  In 
either  case  these  remedies  uniformly  (with  very  few  exceptions)  re-es- 
tablish the  natural  habit  in  from  three  to  fifteen  days.  There  are  a  few 
cases  of  long  standing  that  require  a  longer  time  to  effect  the  same  ob- 
ject, and  there  are  cases  in  the  last  stage  of  consumption  uncontrolled  by 
these  or  any  other  remedies. 

In  the  cases  of  costive  habits,  medicine  should  be  taken  once  a  day  on 
commencing  the  use  of  these  remedies,  in  quantities  sufficient  only  to 
move  the  bowels  every  day,  and  the  dose  gradually  lessened  until  it  is 
no  longer  required. 

In  amenorrh(Ea,leucorrhosa,and  menorrhagia,  the  uterus  is  always  tu- 
berculated, or  more  or  less  enlarged,  and  these  enlargements  of  this  or- 
gan are  uniformly  reduced  by  these  remedies  in  the  first  stage  of  the 
disease,  and  a  great  proportion  of  those  in  the  last  stage,  and  the  natural 
action  of  this  organ  is  thereby  re-established.  These  effects  of  the  re- 
medies are  so  constant  and  uniform,  in  such  cases,  as  to  require  no  aid 
from  other  remedies,  exceptino;  only  such  as  are  accompanied  with  dis- 
placement of  the  uterus,  and  called  prolapsus-uteri. 

When  this  organ  is  enlarged,  its  weight  is  increased,  and  the  ligaments 
by  which  it  is  suspended  dilate,  and  it  descends  more  or  less  from  its  na- 
tural position,  and  in  many  cases  so  far  as  to  require  mechanical  support 
during  the  progress  of  the  cure. 

When,  therefore,  there  is  so  much  displacement  of  this  organ  as  to 
produce  much  inconvenience  in  walking,  it  should  be  supported  in  its 


130 

natural  situation  by  some  of  the  numerous  contrivances  invented  for  that 
purpose,  until  the  tuberculations  are  reduced,  and  its  ligaments  contracted 
to  sustain  it  again  in  its  proper  position. 

In  closing  these  observations  it  may  be  useful  to  observe,  that  vrhen 
blood  is  drawn  from  the  veins  of  patients  affected  with  chronic  diseases, 
it  is  always  of  a  very  dark  color,  which  imparts  a  dark,  sallow,  or  un- 
natural color  to  the  skin,  both  of  which  are  uniformly  found  to  be  changed 
after  one  or  two  weeks  use  of  the  magnetic  pills,  to  the  light,  florid,  or 
natural  color,  and  is  no  doubt  the  consequence  of  a  chemical  and  healthy 
change  in  the  character  of  the  fluid,  produced  by  magnetising  it  with  the 
forces  evolved  in  the  decomposition  of  the  pills. 


CHAPTER    V  I  I 


CASES    OF    TUBERCULA    DISEASE    OF    THE    ORGANS. 


Consumption. 

Mr.  G.  W.  B.,  of  the  city  of  New  York,  of  light  complexion  and 
thin  habit,  aged  29  years,  commenced  the  use  of  these  remedies  for  con- 
sumption in  April,  1S39,  they  being  prescribed  by  another  physician, 
from  whom,  as  well  as  from  Mr.  G.  W.  B.,  I  obtained  the  following 
concise  history  of  the  case  : 

The  disease  commenced  in  August,  1833,  with  hemorrhage  from  the 
lungs,  which  was  succeeded  by  cough  and  moderate  expectoration,  which 
continued  to  August,  1834,  when  the  hemorrhage  from  the  lungs  was 
repeated.  The  cough  and  expectoration  continued  ;  and  in  August,  1835, 
the  hemorrhage  was  again  repeated,  and  his  strength  much  reduced.  Tlip 
quantity  of  blood  raised  each  time  being  from  half  a  pint  to  a  pint.  The 
cough  and  expectoration  gradually  increased  after  this  last  attack  of 


132 

hemorrhage  up  to  the  time  he  commenced  the  use  of  the  remedies,  when 
he  was  pale,  feeble,  and  much  emaciated.  His  cough  and  expectora- 
tion then  -began  to  decrease ;  the  color  of  his  skin  soon  began  to  assume 
a  more  florid  hue  ;  his  appetite  increased,  so  that  he  soon  gained  strength 
and  flesh  ;  and  when  he  had  taken  three  boxes  of  the  remedies,  or  in 
about  six  months,  his  health  was  fully  re-established,  and  it  continues 
very  good  to  this  time. 

TUBERCULA    OF    THE    LEFT    LUNG. 

Mr.  R.  H.,  of  the  city  of  New  York,  aged  30  years,  had  been  out  of 
health  five  years  when  he  called  to  see  me  in  June,  1S37.  On  an  ex- 
amination of  his  case  in  the  usual  manner,  I  found  him  affected  with  tu- 
bercular disease  of  the  lungs,  stomach,  and  liver.  The  disease  com- 
menced first  in  the  liver,  and  in  about  a  year  after  was  propagated  to  the 
stomach,  and  from  thence  to  the  lungs.  This  was  about  four  months  be- 
fore he  called  on  me,  when  cough  and  expectoration  had  commenced, 
which  still  continued.  He  was  pale,  feeble,  and  emaciated.  Prescribed 
magnetic  remedies.  His  health  soon  began  to  improve,  but  progressed 
at  first  slowly ;  yet,  when  he  had  used  four  boxes  of  these  remedies,  his 
health  was  entirely  restored.  He  has  since  enjoyed  as  good  health  as 
any  man. 

TUBERCULA    OF    THE    LUNGS. 

Rapid  Consumption. 

Mrs.  D.  R.,  of  the  city  of  New  York,  of  light  complexion,  aged  19 
years,  commenced  coughing  early  in  the  fall  of  1838,  while  in  a  state  of 
gestation.  This  cough  continued  with  little  expectoration  until  after  her 
confinement  on  the  23d  of  February,  1S39,  when  they  both  began  to  in- 
crease, and  in  a  few  weeks  the  expectoration  amounted  to  about  a  pint  a 
day.  Her  feet  and  ankles  began  to  swell,  accompanied  with  other  symp- 
toms of  approaching  dissolution,  when  she  commenced  the  use  of  the 
magnetic  remedies  under  the  advice  of  another  physician,  on  the  4th  of 
April  following. 

These  remedies  checked  the  further  progress  of  the  disease,  and  in  48 
hours  after  she  commenced  the  use  of  them,  her  symptoms  were  evi- 
dently better ;  her  cough  and  expectoration  gradually  decreased ;  the 
swelling  of  her  feet  and  ankles  disappeared  ;  her  appetite  and  strength  in- 
creased ;  and  in  about  two  months  after  she  commenced  the  use  of  the 
remedies,  and  after  she  had  used  one  box  of  them,  she  called  with  her 
husband  at  my  oflice  to  inquire  whether  it  would  be  necessary  to  use 


133 

them  any  longer.     I  advised  her  to  use  another  box ;  she  did  so,  and  has 
since  enjoyed  uninterrupted  good  health. 

New  York,  June  15,  1840 
I  recognise,  in  the  above  description,  fully  the  case  of  my  wife. 

Silas  Reynolds. 

tubercula    of  the  right    lung,    heart,    stomach,    liver,    spleen, 
kidneys,  spine,  intestines  and  uterus. 

Mrs.  p.,  of  the  City  of  New  York,  of  light  complexion,  and  small 
and  slender  frame.  I  was  called  to  see  her  on  the  20th  May,  1837,  and  on 
examining  her  spine,  found  she  had  tubercula  of  the  right  lung,  heart, 
stomach,  liver,  spleen,  kidneys,  intestines  and  uterus.  On  inquiry  I 
found  that  she  was  married  at  the  age  of  15  years,  and  had  suffered  two 
abortions.  The  disease  commenced  about  two  years  before  in  the 
uterus,  with  leucorrhcea,  and  was  thence  first  propagated  to  the  stomach, 
and  thence  to  the  liver,  spleen,  heart,  kidnies,  and  at  last  to  the  right 
lung.  In  January  of  the  above  year,  cough  and  expectoration  com- 
menced, and  had  continued  to  that  time.  The  whole  length  of  the  spine 
was  A'ery  sensitive  to  the  touch,  and  she  could  consequently  bear  but 
very  little  pressure  upon  it.  On  her  observing  that  there  was  some 
swelling  along  her  back,  I  examined  it,  and  found  a  white  swelling  along 
each  side  of  the  spine,  extending  from  the  sixth  dorsal  to  the  third  lumbar 
vertebrse.  As  this  was  an  extraordinary  case  of  tubercular  disease,  in- 
volving so  many  organs,  as  well  as  the  vertebrzB  at  the  same  time,  I 
requested  the  liberty  of  inviting  several  distinguished  physicians  to  see 
it  before  I  commen'^ed  the  use  of  the  remedies.  This  request  being 
granted,  I  invited  four  of  them  to  see  it ;  all  of  whom  agreed,  after  an 
examination  of  the  case,  that  it  was  hopeless  of  cure  under  the  use  of 
the  common  remedies.  I  then  commenced  the  use  of  the  magnetic 
remedies — the  plaster  to  extend  the  whole  length  of  the  spine.  Her 
health  began  to  improve  soon  after.  About  the  first  of  July,  her  cough 
and  expectoration  had  increased  during  a  few  days,  and  on  an  examina- 
tion of  the  chest  with  the  stethescope,  I  found  an  exca  ration  in  the 
upper  part  of  the  right  lung,  showing  that  a  cluster  of  tubercles  had 
softened  down  and  made  their  way  into  the  air  tubes,  and  left  an  exca- 
vation since  I  first  examined  her  lungs. 

Her  health  soon  after  began  to  improve  again — the  white  swellings  of 
the  vertebrae  disappeared ;  and  in  about  seven  weeks  the  excavation  was 
healed  and  entirely  closed,  and  her  cough  and  expectoration  also  disap- 
peared in  a  few  months  after.  The  other  tuberculated  organs  were 
gradually  reduced  to  the  natural  state ;  and  soon  after  the  state  of  gesta- 
tion was  renewed,  and  continued  through  the  natural  period. 
9 


134 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  LUNGS. 

Rapid  Consumption. 

Mrs.  P.  S.,  of  S.,  Hamilton  county,  Ohio,  aged  twenty-eight  years. 
I  was  called  to  see  her,  September  16th,  1833.  She  had  hectic  fever, 
with  cough,  expectoration,  night  sweats,  and  diarrhoea.  On  applying 
the  stethescope  to  the  chest,  it  gave  the  symptoms  of  tubercular  engorge- 
ment of  the  left  lung.  These  symptoms  came  on  about  three  weeks 
before,  and  two  weeks  after  her  confinement  with  her  last  child.  She 
had  irregular  pains  in  the  left  side  of  the  chest  for  three  months  previous 
to  her  confinement,  and  was  unable  to  sleep  on  her  right  side,  as  an 
attempt  to  do  so  increased  the  painful  sensations  in  her  left  side.  On 
examination,  I  found  a  number  of  tubercles  on  the  left  side  of  her  neck, 
from  the  size  of  a  pea  to  that  of  a  large  bean,  and  one  on  the  side  of  the 
lower  jaw  of  the  same  side,  of  the  size  of  a  small  walnut.  Two  physi- 
cians had  prescribed  for  her,  but  she  continued  to  get  worse,  and  her 
flesh  and  strength  were  wasting  rapidly.  Prescribed — magnetic  pills 
and  plaster.  These  alarming  symptoms  were  checked  in  a  few  hours, 
her  health  soon  began  to  improve,  and  in  three  weeks  her  cough,  fever, 
night  sweats,  and  diarrhoea  had  disappeared,  and  in  another  week  her 
health  was  re-established.  This  was  a  case  of  rapid  consumption,  and 
she  would  not  have  survived  under  the  common  treatment  more  than 
one  or  two  weeks  longer. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  LUNGS. 

Consumption. 

Mrs.  M.  W ,  of  Union,  Butler  county,  Ohio,  aged  34  years.     I 

was  called  to  see  her,  August  22,  1834.  She  is  above  the  middle  stature, 
of  dark  complexion  and  slender  form.  Has  enjoyed  almost  uninter- 
rupted good  health  until  about  the  first  of  June  last,  when  she  began  to 
be  feeble,  and  this  feebleness  continued,  and  in  the  last  week  in  July 
began  to  cough,  and  in  a  few  days  after  began  to  expectorate  a  thin  and 
semi-transparent  glutinous  matter,  and  it  was  not  until  yesterday  morn- 
ing that  the  appearance  of  this  matter  changed  to  a  yellow-white  colour, 
and  raised  in  a  much  larger  quantity  than  usual,  which  now  gave  alarm 
for  her  safety  and  induced  her  to  seek  assistance.  Her  cough  too  had 
been  attended  with  some  degree  of  hoarseness  after  a  few  of  the  first 
days,  and  had  increased  so  much  that  it  was  now  with  great  difficulty 
that  she  could  raise  her  voice  above  a  whisper.  Her  flesh  is  wasting 
rapidly,  and  in  the  last  few  days  has  had  a  little  fever,  in  the  afternoon 
and  evening,  with  a  flush  on  her  cheeks,  and  has  begun  to  sweat  in  the 
after  part  of  the  night. 


135 

The  catamenia  has  disappeared,  and  her  eye  has  the  clear  and  glassy 
appearance  and  expression  Avhich  gives  to  her  countenance  that  peculiar 
vivacity  so  characteristic  of  consumption.  She  has  a  tubercle  of  the 
size  of  a  pea  on  the  upper  and  outer  side  of  the  left  lower  jaw,  and 
another  of  twice  the  size  on  the  lower  part  of  the  neck,  and  near  the 
clavicle  of  the  right  side,  and  both  are  very  sore  or  tender.  Pressure  on 
the  lower  cervical  vertebrze  produces  pain,  which  darts  thence  into  the 
chest,  and  pressure  on  the  tubercle  near  the  clavicle  produces  pain  Avhich 
darts  under  the  clavicle. 

Prescribed,  pills  and  plaster.  The  plaster  12  inches  long  and  five 
broad,  to  be  applied  over  the  last  cervical  and  upper  dorsal  vetebrse. 
One  pill  to  be  taken  night  and  morning-  for  three  weeks,  and  then  one 
every  night,  with  the  constant  use  of  flannel  chemise  and  drawers,  and 
to  continue  her  usual  exercise  and  exposure  to  the  atmosphere. 

Her  cough  and  hoarseness  soon  began  to  subside,  and  in  about  four 
weeks  they  had  very  nearly  ceased,  and  she  had  gained  considerable 
strength,  when  she  took  a  severe  cold,  which  increased  her  cough  and 
hoarseness,  and  lessened  her  strength,  but  they  began  to  subside  again 
in  a  few  days  and  soon  disappeared. 

October  2Sth.  Examined  her  chest  again  with  the  stethescope  aod 
found  that  the  respiratory  murmur,  which  at  first  was  only  heard  very 
slightly  in  the  lower  part,  and  only  in  a  few  places  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  lungs,  was  now  clear  and  distinct  over  their  whole  extent,  but  yet 
not  so  loud  as  in  health. 

November  14th.  The  tubercles  which  were  at  first  nearly  round 
and  hard,  have  flattened  down  and  nearly  disappeared.  The  respiration 
is  now  loud  and  natural  over  the  whole  extent  of  both  lungs.  She  has 
no  cough,  unless  she  gets  a  little  cold,  and  then  it  is  very  slight,  and  no 
more  than  common,  when  enjoying  good  health,  and  has  entirely  lost  the 
consumptive  aspect  of  her  countenance,  and  has  nearly  regained  her 
usual  flesh  and  strength. 

December  15th.  The  catamenia  has  re-appeared  after  an  absence  of 
four  months,  and  her  health  in  all  respects  perfectly  restored. 

Her  mother  and  two  sisters  have  died  with  consumption. 

Oct.  22,  1836.     Her  health  continues  good. 

TUBERCULA  AND  EXCAVATION  OF  BOTH  LUNGS. 

Consumption. 

Mrs.  J.  C,  of  Union,  Butler  county,  Ohio,  aged  36  years.  Called  to 
see  her,  May  28th,  1835. 

She  has  been  very  subject  to  cough  ten  or  eleven  years,  and  has  had 
five  or  six  slight  attacks  of  hemoptysis  during  the  last  two  years,  and  in 


136 

the  last  part  of  March  last,  her  cough  and  expectoration,  after  two  or 
three  successive  colds,  was  much  increased,  and  has  continued  to  in- 
crease to  this  time.  She  has  irregular  fever  and  night  sweats,  and  has 
had  diarrhoea,  which  gradually  disappeared  after  her  feet  and  legs  began 
to  swell.  They  are  now  swelled  nearly  to  the  knee,  and  are  cedematous, 
and  she  is  much  emaciated. 

Pressure  on  the  right  side  of  the  last  cervical  vertebra  produces  pain, 
which,  on  every  repetition  of  the  pressure,  darts  into  the  right  lung,  and 
pressure  on  the  left  side  of  the  same  vertebrae  produces  pain,  which  darts 
into  the  left  lung. 

On  applying  the  stethescope  to  the  chest,  I  found  an  excavation  in  the 
upper  and  front  part  of  the  left  lung,  and  another  near  the  middle  of  it, 
and  a  third  in  the  front  and  upper  part  of  the  right  lung.  These  exca- 
vations are  not  very  large,  and  there  are  no  tubercles  in  clusters  in  a 
mature  state  near  them,  or  in  any  other  part  of  the  lungs. 

Diagnosis.  Tubercula  and  excavation  of  both  lungs.  Prescribed, 
magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  The  action  of  these  remedies  commenced 
immediately,  and  in  about  four  weeks  her  cough,  fever,  and  expectora- 
tion had  entirely  disappeared,  and  the  excavations  were  healed,  and  she 
had  gained  much  flesh  and  strength.  She  has  now,  (July  4th,)  no 
appearance  of  disease,  excepting  the  swelling  of  her  feet  and  legs,  and 
this  has  almost  all  disappeared.  November  4th,  1836.  Her  health 
continues  good. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  NECK  AND  LUNGS. 

King^s  Evil  terminating  in  Consumption. 

Mrs.  L.  B ,  of  Franklin,  Warren  county,  Ohio,  aged  35  years, 

came  to  me,  August  16th  1832,  with  the  form  of  scrofula  called  king's 
evil,  which  had  been  propagated  to  the  lungs,  and  terminated  in  tuber- 
cular consumption. 

The  whole  of  the  right  side  of  her  neck  was  covered  with  scars  and 
ulcers,  and  they  extended  from  thence  down  half  the  length  of  the 
shoulder  blade,  and  half  the  length  of  the  arm.  There  were  sixteen 
ulcers  discharging  scrofulous  matter,  and  a  number  of  tubercles  of 
different  sizes,  on  her  neck,  arm  and  shoulder.  She  had  hectic  fever 
every  day,  with  night  sweats,  and  was  coughing  and  raising  large  quan- 
tities of  matter  every  day,  and  such  as  is  raised  in  tubercular  consump- 
tion. She  was  feeble  and  much  emaciated.  It  was  now  more  than  six 
years  since  the  disease  commenced,  and  the  tubercles  began  to  suppurate ; 
and  more  than  five  months  since  she  began  to  cough  and  expectorate. 
On  examining  her  chest  with  the  stethescope,  it  gave  the  symptoms  of 
tubercular  engorgement  of  the  right  lung.  Prescribed  the  magnetic 
pills  and  plaster.     In  seven  weeks  from  this  time,  she  came  to  me  again. 


137 

apparently  cured.  The  ulcers  were  all  healed — only  one  small  tubercle 
remained,  and  that  much  lessened  in  size.  Her  fever  and  night  sweats 
had  disappeared,  and  her  cough  and  expectoration  had  almost  entirely 
ceased,  and  she  had  gained  ■  so  much  flesh  and  strength  as  to  make  her 
appear  as  well  as  any  other  person.  Her  health  has  continued  good 
Previous  to  her  applying  the  magnetic  remedies,  physicians  and  doctors 
of  all  sorts  had  visited  her  ;  and  her  friends  did  not  expect  her  to  survive 
more  than  a  few  months. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  RIGHT  LUNG. 

Consumption. 

Doctor  B.  S.  Lawson,  of  Cincinnati,  rather  light  complexion,  tall  and 
slender  frame,  aged  32  years.  Called  to  see  him  about  the  last  of 
October,  1836.  His  health,  he  informed  me,  had  been  gradually  de- 
clining about  eight  years,  and  about  the  middle  of  August  last,  he  began 
to  cough  and  expectorate  very  freely.  On  examining  his  neck,  found 
the  submaxillary,  and  some  of  the  cervical  glands  tuberculated ;  and  on 
applying  pressure  on  the  last  cervical  vertebrae,  it  produced  pain,  but  it 
was  more  severe  when  applied  on  the  right  side,  between  this  vertebrse 
and  the  first  dorsal,  while  pressure  on  the  other  vertebrae  of  the  spine 
produced  no  pain  or  effect  whatever. 

I  now  applied  the  stethescope  to  the  right  side  of  the  chest,  and  soon 
found  in  the  middle  portion  of  it,  a  space  of  about  three  inches  in 
diameter,  where  the  respiration  was  entirely  inaudible,  indicating  from 
the  absence  of  the  crepitous  and  mucous  rattle,  a  large  and  solid  cluster 
of  tubercles,  rendering  this  part  of  the  lung  impermeable  and  immove- 
able. The  respiration  was  natural  all  round  this  portion  of  the  lung, 
and  in  every  other  part  of  the  chest. 

Liajnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  middle  portion  of  the  right  lung.  He 
now  told  me  that  a  celebrated  physician,  who  was  attending  him,  had  also 
examined  him  with  the  stethescope,  and  with  the  same  result.  He  also 
told  me  that  percussion  had  beenfrequently  applied,  which  uniformly  gave 
a  dull  sound  over  that  part  of  the  lung.  He  has  the  usual  pale,  lean,  and 
haggard  look,  or  consumptive  aspect  of  the  countenance  ;  and  the  emacia- 
tion has  made  considerable  progress  ;  and  he  is  gradually  sinking.  He  has 
had  prescribed  for  him,  and  has  pursued  the  usual  antiphlogistic  treatment, 
including  a  large  emetic  tartar  plaster  over  the  front  portion  of  his  right 
lung,  (from  which  he  suffered  severely ,J  with  low  vegetable  and  milk  diet. 

Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plaster,  with  no  restriction  in  diet.  He 
commenced  gaining  strength  in  a  few  days  after,  and  in  about  seven 
weeks,  or  at  the  time  he  had  finished  taking  one  box  of  the  pills,  I 
examined  him  again  with  the  stethescope,  when  the  respiration  was  as 


13S 

audible,  in  the  before-mentioned  middle  portion  of  the  right  lung,  as  in 
every  other  part  of  the  chest,  but  presented  now  very  clearly  in  this 
place,  the  sounds  of  bronchophony.  His  cough  had  now  nearly  abated, 
and  he  had  gained  in  this  time  so  much  flesh,  as  to  make  him  appear 
better  than  he  does  in  his  usual  health ;  and  has  lost  entirely  the  pale, 
haggard,  and  consumptive  aspect  of  his  countenance. 

January  18,  1837.  Examined  his  chest  again.  The  sound  of  bron- 
chophony in  the  circumscribed  space  in  the  middle  portion  of  the  right 
lung,  and  his  cough  and  expectoration  have  ceased,  and  percussion  gives 
now  a  full,  clear  sound. 

He  continues  to  gain  flesh  and  strength,  and  his  face,  body,  and  limbs) 
have  now  the  full  and  rounded  form  of  a  person  in  full  flesh,  and  the 
most  perfect  health. 

It  will  be  seen,  that  after  distinguishing  consumption  by  the  new  symp- 
toms, the  chest  is,  in  most  cases,  explored  with  the  stethescope.  This 
is  done  to  ascertain  the  order  and  state  of  the  tuberculations  ;  for,  although 
they  are  detected  in  the  first  dawning  of  the  disease — even  in  many  cases 
before  the  cough  commences — 3'et  we  cannot  tell,  without  the  aid  of  aus- 
culation,  whether  these  tubercles  are  scattered  about  at  a  distance  from 
each  other,  or  are  adjoining  each  other  in  small  or  large  clusters,  like 
clusters  of  grapes,  or  have  softened  down  and  produced  a  small  reparable 
or  a  large  irreparable  excavation.  Hence  the  doubt  that  must  exist  in 
regard  to  the  curability  of  the  disease  in  its  last  stages  in  this  organ,  by 
the  natural  remedies,  without  the  aid  of  ausculation,  and  hence  its  im- 
portance in  this,  as  well  as  in  many  other  diseases  of  the  chest ;  yet  very 
few  know  any  thing  of  its  advantages,  in  consequence  of  a  deplorable  de- 
fect in  the  education  of  physicians. 

"  It  may  be  useful  for  me  to  add  to  the  above  history  of  my  case,  that  besides  the  most 
perfect  restoration  of  my  health,  (for  such  I  believe  to  be  my  happy  fortune,  as  far  as  I 
can  judge,)  that  the  above  remedies  have  been  a  great  benefit  to  me  in  another  point  ot 
view.  My  physician,  and  other  gentlemen  of  the  profession,  aware  of  the  great  dan- 
ger hanging  over  me,  advised  me  to  change  my  location  for  a  more  southerly  one,  as 
affording  the  only  hope,  not  of  a  restoration  of  my  health,  but  of  prolonging  my  feeble 
existence  ;  and  beyond  all  doubt  it  was  the  best  prescription  in  their  power  to  make. 
Now,  I  do  candidly  believe,  that  my  case  was  incurable  under  the  common  mode  of 
practice,  and  that  the  most  judicious  practice  known  to  the  profession  was  pursued  by 
him  to  whom  I  submitted  my  case.  According  to  the  above  advice,  I  determined  to 
remove  to  the  south,  and  had  commenced  preparation  by  selling  off  a  part  of  my  pro- 
perty, when  I  was,  by  the  kindness  of  a  friend,  (a  physician,  too,)  directed  to  Dr.  Sher- 
wood and  his  remedies — for  which  I  consider  myself  under  eternal  obHgation  to  the 
Merciful  Disposer  of  all  good. 

•'  I  do  believe  that  every  case  of  incipient  tubercular  consumption  may  be  radically 
cured  by  a  use  of  the  above  remedies  ;  and  I  feel  it  my  duty  to  submit  my  case,  with 
these  few  remarks,  to  the  public,  from  the  fact  that  thousands  are  carried  to  an  untimely 


139 

grave,  in  spite  of  the  most  scientific  practice  of  the  schools — that  would,  !n  my  opin. 
ion,  have  been,  with  all  certainty,  saved  by  a  use  of  the  electro  magnetic  remedies. 

B.  S.  LAWSON,  M.  D 

From  the  Cincinnati  Whig. 

Doctor  Sherwood's  Magnetic  Remedies. 
The  following  correspondence  has  been  handed  to  us  for  publication,  in  the  beliel 
that  it  will  interest  as  well  as  benefit  the  community.  Doctor  Lawson,  who  testifies  to 
the  value  and  etficacy  of  Dr.  Sherwood's  remedies,  is  a  regular  graduate  of  the  Ohio 
Medical  College,  and  a  physician  of  good  standing.  We  have,  ourself,  made  trial  of 
the  remedies,  and  think  we  derived  essential  benefit  from  them. 

For  the  Daily  Whig. 

CiNCiiVNATi,  January  23,  1839. 
Dr.  Lawson. — Sir  :  Having  been  informed  that  you  have,  during  the  last  year  past, 
prescribed  in  your  practice  Dr.  Sherwood's  Electro  Magnetic  Remedies  in  upwards  of 
fifty  cases,  all  of  which  were  chronic  diskases,  including  scrofula,  with  great  suc- 
cess, I  take  the  liberty  of  making  the  inquiry  of  you,  whether  my  informant  was  justi- 
fied in  making  such  a  report  from  your  own  admission  of  the  facts. 

If  you  confirm  this  report,  I  should  consider  it  a  duty  we  owe  to  the  cause  of  hu- 
manity to  give  it  publicity  as  much  as  possible,  and  if  false,  we  should  disabuse  the  pub- 
lic mind  of  the  imposition. 

Dr.  S.  also  challenges  investigation  as  to  the  electro  galvanic  symptoms.  Please  in- 
form me  if  you,  in  your  practice,  detect  diseases  by  his  method  of  examination. 

Respectfully, 

B.  W. 


Dear  Sir:  Your  communication  of  the  23d  instant  was  duly  received,  and  an  an- 
swer should  more  promptly  have  been  given  but  for  the  want  of  a  leisure  hour,  and  a 
doubt  resting  on  my  mind  in  regard  to  the  propriety  of  noticing  anonj'mous  letters. 

Nothing,  now,  so  much  influences  mc  to  accede  to  your  wish  as  a  conviction  of  the 
importance  of  the  facts  which  you  wish  to  elicit  from  me,  and  thereby  to  diffuse  them 
more  generally  through  society. 

I  have  a  perfect  detestation  of  every  thing  that  has  been  presented  to  the  world  in 
the  form  of  what  has  been  generally  denominated  "  quack  medicines,"  and  on  this  ac- 
count I  have  always  felt  a  delicacy  in  appending  my  name,  or  giving  my  influence  to 
any  thing  which  may  justly  be  "  dubbed"  with  such  an  appellation. 

In  the  case  of  Sherwood's  remedies,  I  am  somewhat  relieved  from  this  difficulty, 
from  two  considerations:  first, from  the  stubborn  fact  that,  in  my  own  person,  I  derived 
the  most  decided  beneficial  effects  from  their  use,  and  at  a  time  when  all  other  means 
were  pronounced  as  incompetent  to  a  cure  ;  and,  in  the  second  place,  from  being  my- 
self pretty  well  acquainted  with  the  composition  of  the  "  remedies." 

These  two  facts  will  serve  as  an  apology  for  me,  in  candidly  expressing  my  opinion 
■with  regard  to  the  medicine.  If  I  did  not  believe  that  thousands  were  suffering  from 
diseases,  incurable  under  any  other  system  of  practice,  and  certainly  curable  under  this, 
I  would  not  dare  to  offer  one  word  in  favor  of  Sherwood's  remedies.  From  a  conviction 
of  this  kind,  I  hesitate  not,  for  one  moment,  to  recommend  them  as  infinitely  superior, 
in  chronic  diseases,  to  any  other  course  at  present  known  to  the  medical  profession. 

I  did  use  upwards  of  fi.ffy  boxes  during  the  last  year,  and  generally  with  success.  I 
am,  however,  of  the  opinion,  that  in  advanced  stages  of  pulmonary  consumption,  they 


140 

are  not  so  effectual  as  one  would  be  led  to  suppose  from  reading  Dr.  Sherwood's  pam- 
phlet. 

In  almost  every  other  form  of  scrofula,  they  have  surpassed  my  most  sanguine  expec- 
tations. There  are  many  citizens  of  Cincinnati  who  will  certify  to  cures,  in  certain 
cases  of  long  standing,  which  were  not  benefitted  from  any  course  which  had  been  pur- 
sued, (and  in  these  cases  you  know  every  thing  is  tried  that  is  heard  of,)  and  their  cer- 
tificates will  be  of  sufficient  variety,  too,  to  prove  all  that  is  claimed  for  them,  even  by 
Dr.  S.  himself,  with  the  single  exception  which  I  have  made  above. 

I  do  not  wish  to  be  understood  to  convey  the  idea  that  they  are  infallible  ;  that  is  not 
my  meaning,  nor  impression,  concerning  anj-  thing  on  this  earth  ;  but  I  do  believe  them 
to  be  as  effectual  in  curingchronic  diseases  as  ordinary  remedies  are  in  curing  the  ordi- 
nary diseases  of  our  climate.  1  must  be  understood  to  have  in  view,  in  such  a  declara- 
tion as  this,  the  exception  which  was  made,  and  again  referred  to. 

With  regard  to  the  sjTnptoms,  I  believe  that  they  cannot  be  gainsayed.     I  can  detect, 
with  the  greatest  certainty,  the  diseases  called  by  Dr.  Sherwood  scrofula,  without  any 
previous  knowledge  of  the  patient,  or  of  the  history  of  his  disease  ;  and  this  I  do  mere 
ly  by  an  examination  of  the  cervical  glands  and  spinal  column. 

The  ordinary  course  of  feeling  the  pulse,  looking  at  the  tongue,  and  asking  a  hundred 
questions,  more  or  less,  is  both  useless,  and  a  waste  of  time.  1  do  not  think  that  one 
skilled  in  this  mode  of  examination  can  be  deceived  once  in  a  hundred  cases.  In  my 
practice,  I  pursue  this  mode  of  examination  exclusively,  with  a  great  saving  of  time, 
and  a  much  more  satisfactory  result.  This  is  as  much  as  I  deem  it  now  necessary  to 
communicate. 

Yours,  &c. 

To  B.  W  B.  S.  LAWSON 

I  had  no  knowledge  of  the  above  communication  of  Dr.  Lawson,  until 
two  or  three  months  after  its  publication  ;  and  as  there  are  now  many 
physicians,  both  in  this  city  and  in  the  different  States  of  the  Union,  who 
are  practising  the  new  symptoms  and  prescribing  the  magnetic  remedies, 
I  have  introduced  it  here  to  show  the  opinion  entertained  of  them  by 
other  physicians,  who  have  tested  the  certainty  of  the  one,  and  the  effi- 
cacy of  the  other. 

In  the  advanced  stages  of  consumption  mentioned,  we  have  constantly 
stated  the  uncertainty  of  the  results,  and  urged  the  necessity  of  com- 
mencing their  use  in  the  first  stage  of  the  disease,  when  cases  like  that 
of  Dr.  Lawson  are  uniformly  cured  by  them ;  and  as  the  disease  can 
now  be  easily  distinguished,  in  the  first  stage  as  well  as  the  last,  there  is 
now  no  longer  any  excuse  for  delaying  their  use  until  the  patient  is  in 
the  last  stage,  when  the  result  must  necessarily  be  uncertain. 

In  regard  to  the  Doctor's  allusion  to  secresy  I  would  remark,  that  in 
the  course  I  have  pursued  to  defray  the  expense  of  the  investigation  and 
cure  of  this  class  of  diseases,  through  a  long  series  of  years,  physicians 
have  no  just  cause  of  complaint :  for  I  tell  them  what  the  remedies  are ; 
explain  the  principles  of  their  action,  and  give  them  the  evidence  of  their 
eflBcacy . 

There  is,  however,  a  cause  constantly  operating  to  prevent  many  phy- 


141 

sicians  from  prescribing  them  in  their  practice,  and  that  is  a  self-interest, 
which,  with  them,  is  paramount  to  every  other  ;  for  they  constantly  pre- 
fer making  up  a  bill  against  a  patient  of  from  fifty  to  five  hundred  dol- 
lars, with  the  old  empirical  and  useless  remedies,  to  a  fee  of  as  many 
cents  for  a  bare  prescription  ;  and  the  tenacity  with  which  they  hang  on 
to  the  valuable  cases  is  truly  astonishing  to  the  uninitiated,  as  they  uni- 
formly prefer  to  see  them  sink  into  their  graves,  than  saved  from  it  by 
another  physician. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  STOMACH  AND  LIVER. 

Dyspepsia  and  chronic  disease  of  the  liver. 

Mr.  J.  B.,  of  the  city  of  New  York,  aged  28  years,  called  to  consult 
me  in  August,  1S37.  He  had  dyspepsia  and  chronic  disease  of  the  liver, 
with  which  he  had  been  affected  about  two  years  and  a  half.  He  had  a 
sallow  countenance,  and  was  much  emaciated. 

Prescribed  magnetic  remedies.  His  health  speedily  began  to  improve  , 
the  sallowness  of  his  countenance  disappeared ;  and  in  about  four  months 
his  health  was  fully  restored,  aud  has  continued  good  to  this  time. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE   STOMACH,  HEART,  AND  EYES. 

Dyspepsia,  enlargement  of  the  hearty  and  scrofulous  sore  eyes. 

Mr.  H.  B.  C,  of  the  city  of  New  York,  aged  25  years,  called  to  con- 
sult me  in  May,  1837.  He  had  been  out  of  health  about  ten  years, 
was  much  emaciated,  and  was  suffering  severely  with  dyspepsia,  hyper- 
trophy of  the  heart,  and  scrofulous  sore  eyes. 

The  disease  of  the  stomach  commenced,  in  1828,  with  the  usual  symp- 
toms of  dyspepsia,  which  had  continued  with  varying  sererity.  In  1831, 
he  began  to  feel  a  hard  beating  of  the  heart,  and,  in  1834,  the  disease  com- 
menced in  both  eyes.  He  had  consulted  and  been  under  the  care  of  a 
number  of  distinguished  physicians,  without  having  received  any  material 
benefit.  Prescribed  magnetic  remedies.  His  health  commenced  improv- 
ing immediately,  and  in  about  six  months  was  entirely  restored,  and  con- 
tinues good  to  this  time. 

New  York,  June  12,  1840. 

I  have  read  the  above  concise  history  of  my  case,  and  am  pleased  to 
have  an  opportunity  to  add  my  testimony  to  the  value  of  the  above-men- 
tioned remedies,  for  I  had  given  up  all  hopes  of  being  cured  long  before 
I  was  induced  to  try  them. 

H.  B.  CowLEs,  198  Broadway. 
10 


142 

TUBERCULA    OF    THE    EYES. 

Scrofulous  sore  eyes. 

Miss  M.  Wilkinson,  of  Syracuse,  N.  Y.,  aged  3  years.  She  had  scro- 
fulous sore  eyes,  with  ulcers  of  the  cornea.  The  disease  commenced  in 
1836,  when  she  was  about  a  year  and  a  half  old.  It  gradually  grew  worse, 
and  she  became  blind  in  about  eight  months  from  the  time  it  commenced, 
and  continued  so  until  the  spring  of  1838,  when  she  commenced  the  use 
of  the  magnetic  remedies.  In  two  weeks  after  she  began  to  see,  and  in 
three  weeks  could  see  very  well,  when  the  shade  she  had  worn  a  year 
and  a  half  was  removed  from  her  eyes.  I  saw  her  in  .July  of  the  same 
year,  when  her  eyes  were  entirely  well,  and  she  enjoying  fine  health. 

Her  father  is  wealthy,  w-ell  educated,  and  intelligent,  and  obtained  the 
attendance  and  advice  of  the  best  physicians  in  the  case  ;  but  the  disease 
continued  to  make  progress  until  it  was  arrested  by  these  remedies. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  ANTRUM,  NOSE,  STOMACH,  UTERUS,  AND  CEREBRUM 

Disease  of  the  antrum^  nose.,  dyspepsia.,  and  leucorhcea- 

Mrs.  J.  C ,  of  S ,  Hamilton  county,  Ohio,  light  complexion, 

middling  stature  and  habit,  aged  34  years.  Called  to  see  her,  March  6th, 
1833.  She  has  severe  pain  in  the  cavity  under  the  cheek  bone,  from 
which  tuberculous  matter  issues  into  the  left  nostril,  and  the  septum  (di- 
vision) of  the  nose  is  perforated  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  place  where 
the  matter  issues,  and  is  also  with  the  nose  painful,  and  a  little  tumefied. 
The  disease  commenced  with  pain  in  the  antrum,  more  than  two  years 
since,  and  after  it  had  continued  a  few  w^eeks,  began  to  discharge  a  thin 
and  sometimes  bloody  matter,  which  gave  her  much  relief  for  a  few  weeks, 
when  the  discharge  ceased,  and  the  pain  returned  with  its  accustomed 
violence,  and  has  pursued  the  same  course  to  this  time. 

The  pain,  after  the  discharge  ceases,  is  spasmodic,  and  a  few  months 
since  extended  to  the  left  and  front  portion  of  the  brain,  and  about  two 
weeks  since  commenced  in  the  scalp. 

Having  no  time  to  spare  for  further  inquiry,  I  commenced  the  exami- 
nation of  the  spine ;  and  first,  with  the  first  cervical  vertebrae,  and  pres- 
sed hard  with  the  fingers  on  a  number  of  small  tubercles  on  the  left  side, 
which  produced  severe  pain,  and  which  darted  with  such  violence  into 
the  head,  scalp,  and  antrum,  as  to  prevent  her  from  allowing  me  on  any 
account  to  repeat  the  pressure  ;  and  I  passed  to  the  dorsal  vertebrae, 
pressure  on  the  third  and  fourth  produced  pain,  which  darted  into  the 


143 

stomach  ;  and  pressure  on  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  lumbar  vertebrae, 
produced  pain,  which  darted  into  the  uterus. 

I  now  described  to  her  symptoms  of  dyspepsia  and  leucorrhoea,  which 
had  been  affecting  her  more  than  a  year.  Note  D. 

The  pain  in  her  head  is  confined  entirely  to  the  front  and  left  portion, 
and  never  passes  the  longitudinal  sinus.  A  number  of  physicians  and 
steam  doctors  have  attended  and  prescribed  for  her,  during  a  period  of 
more  than  two  years,  but  the  disease  continued  to  get  worse. 

Diagnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  left  antrum,  nose,  left  and  front  portion 
of  cerebrum,  left  side  of  the  scalp,  and  of  the  stomach  and  uterus. 

Prescribed  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  Her  health  soon  began  to  im- 
prove ;  and  in  seven  weeks  the  antrum  and  nose  were  healed,  and  her 
health  in  all  respects  restored,  and  she  had  gained  nearly  her  usual  flesh 
and  strength. 

TUBERCULA    OF    STOMACH    AND    UTERUS. 

Dyspepsia  and  Leucorrhoea. 

Miss  M.  D ,  of  dark  complexion,  and  naturally  full  habit,  called 

on  me  May  28,  1833,  with  the  usual  symptoms  of  dyspepsia  and  leu- 
corrhoea. The  disease  commenced  about  a  year  ago  with  leucorrhoea, 
and  it  soon  extended  to  the  stomach ;  she  has  no  vomitings,  but  distress, 
and  sometimes  pain  in  the  stomach,  and  at  others  in  the  right  or  left  side 
of  the  lower  part  of  the  chest,  or  between  the  shoulders,  with  palpita- 
tions, and  accompanied  more  or  less  with  pain  or  weakness  in  the  small 
of  the  back.  She  says  she  has  lost  considerable  flesh,  and  is  feeble  and 
unable  to  labor,  as  an  attempt  to  do  so,  or  to  walk  up  a  hill,  or  up  stairs, 
produces  or  increases  the  palpitations,  when  she  feels  faint,  and  is  soon 
out  of  breath. 

Pressure  on  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  dorsal  vertebrce,  produces  pain,  which 
darts  into  the  stomach;  and  pressure  on  the  3d,  4th,  and  5th  lumbar  ver- 
tebrae, produces  pain,  which  darts  violently  into  the  region  of  the  uterus. 

Diagnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  stomach  and  uterus.  Prescribed  mag- 
netic pills  and  plaster.  Her  health  soon  began  to  improve,  and  in  six 
weeks  was  fully  restored. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  INTESTINES  AND  MESENTERY. 

Tabes  Mesenterica  and  Diarrhoea. 

Master  M.  G.  M.,  of  Cincinnati,  aged  three  years.  I  called  to  see 
him,  August  25th,  1834.  He  has  an  enlargement  of  the  abdomen  and 
diarrhoea. 


144 

The  disease  commenced  when  he  was  three  or  four  weeks  old,  and  has 
continued  to  this  time.  His  limbs  are  very  slender,  and  his  muscles  soft 
and  flaccid,  and  his  joints  appear  very  large  proportioned  to  the  size  of 
his  limbs.  He  has  five  or  six  tubercles  on  each  side  of  his  neck,  some 
of  them  very  large.  Two  or  three  physicians  have  attended  and  pre- 
scribed for  him  at  different  times  without  any  apparent  benefit. 

Biagnosls.  Chronic  tubercula  of  the  intestines  and  mesentery.  Pre- 
scribed magnetic  pills  and  plaster. 

The  diarrhose  disappeared  in  a  few  days,  and  the  enlargement  of  the 
ahdomen,  with  the  tubercles,  began  gradually  to  subside,  and  in  seven  or 
eight  weeks  they  disappeared,  and  he  had  gained  considerable  flesh  and 
strength,  and  had  no  appearance  of  disease,  and  his  health  continues  good. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  LIVER  AND  STOMACH. 

Mr.  W.  H.,  merchant,  of  Louisville,  Ky.,  aged  29  years,  came  up  to 
me,  April — ,  1836,  and  informed  me  that  he  had  been  out  of  health  a 
number  of  years ;  Avhen  I  told  him,  as  I  generally  do  patients  with 
chronic  diseases,  that  it  was  all  I  wanted  to  hear  about  his  case,  as  I 
would  try  to  ascertain  myself  what  his  disease  was,  and  where  it  was 
affecting  him.  He  was  pale,  and  on  his  removing  his  coat  and  vest, 
saw  he  was  much  emaciated.  Pressure  along  the  cervical  vertebrae  did 
not  hurt  him,  but  moderate  pressure  on  the  2d  dorsal  produced  severe 
pain,  which  darted  into  the  stomach  with  such  violence,  as  to  produce 
excessive  faintness  for  nearly  half  an  hour.  Pressure  on  the  right  side 
of  the  7th  and  8th,  and  8th  and  9th  dorsal,  produced  severe  pain,  which 
darted  into  the  liver.  Pressure  on  the  other  vertebrae,  below  these,  pro- 
duced no  pain  or  effect  whatever. 

Diagnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  liver  and  stomach.  The  disease,  Mr. 
H.  now  informed  me,  commenced  in  the  liver  about  five  years  ago,  and 
about  three  years  since  extended  to  the  stomach.  He  has  consulted  a 
number  of  physicians,  east  and  west  of  the  mountains,  and  has  taken  a 
great  variety  of  remedies  recommended  by  them,  besides  a  great  variety 
of  nostrums,  including  Swaim's  Panacea,  but  has  been  gradually  growing 
worse,  and  so  much  so,  that  during  the  last  year,  he  has  not  been  able  to 
take  any  food  upon  his  stomach,  excepting  dry  toast,  without  butter,  and 
cocoa. 

Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plaster,  and  told  him,  as  I  commonly 
do,  that  he  must  commence  getting  well  immediately,  and  that  in  about 
three  days  his  stomach  would  bear,  and  that  he  must  commence  eating 
any  kind  of  food  that  his  appetite  craved,  and  that  in  one  week  he  might 
eat  as  much  as  it  craved  ;  and  that  in  ten  or  twelve  weeks,  his  health, 


145 

flesh,  and  strength  would  be  re-established.     I  did  not  see  Mr.  H.  again 
until  November  6th,  when  I  found  him  enjoying  fine  health. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  LIVER  AND  EYES. 

Mr.  J.  H.  Esq.,  of  L.,  Ohio,  aged  34  years,  called  for  advice,  May  12, 
1835.  Cn  examining  the  spine,  I  commenced  between  the  first  joint  of 
the  neck  and  scull,  and  pressed  in  the  spaces  between  the  joints  below, 
one  after  another,  and  it  produced  no  pain  until  I  had  descended  to  the 
space  on  the  right  side,  between  the  7th  and  8th  dorsal,  when  pressure 
between  these,  and  between  the  Sth  and  9th  produced  pain,  which  on  every 
repetition  of  the  pressure,  darted  into  the  liver.  Pressure  along  the  joints 
below  these,  produced  no  pain  or  efiect  whatever.  On  inquiring  into 
the  history  of  this  case,  I  found  the  disease  commenced  in  the  liver, 
about  six  years  ago,  and  has  terminated  in  abscess,  and  broke  and  dis- 
charged through  the  intestines,  four  different  times  during  this  period. 
He  is  now  feeble,  and  just  recovering  from  the  formation  and  discharge 
of  the  last  one,  which  had  reduced  him  nearly  to  death,  and  from  Avhich 
he  and  his  physicians  had  but  little  hope  of  his  recovery. 

Mr.  H.  brought  with  him  his  son,  aged  three  years,  with  hereditary 
scrofulous  sore  eyes.  The  eye-lids  of  both  eyes  are  very  much  swollen 
and  inflamed,  and  the  inflammation  extended  over  both  eye-balls  which 
had  two  ulcers  of  the  cornea.  The  light  was  so  painful  to  the  eyes,  as 
to  render  it  necessary  for  him  to  hold  a  handkerchief  almost  constantly 
over  them.  The  ganglia,  or  line  of  glands  on  both  sides  of  his  neck, 
with  the  submaxillary  under  the  jaws,  were  very  much  enlarged  and 
painful  under  pressure.  The  disease  commenced  more  than  two  years 
since,  and  he  has,  since  that  time,  been  subjected  to  thorough  courses  of 
treatment,  with  the  most  popular  remedies,  without  any  apparent  benefit 

The  magnetic  remedies  were  prescribed,  and  were  efiectual  remedies 
in  both  of  these  cases. 


The  following  correspondence  on  .the  subject  of  the  efficacy  of  my 
remedies  in  chronic  diseases,  (of  which  I  had  no  knowledge  at  the  time 
it  took  place)  has  been  handed  to  me  for  publication. 

•  <. 

Louisville,  July  12,  1838. 
Mr.  W.  Foulke, 

Sir  :  Your  favor  of  the  25th  ult.  was  received  and  handed  to  Mr.  Wm.  Hanna,  of 

this  city,  who  said  he  would  most  cheerfully  make  a  statement  of  the  effect  of  Dr. 

Sherwood's  medicine  in  his  case,  if  by  doing  so  he  could  relieve  one  person  from  a 

disease  under  which  he  had  suffered  so  much.     His  statement  is  on  the  preceding  page, 

and  is  but  one  out  of  many  cases  that  have  come  under  my  >^.>6ervation,  with  a  similar 

reault.  Very  respectfully, 

DAVID  HOBBS. 


146 

Louisville,  July,  1838. 
Mr.  W.  Fouike, 

Dear  Sir:  Mr.  Hobbs  having  placed  in  my  hand  a  letter  from  you,  asking  the 
opinion  of  persons  in  th).«  city  who  have  used  Dr.  Sherwood's  pills  and  plaster,  as  also 
a  statement  of  their  individual  C3se,  I,  as  one  of  them,  beg  leave  to  state  that  about 
seven  years  since  I  was  afflicted  with  what  was  called  dyspepsia— my  affliction  con- 
sisted in  almost  constant  pain  in  the  bowels,  stomach,  side,  back  and  head,  the  f -rmer 
so  much  so,  that  after  eating,  it  was  excruciating.  For  the  first  three  years,  I  was  under 
the  treatment  of  the  most  eminent  physicians  in  Baltimore,  Philadelphia,  and  this 
city,  without  the  least  relief,  and  by  all  of  them  pronounced  incurable.  1  then  resorted 
to  all  the  nostrums  to  be  had,  but  with  similar  result. 

On  my  return  from  the  east,  in  the  Spring  of  1836,  I  was  induced  by  my  friend  Mr. 
Hobbs,  (who  offered  to  accompany  me)  to  visit  Dr.  Sherwood,  at  Hamilton,  Ohio,  who, 
on  our  arrival,  proceeded  to  e.xamine  me,  (according  to  the  manner  directed  in  several 
pamphlets  since  published)  but  my  case  was  so  bad,  that  he  considered  the  operation 
might  prove  fatal  if  he  continued;  and  consequently  he  felt  doubtful  of  effecting  the 
cure  of  so  bad  a  subject.  I,  however,  determined  wliilst  there  was  a  hope,  to  continue 
every  medicine  that  offered,  and  at  once  commenced  with  the  pills  and  plaster,  which, 
after  the  third  day,  gave  me  great  relief ;  and  before  I  had  finished  two  boxes  became 
as  well,  and  have  continued  so  as  I  ever  was  during  my  life.  I  had  lived  for  two  years 
entirely  on  bread  and  tea.  I  was  the  first  in  this  city  that  ever  took  the  pills  ;  but  from 
the  knowledge  of  my  situation  and  cure,  hundreds  of  others  have  since  been  relieved. 
For  a  more  particular  statement  of  my  case  I  refer  you  to  Dr.  Sherwood's  pamphlet, 
page  — 

Respectfully,  dear  sir,  your  obedient  servant, 

WILLIAM  HANNA 

Cincinnati,  July  9th,  1838. 

Mr.  "W.  Fouike, 

Dear  Sir  :  Your  letter  of  the  25th  June  reached  me  in  due  course  of  mail,  and 
in  answer  I  can  only  say  in  regard  to  Sherwood's  electro-magnetic  remedies,  or  pills 
and  plaster,  that  my  youngest  daughter  was  severely  afflicted  with  scrofula,  and  for 
several  months  I  availed  myself  of  the  best  medical  skill  our  city  afforded,  and  all 
without  success.  Indeed,  the  disease  continued  to  increase,  and  the  eruption  extended 
from  her  body  into  her  face,  nose,  ears,  and  eyes,  until  we  were  obliged  to  keep  her  con- 
fined to  a  dark  room,  and  almost  despaired  of  her  restoration.  In  this  situation  I  was 
induced  to  make  the  experiment,  and  try  the  pills  and  plaster,  the  result  of  which  was, 
in  a  few  weeks,  my  child  began  to  improve,  and  continued  to  improve  until  she  was 
entirely  restored,  leaving  nothing  but  some  of  the  scars  caused  by  the  disease.  She  m 
now  in  fine  health,  and  no  indication  of  scrofula,  and  I  have  no  doubt  it  is  an  effectual 
remedy  for  that  distressing  disease. 

In  regard  to  the  application  of  it  to  myself  I  cannot  speak  in  so  strong  terms.  For 
several  months  I  have  had  a  severe  cough,  and  my  lungs  considerably  affected.  I  tried 
this  medicine  only  so  far  as  to  take  one  box  of  the  pills.  I  also  travelled  into  the  coun- 
try, and  my  health  is  much  improved,  but  the  travel,  exercise,  and  change  of  air  was, 
doubtless,  of  great  service  to  me  ;  and  in  my  own  case,  I  know  not  how  far  I  ought  to 
attribute  efficacy  to  the  medicine.  I  shall  be  in  your  city  some  weeks— expect  to  reach 
there  about  25th  inst.— and  if  you  should  wish  to  see  me,  by  calling  on  Mr.  G.  W. 
Richards,  merchant,  on  Front  street,  he  can  inform  you  where  I  will  be  found. 

Respectfully,  yours, 

WILLIAM  McLEAN 


147 

Cincinnati,  July  2, 1838. 
Mr.  W.  Foulke, 

Dear  Sir  :  Your  favor  of  the  25th  is  at  hand.  Agreeable  to  your  request,  I  give  a 
short  history  of  my  wife's  case,  and  the  result. 

She  had  been  afflicted  for  8  years,  and  had  become  a  confirmed  dyspeptic — so  much 
so,  that  she  had  not  eaten  a  meal  of  victuals  for  2  years,  of  any  kind,  without  distressing 
her,  and  was  seldom  able  to  go  out  much.  At  this  stage  of  the  disease,  and  after 
exhausting  all  resources  of  medical  skill,  (I  had  concluded  that  travelling  for  her  health 
was  the  only  chance  for  her  recovery).  She  earnestly  solicited  me  to  procure  her  a 
box  of  Sherwood's  pills  and  plaster.  I  endeavored  to  persuade  her,  that  they  were 
like  all  other  similar  medicines,  having  no  faith  in  them  myself  But  still  she  could  not 
be  persuaded  to  abandon  the  idea  of  trying  them,  as  she  had  heard  of  several  of  her 
friends  who  had  received  benefit  from  them.  After  some  month's  delay,  1  purchased 
a  box  of  them  merely  to  gratify  her.  But,  contrary  to  my  expectations,  she  soon  began 
to  improve,  and  in  6  or  8  weeks  could  partake  of  any  kind  of  food  with  the  rest  of  the 
family,  and  from  that  time  to  this  (IS  months)  has  been  free  from  any  appearance  of  a 
return  of  the  disease.     She  has  used  about  two  boxes. 

Yours,  Respectfully, 

E.  WHIPPLE 

Cincinnati,  July  3,  183S. 
Mr.  W.  Foulke, 

Dear  Sir  :  In  a  line  received  this  day,  you  request  me  to  give  you  the  history  ot 
my  wife's  case,  in  connexion  with  the  application  and  effect  of  Sherwood's  electro- 
magnetic remedies.  I  take  pleasure  in  answering  your  inquiries,  so  far  as  my  limited 
knowledge  of  the  progress  of  disease  and  the  effect  of  medicine  will  permit. 

My  wife  is  19  years  of  age,  of  a  very  frail  and  delicate  constitution.  Prior  to,  or 
about  the  first  of  January  last,  she  had  enjoyed  good  health.  About  that  time  (perhaps 
a  little  before)  she  commenced  declining,  indigestion,  and  want  of  appetite,  together 
■with  extreme  weakness,  indicated  the  approach  of  more  serious  disease.  A  few  weeks 
passed,  and  she  commenced  coughing — her  cough  was  of  a  dry,  husky  character,  at 
first  unaccompanied  with  expectoration.  I  was  under  "serious  apprehension  that  the 
consumption  which  had  cut  down,  prematurely,  her  father  and  mother,  and  many  other 
members  of  the  family,  had  marked  her  for  its  victim,  and  commenced  its  work.  At 
first,  I  resorted  to  some  of  the  celebrated  remedies  for  diseases  of  this  kind  (among 
which  were  the  "  Watasia,"  and  the  "  Vegetable  Pulmonary  Balsam),"  but  all  to  no 
purpose. 

Her  cough  increased  daily,  attended  with  profuse  expectoration,  and  she  was  rapidly 
wasting  away. 

About  six  weeks  after  her  cough  commenced,  I  was  induced  to  try  Sherwood's  reme- 
dies, confident  that  the  ordinary  practice  of  the  physicians  would  only  facilitate  her 
departure,  at  the  same  time,  doubting  the  eihcacy  of  these  remedies. 

The  day  after  she  had  taken  the  first  pill,  she  had  an  unusual  appetite  for  food,  and  I 
thought  her  cough  during  the  night  had  not  been  so  constant  or  severe.  In  three  or 
four  days,  her  cough  and  expectoration  ceased,  (the  blue  pill  was  abandoned)  the  tone 
of  her  stomach  was  restored,  her  strength  increased,  and  she  could  partake  of  the 
strongest  diet,  without  injury  or  inconvenience.  From  that  time  to  the  present,  her 
health  (with  the  exception  of  occasional  colds)  has  been  good. 

She  has  taken  a  part  of  two  boxes.  Whether  the  relief  which  they  have  afforded  is 
temporary  or  not,  time  only  can  determine.  I  feel  thankful  to  the  Giver  of  all  good, 
that  I  was  directed  to  the  use  of  these  remedies. 


148 

From  this,  and  some  other  cases  which  have  come  within  my  own  observation,  I  have 
no  hesitation  in  recommending  them  to  all  who  may  be  afflicted  with  scrofulous  diseases, 
by  whatever  name  they  may  be  called. 
I  would,  at  least,  say,  try  them. 

Tout's,  &c., 

SAMUEL  F.  GARY, 

Mr.  Foulke,  to  whom  the  above  letters  were  addressed,  resides  in 
Philadelphia — had  been  out  of  health  many  years,  and  a  long  time  un- 
der the  treatment  of  the  elite  of  our  art  in  that  city,  when  he  commenced 
the  above  correspondence  (as  I  am  informed)  to  ascertain  what  would 
probably  be  the  effect  of  the  remedies  in  his  case.  I  am  also  informed 
that  yiv.  Foulke  used  the  remedies,  and  that  their  effect  in  his  case,  fully 
justified  the  character  given  them  by  his  correspondents. 


TUBERCULA    OF    THE    UTERUS,    LIVER,    STOMACH,     TONSILS,     PALATE,    AND 

CEREBELLUM. 

:Mrs.  T.  S ,  of  F.,  Butler  Co.,  Ohio,  aged  31  years.     She  came 

to  see  me,  August  14,  1S36,  and  said  she  had  been  out  of  health  about 
5  years.  The  examination  in  her  case  was  commenced  as  usual,  by  an 
examination  of  the  spine,  and  first,  of  the  first  cervical  vertebrae. 

Pressure  on  a  small  tubercle  of  the  right  side  of  it  produced  severe 
pain,  which  darted  into  the  right  side  of  the  throat,  and  right  side  of  the 
head.  Pressure  on  the  left  side  of  it  produced  pain  which  darted  into 
the  left  side  of  her  throat.  Pressure  on  the  sides  of  the  second  joint 
also  produced  pain,  which  darted  into  the  upper  and  front  part  of  the 
neck.  Pressure  on  the  second,  third,  fourth  and  fifth  dorsal,  produced 
severe  pain,  which  darted  into  the  stomach.  Pressure  on  the  right  side 
of  the  seventh,  eighth  and  ninth,  produced  severe  pain  also,  which  darted 
into  the  region  of  the  liver.  Pressure  on  the  third  and  fourth  lumbar 
was  painful.  Pressure  on  the  other  cervical,  dorsal  and  lumber  vertebrae, 
produced  no  pain  or  effect  whatever. 

I  now  examined  the  line  of  glands  along  the  neck,  and  under  the  jaws, 
and  found  them  very  much  enlarged,  and  told  her  that  her  tonsils  and 
palate  were  enlarged,  and  that  she  had  dyspepsia,  chronic  inflammation 
of  the  liver,  and  leucorrhoea,  besides  swellings  of  some  of  her  limbs. 

She  said  that  was  right,  and  that  the  disease  originated  in  the  uterus 
five  years  before,  and  about  a  year  after,  it  commenced  in  her  liver,  and 
in  a  few  months  after  that,  in  her  stomach  ;  and  that  it  was  now  nearly 
three  months  since  her  ankles  and  legs  began  to  swell.  It  is  now  a  year 
since  her  catamenia  disappeared,  and  they  have  not  since  returned.     On 


14^ 

examiuing  her  throat,  I  found  the  tonsils  and  palate  very  nauch  enlarged, 
and  the  tongue  one-third  larger  than  natural.  The  tonsils  were  very 
sensible  to  pressure,  and  had,  with  the  palate  and  rest  of  the  throat,  a 
dark  red  colour,  and  during  the  last  few  weeks  the  act  of  deglutition,  or 
of  swallowing  solid  food,  had  been  difficult  and  painful.  She  had  had 
more  or  less  pain  in  the  right  side  of  her  head  with  dizziness,  during 
the  last  few  months.  She  was  also  very  pale,  feeble  and  emaciated.  A 
number  of  physicians  have  attended  her  one  after  another,  for  a  long 
time,  but  the  disease  continued  to  make  progress,  and  after  years  of 
suffering,  which  can  only  be  appreciated  by  persons  of  her  sex,  she  was 
in  the  last  part  of  the  last  stage  of  disease,  and  death,  under  the  common 
treatment,  would  soon  have  closed  the  scene.  Prescribed,  pills  and 
plaster.  One  plaster  to  be  applied  over  the  first,  second,  and  third  joints  of 
the  neck  and  of  a  length  sufficient  to  extend  from  ear  to  ear.  One  5  inches 
wide  and  16  inches  long,  to  extend  from  the  6th  joint  of  the  neck,  to  the 
10th  dorsal ;  and  another  over  all  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  and  also  to  use  the 
pills  according  to  the  directions  in  the  pamphlet. 

I  told  her,  as  I  commonly  do,  that  she  must  commence  getting  well 
immediately,  and  that  in  from  three  days  to  a  week,  she  would  notice  it 
distinctly,  and  would  in  that  time  be  able  to  eat  any  kind  of  food,  with  a 
good  appetite,  and  without  any  disturbance  of  the  stomach ;  and  that  in 
from  eight  to  ten  weeks  she  would  be  entirely  well. 

I  never  saw  or  heard  of  this  patient,  or  her  husband,  before  she  called 
on  me  at  the  above  date,  and  never  saw  or  heard  of  her  ajain  until 
October  24,  when  in  passing  near  her  residence,  I  called  to  see  her. 
Her  husband,  on  my  inquiring  after  her  health,  before  I  went  into  the 
house,  told  me,  he  "believed  she  was  about  well."  On  making  the 
same  inquiry  of  her,  she  told  me  she  "believed  she  was  entirely  well ;" 
and  on  my  asking  her  if  there  was  no  mistake  about  it,  she  told  me : 
"  no,  she  thought  there  could  be  none,"  and  asked  me  to  "  observe  the 
difference  in  the  colour  of  her  skin,  and  the  flesh  she  had  gained  ;"  and 
then  presented  to  me  one  arm,  to  see  how  hard  or  solid  the  flesh  was. 
She  also  observed,  "  that  her  catamenia  had  returned,  and  that  she  had 
been  twice,  since  she  saw  me,  as  regular  in  that  way,  as  she  ever  was  ;" 
and  besides,  "  that  she  commenced  work  as  usual  "v^hen  she  was  v,-ell, 
bout  two  weeks  since,  and  had  in  that  time  done  a  great  deal  of  work, 
which  did  not  appear  to  injure  her." 

I  told  her  that  it  all  looked  very  fair,  but  that  the  change  appeared  so 
very  great  in  so  short  a  time,  that  I  would  like  to  examine  her  lack, 
and  see  if  there  was  no  mistake  about  it.  She  told  me  I  might  as  much 
as  I  had  a  mind  to,  for  she  "  thought  it  was  perfectly  sound."  I  accord- 
ingly examined  it  in  the  usual  way,  and  found  she  was  right. 

It  will  be  observed  that  in  describins;  the  cases,  and  the  effects  of  these 
11 


150 

remedies,  I  have  generally  been  very  brief,  but  have  said  more  of  this 
case  in  consequence  of  its  great  importance  to  females  ;  for  the  disease 
generally  commences  in  them  at  an  adult  age,  in  the  uterus,  as  it  did  in 
this  case,  and  then,  after  a  few  months  or  years,  is  extended  to  other 
organs  and  limbs. 

The  above  case  is  not  an  uncommon  one,  for  the  day  previous  to  the 
one  on  which  I  prescribed  for  this  case,  I  was  called  to  prescribe  for 
another. 

Mrs.  W.  F.,  of  the  town  of  R.,  aged  21  years,  affected  in  all  respects 
as  in  the  above  case,  except  that  the  tonsils  and  tubercles  in  the  up- 
per part  of  the  neck  were  much  larger.  After,  however,  the  common 
remedies  had  entirely  failed  in  her  case,  she  was  induced  to  try  the 
effects  of  travelling,  and  visited  some  of  the  principal  eastern  cities — got 
the  advice  of  some  of  the  physicians  of  those  cities,  and  on  her  return, 
her  husband  came  to  me,  and  told  me  ,that  "  he  wanted  me  to  call  and 
see  her,  as  he  had  become  satisfied  that  she  must  die,  unless  I  could  save 
her."  I  accordingly  visited  her,  and  commenced  and  went  through 
with  the  examination  of  the  spine  in  the  same  way,  as  in  the  case  of 
Mrs  S.,  and  then  described  to  her  the  disease  in  the  different  organs  and 
limbs,  and  prescribed  the  same  remedies.  I  then,  as  in  the  case  of 
Mrs.  S.,  told  her  she  must  commence  getting  well  immediately,  and  the 
cure  would  continue  steadily,  unless  it  was  retarded  by  colds,  and  that 
she  must  be  well  in  ten  or  twelve  weeks. 

She  did  accordingly  begin  to  get  well  as  I  had  told  her.  I  called  once 
in  two  or  three  weeks  to  see  her  progress,  and  the  last  time,  the  day 
after  I  called  on  Mrs.  S.,  and  found  her  situation,  in  all  respects  like 
Mrs.  S — 's,  except  that  her  tonsils  and  the  tubercles  under  the  jaws, 
although  greatly  reduced,  had  not  entirely  disappeared — and  she  was 
directed  to  continue  the  use  of  the  remedies.  Dec.  4.  The  tubercles, 
I  have  learnt  from  her  mother,  have  disappeared,  and  her  health  is 
entirely  restored. 

Mrs.  A.  H.,  of  Louisville,  Ky.,  aged  21  years.  She,  like  the  above 
cases,  had  the  disease  affecting  the  liver,  stomach,  and  uterus,  and  a  few 
months  since,  her  throat.  She,  like  Mrs.  W.  F.,  after  the  use  of  a  great 
variety  of  remedies,  recommended  by  her  physicians,  went  to  one  of  the 
eastern  cities.  She,  however,  returned  a  few  months  after,  and  gradually 
growing  worse,  was  in  a  few  weeks  confined  to  her  bed.  The  disease 
continued  to  make  progress,  and  in  a  few  weeks  more  a  number  of  phy- 
sicians were  called  in  consultation,  but  her  symptoms  continued  to  grow 
worse. 


151 

Magnetic  pills  aud  plaster  were  now  prescribed.  She  began  to  get 
well  immediately  after,  and  in  a  few  days  was  able  to  sit  up  and  walk 
her  room,  and  in  two  weeks  was  promenading  the  streets.  It  is  now 
^Nov.  8th,  lS36,j  only  five  weeks  since  she  commenced  the  use  of  these 
remedies,  aud  although  the  usual  time  has  not  elapsed  to  perfect  a  cure, 
she  has  gained  so  much  flesh  and  strength,  as  to  make  her  appear  to  a 
stranger,  as  well,  and  in  as  good  spirits,  as  any  other  person.  Yet  she 
is  rather  thin  or  slender,  and  has  not  regained  her  natural  fleshiness,  and 
pressure  on  the  1st  and  2d  cervical,  2d,  3d,  4th,  and  5th,  and  7th,  Sth, 
and  9th  dorsal,  and  3d  and  4th  lumbar  vertebrse,  produced  pain.  Con- 
tinued the  remedies. 

December  16th.  Her  face  has  now  the  full  and  rounded  form,  and  she 
has  fully  regained  her  natural  flesh.  On  applying  pressure  now,  on  cash 
of  the  vertebrae,  along  the  whole  line  of  the  spinal  column,  it  produced 
no  pain  or  effect  whatever.  Her  health  is  now  in  all  respects  fully  re- 
established, and  I  directed  the  remedies  to  be  discontinued. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  STOMACH. 

Dyspepsia. 
The  following  scrap  was  cut  from  the  Cincinnati  Whig : — 

Gentlemen  :  I  noticed  some  time  since,  a  communication,  published  in  the 
Cincinnati  Whig,  signed  by  Dr.  Lawson,  in  which  he  speaks  with  great  confidence 
and  certainty,  of  the  good  effects  of  "  Sherwood's  Remedies,"  as  prescribed  by  him 
in  his  practice,  in  the  cure  of  various  forms  of  scrofula. 

It  gives  me  pleasure  to  add  my  own  conviction  of  their  efficacy  in  the  cure  of  dys- 
pepsia. For  many  years,  this  disease  had  preyed  upon  my  constitution,  and  in  the 
summer  of  1836,  and  winter  of  1837,  my  digestive  organs  had  become  so  much  im- 
paired, that  almost  every  kind  of  food,  taken  as  nourishment,  created  the  most  intense 
suffering.  My  flesh  had  wasted  away,  and  my  whole  system  had  become  so  much 
debilitated,  as  scarcely  to  give  me  strength  sufficient  to  leave  my  room.  I  had  become 
discouraged,  and  despaired  of  ever  again  regaining  my  health,  and  looked  upon  death 
as  the  only  sure  relief  of  my  sufferings.  Many  of  my  friends  and  acquaintances,  with 
the  knowledge  that  my  disease  seemed  to  baffle  the  skill  of  several  eminent  physicians, 
had  despaired  of  my  recovery,  and  had  made  up  their  minds  that  I  must  soon  be  num- 
bered among  the  dead. 

At  this  stage  of  the  disease,  I  was  advised  by  some  one  to  make  trial  of  "  Sher- 
wood's electro-magnetic  remedies."  As  a  last  resort,  I  was  willing  to  lay  hold  of  any 
thing  that  would  relieve  me,  and  lost  no  time  in  procuring  a  box,  and  commenced 
their  use.  In  the  course  of  a  few  weeks,  I  found  my  strength  gradually  to  increx.«e, 
and  my  food  (such  as  my  appetite  craved)  no  longer  gave  me  distress.     My  former 


152 

flow  of  spirits  again  returned,  my  slumbers  became  sound,  and  undisturbed  by  horria 
dreams,  and  my  constitution,  in  a  short  time,  became  restored  to  its  former  tlesh, 
health,  and  vigor.  It  is  now  more  than  two  years  (1839)  since  I  recovered  my  health, 
and  have  withheld  giving  publicity  tomy  case,  until  I  could,  without  the  fear  of  contra- 
diction, speak  of  the  permanency  of  the  cure.  I  would  advise,  especially,  all  dys- 
peptics to  lose  no  time  in  procuring  these  remedies,  and  to  give  them  a  fair  trial.  I 
am  very  confident  they  will  not  have  cause  to  regret  having  done  so  If  any  person, 
afflicted  with  this  disease,  should  wish  for  further  information  than  herein  given,  if 
they  will  call  on  me,  or  address  me  by  letter,  post  paid,  if  in  my  power,  I  will  cheer- 
fully give  it.     I  have  no  interest,  directly  or  indirectly,  in  the  sale  of  the  medicine. 

Your's,  respectfully, 
Cincinnati,  June  5, 1839.  C.  TOBEY. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  TONSILS,  PALATE  AND  TONGUE. 

Master  W.  W.,  of  Union,  Butler  Co.,  Ohio,  light  complexion,  aged 
17  years,  called  for  advice,  Nov.  25,  1835,  and  said  he  had  been  out  of 
health  some  time.  I  now,  without  any  enquiries,  commenced  an  exami- 
nation of  the  spine,  between  the  first  cervical  vertebrae  and  skull,  when 
he  observed  that  it  hurt  him,  and  the  pain  darted  into  his  tongue.  I 
then  pressed  on  the  left  side,  in  the  space  between  the  first  and  second 
vertebrae;  when  he  observed  again  that  it  hurt  him,  and  the  pain  darted 
into  his  throat.  Pressure  along  the  other  joints  of  the  neck  and  back, 
produced  no  pain  or  effect  whatever. 

I  now  told  him  that  his  tongue  and  tonsils  were  swelled,  and  that  he 
had  a  cough  and  expectoration  ;  and  in  looking  into  his  mouth,  found 
both  tonsils  (almonds  of  the  ear)  much  enlarged,  and  in  a  state  of 
ulceration, — the  uvula  [palate]  much  enlarged  and  elongated,  and  the 
tongue  twice  its  natural  thickness.  On  examining  the  submaxillary  and 
cervical  ganglia  of  glands  under  the  jaws,  and  in  the  sides  of  the  neck, 
they  were  found  much  enlarged.  He  is  pale,  and  the  emaciation  is 
making  progress.  The  disease  commenced  more  than  a  year  since,  and 
he  has  been  coughing  and  expectorating  matter,  more  or  less,  during  the 
last  eight  or  nine  months. 

Prescribed,  the  magnetic  remedies.  The  swelling  of  the  throat  and 
tongue  soon  began  to  subside,  and  in  about  six  weeks  the  ulcers  were 
healed,  and  his  health  was  entirely  restored  in  about  five  months  from 
the  time  he  commenced  the  use  of  the  remedies. 

The  above  was  a  very  bad  case  of  a  disease  to  which  clergymen  are 
very  subject,  and  which  would  have  terminated  fatally  without  the  use 
of  these  remedies.  I  have  prescribed  them  in  many  cases  of  this  affec- 
tion during  the  last  three  years,  nine  of  which  were  those  of  clergymen. 


153 

Five  of  these  are  cured.     Two  were  induced  to  stop  the  use  of  these 
remedies  after  two  or  three  weeks,  and  substitute  others,  one  of  whoi^ 
is  dead.     The  other  is,  or  was,  travelling  for  his  health,  the  last  I  hean 
of  him.     Two  very  bad  cases  are  now  under  treatment,  and  are  both 
very  nearly  well.* 


TUBEBCULA    OF    THE     TONGUE,     RIGHT     TONSIL,    RIGHT     LEG,     AND     BIGHT 

SIDE    OF    THE    NECK. 

Mr.  G.  A.  F ,  merchant,  of  Cleveland,  Ohio,  light  complexion 

and  slender  frame,  aged  34.  His  tongue  began  to  swell,  and  to  be  sore 
and  stiff  or  clumsy,  in  February,  1833  ;  and  in  April  following,  his  right 
leg  began  to  swell.  The  swelling  and  soreness  of  the  tongue  continued 
to  increase  until  the  middle  of  May,  when  the  leg  had  become  very  pain- 
ful, and  began  to  discharge  tuberculous  matter. 

The  swelling  and  soreness  of  the  tongue  began  now  to  subside,  and  in 
a  few  days  disappeared.  The  leg  continued  to  grow  worse,  and  confined 
him  to  the  house  much  of  the  time  for  nearly  four  months  ;  but  after  the 
use  of  a  variety  of  applications,  it  healed  about  the  first  of  December,  of 
the  same  year,  when  he  discovered  a  tubercle  of  the  size  of  a  chesnut  in 
the  centre  and  near  the  roots  of  the  tongue,  which  about  the  last  part  of 
the  month  began  to.  ulcerate,  when  he  discovered  another  tubercle  about 
three  fourths  of  an  inch  from  it,  and  this  soon  ulcerated,  and  others  con- 
tinued to  appear  and  ulcerate,  until  the  first  of  May,  1834.  They  then 
healed,  and  the  swelling  of  the  tongue  became  a  little  reduced,  when  the 
4isease  re-appeared  in  the  leg,  but  in  the  back  part  of  it,  and  with  its 
accustomed  violence,  and  began  to  ulcerate  about  the  1st  of  July.  In 
August,  the  leg  began  to  get  better,  when  the  disease  increased  again  in 
the  tongue,  and  soon  began  again  to  ulcerate  ;  and  a  tubercle  on  the  right 
side  of  the  neck  now  suppurated,  and  began  to  discharge  tuberculous 
matter. 

He  now  went  to  the  city  of  New- York  for  advice,  where  electricity 
was  prescribed,  and  applied  in  different  ways  for  about  or  nearly  three 
months,  during  which  time  the  ulcers  of  the  tongue  healed,  and  the  tu- 
bercles on  the  side  of  the  neck  nearly  disappeared ;  but  on  the  left  side 
of  the  tongue  remained  uninfluenced  by  the  frequent  and  continued  ap- 

•  In  the  cases  were  the  uvula  has  been  a  long  time  very  much  enlarged  and  elongatei. 
it  should  be  cut  ofl.  I  generally  cut  off  about  one  half  of  it  in  such  cases,  to  remove 
a  constant  source  of  irritation,  which  would  otherwise  greatly  retard  the  cure  The 
operation  is  a  vf  ry  simple  one,  and  is  never  attended  with  any  danger 


154 

plication  of  the  electric  shocks.  The  leg  also  during  the  use  of  this  and 
other  remedies  continued  to  get  better,  and  nearly  healed.  In  two  or 
three  days  after  he  had  left  the  city  of  New- York,  and  discontinued  the 
use  of  electricity,  the  tubercles  on  the  side  of  the  neck,  and  the  one  oo 
the  side  of  the  tongue  began  to  enlarge  again,  and  in  two  or  three  weeks, 
two  more  appeared  in  the  tongue  and  his  throat  began  now  to  be  sore 
and  painful,  and  these  symptoms  continued  to  increase  in  violence. 

On  the  10th  of  January,  1S35,  he  called  upon  me  for  advice.  The 
right  side  of  his  neck  was  now  swollen,  tuberculated,  and  painful,  and 
this  pain  frequently  darted  into  the,  side  of  his  face  and  head,  and  ther« 
were  now  two  large  tubercles  on  the  left  side  of  the  tongue,  and  one 
about  the  centre  of  it,  and  one  an  inch  from  its  apex,  and  three  rising  com- 
spicuously  from  the  right  tonsil,  which  were  very  sensible  to  pressure, 
and  with  the  swollen  tongue  produced  painful  and  difficult  deglutition. 

Near  the  time  the  ulcerations  commenced  in  the  tongue,  he  began  to 
feel  lancinating  pains  in  and  through  it,  and  they  have  continued  with 
varying  severity  to  this  time ;  and  all  the  tubercles  that  have  appeared 
in  it  from  time  to  time  have  invariably  ulcerated,  except  the  last  three 
mentioned,  and  have  left  in  it  corrugated  excavations. 

There  is  now  little  or  no  swelling  of  the  leg,  and  the  tuberculous 
abscesses  are  all  healed  except  one ;  but  small  tubercles  of  the  size  of 
small  peas  are  felt  under  the  skin  in  the  back  and  front  part  of  it. 

He  has  suffered  severely  from  this  disease,  and  in  one  or  two  instances 
was  reduced  nearly  to  death,  aud  has  consulted  and  employed  many 
celebrated  physicians,  all  of  whom  called  it  mercurial  disease,  and  pre- 
scribed, among  other  things,  the  compound  sarsaparilla  syrup,  and  cicuta, 
at  a  time  when  the  disease  was  supposed  to  be  terminating  in  cancer. 

Diagnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  tongue,  right  tonsil,  right  side  of  the 
neck  and  right  leg.  Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  In  less 
than  one  week,  the  tubercles  in  his  tongue,  tonsil,  and  neck,  with  the 
swelling  of  his  neck,  were  very  much  reduced  ;  and  he  now  swallowed 
his  food  with  much  less  difficulty,  and  the  reduction  continued  ;  and  at 
the  end  of  two  weeks  the  soreness  of  the  throat  had  subsided,  and  he 
swallowed  without  difficulty  ;  and  at  the  end  of  four  weeks,  the  tuber- 
cles and  swellings  of  the  tongue,  tonsil,  and  neck  disappeared,  as  well  as 
the  tubercles  in  the  leg  ;  and  his  health  and  flesh  had  increased  so  much, 
as  to  make  him  appear  in  perfect  health. 

Death  from  cancer  of  the  tongue  and  throat,  is,  of  all  others,  the  most 
painful  and  most  horrible,  of  which  Mr.  F.  was  advised,  and  for  which 
he  had  been  admonished  to  prepare. 

The  lapse  of  four  years  has  shown  the  cure  a  permanent  one. 


155 

CANCER  OF  THE  LIP. 

Miss  M.  H ,  of ,  aged  17  years.     Called  early  in  the  morning 

to  see  her,  in  April,  1817  ;  and  was  requested  to  examine  her  under  lip, 
which  was  swollen  and  ulcerated,  and  to  give  my  opinion  of  its  charac- 
ter, and  after  examining  it  and  the  lymphatic  glands  of  the  neck,  which 
were  tuberculated  on  both  sides,  I  pronounced  it  a  case  of  scrofulous 
cancer.  I  was  then  requested  to  say  whether  I  "  could  cure  it  without 
cutting  it  out,"  and  readily  answered  in  the  affirmative,  and  was  then 
told  by  the  female  attendant,  that,  that  was  all  they  wanted  of  me,  and 
that  I  was  at  liberty  to  return  home  as  soon  as  I  pleased,  and  accordingly 
bade  her  good  morning,  and  returned  home,  perfectly  in  the  dark,  how- 
ever, as  regarded  what  was  meant  by  this  quixotic  adventure.  The 
next  day,  I  was  called  again,  and  informed  in  explanation,  that  a  cele- 
brated surgeon  had  been  attending  the  patient  about  two  months,  and  as 
the  lip  continued  to  get  worse,  and  had  become  very  painful,  he  had 
advised  them,  a  few  days  before,  of  the  futility  of  all  remedies,  but  the 
knife,  and  had  set  the  time  of  ten  o'clock  of  the  day  before  to  perform 
the  operation  ;  but  they  had  dismissed  him,  and  sent  for  me  to  perform 
the  cure  without  it. 

She  was  of  the  middling  size,  light  and  ruddy  complexion,  eyes  rather 
large  and  prominent,  and  form  of  face  approaching  that  of  the  Roman, 
and  with  perfect  symmetry  of  body  and  limbs,  was  what  may  be  called 
a  scrofulous  beauty,  bating  only  this  horrible  lip. 

Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plaster. 

In  five  weeks  from  this  time  the  cure  was  perfect,  and  the  tubercu- 
lated glands  in  the  neck  had  gradually  become  smaller,  and  soon  after 
disappeared. 

This  case,  and  the  following  one  of  the  uterus,  were  apparently  cases 
of  scrofulous  cancer.  I  have  had  a  few  other  cases  of  the  lip  of  the 
same  character,  and  many  of  a  similar  nature,  affecting  the  uterus,  which 
were  cured  with  these  remedies,  but  which  have  apparently  little  or  no 
effect  on  the  disease  in  this  form,  when  affecting  any  other  part  of  the 
body.  I  have  imputed  their  effects,  in  the  cases  of  the  lip  and  uterus, 
to  the  strong  power  of  contraction  which  they  possess,  from  the  fact  that 
the  same  results  are  obtained  in  cases  where  strong  compression  can  be 
appliad  at  the  same  time  as  in  the  case  given  of  Mrs.  H.,  of  Union, 
Butler  Co.,  Ohio.  ' 


156 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  UTERUS,  TERMINATING  IN  CANCER. 

Menorrhagia  terminating  in  Cancer. 

Miss  P.  F ,  of ,  of  full  habit  and  light  complexion,  aged  22 

years;  called  to  see  her.  May  16,  1812.  She  has  menorrhagia,  which 
commenced  four  months  ago.  I  prescribed  the  usual  remedies  for  many 
months,  during  which  time,  as  before,  she  had  been  constantly  confined 
to  her  bed  :  but  all  to  no  purpose,  and  it  now  became  necessary  to  abandon 
the  patient  or  commence  a  new  treatment. 

She  had  from  the  first  complained  much  of  pain  and  weakness  in  the 
small  of  her  back ;  which  was  attended  with  leucorrhoea.  I  proposed 
now  to  examine  her  back,  and  applied  pressure  on  and  around  the  lum- 
bar vertebrce,  and  this  produced  violent  pain,  which,  on  every  repetition 
of  the  pressure,  darted  into  the  uterus,  and  they  appeared  to  be  the  same 
darting  pains  we  find  in  cancer  of  the  breast. 

I  now  prescribed  the  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  The  plaster  over 
the  small  of  the  back,  or  lumbar  vertebrae,  with  injections  into  the 
uterus  of  a  strong  solution  of  acetate  of  iron,  by  means  of  a  catheter  and 
small  pointed  syringe. 

Her  symptoms  began  to  improve  slowly  from  this  time,  and  in  about 
three  months,  a  very  thick  membrane  separated  from  the  inside  of  the 
uterus,  and  was  discharged  from  it,  rolled  up — round — half  an  inch  in 
diameter,  and  two  inches  in  length,  which  was  presented  to  me  in  a 
paper,  and  on  unrolling  and  spreading  it  out  on  a  stand,  it  presented  two 
tumors  or  bunches,  of  dark  colored  fungi  near  the  middle  or  centre  of  it, 
— one  of  which  was  near  the  size  and  shape  of  a  chesnut,  and  the  other 
of  the  size  of  a  pea,  and  flattened  on  the  sides  that  adhered  to  the  mem- 
brane, and  at  a  distance  from  each  other  of  half  an  inch. 

These  fungi  were  on  the  outside  of  the  membrane,  or  that  next  the 
uterus,  and  adhered  to  and  sunk  deeply  into  it ;  and  there  arose  out  of 
their  tops  and  sides  small  white  or  light  colored  substances  of  the  size 
and  appearance  of  small  threads,  and  firom  a  line  to  a  fourth  of  an  inch 
in  length. 

On  examining  the  other  side  of  this  membrane,  small  holes  or  chinks 
were  found  opposite  to  these  fungi. 

In  a  few  weeks  after  this,  her  health  was  restored.  She  married 
about  a  jea-  after,  but  has  had  no  children. 


157 

The  following  notice  of  the  eflfect  of  my  remedies,  from  the  Rev.  J.  B 
Cook,  was  received  after  this  work  w^as  stereotyped  and  going  through 
the  press.  It  was  one  of  the  cases  under  treatment  before  noticed,  which 
became  so  bad  while  practising  his  clerical  duties  in  the  West,  (Cincin- 
nati and  Covington,)  as  to  compel  him  to  abandon  them  entirely,  and  re- 
turn to  his  friends  in  the  east. 

From  the  Christian  Secretary. 

Hartford,  Oct.  30,  1840. 

Mr.  Editor, — I  send  you  a  brief  statement  of  facts  relating  to  my  recovery.  This 
is  done  the  more  cheerfully,  as  I  feel  prompted  by  gratitude  and  by  a  desire  that  others 
similarly  afflicted,  may  be  as  happily  relieved. 

1  had  been  dyspeptic  for  many  years,  was  afflicted  with  tubercula  of  the  palate,  neck 
and  stomach  ;  with  chronic  diarrhoea  and  piles  ;  with  general  debility,  and  with  chronic 
bronchitis,  which  extended  from  the  glottis  to  both  lobes  of  my  lungs.  During  the 
last  two  years  I  have  suffered  so  much  from  bronchitis  that  much  of  the  time,  speaking 
even  in  a  whisper,  has  been  so  distressing  as  to  oblige  me  to  converse  by  writing.  But 
now  I  am  comfortably  well,  through  the  Divine  blessing,  on  the  use  of  Dr.  Sherwood's 
Electro  Magnetic  Remedies.  Some  of  the  delightful  changes  experienced  by  me  are 
the  following: 

From  such  a  state  of  my  throat  and  lungs  that  the  utterance  of  a  sentence  distressed 
me,  I  have  been  enabled  to  preach  eleven  times  during  the  present  month,  and  conduct 
five  other  religious  services.  My  strength  and  comfort  have  been,  in  the  meantime, 
gradually  increasing.  The  deep  depression  of  spirits  which,  at  times,  seemed  death- 
like, has  given  place  to  the  animation  and  cheerfulness  of  youth.  My  blood,  from 
having  been  almost  literally  black  and  thick,  has  become  perfect  in  color  and  consist- 
ence. My  palate,  through  the  aid  of  a  slight  surgical  operation,  is  reduced  to  its  usua 
size.  The  glands  of  my  neck,  which  were  enlarged  and  painful,  are  now  entirely  re- 
duced. The  pain  from  my  neck  has  passed  off  sensibly.  The  mucous  membrane  of  the 
bronchia  has  been  aided  in  its  secretions.  Dr.  Sherwood's  remedies  have  excelled 
every  thing  I  have  used  as  an  expectorant.  The  inflammation  of  my  throat,  and  the 
pain  consequent  upon  it,  have  been  allayed,  and  at  times  entirely  gone.  The  same  is 
true  of  the  inflammation  and  pain  in  my  bowels.  Relief  from  hunger,  by  eating,  though 
more  immediate,  is  not  more  a  matter  of  consciousness,  than  was  my  relief  from  pain, 
by  the  application  of  these  remedies.  From  apprehending  languor,  consumption,  a 
suffering  life,  and  an  early  death,  I  have  now  the  prospect  of  an  active,  and  I  hope,  use- 
ful life. 

To  all  afflicted  with  bronchitis,  or  tubercular  con.sumption,  or  what  is  called  scrofula, 
or  dyspepsia,  let  me  say  that  I  do  not  believe  that  these  diseases  can  long  exist  under 
the  action  of  these  remedies.  They  are  not,  in  my  estimation,  to  be  classed  with  quack 
medicines,  because,  1st,  I  believe  them  to  have  science  for  their  basis.  2d.  Their 
adaptation  to  individual  sufferers  is  pointed  out  by  symptoms  which  none  need  mistake  ; 
and  3d,  Dr.  S.  is  a  regularly  educated  physician,  who,  having  suffered  from  his  child- 
hood, was  led  gradually  to  the  discovery  of  them  for  his  own  relief.  Some  think  it  a 
mark  of  wisdom  to  ridicule  every  thing  new  in  medicine  ;  as  if  the  science  and  practice 
of  it  were  stereotyped,  however  the  Baconian  philosophy  repudiates  the  theories  of 
every  age  and  school  which  come  in  conflict  with  fact.  I  have  stated  simple  verities 
In  addition  to  my  own  case,  I  refer  to  B.  S.  Lawson,  M.  D.,  of  Cincinnati,  who  was 


158 

restored  from  confirmed  consumption,  after  all  the  common  remedies  had  entirely  failed. 
With  gratitude  to  God  for  my  recovery,  I  subscribe  myself 

Yours,   .  J.  B.  Cook. 

P.  S. — I  should  add  that  Professor  Bronson  gave  me  essential  aid  in  recovering  the 
use  of  my  voice. 

The  Bronchitis  mentioned  in  this  case  was  the  consequence  of  tuber- 
cular disease  of  the  throat  and  lungs  ;  the  reduction  of  which  dissipated 
the  disease  of  the  naucous  membrane  of  the  throat  and  bronchial  tubes. 

I  did  not  see  Mr.  Cook  until  he  had  taken  one  box  of  my  remedies, 
when  I  suggested  the  necessity  of  his  consulting  Professor  Bronson  on 
the  subject  of  the  improvement  of  his  voice,  which  I  am  pleased  to  learn 
has  added  another  case  to  the  Professor's  long  list  of  triumphs  in  his  art. 

The  case  of  Mr.  Cook  was  like  that  of  many  other  clergymen  who  have 
been  affected  in  the  same  manner,  and  who  have  been  cured  with  the 
same  remedies.  At  the  time  I  saw  him,  he  had  the  magnetic  symptoms 
of  tubercular  disease  of  the  lungs  in  addition  to  the  disease  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  throat  (which  •was  tuberculated)  and  larynx,  which  are 
absent  in  idiopathic  bronchitis  until  the  last  stage  of  the  disease,  when 
they  are  sometimes  present  in  consequence  of  the  formation  of  tubercles, 
by  obstructions  in  the  lymphatic  vessels,  from  disease  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  bronchia.  These  symptoms,  when  they  appear  in  such 
cases,  are,  however,  slight  and  not  at  all  proportioned  to  the  intensity  of 
the  disease. 

In  twenty-two  post  mortem  examinations  of  this  disease,  I  found  tuber- 
cles in  seventeen  cases  in  their  different  stages  of  formation  and  destruc- 
tion. In  some  of  these  cases  a  few  small  tubercles  only  were  found  in 
an  immature  state,  while  in  others  they  had  become  mature,  and  in  some 
cases  had  softened  down  and  produced  one  or  more  excavations. 

These  remedies  have  no  effect  whatever  in  idiopathic  bronchitis,  or 
in  any  other  disease  in  the  absence  of  the  magnetic  symptoms. 


CHAPTER    VIII 


TUBERCULA    OF    THE    SPINE. 


Miss  E.  B.,  of  Stratford,  Conn.,  aged  twelve  years.  I  called  to  sec 
her  in  Dec.  1839,  and  on  an  examination  found  a  lateral  curvature  of 
the  dorsal  vertebra;,  a  portion  of  which  extended  under,  and  raised  the 
right  shoulder  blade.  The  right  hip  was  also  raised  above  the  left,  and 
her  health  and  strength  much  reduced. 

Prescribed,  the  magnetic  remedies.  The  plaster  to  extend  the  whole 
length  of  the  spine.  The  weight  of  her  body  was  also  directed  to  be 
suspended  by  her  arms,  with  any  simple  contrivance,  as  by  taking  hold 
of  a  stick  suspended  from  a  ceiling,  a  few  minutes,  five  or  six  times 
a  day. 

I  called  to  see  her  again  the  last  part  of  April,  1840,  when,  on  exami- 
nation of  the  spine,  it  was  found  to  have  resumed  its  natural  position, 
and  her  health  and  strength  perfectly  restored. 

The  curvature  commenced  in  this  case  about  a  year  and  a  half  before 
I  first  saw  her  in  December,  and  gradually  increased  to  the  extent  above 
mentioned.  The  result  of  th's  practice  in  such  cases,  is  constant  and 
uniform.  In  other  cases,  of  many  years  continuance,  little  or  no  change 
is  produced  in  the  curvature,  for  obvious  reasons,  by  this  practice  or  any 
other,  and  the  only  benefit  resulting  from  the  use  of  these  rem-edies  in 
12 


160 

these  cases  is  the  reduction  of  the  disease  in  the  spine,  and  also  of  the 
stomach,  liver,  or  lungs,  almost  constantly  accompanying  curvature  of 
the  spine. 

1  frequently  find  such  patients  harnessed  with  cushions  and  splints, 
but  regarding  them  as  worse  than  useless,  I  always  remove  them. 

Note  E. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  SPINE. 

Caries  of  the  Vertebrce  and  Distortion  of  the  Spine. 

Master  W.  H.  F.,  of  the  City  of  New  York,  of  light  complexion, 
aged  6  years.  His  parents  brought  him  to  me  in  Sept.  1837,  with  white 
swelling  and  distortion  of  the  spine  from  tubercular  disease  of  the 
eleventh  and  twelfth  dorsal,  and  first  lumbar  vertebrae — the  last  dorsal 
projecting  backwards,  and  it  was  with  great  difficulty  he  could  maintain 
himself  in  an  erect  position.  The  disease  (in  which  the  common  reme- 
dies had  been  used  without  benefitj  commenced  about  two  years  before 
that  time  with  pain  in  these  vertebrae,  which  still  continued  with  inter- 
vals of  abatement,  during  a  few  weeks,  when  it  would  sometimes  return 
with  such  violence  as  to  produce  spasmodic  symptoms. 

Prescribed,  magnetic  remedies. 

His  health  soon  began  to  improve,  and  in  about  six  months  it  was 
entirely  recovered.  I  examined  his  back  a  number  of  times  during  the 
summer  and  fall  of  1838,  and  also  on  the  15th  of  June,  1839,  and  found 
it  perfectly  sound  and  strong,  and  he  walked  as  erect,  and  appeared  as 
well,  as  any  boy  of  his  age. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  SPINE  AND  NECK. 

King'^s  Evil,  and  White  Swelling  of  the  right  side  of  the  Spine. 

Master  J.  M.  S ,  of  Union,  Butler  county,  Ohio,  aged   seven 

years.  I  was  called  to  see  him,  August  3d,  1833.  He  had  a  white 
swelling  on  the  under  jaw  of  the  right  side,  and  a  number  of  large  tuber- 
cles on  the  same  side  of  his  neck,  and  a  white  swelling  on  the  right  side 
of  the  lower  dorsal  vertebrae,  (Tjack  bone,)  and  it  was  now  about  three 
weeks  since  the  disease  commenced.  Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plas- 
ter In  six  weeks  the  white  swellings  disappeared,  and  his  usual  good 
health  v/as  re-established. 

September  23d,  1833.     Prescribed  for  Master  W.  C,  the  brother  of 

Master  J.  M.  S ,  aged  4  years.     He  had  a  white  swelling  of  the 

neck,  and  lower  jaw  of  the  right  side,  over  tubercles  on  the  same  side  of 


151 

the  neck.     Prciscribed,  mai2;netic  pills  and  plaster.     In  five  weeks  the 
swellings  and  tubercles  had  disappeared.     His  health  continues  good. 

The  case  of  J   M.  S ,  under  the  common  treatment,  like  the  fol- 
lowing case  of  Master  J.  S ,  would  have  terminated  in  distortion  of 

the  spine  and  lumbar  abscess.     This  disease  always  commences  with 
white  swelhng  on  the  front  or  back  side  of  the  spine. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  SPINE. 

DistOTtion  of  the  Spine,  Lumbar  Abscess,  White  Swelling,  S^c 

Master  J.  S ,  of  Sycamore,  Hamilton  county,  Ohio,  aged  twelve 

years.  1  was  called  to  see  him  October  24th,  18-32.  He  has  tubercles 
of  different  sizes,  on  both  sides  of  his  neck,  and  it  is  now  six  years  since 
they  first  appeared,  and  his  health  began  to  decline  ;  and  he  had  now  a 
distortion  of  the  spine  (back  bonej  ninth  dorsal  vertebrae,  which  formed 
an  obtuse  angle  backward  ;  and  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  (joints  of  the  back 
bone  belonging  to  the  small  of  the  back,)  from  this  point  to  the  os-coccyx, 
inclined  to  the  right  side,  so  far  as  to  form  nearly  a  half  circle  ;  which 
with  the  whole  left  side  of  the  back,  was  occupied  with  a  large  lumbar 
abscess.  The  distortion  of  the  spine  commenced  three  years  before, 
with  white  swelling  on  the  right  side  of  the  spine.  He  had  also  a 
white  swelling  on  the  left  thigh,  and  a  very  great  enlargement  of  the 
abdomen,  produced  by  an  enlargement  of  the  mesenteric  glands.  The 
lumbar  abscess  had  been  discharging  scrofulous  matter  about  two  years, 
which  now  amauntei  to  more  than  half  a  pint  in  every  twenty-four 
hours  ;  and  he  was  so  much  emaciated  as  to  make  his  face,  chest  and 
limbs,  except  the  left  thigh,  appear  precisely  like  a  skeleton  covered 
with  a  thin  skin.  He  had  a  severe  cough,  and  was  expectorating  freely, 
and  had  hectic  fever,  night  sweats,  and  diarrhoea,  with  irregular  vacil- 
lating pain  in  the  chest  and  stomach,  which  was  much  increased  by  the 
little  food  he  was  able  to  swallow  ;  and  he  was  now,  and  had  been  for 
the  last  two  months,  so  feeble  as  to  be  unable  to  move  his  head,  body, 
or  limbs,  excepting  only  feeble  motions  of  his  arms.  Three  physicians 
had  prescribed  for  him,  at  difll-rent  times,  without  apparent  benefit. 
Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  His  health,  in  a  few  days,  began 
slowly  to  improve,  and  the  quantity  of  matter  discharged  from  the  ab- 
scess gradually  became  less,  and  his  cough,  expectoration,  fever,  night 
sweats,  and  diarrhoea  gradually  disappeared,  and  his  strength  improved. 
In  May  following,  the  discharge  from  the  abscess  was  reduced  to  a  tea- 
spoon full  in  twenty-four  hours,  and  the  lumbar  vertebrae  had  resumed 
their  natural  situation,  in  a  line  with  the  dorsal ;  and  the  enlargement  of 


162 

the  abdomen  had  disappeared ;  and  on  the  first  of  August  he  was  able 
to  walk. 

There  was  in  this  case  a  Joss  of  bony  substance  in  the  dorsal  verte- 
brae, by  the  ulceration,  and  the  matter  formed  by  it  passed  down  along 
the  facia  of  the  psoas  muscle,  and  through  the  groin  into  the  upper  part 
of  the  thigh  and  produced  the  swelling  or  abscess  there.  There  was 
also  a  loss  of  bony  substance  by  ulceration  on  the  left  side  of  all  the 
lumbar  vertebrae,  and  the  matter  discharged  from  these  produced  the 
lumbar  abscess,  and  these  losses  of  bony  substance  was  the  cause  of  the 
distortion  of  the  dorsal,  and  of  the  obliquity  of  all  the  lumbar  vertebrae. 


EXPLANATIOX  OF  THE  SUBJOINED  CUPS. 

Fig.  1  represents  the  case  of  Master  J.  S.,  as  it  was  when  I  first  saw 
it  in  October,  1832.  A,  lumbar  abscess,  with  four  openings,  from 
which  matter  issued.  B,  psoas  abscess,  situated  in  the  upper  and  inner 
part  of  the  left  thigh.  CC,  abdomen  distended  by  tuberculated  intes- 
tines and  mesentery.  DD,  line  of  cervical  glands,  tuberculated  on  both 
sides  of  the  neck.     See  the  description  of  it,  page  91. 

Fig.  2  represents  the  same  case  as  it  was  when  published  in  June, 
18.34,  and  as  it  now  is.  The  distortion  of  the  ninth  dorsal  vertebrae 
backward,  will  be  seen  as  in  Fig.  1,  and  the  tenth  dorsal  fallen  down  on 
its  side,  or  nearly  so  ;  and  it  would  be  difficult  to  tell,  according  to  Mr 
Sanson's  views  of  such  accidents,  where  that  portion  of  the  spinal  mar- 
row is,  that  omie  passed  through  its  centre. 

Caries  of  the  vertebrae  is  the  consequence  of  tubercula,  or  white  swel- 
ling of  the  vertebrae. 

The  disease  it  will  be  seen  by  an  examination  of  the  preceding  cases, 
is  easily  distinguished  by  the  new  and  natural  symptoms  in  any  of  its 
stages,  and  easily  cured  by  the  natural  remedies,  and  as  a  knowledge  of 
these  facts  is  of  great  importance  to  the  community,  I  shall  give  copious 
extracts  from  a  lecture  on  caries  of  the  vertebrae,  by  M.  Sanson,  of  the 
Hotel  Dieu,  who  is  one  of  the  most  distinguished  surgeons  in  Europe, 
and  was  delivered  before  one  of  the  most  learned,  and  most  numerous 
forums  in  the  world,  for  the  purpose  of  showing  the  great  difficulty  in 
distinguishing  tubercula  or  scrofula,  in  this,  as  well  as  other  parts  of  the 
body,  by  the  common  symptoms,  and  the  common  erroneous  views  of 
the  disease,  with   the  absolute  uselessness  of  the  common  treatment 

for  it. 

M.  Sanson  was  a  candidate  for  the  vacant  medical  chair  in  the  univer- 
sity of  Paris,  occasioned  by  the  death  of  Baron  Boyer,  and  this  lecture 
was  a  trial  of  his  learning  and  skill,  in  an  immense  amphitheatre,  before 


163 


the  faculty  of  medicine,  who  were  his  judges,  and  more  than  2500  stu- 
dents, and  has  been  published  and  lauded  in  the  medical  journals  of 
Europe  and  this  country,  and  is  consequently  generally  esteemed  the 
very  best  authority  on  the  subjects  of  which  it  treats 


1.  Lecture  l-f  M.  Sanson  at  the  Concours  of  Paris,  in  June,  1834. — 
The  two  patients  who  fell  to  the  lot  of  M.  Sanson,  were  placed  at  No.  19,  Salle  St 
Martha,  and  No.  12,  Salle  St.  Jeane,  Hotel  Dieu,  and  afforded  subjects  for  the  follow- 
ing lecture : — 

First  Patient. — Caries  of  Lumber  Vertebr.s:. 

Gentlemen:  The  first  is  a  child  eight  years  of  age,  of  a  lymphatic  temperament; 
his  skin  is  fine  and  white,  the  abdomen  nduch  developed  ;  the  hair  light  coloured  ;  in  a 
word,  he  presents  the  characteristics  of  what  may  be  called  a  scrofulous  beauty.  The 
family  of  this  child  is,  according  to  all  accounts,  healthy,  and  he  himself  has  enjoyed  a 
good  state  of  health  until  within  eight  months  of  the  present  time.  At  that  period  the 
patient  first  experienced  some  pain  in  the  region  of  the  loins,  which  remained  for  some 
time,  I  cannot  tell  exactly  how  long,  as  the  answers  of  the  child  were  not  very  precise 
on  this  point;  the  pains  were  not  accompanied  by  any  feebleness  of  the  lower  extremities, 
or  symptoms  of  any  organic  affection.  After  a  few  months  a  tumor  made  its  appearance 
at  the  upper  part  of  the  thigh,  and  was  at  first  accompanied  by  pulsations,  which  have 
since  disappeared.  The  swelling  gradually  increased  in  size,  and  is  now  as  large  as  two 
fists.  When  examined  by  the  hand,  there  is  an  evident  feeling  of  fluctuation,  and  its 
volume  is  influenced  by  the  position  in  which  the  patient  may  be  placed.  Thus,  when 
the  child  lies  down  on  his  back,  the  tumor  becomes  less  tense  than  in  the  upright  pos- 
ture, and  if  we  press  the  hand  flat  on  the  thigh,  the  contents  are  displaced,  and  ascend 
into  the  illiac  fossa  ;  hence  we  may  conclude  the  existence  of  a  large  cavity,  filled  with 
a  liquid  matter.  I  should  remark  that  the  skin  is  not  adherent  to  the  surface  of  the 
tumor,  but  is  moveable  on  all  points  of  it.  The  child,  as  was  before  remarked,  seems  to 
enjoy  still  a  good  state  of  health  ;  he  is  not  affected  with  diarrhoea  or  sweating  ;  his  appe- 
tite is  good  ;  sleeps  sound  ;  he  walks  without  experiencing  inconvenience,  and  the 
affection  is  as  yet  completely  local.  The  sister  of  the  ward  says  he  has  coughed  for  the 
last  three  months  ;  this  led  me  to  examine  carefully  the  state  of  the  chest ;  on  ausculta- 
tion we  Could  not  discover  any  symptoms  of  the  presence  of  any  tubercles  in  the  lungs ; 
the  respiration,  on  the  contrary,  was  healthy  ;  there  was  no  matity  upon  percussion  at 
any  point  of  the  thorax  ;  the  onlyabnormalsound  was  some  mucous  rale,  indicating  a 
chronic  catarrh,  but  this  was  slight,  and  the  expectoration  was  by  no  means  abundant. 

What,  we  ask,  is  the  nature  of  the  disease  under  which  our  patient  labours  .'  It  may 
be  laid  down,  as  a  general  rule,  that  when  you  have  a  tumor  presenting  itself  a(  the 
upper  part  of  the  thigh,  after  a  continuance  of  lumber  or  dorsal  pains,  the  existence  of 
caries  of  the  vertebral  column  is  very  probable.  The  diagnosis  is  sometimes,  however^ 
accompanied  with  difficulties  ;  in  the  present  case,  indeed,  we  are  assisted  by  a  leading 
symptom,  for  we  have  a  slight  s;ibbosity of  the  lumber  vertebra,  and  hence  we  are  jus- 
tified in  concluding  that  the  vertebral  column  is  affected  ;  we  should,  however,  in  all 
cases,  wa  i  for  the  formation  of  an  abscess,  before  we  give  a  decided  opinion,  because  in 


164  • 

many  circumstances,  as  fn  the  case  of  a  fall  on  the  loins,  accidental  Injury,  &c.,  we  have 
often  the  symptoms  of  vertebral  disease,  although  no  caries  exist.  But  our  patient  was 
not  affected  by  any  accident  of  this  kind,  and  tlie  pains  commenced  without  any  appre- 
ciable cause. 

Let  us  begin  by  endeavouring  to  determine  the  origin  of  the  disease  in  the  present 
instance.  Rachitis  is  a  very  frequent  cause  of  softening  of  the  vertebral  column,  and 
this  often  produces  the  angular  curvature  ;  so  much  so,  that  many  practitioners  rej;drd 
the  angular  curvature  as  a  characteristic  of  rachitis,  hence  much  doubt  on  the  origin  of 
the  affection  must  exist,  until  caries  has  actually  set  in.  But  we  have  to  remember  that 
rachitis  has  a  set  of  symptoms  by  which  it  is  distinguished  ;  it  is  a  general  constitutional 
disease,  not  a  local  one  ;  rachitic  children  ore  feeble,  and  mostly  sunk  in  a  state  of 
abatement  and  depression  of  spirits  ;  thej"  exhibit  an  indifference  to  what  passes  about 
them,  while,  at  the  same  time,  there  is  a  precocity  of  mental  powers,  which  is  very 
remarkable  ;  the  gastric  organs  are  usually  affected  in  this  disease  ;  the  mesenteric 
glands  are  engorged  ;  the  child  has  often  diarrhoea,  with  a  slow  fever,  or  an  acceleration 
of  the  pulse  towards  evening,  he  is  pale,  the  lower  jaw  projects,  and  he  gradually  gets 
thin  and  pines  away.  Now  we  remark  none  of  these  symptoms  in  our  patient ;  his 
health  has  been  good,  and  we  have,  besides,  another  proof  that  his  affection  does  not 
derive  its  origin  from  rachitis,  besides  we  find  the  characteristic  signs  of  an  abscess  by 
congestion.  We  have,  therefore,  in  the  present  case,  a  formation  of  pus  in  the  cellular 
sheath  surrounding  the  lumbar  nerves,  or  psoas  muscles,  and  passing  down  as  far  as  the 
thigh,  where  it  presents  itself;  this  matter  is  of  an  inflammatory  origin.  He  first  had 
pain  in  the  part  for  a  considerable  period,  and  then  the  formation  of  pus  which  is  now 
making  its  way  to  the  exterior  along  the  sheath  of  the  muscles  ;  the  disease,  in  a  word, 
is  caries  of  the  vertebral  column,  withabscessby  congestion. 

But  we  do  not  find  here  the  symptoms  which  most  commonly  accompany  caries  of  the 
spine.  In  most  cases  the  disease  commences  by  vague  pains  in  some  one  point  of  the 
vertebral  column  ;  these  become  worse,  and  the  patient  soon  experiences  some  difficulty 
or  loss  in  the  power  of  the  locomotive  system.  Thus,  if  the  disease  commence  in  the 
lumbar  region,  the  curve  of  the  spinal  column  begins  there,  and  the  patient's  movements 
are  embarrassed  in  consequence  of  the  influence  which  the  change  of  form  exercises  on 
the  action  of  the  nerves  ;  the  general  position  of  the  patient  is  very  characteristic  of  the 
affection  under  which  he  suffers  ;  the  head  and  neck  are  thrown  back,  and  the  legs  are 
bent  in  such  a  way  as  to  produce  a  most  uneasy  position.  If  j^ou  remark  the  child  when 
he  walks  there  is  no  action  of  the  thighs,  he  seems  to  walk  merely  with  the  lower  leg. 
When  the  bodies  of  several  vertebrae  are  engaged  in  the  disease,  the  spinal  marrow  may 
be  pressed  on  in  a  moderate  manner,  ai.d  certain  symptoms,  as  subsultus  tendinum  or  con- 
vulsive movements  of  the  muscles  indicate  this  complication  ;  the  patient  feels  a  weak- 
ness of  the  lower  extremities  ;  if  he  sit  down  or  attempt  to  lift  any  thing  from  the 
ground,  he  is  compelled  to  bend  the  limbs  gradually,  and  dip  down  with  a  slow  motion. 
The  child  whom  we  had  to  examine,  did  not  present  any  of  these  accidents ;  he  walked 
well,  as  has  been  remarked,  and  did  not  show  any  impediment  of  motion. 

Whence  arises  this  exception  from  the  accidents  usually  accompanying  caries  of  the 
spine  ?  The  reason  is  that  he  has  several  of  the  bodies  of  the  vertebrae  affected  at 
the  same  time  ;  when  only  one  is  diseased,  the  curvature  which  results  is  angular,  and 
the  pressure  exercised  on  the  spinal  marrow  is  consequently  more  sudden  and  violent, 
giving  rise  to  convulsions,  paralysis,  or  retraction  of  the  limbs.  The  compression  of  the 
spinal  marrow  is  not  the  only  cause  of  the  disorders  which  we  sometimes  witness  in  the 
organs  of  locomotion  ;  inflammation  may  come  in  as  an  accessary  cause,  extending  from 
the  bodies  of  the  affected  vertebra;  to  the  membranes,  and  from  the  latter  to  the  spinal 
marrow  itself.     We  have,  therefore,  in  the  present  case,  caries  of  the  vertebrae,  and 


105 

abscess  by  congestion.  The  caries  occupy  many  vertebrae  together  ;  for  if  we  examine 
the  state  of  the  spinal  column  we  find  a  gradual  bend,  quite  different  from  the  sudden 
angular  curvature  when  one  vertebrae  only  is  diseased  ;  and  this  circumstance  fully 
explains  the  little  or  no  ■UtBculty  of  motion  which  our  patient  experiences,  liis  upright 
posture  in  walking,  and  the  freedom  from  all  unpleasant  or  dangerous  accidents. 

Tlie  question  now  arises,  what  is  the  cause  of  the  disease  in  the  present  case  ?  The 
exciting  causes  of  caries  of  the  vertebral  column  are  in  general  difficult  to  discover.  Our 
patient's  father  is  a  tailor,  and  his  children  have  bpen  accustomed  to  spend  tl:cir  time  in 
a  low,  ill-ventilated  shop.  This  maj'  be  the  origin  of  the  scrofulous  affection  under 
which  he  now  suffers,  and  although  the  cause  is  not  very  well  marked,  yet  the  bad 
habit  of  body,  contracted  by  livir.g  in  an  unwholesome  place,  is  sufficient  to  excite  the 
disease. 

In  what  state  is  the  vertebral  column  .' 

The  affection  sometimes  commences  in  the  bodies  of  the  vertebrae,  and  then  we  have 
them  only  inflamed.  If  it  persist  for  some  time,  the  weight  of  the  body  begins  to  act 
on  the  altered  and  softened  bone,  breaks  it  down,  and  a  curvature,  more  or  less  proini- 
nent,  is  the  consequence.  But  in  our  patient  we  have  not  only  inflammation  of  the  bone 
but  suppuration  aho.  The  disease  is  not  confined  to  a  simple  ramollissement ;  the  sponsy 
tissue  of  the  bones  has  become  fungous,  purulent  matter  is  secreted  by  them,  and  a  large 
cavity  exists,  filled  with  that  fluid.  If  we  had  an  opportunity  of  examining  the  state  of 
the  parts  which  transmit  the  pus  from  the  seat  of  the  disease  to  the  exterior,  we  should 
find  a  long  channel,  hallowed  out  through  the  cellular  sheath  surrounding  the  muscles  ; 
the  channel  is  lined  throughout  by  a  membrane  which  constantly  secretes  pus,  and  is 
called  by  surgeons  puro-generative  (puro-gcnie.)  In  its  structure  it  resembles  some- 
what that  of  the  mucous  membranes. 

How  does  the  disease  terminate  .'  (Here  M.  Sanson  entered  into  an  extensive  exami- 
nation of  the  different  ways  in  which  caries  of  the  spine  may  end,  and  of  which  we  need 
give  but  a  very  faint  outline.)  The  affection  in  the  first  place  may  go  on  and  become 
daily  worse  ;  the  inflammation  extends  to  the  membranes  of  the  spinal  marrow,  and  to  the 
medullary  substance  itself;  we  have  then  the  developement  of  a  new  set  of  symptoms  ; 
motion  becomes  irregular  and  interrupted,  and  paralysis  is  finally  established.  The 
patient  is  now  confined  altogether  to  bed,  his  health  is  completely  destroyed,  the  long- 
continued  pressure  brings  on  gangrene  of  the  buttocks,  &c.,  and  death  ensues.  In  many 
cases,  however,  the  purulent  collection  opens  by  a  small  abscess  in  the  thigh ;  the 
opening  is  often  very  minute,  but  this  does  not  prevent  the  entrance  of  atmospheric  air 
into  the  cavity.  The  patient  soon  presents  severe  typhoid  symptoms,  from  the  dege- 
nerescence  of  the  purulent  contents  of  the  abscess  ;  his  lungs  are  attacked,  and  oa 
examination,  we  find  tubercles,  which,  perhaps,  we  did  not  before  suspect  or  discover  ; 
diarrhoea  now  sets  in,  and  he  soon  sinks  in  a  state  of  exhaustion. In  other  more  favorable 
cases  the  termination  is  of  a  different  character.  The  tissues  surrounding  the  disea-sed 
and  carious  vertebras  furnish  a  bony  matter,  and  the  destruction  of  the  hard  parts  is  in 
some  degree  repaired  ;  the  pus  becomes  concentrated  and  dries,  the  abscess  contracts, 
and  its  sheath  is  gradually  changed  into  a  kind  of  canal,  which  no  longer  secretes  puri- 
form  matter,  and  is  at  length  totally  healed,  or  the  abscess  may  open  externally,  and 
terminate  like  any  other  abscess  in  a  different  part  of  the  body  ;  however,  in  most  cases, 
where  the  abscess  thus  opens  spontaneously,  it  becomes  fistulous,  or  the  patient  dies. 

Let  us  row  consider  the  treatment  which  should  be  adopted  in  the  present  case.  If 
we  look  to  the  general  health  of  our  patient,  we  find  it  very  favorable ;  his  constitution 
is  good,  there  is  little  or  no  pain,  and  we  may  say  that  he  is  in  a  promising  state,  and  that 
the  affection  under  which  he  labours  is  as  simple  as  it  is  capable  of  being.  He  has,  in 
fact,  no  fever  of  any  kind,  he  does  not  suffer  from  diarrhoea  or  hectic  perspirations,  and 


166 

there  are  no  symptoms  of  constitutional  derangement.  The  pain  in  the  lumbar  region 
has  considerably  diminished,  and  the  abscess  has  not  yet  opened  externally.  There  are, 
however,  on  the  other  hand,  some  unfavourable  conditions  in  the  present  case  ;  thus, 
for  example,  if  the  extent  of  the  caries,  by  destroying  several  of  the  bodies  of  the  ver- 
tcbrse,  has  llie  effect  of  preventing  any  injurious  pressure  on  the  spinal  marrow,  yet  a 
jp-eater  quantity  of  osseous  tissue  is  necessarily  affected,  and  the  labour  of  regeneration 
^viil  be  more  difficult  or  uncertain  ;  and  again,  although,  on  examination  of  the  chest,  we 
found  no  sigi;s  of  the  existence  of  tubercles,  yet,  from  the  cliild's  general  appearance 
and  temperament,  we  may  fear  their  formation  at  a  subsequent  period.  Hence  the 
prognosis  in  the  present  case  must  be  guarded,  and  the  chances  of  a  cure  are  perhaps, 
less  numerous  than  those  of  a  fatal  termination. 

Sometimes  the  caries  of  the  vertebral  column  is  superficial,  and  we  may  attack  it  with 
a  reasonable  hope  of  attaining  a  successful  result ;  but  not  so  in  the  case  of  our  patient 
The  disease  has  already  existed  for  too  long  a  time,  and  the  lesion  is  too  profound.  What 
then  are  we  to  do  .'  It  may  be  remarked,  in  the  first  place,  and  as  a  principle  of  treat- 
ment, that  the  affection  is  originally  an  inflammatory  one,  and  hence  the  antiphlogistic 
treatment  should  form  the  principle  we  ought  to  have  in  view.  When  I  mention 
antiphlogistic  treatment,  I  do  not  refer  exclusively  to  bloodletting  and  debilitating  mea- 
sures ;  these  only  form  a  part  of  it,  regarded  as  a  whole.  I  allude  to  another  and  an 
important  branch,  viz.,  the  revulsive  part,  which  is  included  in  the  term  antiphlogistic 
treatment,  and  not  to  the  sanguineous,  which,  in  most  cases,  is  not  to  be  thought  of 

The  first  means  I  would  employ  is  the  moxa ;  this  is  a  most  powerful  and  efficacious 
external  irritant,  and  we  may  apply  it  over  various  points  of  the  spine,  so  as  to  multiply 
the  foci  of  irritation,  according  to  the  method  recommended  by  Baron  Larrey  ;  he  has 
often  placed  thirty  or  forty  moxje  along  the  spine,  and  this  application  has  been  attended 
with  very  remarkable  success. 

At  the  same  time  that  we  attack  the  disease  by  local  measures,  we  should  not  neglect 
general  constitutional  treatment.  Our  first  and  principal  object  should  be  to  correct  the 
scrofulous  temperament,  which  is  strongly  marked  in  the  patient ;  this  is  to  be  done  by 
the  treatment  with  which  everj*  one  is  familiar  ;  the  child  should  have  good,  nourishing, 
easily  digested  food  ;  he  should  live  in  a  wholesome  atmosphere,  exposed  to  a  fresh 
healthy  air ;  be  should  take  gentle  and  constant  exercbe,  &c.,  and  we  may  aid  these 
means  by  the  administration  of  bitters,  if  indicated. 


Here  M.  Sanson  entered  into  the  different  modes  of  treating  the  ab- 
scess, which  is  unimportant,  and  unnecessary  to  notice,  and  then  passed 
to  the  consideration  of  his  second  patient,  with  lymphatic  engorgement 
of  the  breast,  which  I  propose  to  notice  at  a  future  period. 

It  will  bf>  observed,  that  after  de.scribing  the  common  symptoms  in 
this  case,  M.  Sanson  asks,  "  what  is  the  nature  of  the  disease  .'  and  after 
observing  that  "  the  diagnosis  is  sometimes  accompanied  with  difficulties," 
acknowle'Iges  that  "  in  the  present  case"  he  is  "  assisted  by  a  leading 
symptom,  a  slight  gibbosity  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae."  It  excited,  how- 
ever, so  little  attention,  in  his  examination  of  the  case,  that  he  forgot 
to  mention  it  in  his  description  of  the  sj-mptoms. 

The  nature  of  this  gibbosity,  or  swelling,  and  the  sympathies  excited 
by  it,  could  not,  therefore,  have  been  known  to  the  learned  author  of  this 
lecture,  for  in  such  case,  the  natural  associations  of  his  mind  would  have 
13 


,  167 

led  him  to  a  critical   examination  of  it,  and  of  the  cervical  and  sub- 
maxillary glands,  which  he  would  have  found  tuberculated. 

These  swellings  of  the  vertebrae  and  tuberculated  glands,  may  always 
be  found  in  the  first  stage  of  the  disease,  as  well  as  the  last,  and  should 
always  be  decisive  of  its  nature,  and  consequently  we  never  should  do 
as  he  says,  "  wait  for  the  formation  of  an  abscess,  before  we  give  a  de- 
cided opinion,"  but  on  the  contrary,  we  should  commence  our  treatment 
immediately,  to  remove  the  disease  in  the  first  stage,  and  prevent  the 
formation  of  caries  and  abscess,  and  their  deplorable  consequences. 

He  labours  to  show  that  caries  of  the  spine  has  an  inflammatory  origin 
— tells  us  that  it  is  different  from  rachitis,  (rickets)  because,  in  this  case, 
"we  find  the  characteristic  signs  of  an  abscess  b}''  congestion," — tells  us, 
also,  of  "  the  bodies  of  the  vertebrae"  being  "  inflamed" — that  "  in  this 
case,  we  have  not  only  inflammation  of  the  bone,  but  suppuration  also" 
— that  "  this  matter  has  an  inflammatory  origin,"  and  repeats  again  and 
again,  that  the  abscess,  "  is  an  abscess  by  congestion." 

In  replying  to  these  vagaries,  (for  such  they  really  are,J  it  may  be 
useful  to  observe,  that  in  this  disease,  we  rarely  see  two  cases  precisely 
alike,  and  that  the  common  symptoms,  are  always  varied  according  to 
the  different  parts,  situation,  and  number  of  the  vertebrse  affected,  and 
by  its  almost  constant  complication  in  some  of  its  stages,  with  tubercula 
of  other  parts  of  the  system,  and  that  the  idea  of  the  abscess  being  "an 
abscess  by  congestion,"  or  inflammation,  and  the  vertebrae,  or  "  bones," 
being  "  inflamed,"  or  in  a  state  of  inflammation,  and  that  "  the  affection 
is  originally  an  inflammatory  one,"  is  all  visionary  theory,  and  the  old 
visionary  theory  too,  of  the  schools  which  was  never  favoured  with  the 
evidence  of  its  real  existence  in  chronic  diseases. 

The  abortive  attempt  of  M.  Sanson  to  show  a  distinction  between  the 
disease  in  this  case  and  rickets,  will  be  seen  on  comparing  it  with  the 
case  of  Master  J.  S.,  who,  besides  an  abscess  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
thigh  from  caries  of  the  vertebrae,  as  in  this  case,  had  also  the  common 
symptoms  of  rickets,  or  those  given  as  such  by  M.  Sanson,  at  the  same 
time,  which  demonstrates  their  unity  ;  and  yet  Mr.  Sanson  describes  the 
same  symptoms,  to  show  they  are  different  diseases.  His  description 
of  the  common  symptoms  of  both,  is  consequently  lame,  confused,  irre- 
gular and  unnatural.  There  are  really,  therefore,  no  such  diseases  as 
are  here  described  by  M.  Sanson,  as  nature  is  necessarily  uniform  in  all 
her  works. 

His  treatment,  it  will  be  seen,  corresponds  with  his  theory.  It  is  "  the 
antiphlogistic,"  or  debilitating  treatment,  "  in  which  bleeding  forms  a 
part,"  and  the  same  that  is  pursued  in  chronic  diseases  of  the  organs  and 
limbs.  It  is  founded  on  a  theory  that  was  formed,  like  many  others, 
with  a  very  superficial  knowledge  of  the  construction  of  the  ele'.iientary 


US 

organs,  and  of  the  motions  of  the  elementary  and  compound  organs,  and 
without  the  least  knowledge  of  the  causes  of  these  motions,  or  of  the 
s;reat  sympathetic  motions  by  which  these  are  regulated  and  sustained, 
or  of  the  natural  remedies  founded  on  a  knowledge  of  these  causes  and 
motions — a  theory  which  has  consigned  its  millions  to  a  premature  grave. 
And  the  few  that  nature  has  been  able  to  sustain  arainst  the  combined 
influence  of  the  disease,  and  this  treatment,  may  be  seen  in  our  towns 
and  cities, — some  pale,  sallow,  feeble,  and- emaciated,  and  others  with 
distortions  of  the  spine,  and  tuberculated  and  amputated  limbs,  and  who 
have  long  been  perpetual  monuments  of  its  folly.  Hence  the  cause  of 
the  grave  scepticisms  of  some,  and  the  ridicule  of  others,  in  regard  to  the 
real  usefulness,  or  great  importance  of  the  medical  art, — of  the  great 
number  of  nostrums  for  these  diseases, — of  the  mazes  of  Doct.  Philip,* — 
the  visions  of  Prince  Hoenlohe,  and  of  the  very  learned  theory,  and  very 
scientific  atomic,  or  seventy-thousandth-part-of-a-grain-practice,  of  the 
great  German  professor. 

The  cases  before  noticed  of  Master  J.  M.  S.  and  Mr.  W.,  like  that  of 
M.  Sanson's,  commenced  with  a  small  gibbosity  of  the  vertebrae,  and 
both  would  have  terminated,  like  his,  in  caries  and  abscess,  under  the 
common  treatment,  or  that  recommended  by  M.  Sanson.  The  case  also 
before  noticed,  of  Master  J.  S.,  was  so  much  worse  than  that  of  M. 
Sanson's,  as  hardly  to  admit  of  a  comparison,  and  yet  he  is  preparing  him- 
self for  a  public  teacher,  Avhile  M.  Sanson  acknowledges,  that  the"  lesion," 
in  the  case  of  his  patient,  although  so  comparatively  trifling,  is  from  his 
knowledge  of  the  dependence  that  can  placed  on  the  common  treatment, 
"  too  profound"  to  give  "  a  reasonable  hope  of  attaining  a  successful 
result." 

The  disease,  in  the  case  of  Master  J.  S.,  after  it  commenced  in  the 
dorsal,  was  gradually  extended  to  the  lumbar  vertebrae.  An  abscess  was 
formed  in  the  upper  part  of  the  thigh,  and  on  the  back,  by  the  matter 
discharged  from  the  carious  bones;  and  the  disease  propagated  to  other 
organs.  And  with  caries  and  distortion  of  the  ninth  dorsal  ;  and  caries 
and  obliquity  of  the  last  dorsals,  and  all  the  lumbar  vertebrjE — with  tu- 
berculated, stomach,  intestines  and  mesentery;  and  tuberculated  and 
ulcerated  lungs — with  the  motions  of  his  body  and  limbs  paralized,  and 
his  legs  flexed,  in  right  and  obtuse  angles,  from  compression  of  the  spi- 
nal marrow ;  combined  with  great  precocity  of  intellect,  hectic  fever, 
night  sweats,  diarrhoea,  and  a  frightful  marasmus ;  presented  the  most 
appalling  effects  of  this  disease,  and  of  the  common  remedies. 

Under  the   use  of  the  natural  remedies,  the  further  progress  of  the 

•  Dr.  Philip  imagined  he  could  distinguish  chronic  diseases  of  the  different  orgmj 
by  the  pulse. 


169 

disease  was  stayed — the  tuberculations  reduced,  and  the  work  of  re-for- 
mation commenced,  to  replace  the  great  loss  of  substance  ;  and  he  slowly, 
but  gradually,  arose  from  his  most  deplorable  position,  and  stood  erect, 
and  remains,  like  many  similar  cases,  a  monument  of  the  value  of  the 
simple  and  natural  remedies,  indicated  by  the  really  simple  nature  of  the 
disease,  and  of  the  futile  nature  and  folly  of  the  common  treatment. 

Acute  or  intlammatory  diseases,  requiring  the  antiphlogistic  treatment, 
run  through  their  course,  and  terminate  in  a  few  days  or  weeks  ;  but 
contra,  or  chronic  diseases,  are  slow  in  their  progress,  and  continue  many 
weeks  or  months,  and  sometimes  years,  before  their  termination,  and  re- 
quire a  treatment  entirely  different,  as  every  body  knows,  except  physi- 
cians, who,  in  spite  of  the  every  day  evidences  of  their  own  senses,  still 
adhere  scientifically,  to  the  old  unscientific  theory  and  practice  of  the 
schools. 

This  case,  and  lecture,  are  is  full  of  instruction,  and  it  should  never  be 
forgotten,  that  the  reason  which  induced  M.  Sanson  to  advise  to  wait  for 
the  formation  of  an  abscess,  before  Me  give  a  decided  opinion  in  such 
cases,  is  the  consequence  of  the  great  difficulty  in  distinguishing  chronic 
diseases  in  their  early  stages  by  the  common  symptoms.  The  deplorable 
consequences,  resulting  from  this  necessity,  must  be  apparent  to  all,  for 
instead  of  attacking  and  reducing  the  disease  in  the  first  stage,  when 
affecting  the  spine,  organs,  or  limbs,  we  must  wait  many  weeks  or 
months,  and  sometimes  years,  for  the  formation  of  an  abscess,  before  we 
can,  by  the  common  symptoms,  "  give  a  decided  opinion,"  or  commence 
the  proper  treatment ;  or  until  the  disease  is  so  far  advanced,  as  to  pre- 
clude, in  a  great  majority  of  cases,  "  a  reasonable  hope  of  attaining  a 
successful  result." 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  NECK. 

King'^s  Evil. 

Master  John  Watson,  of  the  City  of  New  York,  aged  eighteen  years. 
He  had  large  tubercles  on  both  sides  of  his  neck,  and  in  the  last  part  of 
November,  1S38,  a  general  swelling  commenced  over  them,  and  gradually 
increased  to  December  19th  of  the  same  year,  when  they  had  become 
very  large.  He  then  commenced  the  use  of  the  magnetic  remedies. 
Matter  was  formed  in  the  swelling  on  the  left  side,  which  broke  and  dis- 
charged scrofulous  matter  six  or  seven  weeks.  The  abscesses  then 
healed,  and  the  swelling  with  that  on  the  right  side  of  the  neck,  entirely 
disappeared  in  about  six  months  Irom  the  time  he  commenced  the  use  of 
the  remedies.  His  health  was  then  re-established,  and  has  continued 
good  to  this  time.     Sept.  1,  1840. 


CHAPTER   IX, 


TUBERCULA    OF    THE    JOINTS    AND    LIMBS. 


In  consequence  of  there  being  no  generally  known  remedy  for  tubercula, 
it  is  the  practice  in  this  country,  and  in  Europe,  and  in  the  hospital  and 
country  practice,  to  amputate  or  cut  off  the  limbs  in  cases  of  tubercuky 
or  white  swellings  of  the  joints  or  limbs,  whenever  the  disease  is  sup- 
posed to  have  advanced  so  far  as  to  endanger  life.  The  relief  in  such 
case  is,  however,  generally  very  temporary,  as  the  disease  is  commonly 
soon  developed  in  another  joint,  limb,  or  organ,  and  such  patients  con- 
sequently receive,  from  such  severe  operations,  but  a  brief  immunity 
from  pain  and  death.  In  the  case  given  of  Mr.  J.  S.,  of  Preble  county, 
the  thigh  was  amputated  for  a  white  swelling  of  the  right  knee ;  but  the 
disease  soon  after  attacked  him  in  the  left  hip,  and  then  in  the  left  foot, 
when  that  of  the  hip  became  passive.  If,  in  this  case,  the  left  leg,  like 
the  thigh  of  the  right  side,  had  been  amputated  on  account  of  the  disease 
in  the  foot,  according  to  the  conimon  practice,  the  disease  in  the  hip 
would  have  quickly  become  active,  and  Mr.  J.  S.  soon  numbered  with 
the  dead. 

This  case,  with  that  of  Miss  M.  G.,  of  Springfield,  with  acute  white 
swelling  of  the  heel ;  and  Master  W.  L.,  of  Madison,  with  the  disease 
in  all  the  limbs  and  many  of  the  joints,  with  a  great  variety  of  similar 
cases,  show  what  is  effected  by  the  natural  remedies,  without  amputa- 
tion.    And  I  may  here  remark,  that  on  examining  the  cases  of  amputa- 


171 

tion  for  tubercula  of  the  joints  and  limbs,  reported  in  the  London  Medico- 
Chiriirgical  Review,  during  the  last  ten  years,  and  including  those  that 
are  called  by  different  names,  but  really  the  same  disease,  there  can  be 
little  or  no  doubt,  but  at  least  three-fourths  of  the  number  would  have 
been  rendered  unnecessary,  if  the  use  of  these  remedies  had  been  com- 
menced, even  at  as  late  a  period  as  that  in  which  the  operations  were 
performed.  And  this  opinion  is  hazarded  with  the  full  knowledo-e  of 
the  fact,  that  these  reports  were  prmcipall}' from  the  Hospitals  of  London 
and  Paris,  and  that  these  operations  were  performed  by,  or  with  the  ad- 
vice of  physicians  and  surgeons,  who  rank  among  the  first  members  of 
our  profession.  The  tuberculous  or  scrofulous  diathesis  or  taint,  is 
destroyed  by  the  natural  remedies,  but  remains  in  the  system  after  these 
operations,  and  the  disease  is  propagated  to  other  organs  and  limbs. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  LEFT  KIsEE,  STOMACH,  AND  LEFT  LUNG. 

White  Swelling,  Dyspepsia  and  Consumption. 

t 

Master  Alexander  Benedict,  of  light  complexion,  aged  15  years,  came 
into  my  office  on  crutches,  in  June,  1837,  accompanied  by  his  father. 
On  examining  the  son,  I  found  he  had  a  white  swelling  of  the  left  knee, 
and  tuberculated  stomach  and  left  lung.  The  disease  commenced  in  the 
knee  about  five  years  before,  and  progressed  gradually  under  the  treat- 
ment of  the  best  physicians  and  surgeons  of  this  city,  until  February, 
1837,  when  the  disease  commenced  in  the  lungs,  with  cough  and  expec- 
toration, which  still  continued,  and  he  was  then  pale,  feeble  and  ema- 
ciated. Prescribed  the  magnetic  remedies.  I  heard  no  more  from  the 
case  until  October  of  the  same  year,  when  he  called  at  my  office  with  his 
father  in  perfect  health.  The  white  swelling  of  the  knee,  with  the 
cough  and  expectoration,  had  entirely  disappeared,  and  he  had  gained  so 
much  flesh  and  strength  as  to  make  him  appear  in  as  good  health  as  that 
of  any  other  person,  and  his  health  has  continued  good  to  this  time. 

New  York,  June  8,  1840. 

I  have  read  the  above  description  of  the  case  of  my  son,  and  will  add  to  it  the  fact 

of  my  having  paid  to  the  best  physicians  and  surgeons  of  this  city,  about  a  thousand 

dollars  for  their  attendance  on  him,  and  that  they  had  given  up  the  case,  and  told  me 

that  he  could  not  be  cured,  but  must  die  ;  when  a  gentleman,  (Mr.  Baker)  advised  mn 

to  take  him  to  Dr.  Sherwood  ;  I  did  so,  and  got  him  cured  at  last,  as  stated  above,  for 

ten  dollars.* 

SAMUEL  BENEDICT, 

No.  2  Merchants  Exchange. 

•  I  have  had  a  great  number  of  similar  cases  which  have  terminated  in  tiie  same 
manner,  and  in  which  from  fifty  to  five  hundred  dollars  has  been  first  paid  to  other 
physicians  and  surgeons  for  their  attendance  upon  them. 


172 

ACUTE    TUBERCULA    OF    THE    ANKLE    JOINT — ACUTE    WHITE    SWELLING    OF 

THE  ANKLE  JOINT. 

Master  John  Lepine,  of  the  City  of  New  York,  aged  12  years.  He 
began  to  have  severe  pain  in  the  right  ankle  joint,  about  the  first  of  Jan- 
uary, 1840,  which  was  soon  followed  by  swelling,  and,  in  a  few  weeks, 
matter  was  formed  and  discharged  from  the  left  side  of  the  joint,  which 
matter  was  a  thin  sanies  mixed  with  cheesy  concretions.  He  was 
treated  by  a  physician  of  this  city  in  the  usual  manner,  until  the  18lh  of 
March,  without  any  other  effect  than  a  palliation  of  the  symptoms.  At 
this  period  he  commenced  the  use  of  the  magnetic  reniedies. 

Under  their  use  the  character  of  the  discharge  from  the  ankle  joint 
was  changed,  in  a  few  days,  from  a  thin  sanies  to  a  thick  yellow  matter, 
which  soon  began  to  decrease  in  quantity,  as  also  the  swelling,  and  in 
the  course  of  six  weeks  he  was  able  to  draw  on  his  boots  and  walk  about, 
and  has  continued  to  do  so  every  day  since  that  time.  I  saw  him  and 
examined  the  ankle  to-day  (June  8th) — the  swelling  and  pain  have  sub- 
sided, and  there  only  remains  a  very  slight  discharge  from  a  small  orifice 
in  the  skin,  which  will  be  closed  in  a  few  days. 

July  27th.  A  small  piece  of  bone  was  discharged  from  the  orifice  a 
few  days  after  the  above  date,  when  it  closed,  and  the  ankle  is  now  per- 
fectly well. 

I  have  received  many  letters  of  commendation  for  the  success  of  my 
practice  in  chronic  diseases,  and  cannot  well  resist  the  temptation  to  pub- 
lish the  following  from  a  lady  of  this  city,  who  is  anxious  to  add  her 
testimony  to  the  benefits  resulting  from  the  use  of  my  remedies. 


New  York,  Sept.  7,  1840. 
Dr.  Sherwood, 

Sir:  Having  been  informed  of  your  intention  to  publish  a  pamphlet,  containing  an 
account  of  cures  performed  by  your  magnetic  remedies,  I  deem  it  important  to  lay 
before  the  public  a  statement  of  your  success  in  the  case  of  my  son.  He  had  injured 
his  spine  by  a  fall  from  his  chair  about  two  years  previous  to  your  undertaking  the  cure 
of  him,  and  had  suffered  much  from  the  disease  which  ensued,  as  v/ell  as  from  the 
remedies  of  various  physicians,  with  no  material  benefit,  until  the  application  of  your 
remedies,  when  his  recovery  was  rapid,  and  he  is  now  in  the  enjoyment  of  perfect 
health. 

The  handsome  manner  in  which  you  so  disinterestedly  came  forward  to  the  assistance 
of  several  poor  people  in  our  neighbourhood,  particularly  in  your  successful  treatment 
of  an  aggravated  case  of  white  swelling  of  long  standing,  will  be  long  remembered  with 
gratitude,  and  must  establish  the  superiority  of  your  remedies  in  cases  of  the  above 
character.  Certain  that  to  your  exertion  I  am  indebted  for  the  life  of  my  child,  I  wish 
you  all  possible  success  in  the  heavenly  art  of  healing  the  sick. 

Respectfully  yours, 


173 


The  first  case  referred  to  by  this  lady,  was  that  of  a  white  swelling 
and  distortion  of  the  spine ;  and  the  last,  a  very  bad  case  of  white  swel- 
ling of  the  knee  of  a  young  lady  of  six  years  standing,  which  had  re- 
sisted both  the  hospital  and  private  practice. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  JOINTS  AND  LIMBS. 

Ulcers,  White  Swellings,  Abscesses,  and  Caries  of  the  Bones. 

Master  W.  L.,  of  Madison,  Butler  county,  Ohio,  aged  eleven  years.  I 
was  called  to  see  him,  May  29th,  1S33.  He  had  scrofulous  tubercles, 
and  a  scrofulous  ulcer  on  both  sides  of  his  neck,  a  white  swelling  of  the 
left  arm,  between  the  shoulder  and  elbow,  and  another  of  the  left  ankle. 
He  had  also  a  white  swelling  of  the  right  knee,  and  also  of  the  right 
ankle,  and  another  of  the  third  joint  of  the  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand. 
The  white  swelling  of  the  left  arm  was  discharging  scrofulous  matter 
from  abscesses  in  four  places,  and  that  of  the  left  ankle  in  two  places,  and 
that  of  the  right  ankle,  and  that  of  the  hand,  in  one  place  each. 

The  disease  commenced  about  a  year  and  a  half  before,  first  with  white 
swelling  of  the  right  knee,  and  the  other  swellings,  ulcers  and  abscesses 
gradually  appeared  as  the  disease  advanced.  He  was  now  confined  to  his 
bed  and  unable  to  walk,  was  feeble  and  emaciated,  entirely  deaf,  and  suf- 
fered much  from  pain,  mostly  at  this  time  in  both  ankles  and  the  left  leg. 
Prescribed  the  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  The  pain  in  his  limbs  began 
to  subside  in  a  few  days,  and  his  health  to  improve ;  a  piece  of  bone  two 
inches  long,  half  an  inch  wide,  and  three-eighths  of  an  inch  thick,  sepa- 
rated from  the  bone,  and  was  removed  from  the  left  arm.  The  white 
swellings  gradually  became  less,  and  in  six  weeks  he  was  able  to  walk 
about  in  the  fields.  The  swelling  of  the  thigh  terminated  in  abscess  ;  I 
opened  it,  and  it  discharged  about' three  gills  of  matter,  and  then  healed 
rapidly.  November  Isf,  1S33.  The  white  swellings  have  all  disappeared, 
and  the  abscess  and  ulcers  healed,  and  his  general  health  is  good. 

His  jaws  were  so  nearly  closed  as  to  only  admit  a  finger  between  them. 
All  the  teeth  on  the  under  jaw  of  the  left  side  came  out,  and  also  a  part 
the  jaw  bone,  the  whole  length  of  the  jaw  in  which  the  teeth  were  set, 
and  there  has  come  out  of  the  same  place  an  entire  new  set  of  teeth,  and 
he  can  now  open  his  mouth  as  wide  as  he  ever  could,  and,  besides,  there 
has  come  out  of  the  roof  of  his  mouth  a  number  of  small  pigces  of  bone 

Pieces  of  bone  also  came  out  of  the  upper  end  of  the  tibia  (shin  bone) 
of  the  right  side,  from  the  left  ankle  joint,  the  left  clavicle,  (collar  bone,) 
the  mastoid  process  of  the  right  side,  (bone  that  projects  under  the  ear,^. 


174 

and  from  the  under  jaw  bone  of  the  right  side ;  and  the  right  leg  "was 
drawn  back  so  as  to  form  nearly  a  right  angle  with  the  thigh,  and  the  left 
so  as  to  form  an  obtuse  angle. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  KNEE  AND  MESENTERY. 

Mr.  D.  C,  of  Springfield,  Hamilton  county,  Ohio,  farmer,  aged  thirty- 
nine  years,  came  to  me  October  15th,  1832,  with  white  swelling  of  the 
left  knee,  and  enlargement  of  the  abdomen,  which  we  supposed  to  be 
dro^Dsy,  but  it  was  evidently  caused  by  enlargement  of  the  mesenteric 
glands.  His  health  has  been  declining  more  than  a  year,  and  the  enlarge- 
ment of  the  abdomen  commenced  about  a  year,  and  the  swelling  and  pain 
in  the  knee,  which  now  rendered  him  a  cripple,  about  four  months  before. 
Prescribed  the  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  In  five  weeks  from  this  time 
the  swelling  of  the  knee  and  enlargement  of  the  abdomen  had  disappeared, 
and  his  usual  good  health  was  restored. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  NECK  AND  MESENTERT. 

Master  T.  I.,  of  the  city  of  Cincinnati,  aged  18  months.  I  was  called 
to  see  him  about  September  1st,  1630.  He  had  scrofulous  ulcers  under 
each  ear,  which  were  discharging  scrofulous  matter  very  freely,  and  a 
number  of  tubercles  of  different  sizes,  on  both  sides  of  the  neck,  and  an 
enlargement  of  the  abdomen,  with  diarrhoea.  It  was  now  more  than  a 
year  since  the  disease  commenced,  and  he  had  irregular  fever  and  was 
feeble  and  emaciated.  Five  or  six  physicians  had  attended  and  prescribed 
for  him,  but  the  disease  grew  worse.  Prescribed  the  magnetic  pills  and 
plaster.  His  health  began  to  improve  in  a  few  days,  and  in  about  six 
weeks  the  ulcers  were  healed  and  the  tubercles  had  disappeared,  and  his 
health  was  in  all  respects  restored. 


TUBERCULA  OF   THE  LEFT  HIP  AND  FOOT. 

After  amputation  for  tuburcula  of  right  knee. 

Mr.  J.  S.,  of  Preble  county,  Ohio,  of  light  complexion,  aged  19  years, 

called  on  me,  September  19th,  1836.     His  right  thigh  was  amputated 

about  five  years  ago,  on  account  of  white  swelling  of  the  right  knee,  soon 

after  which  he  began  to  feel  pain,  sometimes  in  the  left  hip,  and  at  others 

in  the  knee,  and  these  pains  continued,  with  varying  severity,  until  about 
14 


175 

ten  months  ago,  when  his  foot  began  to  swell  and  to  be  painful.  The 
pain  in  the  hip  and  knee  then  subsided.  The  white  swelling  is  now 
large,  and  extends  over  the  foot,  and  sides  of  the  foot,  and  he  has  tuber- 
cles on  both  sides  of  his  neck,  and  his  health  has  continued  feeble  since 
the  amputation.  Diagnosis.  Chronic  tubercula  of  the  hip  joint  and  foot. 
Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  plaster.  October  7th,  the  whole  swel- 
ling is  gone,  excepting  only  a  small  abscess,  which,  on  being  opened, 
discharged  two  teaspoons  full  of  tuberculous  matter.  The  plaster  was 
now  re-applied,  and  the  pills  continued,  and  in  three  weeks  the  abscess 
was  healed  and  his  health  restored. 


ACUTE  TUBERCULA  OF  THE  LEFT  LEG. 

Master  W.  L.,  of  Somers,  Preble  county,  Ohio,  aged  five  years  ;  called 
to  see  him  October  11th,  1834.  He  had  a  violent  and  spasmodic  pain  in 
the  lower  and  forepart  of  the  left  leg,  with  intervals  of  ease.  The  disease 
commenced  five  or  six  days  before,  and,  on  examining  his  neck,  I  found 
five  or  six  large  tubercles  on  the  left  side.  A  physician  had  been  every 
day  in  attendance,  and  had  prescribed  the  usual  antiphlogistic  remedies, 
including  a  blister  over  the  swelling ;  but  the  pain  continued  with  una- 
bated violence,  and  the  patient,  in  his  agony,  continued  to  make  the  wel- 
kin wring  with  screams. 

Diagnosis.  Acute  tubercula.  I  now  took  a  scalpel,  and  laid  the 
swelling  open  along  the  course  of  the  tibia,  about  an  inch  and  a  half 
through  the  blister,  integuments  and  periosteum  to  the  bone. 

This  operation,  though  a  severe  one,  was  less  painful  than  one  of  those 
turns  of  severe  pain.  I  now  placed  a  linen  cloth  over  it,  and  directed  it 
to  be  wetted  in  a  triple  solution  of  sulphate  of  copper,  iron,  and  alumine, 
in  the  following  proportions,  viz.,  blue  vitriol  one-fourth  of  an  ounce, 
copperas  and  alum,  each  half  an  ounce,  water  one  pint,  and  also  to  wet  a 
roller  bandage  in  this  solution,  and  commence  at  the  toes,  and  roll  it  mode- 
rately tight  over  the  foot,  ankle,  and  leg  to  the  knee,  and  at  night  tO' 
remove  it  and  apply  a  fermenting  poultice  over  the  limb;  and  in  the 
morning  to  apply  again  the  cloth,  wash,  and  bandage,  and  to  continue- 
this  course  until  the  pain  ceased,  and  then  to  discontinue  the  wash  and 
poultice,  and  apply  magnetic  scrofulous  plaster,  with  the  roller  bandage. 
I  also  prescribed  magnetic  pills  ;  one  to  be  taken  night  and  morning  for 
one  week,  and  afterwards  one  every  night. 

The  turns  of  spasmodic  pain  now  gradually  decreased  in  frequency  and 
violence,  and  in  nine  days  he  was  able  to  walk  about  the  house,  and  in- 
less  than  two  weeks  after  this  his  leg  was  healed,  and  his  health  re- 
stored. 


176 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  HIP  JOINT. 

Disease  of  the  Hip  Joint. 

Master  J.  C,  aged  14  years,  called  to  see  him  November  20th,  1828. 
He  had  been  complaining  of  pain  in  his  right  knee,  with  a  little  lameness 
every  two  or  three  days,  during  the  last  two  weeks,  but  is  now  confined 
to  his  bed,  with  pain  in  his  right  hip  He  lays  on  his  left  side,  with  his 
thighs  drawn  up,  and  every  attempt  to  move  the  limb  produces  pain  in 
the  hip,  and  he  cannot  bear  pressure  on  the  joint  or  in  the  groin.  On 
comparing  this  joint  with  the  left,  there  was  no  swelling  or  enlargement, 
but,  on  the  contrary,  it  appears  rather  less  or  flattened  on  the  out  side  ot 
the  joint,  and  the  limb  appears  shorter  than  the  other.  He  has  some 
fever ;  is  very  irritable,  and  has  tubercles  on  the  right  side  of  the  neck 
and  in  the  groin. 

Prescribed,  magnetic  pills,  and  a  large  poultice  to  the  hip  and  groin,  1o 
be  renewed  once  in  four  hours.  Novemb'ir  21.  Pain  abated,  discon- 
tinued the  poultice,  and  applied  magnetic  plaster  over  the  hip  and  groin. 

November  23.  Pain  in  the  joint  much  less,  and  he  rests  better  during 
the  night.  On  removing  the  plaster,  the  hip  and  groin  were  covered 
with  small  vesicles  and  ulcerations.  The  same  plaster  was  spread  again, 
by  adding  a  little  more  to  it,  and  re-applied. 

November  26.  He  continues  better,  but  the  joint  is  in  every  attemj^t 
to  move  it  still  very  painful.  The  same  course  was  continued,  and  in 
four  weeks  he  was  able  to  sit  up,  and  in  two  weeks  more,  was  able  to 
walk  with  a  little  lameness,  from  which  he  entirely  recovered  in  a  few 
days,  and  without  any  shortening  of  the  limb. 

There  are  a  few  cases  in  which  I  use  other  external  applications 
instead  of  the  plaster,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  two  following  examples. 

TUBERCULA  OF  THE  HEEL. 

Acute  While  Swelling  of  the  Heel  and  Ankle  Joint,  with  Abcesses  and 

Caries  of  the  Bones. 

Miss  M.  G ,  of  Springfield,  Hamilton  county,  Ohio,  aged  twelve 

years.  1  was  called  to  see  her,  February  5th,  1S33.  She  had  been 
attacked  with  acute  white  swelling  of  the  left  heel,  three  months  pre- 
vious to  this  time.  The  whole  foot  and  ankle  was  now  swollen  as  large 
as  the  skin  would  admit,  and  was  oedematous,  and  extended  half  way  to 
the  knee.  There  were  three  abscesses  on  the  right  side  of  the  heel,  five 
on  the  left,  and  two  on  each  side  of  the  ankle  joint,  all  discharging  scro- 


177 

fulous  matter,  of  a  greenish-yellow  color,  and  the  whole  foot  and  ankle 
had  a  dusky  yellow  appearance.  There  was  little  or  no  sensibility 
in  the  skin,  but  a  great  discharge  of  matter,  with  acute  pain  on 
pressure.  On  introducing  the  probe  into  the  abscesses,  the  bone  was 
found  bare  in  three  of  them  on  the  left  side  of  the  heel  and  foot,  and  had 
a  rough  feel.  She  had  a  number  of  tubercles  of  different  sizes,  from  that 
of  a  pea  to  a  walnut,  on  both  sides  of  her  neck,  and  was  now,  and  had 
been  from  the  first,  confined  to  her  bed,  and  is  now  very  feeble  and  ema- 
ciated, has  hectic  fever,  and  has  suffered  much  from  pain  in  the  heel  and 
ankle.  About  three  weeks  previous  to  this  time,  the  attending  physician 
proposed  to  amputate  the  limb,  ("as  is  customary  in  such  casesj  as  it 
offered,  in  his  opinion,  the  only  chance  to  save  her  life.  Her  parents, 
opposed  to  this  last  resort,  sent  for  a  celebrated  physician  of  a  neighbor- 
ing town  in  consultation,  who  was  of  the  opinion  that  she  would  not 
recover,  whether  the  limb  was  amputated  or  not. 

Prescribed,  magnetic  pills  and  a  wash  for  the  limb,  composed  of  sul- 
phate of  copper  (blue  vitriol)  a  quarter  of  an  ounce,  sulphate  ferri  (cop- 
peras) one  ounce,  sulphate  of  alumine  (alum)  one  ounce,  dissolved  in  a 
pint  of  warm  water.  A  roller  bandage  to  be  wet  in  this  solution  and 
applied  to  the  foot,  ankle  and  leg,  and  to  be  kept  wet  with  the  wash 
through  the  day,  and  at  night  to  remove  the  roller  and  apply  the  common 
fermenting  poultice  through  the  night  alternately.  February  15th.  The 
swelling  of  the  limb  has  lessened  more  than  one-half.  The  cuticle 
(scarf  skin)  very  much  thickened,  has  peeled  off  of  the  entire  foot,  and 
it  has  a  much  more  healthy  and  natural  appearance.  Her  fever  has 
nearly  disappeared,  and  her  health  much  improved,  and  she  is  able  to  sit 
up.  Her  health  continued  to  improve  without  any  interruption,  with 
the  same  treatment,  and  in  two  weeks  more  the  swelling  had  disappeared 
from  the  foot  and  leg,  except  at  the  heel,  and  in  another  week  the  ab- 
scesses on  both  sides  of  the  ankle  joint,  and  on  the  right  side  of  the  heel, 
were  healed.  The  magnetic  plaster  was  now  applied  to  the  left  side  of 
the  heel.  She  was  able  to  walk  soon  after  this,  first  on  crutches,  and 
then  without  them.  More  than  a  dozen  pieces  of  bone  came  out  of  the 
left  side  of  the  heel  and  foot,  two  of  them  large  and  of  the  circumference 
of  a  quarter  of  a  dollar.     Her  father  and  mother  are  both  scrofulous. 


TUBERCULA  OF  THE  UTERUS  AND  RIGHT  LEG. 

Mrs.  H.,  of  Union,  Butlercounty,  Ohio,  of  the  middling  size,  and  good 
constitution,  aged  46  years. 

Called  to  see  her  August  17th,  1833.  She  has  a  large  fungus  ulcer 
on  the  right  side  of  her  right  ankle.     The  foot  and  leg  swelled  as  large 


178 

as  the  skin  will  admit,  which  has  a  shining  appearance,  and  the  ulcer 
black  and  depressed  from  the  surrounding  everted  edges  of  the  skin.  It 
is  in  form  perfectly  round,  and  as  large  as  the  circumference  of  the  top 
of  a  large  tea  cup,  and  is  to  the  depth  of  half  an  inch,  a  gangrenous  mass 
of  fungi,  which  emits  a  horrible  smell.  The  swelling  commenced  about 
three  months  since. 

Her  countenance  is  pale  and  sallow,  and  she  has  leucorrhoea,  with 
which  she  has  been  affected  more  than  two  years,  and  she  is  now  feeble 
and  emaciated, — is  suffering  severely  with  dull  and  lancinating  pains  in 
the  ankle  and  leg,  and  is  confined  to  her  bed. 

She  has  a  number  of  tubercles  on  the  right  side  of  her  neck,  and  pres- 
sure on  two  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  produces  pain,  which  darts  into  the 
uterus.  Prescribed  the  magnetic  pills  and  a  grain  of  quinine,  three  times 
a  day,  with  a  large  fermenting  poultice  to  the  foot,  ankle  and  leg,  to  be 
renewed  morning  and  evening,  and  the  magnetic  plaster  over  the  lum- 
bar vertebrae.  August  22nd.  The  swelling  of  the  limb  is  very  much 
reduced,  and  the  gangrenous  fungi  have  sloughed  out  and  left  a  large  and 
round  chasm  half  an  inch  deep,  the  bottom  of  which  is  covered  with 
fungus  or  round  elevations,  of  a  red  colour,  surrounded  with  a  white 
colored  matter,  and  the  edges  of  the  skin  every  where  everted,  and  be- 
sides this  formidable  ulcer,  the  whole  of  the  back  part  of  the  ankle, 
from  an  inch  above  the  bottom  of  the  heel  to  four  inches  above  the  an- 
kle, is  now  one  mass  of  fungus  or  loose  and  spungy  ulcers,  the  skin  having 
entirely  disappeared. 

The  limb  was  now  washed  with  a  solution  of  chloride  of  mercury,  and 
adhesive  plaster,  spread  very  thin  on  strips  of  cotton  cloth,  two  and  a 
half  inches  wide,  and  long  enough  to  reach  round  the  limb  and  lap  over 
two  inches,  and  a  sufficient  number  of  them  so  spread  to  cover  the  limb 
from  the  lower  part  of  the  ankle  to  a  point  seven  inches  above  it.  I 
commenced  applying  these  strips  by  making  one  end  stick  fast  to  the  side 
of  the  heel,  and  then  drew  it  round  below  the  ankle  moderately  tight, 
and  then  took  up  another  and  fastened  it  as  before,  and  lapped  it  on  the 
first  about  an  inch,  and  drew  it  ou,  and  let  it  lap  over  the  end  of  the 
strip  as  before,  and  so  with  the  remainder  of  the  strips,  until  they  were 
all  on. 

I  then  took  a  roller  bandage,  wet  in  the  above  solution,  and  commen- 
cing at  the  toes,  rolled  it  over  the  foot,  ankle  and  leg,  to  the  knee.  Di- 
rections were  now  j^iven  to  keep  the  roller  wet  with  the  solution,  and 
remove  it  and  the  strips  of  plaster,  and  wash  the  leg  and  ulcers,  and 
re-apply  new  strips  of  plaster,  and  the  roller,  in  the  same  way  night  and 
morning,  and  in  case  the  limb  should  become  more  painful,  to  remove 
them,  and  apply  the  fermenting  poultice  for  twelve  hours,  and  then  again 
apply  the  wash,  strips  of  plaster,  and  roller. 


179 

September  Sth.  The  swelling  of  the  limb  has  subsided,  except  a  little 
about  the  ulcers,  and  they  have  commenced  healing  from  their  extreme 
points  towards  the  centre  Her  health  has  improved  so  much  as  to  be 
able  to  sit  up  the  most  of  the  clay,  and  the  quinine  discontinued. 

October  3d.  Her  leucorrhoea  has  disappeared,  and  the  ulcerations 
reduced  to  about  one-third  their  original  diir;ensions.  The  same  course 
of  treatment  was  continued  with  little  variation,  and  in  about  two  months 
they  healed  entirely,  when  her  health  was  fully  re-established. 

The  manner  of  applying  adhesive  strips  of  plaster  pursued  in  this  case 
was  first  recommended  by  Cooper,  in  cases  of  the  common  ulcerated  legs, 
and  it  cured  some  cases,  but  the  disease  generally  returned  again  after  a 
few  weeks  or  months.  When,  however,  the  disease  is  treated  hke  this 
case,  with  the  magnetic  pills  and  the  adhesive  strips  of  plaster,  the  dia- 
thesis or  taint  in  the  system  from  absorption  from  these  ulcers  is  des- 
troyed, and  the  disease  does  not  return.  The  adhesive  plaster  I  use  in 
these  cases  is  much  better  and  cheaper  than  that  obtained  from  the  shops, 
and  is  made  by  boiling  rosin  and  lard  in  water  an  hour,  in  the  proportion 
of  one  ounce  of  lard  to  every  pound  of  rosin,  and  when  nearly  cold  may 
be  made  into  rolls  of  any  convenient  size.  The  rosin  must  always  be 
good  and  free  from  impurities.  The  plaster  must  also  be  spread  very 
thin  and  very  even,  and  always  applied  precisely  in  the  same  way  as  in 
this  case,  when  it  cures  the  disease,  if  it  is  not  of  more  than  seven  or 
eight  years'  continuance,  in  from  five  to  seven  weeks. 

COLOUR  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  CHRONIC  TUBERCULA. 

In  the  foregoing  cases  of  chronic  tubercula  of  the  limbs,  neck,  head, 
and  face,  there  was  little  or  no  discolouration  of  the  skin,  and  there  is  little 
or  none  of  the  membranes  which  cover  the  tuberculated  organs.  There 
are,  however  rare  cases  of  this  disease  in  which  a  red  colour  of  the  skin 
is  sometimes  produced  by  accidental  causes,  and  in  order  to  prevent 
these  cases  which  are  incurable  by  other  remedies,  from  being  mistaken 
for  another  disease,  the  following  case  is  presented. 

Miss  M.  G.,  aged  ten  years,  was  brought  to  me  January  26th,  1836. 
The  lower  half  of  her  nose  is  swelled  and  of  a  scarlet  red  colour.  The 
lower  half  of  both  cheeks,  upper  and  under  lip,  and  chin,  are  also  swelled, 
and  of  the  same  scarlet  colour,  and  they  all  have  a  smooth  and  shining 
appearance,  except  in  some  places  along  the  cheeks  where  they  are  tu- 
berculated, and  along  the  upper  lip  where  tubercles  have  ulcerated  and 
are  discharging  matter. 

The  disease  commenced  about  five  years  since  with  pain,  and  then  a 
thin  or  sanious  discharge  from  the  nose,  which  from  its  frequent  appli- 
cation to  the  skin  produced  the  swelling,  ulceration,  and  scarlet  colour 
of  this  part  of  the  nose  and  face. 


180 

She  has  a  black  and  very  intelligent  eye,  and  is  apparently  a  perfect 
beauty,  saving  the  frightful  deformity  produced  by  this  disease,  from 
■which  she  has  suffered  long,  and  sometimes  severely. 

The  line  or  ganglia  of  glands  on  both  sides  of  her  neck,  w^ith  the  sub- 
maxillaries under  the  jaws  and  the  parotids  are  tuberculated.  The 
tubercles  very  large,  and  painful  under  pressure. 

Pressure  on  a  small  tubercle  of  the  right  side  of  the  first  cervical  ver- 
tebrae produces  pain,  which  darts  into  those  under  the  jaw,  and  into  the 
throat  of  the  riirht  side  and  into  the  nose.  Pressure  on  one  of  the  left 
side  of  the  same  verlebrai  produces  pain  which  darts  into  those  under  the 
jaw  and  into  the  throat  and  face  of  the  left  side.  I  now  examined  the 
mouth  and  found  both  tonsils  tuberculated,  and  the  tongue  one-third 
larger  than  natural.  A  number  of  physicians  have  as  usual  attended  and 
prescribed  for  this  patient.  Diagnosis.  Tubercula  of  the  nose,  face, 
tonsils  and  tongue.      Prescribed  magnetic  pills  and  plaster. 

The  disease  began  to  subside  in  a  few  days,  and  at  the  end  of  ten 
weeks  it  had  entirely  disappeared,  and  the  colour  of  the  skin  natural. 
One  plaster  was  applied  in  this  case  over  the  first  cervical  vertebree. 
One  over  the  lower  part  of  the  lower  jaw  and  upper  part  of  the  neck  of 
both  sides,  and  one  over  the  swelled  and  scarlet  portions  of  the  face. 
She  wore  the  plaster  on  the  face  four  or  five  weeks  only,  and  on  the 
neck  seven  or  eight. 


APPENDIX. 


I  ADD  to  the  common  per  chloride  of  gold  a  quantity  of  condensed  chlorine,  which 
is  supposed  to  be  equal  to  ten  or  twelve  times  the  quantity  condensed  In  the  common 
per  chloride,  and  which  greatly  increases  its  contractive  power  in  the  same  doses.  It 
is  supposed  to  be  the  same  article  which  was  used  by  the  ancient  Egyptians;  the  know- 
ledge of  which,  in  some  form,  has  descended  to  the  modern  Arabians  and  Persians 


B 

The  Bitumen  and  principal  article  of  which  the  plaster  is  composed,  is  the  same  arti- 
cle which  was  used  by  the  ancient  Egyptians,  and  other  ancient  nations,  for  the  same 
purposes,  and  also  for  embalming,  and  from  which  the  Germans  but  recently  commenced 
the  manufacture  of  creosote.  The  skin  over  which  the  plaster  is  applied,  absorbs  the 
creosote  from  it,  and  at  the  same  time  excretes  a  mucous  or  positive  matter,  instead  of 
its  natural  excretion  of  aeriform,  aqueous,  or  negative  matter. 


"  The  remains  of  animals  and  vegetables  in  the  rocks  and  earthy  strata  of  the  earth,  we 
the  true  and  only  means  of  ascertaining  its  history  and  natural  changes  before  the  re- 
cords of  man.  The  discoveries  made  on  this  subject  within  the  last  half  century  form 
an  era  in  science  in  which  the  name  of  Cuvier  will  always  be  distinguished.     In  all 


182 

countries,  on  digging  to  certain  depths,  and  in  mining,  the  remains  of  fishes,  vegetables, 
quadrupeds,  and  birds  are  found  in  the  soil  or  imbedded  in  the  rocks,  except  in  those 
of  primitive  antiquity.  The  general  regularity  with  which  those  that  are  marine  are  laid 
at  one  level,  and  those  which  are  products  of  laud  are  laid  at  another,  and  the  alterna- 
tions of  these  marine  and  land  products,  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  the  sea  has  re- 
peatedly covered  the  land  for  long  periods  of  time,  and  that  the  land  has,  at  interme- 
diate periods,  been  dry  ;  and  what  is  very  remarkable,  the  remains  found  consist,  and 
always  at  certain  depths,  of  species  of  animals,  vegetables,  &c.  not  now  in  existence, 
and  often  of  genera  not  natural  to  the  present  climate.  Cuvier  has  enumerated  several 
hundred  genera  of  animals,  fishes,  and  vegetables  so  found,  of  which  there  are  none  of 
the  living  genera  or  species.  The  lowest  rocks,  it  is  therefore  inferred,  were  at  one 
time  the  surface  of  the  earth  and  the  seat  of  organic  life.  These  appear  to  have  been 
destroyed  by  some  great  revolutions  which  brought  new  tribes  of  organized  beings, 
while  their  kinds  prove  that  the  surface  was  covered  with  water.  The  subsequent 
appearance  of  amphibia,  &c.  prove  the  development  of  dry  land  ;  these  appear  to  have 
been  swept  away,  and  among  later  solid  rocks,  the  monstrous  race  of  herbiverous 
quadrupeds  and  gigantic  lacerta  came  into  existence  when  the  earth  seems  to  have  ac- 
quired herbage  for  their  subsistence.  How  long  this  race  kept  possession  cannot  be 
guessed,  but  their  length  of  life  is  well  known.  The  gypsum,  &c.  which  now  contains 
their  remains  is  covered  with  newer  deposits,  abounding  with  sea  shells,  and  above  the 
stratum  is  found  a  new  race  of  herbiverous  animals  of  the  genera  of  the  elephant,  rhi- 
noceros, iSoc.  and  above  them  is  the  first  loose  soil,  intermixed  with  marine  substances, 
proving  second  or  third  immersions  of  the  sea  ;  and  above  this  lies  the  soil  which  the 
present  race  of  animals  enjoy.  What  may  follow,  and  when,  and  how,  is  a  curious 
question. 

"  The  age  of  the  rocks  indicates  the  age  of  the  remains,  but  we  can  measure  neither 
by  any  comparison  with  known  time. 

"  The  older  secondary  rocks  contain  peculiar  aquatic  plants  and  reeds,  then  above  these 
madrepores,  coral,  &c.  all  fixed  where  they  lived  ;  and  then  shell-fish,  very  simple,  but 
differing  from  all  now  in  existence  ;  in  strata  above  these  fishes,  bamboos  and  ferns  ; 
in  a  still  higher  stratum  are  more  complicate  shells  and  oviparous  amphibia,  as  croco- 
diles, tortoises,  and  reptiles  ;  these  are  imbedded  in  the  uppermost  solid  rocks  of  the 
oldest  secondery  formation. 

"  In  the  newest  solid  rock  formations,  whales,  seals,  and  birds  appear  ;  above  these 
land  animals  of  enormous  size,  birds  and  fresh  water  shells,  all  in  concrete  rocks. 

"  Above  these,  in  the  lowest  beds  of  loose  soil  and  peat  bogs,  elephants,  elks,  rhinoce- 
roses, of  peculiar  species  are  found.  Near  the  surface  is  fo\md  the  remains  of  the  ex- 
isting races.     Human  bones  have  only  been  found  among  these. 

"  The  fossil  or  organic  remains  in  strata  are  always  the  same  kind  in  similar  strata,  and 
generally  have  characters  of  simplicity  of  structure,  proportioned  to  the  age  or  depth 
of  the  stratum. 

"  Brogniart,  in  his  Geological  Flora,  classes  plants  into  four  periods:  1,  The  transi- 
tion and  coal  formation  ;  2,  Variegated  sandstone ;  3,  The  chalk  ;  and  4,  Above  the 
chalk.  He  conceives  that  the  successive  creations  are  distinguished  by  a  sudden 
change  in  the  essential  characteristics.  Those  of  the  fourth  period  are  similar  to  the  pre- 
sent. Below  the  chalk  the  most  perfect  are  the  cycadecB  and  conifera.  A  land  vege- 
tation marks  each  period,  while  one  family  of  one  period  runs  into  another.  The  dico- 
tyledonous begin  in  the  oldest  strata  of  the  secondary  formations,  and  increase  in  the 
more  recent." — Treasury  of  Knowledge. 


183 

As  vegetative  and  animal  life  are  most  vigorous  and  luxuriant  in  the  middle  of  the 
golden  ages,  when  the  average  heat  of  the  earth  and  the  perfection  of  all  things  are  at 
their  maximum  ;  there  can  be  no  doubt  but  man,  with  the  long  list  of  other  animals 
belonging  to  the  order  mammalia  as  well  as  that  of  the  amphibia,  were  successively 
produced  in  those  periods  ;  many  species  of  which  were  subsequently  overwhelmed  by 
the  raging  elements,  and  became  extinct  in  other  ages.  These  creations  were  at  first 
of  comparatively  small  size  and  of  simple  form  and  structure,  which  were  succeeded  by 
those  of  greater  size  and  more  complicated  and  perfect  forms  in  each  succeeding  period 
until  they  at  last  arrived  at  their  maximum  in  the  production  of  man,  the  mastidon  and 
the  missourian. 

These  great  geological  revolutions  in  the  surface  of  the  earth  were  performed  in  four 
periods  of  time,  and  the  length  of  each  of  these  periods  was  2,304,000  years  ;  making 
in  the  whole  9,216,000.  The  earth  had  existed  two  periods  previous  to  the  commence- 
ment of  these  revolutions,  in  the  first  of  which,  the  primitive  crystallised  granite  was 
deposited,  and  formed  the  crust  on  which  the  first  strata  were  laid  in  the  second  period, 
devoid  of  organic  remains.  These  periods  amounted  to  4,608,000  years,  and  when 
added  to  the  four  periods  above  described,  make  in  the  whole  13,824,000  years  from 
the  commencement  of  the  first  to  the  completion  of  the  sixth  period. 

We  are  now  progressing  in  the  seventh  period,  and  assuming  that  it  will  be  com- 
pleted in  the  middle  of  the  present  age,  or  when  the  earth's  axis  is  again  perpendicular 
to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  then  it  is  2,161,845  years  since  the  commencement  of  this 
period,  and  of  the  decay  of  the  earth,  and  of  all  things  upon  it. 


D 

The  brain  is  frequently  tuberculated,  as  is  shown  by  the  magnetic  symptoms  and  by 
post  mortem  examinations.  I  have  also  found  these  symptoms  in  every  case  of  Hemi- 
plegia or  paralysis  of  one  side,  which  I  have  examined  during  the  last  twenty  years.  I 
have  also  found  them  in  every  case  of  Epilepsy,  Chorea,  and  Amaurosis.  These 
are,  therefore,  cases  of  tubercular  disease,  and  they  are  uniformly  cured  by  the  magnetic 
remedies,  in  the  first  stage  of  the  disease,  in  young  subjects  ;  but  in  old  subjects,  where 
the  brain  has  been  a  long  time  tuberculated,  as  is  usual  in  such  cases,  these  remedies 
have  generally  little  or  no  effect,  except  to  palliate  the  symptoms. 

These  symptoms  are  also  found  in  Paraplegia  or  tubercular  disease,  affecting  the  spi- 
nal cord,  which  are  generally  cured  by  these  remedies,  in  the  first  stage  of  the  disease, 
in  young  subjects. 

It  will  be  observed  that  I  have  regarded  tubercles  in  the  lungs  and  brain,  as  well  as 
those  found  in  other  organs,  as  the  diseased  satellites  of  the  lymphatic  glands,  and  it  is 
believed  they  must  be  so  regarded  hereafter  by  physiologists  ;  for  the  magnetic  symp- 
toms demonstrate  their  direct  connection  with  the  lymphatic  glands.  They  cannot, 
therefore,  (according  to  the  received  opinion,)  be  foreign  bodies. 


E 

I  called  to  see  Miss  E.  B.  about  the  15th  June  1841,  and  found  her  enjoying  fine 
health.  She  has  grown  about  a  head  taller  than  she  was  when  I  saw  her  last  in  April 
1840.    Her  form  continues  perfect,  and  she  walks  more  erect  than  ladies  generally  do. 


184 

Lateral  curvatures  ^of  the  spine  are  produced  by  the  contractions  of  tuberculaSed 
muscles.  In  this  case,  like  every  other,  the  muscles  were  thickened  on  the  side  of  the 
spine  to  which  the  curve  was  directed.  When  these  tuberculations  are  reduced,  the 
spine  resumes  its  natural  position.  In  the  case  of  Mrs.  P.,  page  133,  the  muscles  were 
tuberculated  on  both  sides  of  the  same  vertebrae,  from  the  sixth  dorsal  to  the  third  lum- 
ber, yet  there  was  no  curvature  of  the  spine,  because  the  force  of  the  contraction  on 
one  side  was  balanced  by  that  on  the  other 

The  contractions  of  the  muscles  on  one  side  of  the  vertebrae  only,  produced  partial 
dislocation,  and  a  greater  or  lesser  curvature  in  proportion  to  the  extent  and  intensity 
of  the  disease  in  the  muscles.  Partial  dislocations  of  the  joints  of  the  limbs  are  fre- 
quently produced  in  the  same  manner.  In  a  great  majority  of  the  cases  of  disease  of 
the  hip  joint,  there  is  partial  dislocation  of  the  head  of  the  femur  soon  after  the  disease 
commences,  by  the  contraction  of  the  large  tuberculated  muscles  of  the  outer  and 
back  side  of  the  joint. 

M.  Guerin  of  Paris  has  recently  introduced  the  practice  of  dividing  the  contracted 
muscles  to  reduce  these  partial  dislocations,  and  is  pursuing  it  with  great  success.  It 
must  greatly  facilitate  the  cure  of  the  disease  in  these  cases,  while  the  operation  alone 
cures  entirely  congenital  affections  of  this  kind,  as  wry-neck,  club-foot,  &c.  &,. 


GLOSSARY 


Ablation,  Taking  away,  abstracting,  or  cutting  off. 

Abnormal,  Irregular,  unnatural,  singular,  misshaped. 

Absorption,  The  act  of  sacking  up,  attracting,  or  collecting,  as  with  a  sponge. 

Absorbents,  Vessels  taking  up  and  conveying  fluids. 

Abscess,  A  collection  of  pus  in  a  cavity,  the  result  of  morbid  process. 

Accessoj-ious,  Helping,  additional,  two  nerves  running  from  the  medulla  oblongata. 

Acetate  of  Lead,  a  combination  of  acetic  acid,  or  vinegar,  with  lead. 

Acini,  Minute  kernels,  tubercula,  or  glandiform  corpuscles. 

Acoustic  JVerve,  Belonging  to  the  ear,  hearing,  or  sound. 

Adipose,  Fatty,  containing  fat. 

Alkaline,  Having  the  quality  of  an  alkali,  or  fixed  salt,  caustic. 

Amenhorrhma,  Suppression  of  the  menses. 

Anastomatic,  Quality  of  removing  obstruction,  deobstruent. 

Anaphrodisix,  Absence  of  venery,  impotence,  sterility. 

Anastimose,  To  join  tw^o  vessels,  union  of  parts  or  currents. 

Aneurism,  A  tumor,  formed  by  the  dilatation  or  lesion  of  an  artery. 

Anfractuosities,  Sinous  depressions,  windings  or  turnings. 

Ans^ina,  Quincy,  or  sore  throat. 

Antiphlogistic,  Opposed  to  inflammation — depleting. 

Antrum,  Cavities  in  bones,  the  entrance  to  which  is  smaller  than  the  bottom. 

Aorta,  The  great  artery  arising  out  of  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart. 

Arachnoid,  Inner  membrane  covering  the  brain. 

Asphyxia,  Suspended  animation  or  motions  of  the  heart,  swooning  or  fainting. 

Asthenic,  Relating  to  a  debility  of  the  vital  forces. 

Ataxic,  Pertaining  to  disorders  characterizing  nervous  fevers. 

Atony,  Want  of  tone  or  force,  general  debility. 

Auriferous,  Producing  or  partaking  of  gold. 

Auscultation,  To  listen,  to  learn  by  sounds  thro'Jgh  the  stethescope,  or  otherwise, 

the  diagnosis  of  diseases  in  the  heart  and  lungs. 
Automatic,  Mechanical,  like  or  belongring  to  an  automaton. 
Axillary,  Belonging  to  the  armpit. 

24 


186 


B 

Bronchia,  The  tubes  arising  from  the  throat,  or  trachsea,  and  conveying  air  into  the 

lungs. 
Bronchitis,  Inflammation  of  the  lining  membrane  of  the  bronchial  tubes. 
Bronchophony,  Guteral  sound  of  words  in  the  lungs,  like  that  in  the  character  of 

Punch. 


c 

Calamus  Scriptorius,  A  furiovv  or  canal  in  the  fourth  ventricle  of  the  brain. 

Calx,  Lime,  preparations  of  lime  used  medicinally. 

Cardiac,  Relating  to  the  heart  or  upper  orifice  of  the  stomach. 

Camivorons,  Feeding  or  living  on  flesh. 

Caries,  Ulcerations  of  the  bones. 

Catarrhal,  Relating  to  a  discharge  from  a  mucous  membrane. 

Catamenia,  The  menses. 

Catenation,  A  link,  a  regular  connection. 

CathoUcons,  General  remedies,  panaceas. 

Catheter,  A  tube  or  instrument,  introduced  through  the  urinary  passage  into  the 
bladder. 

Cautery,  A  burning  iron,  a  caustic. 

Cellular,  Consisting  of  cells  or  cavities. 

Cellulosity,  State  of  having  cells. 

Ccrebellec,  Belonging  to  the  cerebellum. 

Cerebelli,  The  two  hemispheres  of  the  cerebellum. 

Cerebellum,  The  small  brain,  posterior  to  the  cerebrum. 

Cerebral,  Belonging  to  the  brain. 

Cerebrum,  The  brain  anterior  to  the  cerebellum. 

Cervical,  Belonging  to  the  neck. 

Chlorosis,  A  disease  affecting  females  before  menstruation. 

Chloride  oj  Mercury,  A  compound,  formed  by  chlorine  and  mercury. 

Chorea,  St.  Vitus'  dance. 

Chronic  Diseases,  Those  of  long  duration,  organic,  impeding  performance  of  func- 
tions. 

Chyle,  A  white  fluid  produced  by  digestion,  secreted  from  the  stomach. 

Cincritious,  Color  of  ashes,  the  part  of  the  brain,  &c.  of  that  color. 

Circulatory  Syste?n,  Circulation  of  the  blood  and  other  fluids  of  the  body. 

Circumflexus  Palati,  A  muscle  of  the  sphenoid  bone. 

Clavicle,  The  collar  bone. 

Clinical,  Relating  to  discourse  or  practice  at  the  bed  of  the  sick. 

Commissure,  A  joint  of  union,  seam  or  bridae. 

Con^arative  Physiology,  Knowledge  or  doctrine  of  functions,  derived  from  study  of 
the  lower  order  of  animals. 

Coma,  Morbid  disposition  to  sleep,  profound  sleep,  lethargy. 

Condyloid,  Shape  of  a  condyle,  or  soft  protuberant  end  of  a  bone. 

Congestion,  An  unnatural  accumulation  of  blood  or  other  fluid  in  an  organ. 

Conglobate,  Formed  into  balls — lymphatic  glands. 


187 

Conjunctiva,  External  coat  of  the  eye. 

Contractility,  Power,  or  susceptibility  of  contraction,  or  shrinking. 

Contractile,  A  muscle,  having  the  power  of  contracting  or  shortening. 

Convolutions,  Turnings,  undulating,  or  tortuous  projections,  as  of  the  brain,  intes- 
tines, &,c. 

Corpora  Restiformia,  Resting  bodies,  medullary  projections'from  the  top  of  the  me- 
dulla oblongata. 

Corpora  Striata,  Two  ganglions  in  the  ventricles  of  the  brain. 

Coronary,  Belonging  to  the  crown  or  top,  as  of  the  head. 

Costal,  Relating  to  the  ribs. 

Corpus  Olivare,  Olivary  body  or  ganglion  in  the  medulla  oblongata. 

Cortical,  The  exterior  skin,  rind,  bark. 

Costive,  Bound,  retentive,  close. 

Cranium,  The  skull. 

Crepitous,  Pertaining  to  crackling  sounds  in  breathing,  ebulitions  of  air,  or  the  fric- 
tions of  bones. 

Cribriform,  Resembling  a  sieve  or  riddle,  like  the  ethmoid  hone. 

Crura,  Bodies  resembling  legs  or  roots,  as  the  crura  cerebri. 

Crypts,  ( CryptcB,  pi.)  Follicles,  cavities,  small  glands,  or  cells  in  the  membranes. 

Cystis,  A  bag,  the  urinary  bladder. 

D 

Decussation,  Crossing,  intersection  at  angles,  &c. 

Degenerescence,  A  change  for  the  worse  in  the  composition  of  fluids,  or  solids  of  the 

body,  or  the  structure  of  an  organ. 
Diagnosis,  Discrimination  of  diseases—"  What  is  the  matter  ?" 
Diaphragm,  The  midriff,  a  muscular  partition  dividing  the  chest  from  the  belly. 
Diarrhaa,  A  flux,  purging. 

Diathesis,  Disposition,  predisposition  to  certain  diseases. 
Dorsal,  Belonging  to  the  back,  the  second  division  of  the  spine,  consisting  of  twelve 

vertebrse. 
Dorsal  Medulla,  marrow  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae. 
Duct,  A  tube,  canal,  or  passage  for  fluids^ 

Duodenum,  First  small  intestine  receiving  the  food  from  the  stomach 
Dyspnoea,  Difficulty  of  breathing. 

E 

Electro-dynamic,  Laws  relating  to  electrical  forces,  &c. 

Elixirs,  Liquid  extracts,  the  essence,  a  medical  cordial. 

Ellipticity,  Oval,  like  an  egg. 

Embryo,  A  germ,  elementary  organization,  foetus,  first  or  unfinished  form. 

Encephalic,  Belonging  to  the  head  or  the  brain. 

Erotic,  Loving,  produced  by  love. 

Ethmoid  Bone,  Lying  horizontally  with  the  eyes  and  over  the  nose. 

Exacerbation,  Increase  in  the  symptoms  of  disease. 

Excrete,  To  separate,  to  throw  off. 

Expectoration,  The  act  of  expelling  secretions  from  the  chest — the  matter  expelled. 

Extravasated,  Forced  out  of  the  proper  vessel  or  channel,  as  with  stagnant  blood. 


188 


Fascia,  A  membrane,  covering  the  muscles. 

Femoral,  Relating  or  belonging  to  the  thigh. 

FibriUcB,  Small  fibres. 

Flexor  and  Extensor  muscles,  The  oflBces  of  which  are  to  extend  and  contract. 

Flocculi,  Flakes,  like  snow,  leaf-like. 

Foetal,  Relating  to  the  foetus,  or  child  in  the  womb. 

Follicles,  Little  glands,  bags,  or  folds. 

Foramen,  {Foramina,-p\.)  A  hole  or  opening. 

Foramen  Magnum,  A  large  hole  or  opening  at  the  base  of  the  brain,  through  which 

the  spinal  marrow  enters  the  brain. 
Foramen  Lacerum,  A  hole  in  the  os  pherwides. 
Formula,  Forms  of  medicinal  preparations  or  prescriptions. 
Fornix,  A  medullary  body  in  the  brain. 
Fossa,  {^FosscB,  pi.)  A  groove  or  ditch. 
Frontal,  Belonging  to  the  front,  or  forehead. 
Fungus,  {Fungi,  pi.)  A  spungy  excrescence. 


G 

Ganglions,  Organs  formed  of  agglomerated  globules  in  the  brain — the  posterior  spi- 
nal nerves  and  along  the  course  of  the  sympathetic  nerves. 

Gangrenous,  Mortification,  partial  death,  or  disorganization  of  any  organ  or  limb. 

Gestation,  The  act  or  period  of  carrying  young. 

Gibbosity,  Curvature  of  the  spine — relating  to  rickets  and  caries  of  the  vertebrse. 

Glands,  Organized  bodies,  situated  internally  and  externally,  to  secrete  fluids  or  mo- 
dify those  of  others. 

Glandular,  Of  the  form  or  texture  of  glands. 

Globate,  Like  a  globe. 

Glottis,  The  opening  of  the  windpipe  or  larynx — serving  in  the  formation  of  the  voice. 

Glossopharyngeal,  Belonging  to  the  tongue  and  pharynx. 


H 

Hectic,  Fever,  preternatural  irritability,  febrile  excitement,  with  emaciation. 
Hemiplegia,  Paralysis  of  a  part  or  one  side  of  the  body. 
Hemorrhage,  A  violent  or  unnatural  flux  of  blood. 
Hcemoptysis,  Hemorrhage  from  the  lungs. 
Homogeneous,  Of  the  same  nature — similarity  of  parts. 
Hydriodates,  Salts  consisting  of  the  hydriodic  acid  combined  with  an  oxide. 
Hydrocephalic,  Relating  to  dropsy,  or  water  on  the  brain. 
Hyoideal,  Relating  to  the  es  hyoides. 

Hypertrophy,  The  state  of  a  part  in  which  nutrition  is  performed,  with  great  or  un- 
natural activity. 


1S9 


Inervation,  Weakness — relaxation  of  the  nervous  power. 

Increments,  Increases,  additions,  or  productions. 

Inosculate,  Inter-union  of  the  extremities  of  arteries,  veins,  &c. — to  unite  by  contact 

Infinitesimal,  Indefinitely  small  quantity. 

Inter  cerebral.  Between  the  hemispheres,  or  parts  of  the  brain. 

Intercostal,  Between  the  ribs. 

Integument,  The  skin,  an  envelope,  bark,  a  covering. 

Interniembranotis,  Between  the  membranes. 

Inguinal,  Relating  or  belonging  to  the  groin. 

Involuntary  Muscles,  Those  performing  their  functions  without  the  aid  of  the  will. 

Iodine,  A  violet  colored  liquid,  obtained  by  burning  a  marine  plant  and  the  ashes 

with  sulphuric  acid. 
Iris,  The  variegated  circle  surrounding  the  pupil  of  the  eye. 


Lamince,  Thin  plates  or  layers. 

Laryngeal,  Relating  to  the  larynx. 

Larynx,  Upper  part  of  the  trachea  or  windpipe. 

Leucorrhcea,  A  colored  discharge  from  the  membranes  of  the  uterus,  &c. 

Leyden  Jar,  A  glass  vessel,  covered  with  tin  foil,  for  electrical  purposes. 

Ligamenta  dentata,  A  small  ligament  supporting  the  spinal  marrow. 

Ligament,  An  elastic  and  strong  membrane,  connecting  moveable  bones,  &c. 

Lobes,  Round  projecting  parts  or  divisions  of  organs — as  of  the  brain,  lungs,  &c. 

Locus  JViger,  Dark  colored  cells  or  spots. 

Longus  Colli,  A  flexor  muscle  of  the  neck. 

Lumbar,  Relating  to  the  loins — five  vertebrae  of  the  third  division  of  the  spine. 

Lymph,  A  clear  fluid,  found  in  the  lymphatic  vessels,  mixing  with  the  chyle  and 

blood. 
Lymphatic  Tubes,  Small  vessels  of  the  body,  containing  or  carrying  lymph. 


M 

Maison  de  Sante,  Sacred  house,  a  hospital. 

Mammalia,  Animals  which  suckle  their  young. 

Mammary,  Pertaining  to  the  breasts. 

Manipulator,  One  practising  by  manual  operations. 

Marasmus,  Consumption — destroying,  a  wasting  disease. 

Masseter,  A  strong  muscle,  closing  the  jaw  in  chewing. 

Matity,  Relating  to  sounds,  afforded  by  the  percussion  of  the  chest. 

Maxillary,  Pertaining  to  the  jaw  bones. 

Maximum  and  Minimum,  The  greatest  and  least — indicating  the  greatest  and  least 

number,  quantity,  or  power  in  any  case. 
Median,  The  middle  line. 


190 

Medinstinum,  The  fold  of  the  membrane  separating  the  chest  into  two  parts. 

Medulla,  The  marrow. 

Medulla  Oblongata,  The  union  of  the  parts  of  the  brain  to  form  the  spinal  marrow. 

Medulla  Spinalis,  The  spinal  marrow. 

Membrane,  A  thin,  expanded  substance,  composed  of  elastic  fibres,  interwoven  like 
network,  covering  and  lining  the  organs  of  the  body. 

Menorrhagia,  Excessive  flow  of  the  menses,  or  monthly  hemorrhage. 

Mercury,  Quicksilver — a  preparation  of  mercury  by  volatilization. 

Messenteric,  Relating  to  the  messentarJ^ 

Messentary,  A  double  fold  of  the  membrane  lining  the  abdomen  and  covering  the 
intestines. 

Meterologico-Medical,  Diseases  depending  on  the  atmosphere  or  the  weather. 

Microscopic,  Seen  only  by  the  microscope — an  instrument  for  magnifying  minute 
objects. 

Molecular,  Small,  diminutive,  elementary  parts. 

Motor,  Moving,  prompting,  or  acting. 

"  Mouvements  d'ejisemble,'"  Combined  movements. 

Moxa,  An  application  of  cotton,  wool,  or  other  substance,  which  is  burned  on  the 
part  intended  to  be  cauterized. 

Muco-serous,  Partaking  of  the  quality  of  mucus  and  serum,  or  of  the  mucous  and 
serous  membranes. 

Mucous,  Of  the  nature  of  mucus. 

Mucous  rale.  Rattle,  or  sounds  produced  by  the  air  in  breathing,  passing  through 
mucus. 

Mucus,  A  mucilage,  a  glutinous,  thready  semi-transparent  fluid  of  a  salt  savor,  pro- 
duced in  the  mucous  membranes. 

Muriate,  A  salt  formed  by  the  combination  of  muriatic  acid  and  a  base,  as  soda,  or 
any  of  the  earths  or  metals. 

Muscles,  Regular  structure  of  fleshy  bodies,  composed  of  fibres,  and  adapted  to  dis- 
tinct functions  in  all  the  varied  motions  of  life. 


N 

JVaso  palatine.  Relating  to  the  nose  and  palate. 

JSlephrolgia,  Pain  or  disease  in  the  kidneys — belonging  to  the  kidneys. 

JVerves,  Cords  composed  of  filaments,  conveying  sensation,  motion  and  will  to  and 

from  the  brain. 
JSTervous  filament,  A  thread  or  fibre  of  a  nerve. 
JVitrate,  A  salt  formed  of  nitric  acid  and  an  earth  or  a  metal. 
JVormal,  Natural,  by  rule,  upright. 

J\'osologists,  Those  skilled  in  the  classification  of  diseases. 
JSPurilema,  The  investing  sheath  of  the  nerves. 
JVutation,  Tremulous  motion  of  the  earth's  axis. 
JKux  vomica.  The  vomic  nut  of  India. 


o 

(Edematous,  Relating  to  a  swelling  from  a  serous  fluid  in  the  cellular  texture. 
Olfactory,  Belonging  to  the  organs  of  smell — sense  of  smelling. 
Olivary,  Belonging  to  the  two  prominences  on  the  medulla  oblongata. 


101 

Ophthalmic,  Relating  to  the  eye. 
Os  coxyx.  The  lowest  bone  of  the  sacrum. 

Os  sacrum.  The  fundamental  bone  of  the  spinal  column;  of  pyramidal  form,  base  up- 
ward. 
Os  hyoides.  The  bone  forming  the  base  and  support  of  the  tongue. 
Oxyde,  A  rust  or  substance,  formed  by  the  combination  of  oxygen  and  a  metal. 


Panacea,  Universal  remedy  for  human  diseases. 

Pancreas,  A  large  gland,  secreting  a  kind  of  saliva  and  pouring  it  into  tlie  duode- 
num— the  sweet  bread. 
Papillary,  Having  ernulgent  vessels,  or  resemblances  of  paps. 

Par  vagum.  Eighth  pair  of  nerves. 

Paralysis,  Palsy,  prostration  of  nervous  power. 

Parietal,  The  two  bones  of  the  lateral  and  upper  parts  of  the  skull. 

Pathology,  The  part  of  medicine  relating  to  diseases,  their  causes,  effects,  and  pecu- 
liarities. 
Patulous,  Of  the  form  of  lips,  or  an  extended  flower. 

Peripheral,  Of  a  round  form — relating  to  the  circumference.  • 

Peritoneum,  A  serous  membrane  lining  the  abdominal  cavity. 

Pericardium,  A  membranous  sack  envelopeing  the  heart. 

Periosteum,  A  white  fibrous  membrane  surrounding  the  bones. 

Pharmacopice,  Medical  dispensatory,  formulae  of  compounding  medicines,  the  rules 
or  book  of  pharmacy.  * 

Photographic,  The  art  of  producing  impressions  on  metallic  plates  by  the  sun's  rays. 

Phrenic,  Relating  to  the  mind. 

Phrenologists,  Students  and  advocates  of  the  physiology  of  the  brain  and  nervous  sys- 
tem, as  propounded  by  Gall,  Spurzheim,  and  others,  and  on  which  is  now  based 
a  clear  and  beautiful  system  of  mental  philosophy. 

Physiology,  The  science  of  organic  life,  the  natural  constitution  and  functions  of  or- 
gans, animal  and  vegetable. 

Pia  mater,  A  thin  membrane  immediately  investing  the  brain. 

Platina,  A  greyish  white  metal,  heavier  and  more  durable  than  gold. 

Plexuses,  Junctions  of  vessels,  nerves  or  fibres,  representing  net  work. 

Pleum,  Fulness,  fleshy,  large. 

Pneumatica,  Pertaining  to  breathing. 

Potassa,  Potash — a  vegetable  alkali. 

Premier  mobile.  First  cause,  principal  or  impulse. 

Premier  moteur.  First  motive,  or  impulse  to  action. 

Prolapsis  uteri,  A  falling  down  of  the  uterus. 

Psoas,  Two  muscles  situated  on  the  lumbar  and  dorsal  vertebrae. 

Pterygoids,  Two  processes,  or  wings  of  the  sphenoid  bone. 

Pyramidal,  Of  the  form  of  a  pyramid. 

Pulmonary  catarrh.  Inflammation  of  the  membrane  lining  the  inside  of  the  air  tubes; 
of  the  lungs. 

Picrutent,  Matter— pus. 


193 


Q 


Quinine,  An  alkaline  substance,  obtained  from  the  cinchonas,  valuable  bitter   barks 
from  South  America 


R 

Rachitis,  Curvature  of  the  spine — the  rickets. 

Rectilinear,  Straight,  in  straight  lines. 

Rectus  externus.  Muscle  attached  to  the  foramen  opticum  and  the  sphenoid  bone. 

RemoUissenient,  Branching  like  boughs — small  sprigs. 

Renal,  Relating  to  the  kidneys. 

Restiform  columns.  Parts  of  the  brain. 

Retina,  A  delicate  and  sensitive  nervous  membrane  (considered  an  extension  of  the 

optic  nerve,)  on  which  the  images  of  objects  are  received. 
Rodentia.  Gnawers — a  class  of  animals  which  gnaw  their  food;  as  the  rat,  beaver, 

squirrel,  &c. 
Ruminating,  A  class  of  animals  which  chew  the  cud — reflecting. 


s 

Sacral,  Relating  to  the  sacrum — a  bone  forming  the  posterior  part  of  the  pelvis. 

SaHvary,  Belonging  to  the  glands  secreting  saliva  or  spittle. 

Sanative,  Povvef  of  healing — healtliful. 

Sanguineous,  Relating  to  or  indicating  a  fullness  of  blood;  tinged  with  blood. 

Sarsaparilla,  The  name  of  a  sudorific  plant  of  medicinal  virtue. 

Scirrhous,  Pertaining  to  scirrhus — a  disease  of  the  glandular  structures,  and  known 

by  its  hardness,  &c. 
Sclerotica,  A  hard  white  membrane  covering  the  globe  of  the  eye. 
Scrofula,  A  depravation  of  the  humors  of  the  body  breaking  out  in  sores. 
Secretion,  The  process  of  secreting  from  the  blood,  or  from  one  fluid  to  another  by 

the  glands. 
Semiluna,  A  semicircular,  or  half  moon  shape. 
Semi-paraplegia,  A  partial  palsy  of  the  lower  half  of  the  body  with  the  rectum  and 

bladder. 
Sensorum  commune.  Centre  of  sensations — the  cerebrum. 
Sensory,  The  seat  of  sensation  or  of  perception. 

Sequestration,  The  separation  of  a  diseased  or  dead  part  from  the  living. 
Seious,  Partaking  of  serum — exudations  from  serous  membranes. 
Serum,  A  thin  and  yellowish  part  of  the  blood — whey. 
Seton,  An  issue  or  rowell. 

Spheroidal,  Having  the  form  of  an  oblong  or  oblate  body. 
Spenoid  bone,  A  wedged  shaped  bone  at  the  base  of  the  skull. 
Spheno-palatine,  Muscles  of  the  palate. 
Spinal  marrow.  The  medullary  substance  of  the  spine. 
Spinal,  Belonging  to  the  backbone  or  spine 
Splanchnic,  Relating  to  the  diseases  of  the  bowels,  or  to  the  three  cavities  of  the 

viscera,  the  bowels,  head  and  chest. 


193 

Spleen,  The  milt,  one  of  the  viscera  of  the  bcdy — anger,  spite,  melancholy. 

Spongoles,  Sponges,  substancfs  like  sponges. 

Sponianiety ,  Voluntariness,  willingness. 

Sternum,  The  breastbone. 

Stethescope,  An  instrument  used  for  determining  by  sound  the  diseases  of  the  chest. 

Sthenic,  Excessive  excitement,  or  excess  of  strength  in  organic  actions. 

Striated,  Fibrous,  channelled,  radiated. 

Strumous,  Scrofulous — pertaining  to  st>-uma,  the  king's  evil. 

Sty/o  glossal.  Muscles  expanding  the  tongue. 

Submaxillary,  Under  or  below  the  jaw  bone. 

Sulcus,  Groove — as  on  the  end  of  bones  and  other  organs,  and  in  the  interstices  of 

the  brain. 
Sulphate,  A  salt  formed  of  sulphuric  acid  and  an  ear'h,  &c. 
Supra  and  infra  orbita.  Situated  above  and  below  the  orbits  of  the  eye. 
Syphilis,  An  infectious  or  poisonous  disease,  communicated  by  virus  and  contact,  as 

in  coition. 
Sympathetic,  Relating  to,  depending  on  sympathy — the  action  and  reaction  of  one 

part  or  organ  on  another. 
Synovial,  Pertaining  to  synovia — a  fluid  like  the  white  of  an  egg,  exhaled  from 

membranes  around  the  joints. 


Tactile,  Perceptable  to  the  touch. 

Tactual,  Relating  to  touch  and  tact 

Tegumentary,  Belonging  to  the  outer  parts — the  skin  or  covering. 

Telia  cellulosa,  The  cellular  or  adipose  membrane 

Temporal,  Relating  to  the  temple. 

Temperament,  The  constitution,  or  the  remarkable  differences  of  men,  arising  from 
the  peculiarities  of  organization,  relations  and  constituents. 

Tetannic,  Relating  to  a  permanent  contraction  of  the  muscles. 

Thalamus,  The  place  where  a  nerve  originates — an  irregular  surface  in  the  ventri- 
cles of  the  brain. 

Thalmi  optici,  Two  round  bodies  in  the  brain. 

Thoractic,  Belonging  to  the  chest  or  breast. 

Thyroid,  Having  the  form  of  a  shield — belonging  to  the  larynx. 

Tibia,  Shin  bone — flute  or  hautboy. 

Tissues,  The  parts  of  the  body  which  forms  the  organs — the  anatomical  elements  of 
the  body,  and  of  its  diseases. 

Tonsil,  Glands  in  the  throat — almonds  of  the  ear. 

Trachea,  Windpipe — composed  of  cartilaginous  rings. 

Trigeminus,  The  fifth  pair  of  nerves. 

Trisplanchnic,  Belonging  to  the  three  orders  of  viscera  in  the  three  splanchnic  cavi- 
ties— the  head,  chest,  and  abdomen. 

Tubercular,  Relating  to  tubercula. 

Tubercles,  Tumors  in  the  substance  of  organs. 

Tumijied,  Of  the  form  and  nature  of  tumor  or  swelling. 

Tympanum,  The  drum  or  barrel  of  the  ear. 

Typhoid,  Relating  to  typhus ,  as  typhoid  or  typhus  fever. 

25 


194 


U 


Uterus,  The  womb. 

Uvula,  Pap  of  the  throat,  belonging  to  the  palate. 


V 

Vascular,  Relating  to,  or  consisting  of  vessels — arterial  venous  or  lymphatic. 

Vesicles,  Vessels,  b;igs,  or  bladders. 

Ventricle,  Cavities  in  the  brain,  the  lower  right  and  left  cavities  of  the  heart. 

Vertebrated  animals.  Those  having  a  spine  or  skeleton. 

Vermiform,  Resembling  a  worm. 

Villi,  Delicate  tibres  on  parts  of  the  body,  as  on  the  lips,  &,c. 

Villous,  Pertaining  to  villi. 

Virus,  Poison,  infectious  secretion. 

Viscus,  {Viscera,  pi.)  One  of  the  viscera. 

Vivi  sectors.  Those  practising  dissections  on  living  animals. 

Volition,  The  will,  the  act  of  willing  or  determining  by  choice. 

Voluntary  muscles,  Those  acting  from  the  will. 


Zoophyta,  The  class  of  organic  beings  partaking  of  both  animal  and  vegetable  life. 
Zygomatic,  Relating  to  the  zygoma  or  cheek  bone. 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 

Preface 3 

Contents 9 

Objects  of  physiology 11 

Nervous  system 15 

Cerebrum  or  brain  proper 15 

Cerebellum 20 

Medulla  oblongata 23 

Spinal  marrow 25 

Nerves — of  motion — of  sensation — of  the  three  senses 31 

Ganglionic  system , 38 

Recapitulation 40 

Base  of  the  brain  and  cerebellum 42 

Hemispheres  of  the  brain 44 

Cerebellum  and  its  connection  with  the  cerebrum 45 

Horizontal  section  of  the  brain 46 

Ventricles  of  the  brain 48 

Decussation  of  the  fibres  of  the  pyramidal  bodies. 48 

Great  inferior  ganglion,  fibres  in  the  surface  of 49 

Section  of  the  great  inferior  ganglion 50 

Diverging  fibres  of  the  brain 51 

Structure  of  the  convolutions 52 

Converging  fibres  of  the  brain ib 

Relation  between  the  structure  and  the  functions  of  the  brain 57 

Ganglionic  system  of  vegetative  life 65 

Ganglionic  system  of  phrenic  life 69 

Disposition  of  the  different  kinds  of  matter  of  the  brain 70 

Diverging  and  converging  forces ib 

Excreting  system 71 

Galvanic  battery 74 

Poles  of  the  brain ib 

Secreting  system 76 

Secreting  and  excreting  systems  of  vegetable  life 79 

Convolutions,  form  and  developement  of 81 

Sensation  and  motion ib 

Lecture  of  M.  Broussais  on  the  cerebellum 82 

Application  of  the  motive  power  of  the  human  system  to  determine  the  character  of  a 

large  class  of  chronic  diseases 96 

!Motion  of  the  magnetic  forces  along  the  spinal  nerves ib 

Magnetic  symptoms 97 

Cause  of  the  symptoms - 103 

Causes  of  the  tuberculations  of  the  organs  and  limbs r .  .107 

Influence  of  meteorological  phenomena 108 

Influence  of  the  diurnal  and  annual  revolutions  of  the  earth 110 

Magnetism  of  the  human  system  and  of  the  medium  which  surrounds  it ib 


196 

PAGE. 

Earth  magnetised  geometrically 110 

Sun  a  magnetised  body ib 

Spiral  motions  of  the  magnetic  poles Ill 

Revolution  of  the  ocean ib 

Geological  strata  of  the  earth ib 

Revolution  of  the  earth's  axis ib 

Cause  of  the  great  changes  in  the  climate  and  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms.  112 

Earth  approaching  the  sun ib 

Pythagoras  and  Copernicus 113 

Motions  of  the  planets  and  their  satellites ib 

General  deluge ib 

Ancient  temples ib 

Temple  of  Belus 114 

Broussais,  Alexander,  Pythias ib 

Motion  of  the  earth's  axis ib 

Form  of  the  earth ib 

Maximum  amount  of  depression  at  the  poles,  and  of  protrusion  at  the  equator ib 

Amount  of  depression  at  the  poles  and  protrusion  at  the  equator  in  1837 ib 

Periods  of  the  different  ages ib 

Present  age 115 

Observations  of  the  Babylonians,  Egyptians,  and  Hindoos ib 

Angle  of  the  earth's  axis  with  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic ib 

Motion  of  the  earth  on  its  axis  and  in  its  orbit,  increasing ib 

Diameter  of  the  circle  in  which  the  terrestrial  pole  moves  round  the  mean  pole ib 

Obliquity  of  the  ecliptic ib 

Angle  of  the  moon's  axis  with  the  plane  of  its  orbit,  increasing  in  an  increasing  ratio.  116 

Average  heat  of  the  earth,  and  average  age  of  man,  increasing ib 

Great  changes  in  the  temperature  and  constitution  of  the  atmosphere ib 

Great  changes  in  diseases  in  different  periods  of  time ib 

Changes  in  the  treatment  of  diseases ib 

Amount  and  rate  of  rise  and  fall  of  the  ocean  in  the  different  latitudes 117 

Currents  of  the  ocean ib 

Strata  of  the  earth  containing  remains  of  organic  life — history  of — number    of — 

length  of  their  periods 181 

Primitive  or  chrystalline  period 183 

Primitive  strata  devoid  of  organic  remains ib 

Age  of  the  earth  from  the  commencement  of  the  first  to  the  end  of  the  sixth  period. ..    ib 

Seventh  period ib 

Decay  of  the  earth,  and  progress  in  it ib 

Remedies  for  tubercular  diseases 118 

Directions  for  using  the  remedies 123 

Observations  on  the  use  of  the  remedies  in  different  cases 125 

Cases  of  tubercular  disease  of  the  organs 131 

Cases  of  tubcrcula  of  the  Spine 159 

Cases  of  tubercula  of  the  joints  and  limbs 170 

Color  of  the  skin  in  chronic  tubercula 179 

Appendix 181 

Glossary 185 


u 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  Caiifornia  Library 
or  to  tlie 
NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


J4 


I 


^f^Jil:20Q0 


\y 


12,000(11/95) 


FORM  NO.  DD6 


V,.  ,.  »  urxvji  t  I  wrv^MLiruKINIA,  BbKKtLEY 
BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


/fA 


!•;! 


"'in 


lilllilliill 


nnbiiiiMiiiujunMiiin 


!! 


